RTN 980 IDU Hardware Description - (V100R003C03 - 01) PDF

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
V100R003C03
IDU Hardware Description
Issue 01
Date 2011-10-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
IDU Hardware Description About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX RTN 980 V100R003C03
iManager U2000 V100R006C00
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineer

l Hardware installation engineer
l Installation and commissioning engineer
l Field maintenance engineer
l Data configuration engineer
l System maintenance engineer
Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:
l Basics of digital microwave communication

l Basics of the OptiX RTN 980
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,

which if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level

of risk, which if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,

which if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a

problem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasize

or supplement important points of the main
text.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains all
updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03

This document is the first issue for the V100R003C03 product version.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

IDU Hardware Description Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Network Application..........................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Components........................................................................................................................................................4
1.3 Radio Link Types...............................................................................................................................................7
2 Chassis.............................................................................................................................................9
2.1 Chassis Structure..............................................................................................................................................10
2.2 Installation Mode..............................................................................................................................................10
2.3 Air Flow............................................................................................................................................................11
2.4 IDU Labels.......................................................................................................................................................11
3 Boards............................................................................................................................................15
3.1 Board Appearance............................................................................................................................................17
3.2 Board List.........................................................................................................................................................18
3.3 CSHN................................................................................................................................................................21
3.3.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................21
3.3.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................21
3.3.3 Working Principle....................................................................................................................................28
3.3.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................32
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card......................................................................................................................39
3.3.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................41
3.3.7 Types of SFP Modules............................................................................................................................42
3.3.8 Board Parameter Settings........................................................................................................................43
3.3.9 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................44
3.4 IF1.....................................................................................................................................................................47
3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................49
3.4.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................54
3.4.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................56
3.5 IFU2..................................................................................................................................................................59
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


3.5.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................66
3.5.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................68
3.6 IFX2..................................................................................................................................................................72
3.6.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................79
3.6.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................81
3.7 ISU2..................................................................................................................................................................86
3.7.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................93
3.7.5 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................95
3.8 ISX2................................................................................................................................................................100
3.8.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................100
3.8.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................101
3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................104
3.8.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................107
3.8.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................110
3.8.6 Board Parameter Settings......................................................................................................................111
3.8.7 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................112
3.9 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA......................................................................................................................117
3.9.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................117
3.9.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................117
3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................121
3.9.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................123
3.9.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................130
3.9.6 Types of SFP Modules..........................................................................................................................131
3.9.7 Board Parameter Settings......................................................................................................................133
3.9.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................133
3.10 EMS6............................................................................................................................................................138
3.10.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................138
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

3.10.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................138

3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................143
3.10.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................145
3.10.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................150
3.10.6 Types of SFP Modules........................................................................................................................151
3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................152
3.10.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................152
3.11 EFP8.............................................................................................................................................................155
3.11.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................161
3.11.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................164
3.12 SL1D/SL1DA...............................................................................................................................................166
3.12.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................170
3.12.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................172
3.12.6 Board Feature Code.............................................................................................................................173
3.13 ML1/MD1.....................................................................................................................................................175
3.13.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................180
3.13.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................183
3.14 SP3S/SP3D...................................................................................................................................................186
3.14.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................190
3.14.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................194
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

3.15 AUX..............................................................................................................................................................197
3.15.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................198
3.15.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................199
3.15.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................202
3.16 PIU................................................................................................................................................................205
3.16.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................207
3.16.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................208
3.17 FAN..............................................................................................................................................................209
3.17.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................211
3.17.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................213
4 Accessories..................................................................................................................................215
4.1 E1 Panel..........................................................................................................................................................216
4.2 PDU................................................................................................................................................................218
4.2.1 Appearance............................................................................................................................................218
4.2.2 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................219
4.2.3 Functions and Working Principles........................................................................................................220
5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................222
5.1 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................224
5.2 PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................................225
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable..................................................................................................................................225
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable...........................................................................................................................225
5.3 IF Jumper........................................................................................................................................................226
5.4 XPIC Cable.....................................................................................................................................................227
5.5 Fiber Jumper...................................................................................................................................................228
5.6 STM-1 Cable..................................................................................................................................................230
5.7 E1 Cables........................................................................................................................................................231
5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment...................................................................................231
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel.....................................................................................................235
5.8 Orderwire Cable.............................................................................................................................................237
5.9 Network Cable................................................................................................................................................238
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................242
A.1 Parameters for Network Management...........................................................................................................243
A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management...........................................................................................................243
A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching.........................................................................................243
A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation...........................................................................................248
A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs..................................................................250
A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization.....................................................................251
A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time............................................254
A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management...........................................................255
A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management.............................................................................256
A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs.......................................257
A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management.....................................................................................258
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting..................................................258
A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration.......................................259
A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management.......261
A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC..................................263
A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management...................................................................264
A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: ECC Link Management_Availability Test............................................265
A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management........................267
A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation.........268
A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_Availability Test.................................269
A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings.................270
A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP.............................................................275
A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas.................................................276
A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding OSPF Areas..............277
A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding Routes to Be Manually
Aggregated................................................................................................................................................278
A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting................................................................................279
A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter......................................279
A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table........................................................280
A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel............................................................281
A.1.2.19 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Port Parameters..............................................285
A.1.2.20 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management......................................286
A.1.2.21 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting..........................................................287
A.1.2.22 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control.....................................................287
A.1.2.23 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Packet Control.....................................................288
A.1.2.24 Parameter Description: L2 DCN Management..........................................................................289
A.1.2.25 Parameter Description: Access Control.....................................................................................290
A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management....................................................................................291
A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management............................................................................291
A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation............................................................291
A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control..............................................................................294
A.1.3.4 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_Creation.........................................................295
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

A.1.3.5 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_RADIUS Server.............................................296

A.1.3.6 Parameter Description: Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function...........................................297
A.2 Radio Link Parameters..................................................................................................................................298
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation...........................................298
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC..............................................................................303
A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create...................................................................................310
A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection................................................................................................311
A.2.5 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create................................................................................313
A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection............................................................................................316
A.2.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_Creating a PLA Group...................................................320
A.2.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_PLA................................................................................320
A.2.9 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration......................................................................321
A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters......................................................................................................331
A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation.....................................................................................331
A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP.....................................................................................................335
A.3.3 Parameter Description: Ring MSP_Creation........................................................................................339
A.3.4 Parameter Description: Ring MSP........................................................................................................341
A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters......................................................................................................................342
A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation............................................................342
A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation....................................345
A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
........................................................................................................................................................................348
A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration............................................................................352
A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control....................................................................................354
A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion...........................................................................................357
A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces....................................................................................................................358
A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters............................................................................................................................358
A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes..................................................................358
A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes...........................................................359
A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................363
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes.......................................................363
A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control...........................................................367
A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...................................................369
A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes...........................................................372
A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes...............................................373
A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters...........................................................................................................................376
A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes..................................................................376
A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports.......................................................377
A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters..........................................................................................................378
A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes..................................................378
A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...............................................379
A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes...............................................381
A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes...........................................383
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

A.5.5 IF Board Parameters.............................................................................................................................386

A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute........................................................................386
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute.................................................................394
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes.................................396
A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records...................................................................397
A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test..............................................................................................398
A.5.6 ODU Parameters...................................................................................................................................399
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute...........................................399
A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes..........................................................400
A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information................................................404
A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes....................................................405
A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards..................................................................................................406
A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces.......................................................................................407
A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown...................................................................408
A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards..................................................................................................409
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports..............................................................................................409
A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test..............................................................................................412
A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead......................................................................................................................413
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead..............................................................413
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs............................................................................................414
A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs..........................................................................................416
A.5.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Virtual Interfaces............................................................................417
A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane...............................................420
A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................420
A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation........................................................................420
A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service.......................................................................................441
A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Items for E-Line Services_Creation.............452
A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation.......................................................................453
A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service......................................................................................459
A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation..............................................................................470
A.6.1.7 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services_Creation..................................................................470
A.6.1.8 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services..................................................................................478
A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols........................................................................................................483
A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation................................................................483
A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management................................................................................486
A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation...........................................492
A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration..................................494
A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters.............................................494
A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters................................................500
A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST...............502
A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation.....................510
A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation......................................518
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT................................................519

A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT.................................521
A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT.......................................521
A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT........................524
A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM........................................................................................................528
A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation
..................................................................................................................................................................528
A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation
..................................................................................................................................................................529
A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation............................530
A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation..............531
A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation.............................532
A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling..............................533
A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling..............................534
A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling Service Loopback Detection............536
A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter.............................537
A.6.3.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
..................................................................................................................................................................539
A.6.4 QoS Parameters....................................................................................................................................540
A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management..............................................................540
A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create.................................................546
A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification.......................................553
A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management...............................................................................555
A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy.............................................................................................561
A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration..................................568
A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation.....................................................579
A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoS/EoPDH Plane.....................................581
A.7.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................581
A.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation.............................................................581
A.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based Ethernet Line Services
..................................................................................................................................................................585
A.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service.............................................................................589
A.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN Services Based on IEEE
802.1d/802.1q Bridge...............................................................................................................................591
A.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN
Service......................................................................................................................................................595
A.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service............................................................................600
A.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation............................................................606
A.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries.........................................607
A.7.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols........................................................................................................608
A.7.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation................................................................608
A.7.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management................................................................................611
A.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling.........................................................617
A.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters........................................................618
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii

A.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters.............................................................619

A.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information........................................621
A.7.2.7 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information............................................622
A.7.2.8 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute................................................623
A.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling......................................................624
A.7.2.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static Multicast Table Entries
..................................................................................................................................................................625
A.7.2.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast Table Entries
..................................................................................................................................................................626
A.7.2.12 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs...................................627
A.7.2.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation....................................629
A.7.2.14 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point Service LPT................630
A.7.2.15 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint Service LPT.......631
A.7.2.16 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation......................................................................632
A.7.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM........................................................................................................633
A.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs.............................................633
A.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs.............................................634
A.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs..............................................635
A.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB....................................................637
A.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT....................................................638
A.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter...................................................639
A.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring.............................640
A.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter......................................641
A.7.4 QoS Parameters....................................................................................................................................642
A.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows....................................................642
A.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR.....................................................644
A.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS......................................................646
A.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS.............................................648
A.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress Queues................648
A.7.4.6 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Port Shaping............................................................650
A.7.5 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................651
A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port...................................................................651
A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port....................................................................658
A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames...................................................................664
A.8 RMON Parameters.........................................................................................................................................665
A.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group...........................................................665
A.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group..............................................................666
A.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group.................................................667
A.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting.............................................................668
A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services..........................................................................................................669
A.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters.....................................................................................................................670
A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels................................................670
A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel..........................................671
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels.......675

A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels.........679
A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters...................................683
A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI.........................................................688
A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping................................................689
A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute......................................692
A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management......................................................695
A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation....................................................700
A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM...............................................................711
A.9.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping.................................................................715
A.9.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute.......................................................718
A.9.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management...................................................720
A.9.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation......................................................723
A.9.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation...................................................728
A.9.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation.........739
A.9.2 CES Parameters....................................................................................................................................745
A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management.....................................................................745
A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation.....................................................754
A.9.3 ATM Parameters...................................................................................................................................767
A.9.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management.............................767
A.9.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration............................772
A.9.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status........................................774
A.9.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status...........................................775
A.9.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management........................775
A.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table...........................777
A.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation...........779
A.9.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management.....................................................................781
A.9.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation......................................................785
A.9.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management..................................................................790
A.9.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation..................................................799
A.9.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes.....................811
A.9.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status................................815
A.9.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status...................818
A.9.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID.........................................................821
A.10 Clock Parameters.........................................................................................................................................822
A.10.1 Physical Clock Parameters.................................................................................................................822
A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table................................................................822
A.10.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock Port
..................................................................................................................................................................824
A.10.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet....................................................826
A.10.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality...................................................829
A.10.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control........................................832
A.10.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status.................................833
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv

A.10.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters.........834

A.10.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching..............................836
A.10.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions...........837
A.10.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source.............838
A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status............................................................841
A.10.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters..............................................................................................................842
A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source..............................................................................843
A.10.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain......................................................................................843
A.10.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation......................................................................844
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports..............................................................................................845
A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...............................................................................845
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General.......................................................................................845
A.11.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced....................................................................................847
A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port................................................................................848
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port....................................................................848
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...............................................................849
B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................853

C Indicators of Boards.................................................................................................................855
D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board................................................................872
E Glossary......................................................................................................................................874
E.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................875
E.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................875
E.3 F-J...................................................................................................................................................................884
E.4 K-O.................................................................................................................................................................889
E.5 P-T..................................................................................................................................................................895
E.6 U-Z.................................................................................................................................................................904
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

IDU Hardware Description 1 Introduction
1 Introduction
About This Chapter
The OptiX RTN 980 is a product in the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission system series.
1.1 Network Application

The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrated microwave
transmission system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission
solution for mobile communication network or private networks.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 980 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 980 and the ODU.
Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable.
1.3 Radio Link Types
The OptiX RTN 980 provides the radio links of various types in which different IF boards and
ODUs are configured for diverse microwave application scenarios.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

1.1 Network Application

The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrated microwave
transmission system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission
solution for mobile communication network or private networks.
OptiX RTN 900 Product Family

There are three types of OptiX RTN 900 products: OptiX RTN 910, OptiX RTN 950, and OptiX
RTN 980. Users can choose the product best suited for their site.
l The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards.
l The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards.
l The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980 is 5U high and supports one to fourteen IF boards.
NOTE
All the products in the OptiX RTN 900 series use the same types of IF and service interface boards.
The OptiX RTN 900 series provide a variety of service interfaces and can be installed easily and
configured flexibly. The OptiX RTN 900 series provide a solution that can integrate TDM
microwave, Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave technologies according to the
networking scheme for the sites, achieving smooth upgrade from TDM microwave to Hybrid
microwave, and from Hybrid microwave to Packet microwave. This solution is able to adapt to
changing service scenarios brought about by evolutions in radio mobile networks. Therefore,
this solution meets the transmission requirements of 2G and 3G networks while also allowing
for integration with future LTE and 4G networks.
OptiX RTN 980

Figure 1-1 shows the microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 980.
The OptiX RTN 980 is large-capacity nodal microwave equipment deployed at the convergence
layer. It supports the convergence of up to 14 radio links, and supports multiple protection
schemes.Figure 1-1 shows the microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN
980.

Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 980
Raido trassmission network Regional

backhaul
network
STM-1/4
STM-1/4 TDM Network
(SDH)
STM-1/4
Packet Network FE/GE

GE (PTN)
ATM
FE/GE
FE/GE Ethernet Network
(Metro)
Radio link Cable/fiber
OptiX RTN 980 OptiX RTN 910/950 RNC BSC
NOTE
l In this solution, the OptiX RTN 980 is connected to an RNC and BSC directly or through a regional backhaul
network.
l The OptiX RTN 980 provides a wide range of interfaces and service bearer technologies to adapt to the
regional backhaul network. The regional backhaul network can be a time-division multiplexing (TDM)
network or packet switching network (PSN).
l The OptiX RTN 980 supports the Ethernet over SDH (EoSDH) function and Ethernet over PDH
(EoPDH) function. Therefore, packet services can be backhauled through a TDM network.
l The OptiX RTN 980 supports the pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) technology. Therefore,
TDM, ATM, and Ethernet services can be backhauled through a PSN.
l The OptiX RTN 980 supports the VLAN sub-interface function. Therefore, MPLS packet services can
be backhauled through a Layer 2 network.

1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 980 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 980 and the ODU.
Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable.
IDU 980
The IDU 980 is the indoor unit for an OptiX RTN 980 system. It receives and multiplexes
services, performs service processing and IF processing, and provides the system control and
communications function.
Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 980.
Table 1-1 Features of the IDU 980

Item Description
Chassis height 5U
Pluggable Supported
Number of microwave 1 to 14
directions
RF configuration mode 1+0 non-protection configuration

N+0 non-protection configuration
1+1 protection configuration
N+1 protection configuration (N ≤ 7)
XPIC configuration
Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 980

ODU
The ODU is the outdoor unit for the OptiX RTN 900. It converts frequencies and amplifies
signals.
The OptiX RTN 900 product series can use the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering
the entire frequency band from 6 GHz to 38 GHz.
NOTE
Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHz
frequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing.
Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs that the OptiX RTN 980 supports
Item Description
Standard Power High-Power ODU Low Capacity for

ODU PDH ODU
ODU type SP, SPA HP, HPA LP
Frequency band 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/ 6/7/8/10/10.5/11/13/ 7/8/11/13/15/18/23

26/38 GHz (SP 15/18/23/26/28/32/3 GHz (LP ODU)
ODU) 8 GHz (HP ODU)
6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2 7/8/11/13/15/18/23
3 GHz (SPA ODU) GHz (HPA ODU)
Microwave QPSK/16QAM/ QPSK/16QAM/ QPSK/16QAM

modulation scheme 32QAM/64QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM 128QAM/256QAM
Channel spacing 3.5/7/14/28 MHz 7/14/28/40/56 MHz 3.5/7/14/28 MHz

(6/7/8/10/11/13/15/1
8/23/26/28/32/38
GHz)
7/14/28 MHz (10.5
GHz)
Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs that the OptiX RTN 980 supports
Item Description
High-Power ODU Low Capacity for PDH

ODU
ODU type XMC-2 XMC-1
Frequency band 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/38 7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz

GHz

Item Description
High-Power ODU Low Capacity for PDH

ODU
Microwave modulation QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/ QPSK/16QAM

scheme 64QAM/128QAM/256QAM
Channel spacing 7/14/28/40/56 MHz 3.5/7/14/28 MHz
There are two methods for mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate
mounting.
l The direct mounting method is generally adopted when a small- or medium-diameter and
single-polarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna,
the ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for
one antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hence referred to as a hybrid coupler) must
be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-3 illustrates the direct mounting
method.
The direct mounting method can also be adopted when a small- or medium-diameter and
dual-polarized antenna is used. Two ODUs are mounted onto an antenna using an
orthomode transducer (OMT). The method for installing an OMT is similar to that for
installing a hybrid coupler.
Figure 1-3 Direct mounting
l The separate mounting method is adopted when a large- or medium-diameter and single-
or dual-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-4 shows the separate mounting method. In this
situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted (two ODUs share one feed boom).

Figure 1-4 Separate mounting
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 provides an antenna solution that covers the entire frequency band, and supports
single-polarized antennas and dual-polarized antennas with diameters of 0.3 m to 3.7 m along with the
corresponding feeder system.
1.3 Radio Link Types

The OptiX RTN 980 provides the radio links of various types in which different IF boards and
ODUs are configured for diverse microwave application scenarios.
Table 1-4 Radio link types that the OptiX RTN 980 supports
Radio Link Type System Control, IF Board ODU

Switching, and
Timing Board
Low-capacity PDH CSHN IF1 Low capacity for

microwave PDH ODU
SDH/PDH CSHN IF1 Standard power

microwave ODU or high power
ODU
High-capacity SDH CSHN ISU2 Standard power

ODU
High-capacity SDH CSHN ISX2 Standard power

supporting XPIC ODU

Radio Link Type System Control, IF Board ODU

Switching, and
Timing Board
Integrated IP CSHN IFU2 Standard power

microwave ISU2 ODU or high power
ODU
Integrated IP CSHN IFX2 Standard power

microwave ISX2 ODU or high power
supporting XPIC ODU

IDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis
2 Chassis
About This Chapter
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980 is a 5U chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and
on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces.
2.1 Chassis Structure

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 980 chassis are 225 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU
980 chassis has a ten-layered structure that is air cooled.
2.2 Installation Mode
The IDU 980 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks,
cabinets, and surfaces.
2.3 Air Flow
An IDU 980 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side.
2.4 IDU Labels
Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels,
laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and
other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere
to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order
to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.

2.1 Chassis Structure

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 980 chassis are 225 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU
980 chassis has a ten-layered structure that is air cooled.
Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 980.
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 980
H
D W
2.2 Installation Mode

The IDU 980 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks,
cabinets, and surfaces.
The IDU 980 can be installed:

l In a 300 mm European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) cabinet
l In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet

l In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet

l In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet
l In a 19-inch open rack
2.3 Air Flow

An IDU 980 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side.
Figure 2-2 shows the air flow in an IDU 980 chassis.
Figure 2-2 Air flow in an IDU 980 chassis
2.4 IDU Labels

Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels,
laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and
other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere
to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order
to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.

Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. Actual labels
may vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels

Label Label Name Description
ESD protection Indicates that the

label equipment is
sensitive to static
electricity.
Grounding label Indicates the

grounding position
of the IDU chassis.
Fan warning label Warns you not to

touch fan leaves
when the fan is
rotating.
High temperature Indicates that the

warning label board surface
temperature may
exceed 70°C when
the ambient
temperature is
higher than 55°C.
Wear protective
gloves to handle
the board.
Power caution label Instructs you to

read related
instructions before
performing any
power-related
tasks.
For details, see
Labels in 3.16.4
Front Panel.
合格证/ QUALIFICATION CARD Qualification card Indicates that the

label equipment has
been quality
checked.
HUAWEI
华为技术有限公司中国制造
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA

Label Label Name Description
RoHS label Indicates that the

equipment
complies with the
related
requirements
specified in the
RoHS directive.
Product nameplate Indicates the

label product name and
certification.
Operation guidance Instructs you to

label slightly pull the
switch lever
PULL outwards before
setting the switch
to the "I" or "O"
position.
Label Position
Figure 2-3 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 980.

Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 980 labels
! 22kg(48.41b)
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD
HUAWEI
华为技术有限公司中国制作
HUAW EI TE CHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
CAUTION
WARNING
Hazardous moving
parts,keep fingers -48V OUTPUT
and other body
parts away. TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
严禁在风扇旋转时接
触扇叶！ DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
3 Boards
About This Chapter
The IDU 980 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timing
boards, IF boards, Ethernet boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, power supply boards, and fan
boards.
3.1 Board Appearance

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 980 chassis are 19.82
mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching,
and timing board in the IDU 980 are 23.60 mm x 378.40 mm x 205.70 mm.
3.2 Board List
The IDU 980 provides various functions with different boards inserted.
3.3 CSHN
The CSHN is the integrated system control, switching, and timing board.
3.4 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.5 IFU2
The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the
DC-I power distribution mode.
3.6 IFX2
The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode.
The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.7 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode
at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.8 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode.
3.9 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA
The EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE
electrical ports and two GE ports. The EM6T/EM6TA has similar functions to the EM6F/

EM6FA. The only difference is as follows: The GE ports on the EM6T/EM6TA use fixed
electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F/EM6FA use the SFP modules and therefore
can function as two FE/GE optical or GE electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on the
EM6F/EM6FA and the EM6T/EM6TA are compatible with the FE electrical ports.
3.10 EMS6
The EMS6 is an FE/GE EoSDH processing board providing the L2 switching function. It
provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports using small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
optical/electrical modules.
3.11 EFP8
The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet
plane through its bridging GE port.
3.12 SL1D/SL1DA
The SL1D/SL1DA is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board. The SL1D/SL1DA can also provide
STM-1 electrical ports by using SFP electrical modules. Besides all the functions provided by
the SL1D, the SL1DA supports the K byte pass-through function.
3.13 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.
3.14 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
3.15 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 980. One NE can house
only one AUX.
3.16 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 980 supports two PIUs, each of which
accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.
3.17 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.

3.1 Board Appearance

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 980 chassis are 19.82
mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching,
and timing board in the IDU 980 are 23.60 mm x 378.40 mm x 205.70 mm.
NOTE
The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.
Board Appearance
Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of an ISU2 board in an IDU 980 chassis.
Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ISU2 board
H
D W
Bar Code
The front panel of a board has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers help
you remove or insert a board. The captive screws fasten a board to the chassis. A board bar code
(as shown in Figure 3-2) is attached to one of the ejector levers.
Figure 3-2 Bar code

Bar code
0514721055000015-SL91EM6F01
① ② ③ ④
① Internal code
② Board version
③ Board name
④ Board feature code

NOTE
Only the bar codes of some boards contain board feature codes, which further classify boards. For example,
the feature codes of some boards using SFP modules (such as EM6F) indicate the type of SFP module
being used, and the feature codes of some other boards providing E1 ports (such as SP3S) indicate the
impedance of E1 ports.
3.2 Board List

The IDU 980 provides various functions with different boards inserted.
Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout
Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)
Slot 13 (EXT) Slot 14 (EXT)

Slot 28 Slot 20 (CSHN)
(FAN)
Slot 15 (CSHN)
NOTE
"EXT" represents an extended slot, which can house any type of IF board or interface board.

Table 3-1 List of IDU boards

Board Board Name
Acronym Valid Slot Description
CSHN Hybrid control, Slot 15/20 l Supports the TDM cross-connect function, provides
switching, and 128x128 VC-4 higher-order cross-connections and
timing board VC-12/VC-3 lower-order cross-connections
equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s.
l Supports the 22 Gbit/s packet switching function.
l Performs system communication and control.
l Processes clocks and provides one clock input/
output interface.
l Provides one network management interface, one
network management serial port, and one NE
cascading interface.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-4 optical
interfaces or two STM-1 optical interfaces.
l Provides two GE interfaces. (Each GE interface can
use an RJ45 electrical interface or an SFP optical
interface independently.)
ISU2 Universal IF Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides one IF interface.

board l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH
microwave. The supported service modes are Native
E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH
(1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1).
l Supports the AM function.
l Supports Ethernet frame header compression.
l Supports the physical link aggregation (PLA)
function.
ISX2 Universal XPIC Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides one IF interface.

IF board l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH
microwave. The supported service modes are Native
E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH
(1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1).
l Supports the XPIC function.
l Supports Ethernet frame header compression.
l Supports the physical link aggregation (PLA)
function.
IF1 SDH IF board Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides one IF interface.

l Supports the TU-based PDH microwave solution
and the STM-1-based SDH microwave solution.

Board Board Name

IFU2 Universal IF Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides one IF interface.

board l Supports integrated IP microwave.
IFX2 Universal XPIC Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides one IF interface.

IF board l Supports integrated IP microwave.
l Supports the XPIC function.
SL1D 2xSTM-1 Slot 1 to slot 14 Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical/
interface board electrical interfaces.
SL1DA 2xSTM-1 Slot 1 to slot 6 Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical/
EM6T/EM6TA 6-port RJ45 Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

Ethernet/ l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are
Gigabit Ethernet compatible with the FE electrical interface.
interface board
EM6F/EM6FA 4-port RJ45 + 2- Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

port SFP Fast l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE/FE optical
Ethernet/ interfaces or GE electrical interfaces. The GE
Gigabit Ethernet electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE
EFP8 8-port RJ45 FE Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides eight FE electrical interfaces.

EoPDH l Bridges to the packet plane through one internal GE
processing interface.
board with the
switching l Supports the processing of EoPDH services.
function l Supports Ethernet transparent transmission services
and Layer 2 switching services.
EMS6 4-port RJ45 and Slot 1 to slot 6 l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
2-port SFP FE/ l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE optical or
GE EoSDH electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are
processing compatible with the FE electrical interfaces.
board with the
switching l Supports the processing of EoSDH services.
function l Supports Ethernet transparent transmission services
and Layer 2 switching services.
ML1 16xE1 (Smart) Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1
tributary board interfaces.
l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and Fractional E1.
MD1 32xE1 (Smart) Slot 1 to slot 14 l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1
tributary board interfaces.
l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and Fractional E1.

Board Board Name

SP3S 16xE1 tributary Slot 1 to slot 14 Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1
board interfaces.
SP3D 32xE1 tributary Slot 1 to slot 14 Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1
board interfaces.
AUX Auxiliary Slot 1 to slot 14 Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous
interface board data interface, one synchronous data interface, and four-
input and two-output external alarm interfaces.
PIU Power board Slot 26 or slot 27 Provides one -48 V/-60 V DC power input.
FAN Fan board Slot 28 Cools and ventilates the IDU.
3.3 CSHN
The CSHN is the integrated system control, switching, and timing board.
3.3.1 Version Description

The functional version of the CSHN is SLB1.
3.3.2 Functions and Features

The CSHN provides 22 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, system
control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSHN provides GE service
ports, STM-1/4 service ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports.
Table 3-2 lists the functions and features that the CSHN supports.
Table 3-2 Functions and features that the CSHN supports
Function and Feature Description
Basic functions Switching Supports 22 Gbit/s packet switching function.

capability
Cross-connect l Supports higher order cross-connections, which are

capacity equivalent to 128x128 VC-4s.
l Supports full time division lower order cross-
connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the
VC-12 or VC-3 level.
System control Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of

and the IDU, and works as a communication service unit
communication between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to
control and manage the NE.

Clock Clock Provides the system clock and frame headers for
synchronization service signals and overhead signals for the other
at the physical boards when tracing an appropriate clock source.
layer The traced clock source can be any of the following:
l External clock
l SDH line clock
l PDH tributary clock
l Radio link clock
l Synchronous Ethernet clock
Clock Supports the following clock protection schemes:

protection l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
l 1+1 backup for the system clock
External clock 1
port
DCN Outband DCN Supports a maximum of 33 DCCs.
Inband DCN Supports the inband DCN function. The DCN

bandwidth is configurable.
Protection 1+1 hot backup Supported
MPLS/PWE3 functions Supported
See Table 3-3.
QoS functions Supported
See Table 3-4.
Ethernet service functions Supported
See Table 3-5.
STM-1/4 service functions Supported
See Table 3-6.
Auxiliary ports Ethernet NM 1

and port
management
ports NM serial port 1
NE cascading 1
port
OM Warm reset and Supported

cold reset

In-service Supported
FPGA loading
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query
Board power Supported

consumption
information
query
Board Supported
temperature
detection
Board voltage Supported

detection
Detection of Supported
indicators on the
other boards
Hot swapping Supported

function
Pluggable CF Supported
card
The packet switching unit of the CSHN works with its service interface unit or a service board
to implement MPLS/PWE3 functions. Table 3-3 provides details about these functions.
Table 3-3 MPLS/PWE3 functions
MPLS tunnel Setup mode Static LSPs
VLAN subinterface Supported
Protection 1:1 MPLS tunnel APS
OAM Supports the following OAM functions:

l MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.
1710 and ITU-T Y.1711
l LSP ping and LSP traceroute functions
PWE3 TDM PWE3 Encapsulatio Supports the following encapsulation modes:

n mode l SAToP
l CESoPSN

Packet 125 μs to 5000 μs

loading time
Jitter 375 μs to 16000 μs

compensatio
n buffering
time
ATM PWE3 Mapping l ATM N-to-one VCC cell encapsulation

mode l ATM N-to-one VPC cell encapsulation
l ATM one-to-one VCC cell encapsulation
l ATM one-to-one VPC cell encapsulation
Transparentl Supported
y transmitted
ATM service
Maximum 31
number of
concatenated
cells
ETH PWE3 Encapsulatio l Raw mode

n mode l Tagged mode
Service type Supports E-Line services.

l E-Line
l E-Aggr
Setup mode Static PWs
Numbers of PWs Supports a maximum of 1024 PWs.
Protection 1:1 PW APS
OAM Supports the following OAM functions:

l VCCV
l PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.
1710 and ITU-T Y.1711
l PW ping and PW traceroute functions
l Intelligent service fault diagnosis, that is,
one-click PWE3 service fault locating
MS-PW Supported
Configurable bandwidth Supported
The packet switching unit of the CSHN works with its service interface unit or a service board
to implement QoS functions. Table 3-4 provides details about these functions.

Table 3-4 QoS functions
Function and Description

Feature
DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service

classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values)
carried by the packets.
Ethernet complex Supports traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs,
traffic classification C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried
by packets.
CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.
Shaping Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or traffic
flow.
Queue scheduling Supports the following queue scheduling policies:

policies l SP
l WRR
l SP+WRR
The Ethernet service interface unit of the CSHN works with its packet switching unit to
implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-5 provides details about these functions.
Table 3-5 Ethernet service functions
Basic functions Receives/Transmits GE service signals and works with

the packet switching unit to process the received GE
service signals.
Port GE electrical 2
specifications port (fixed):
10/100/1000BA
SE-T(X)
GE port: SFP 2
optical module
(1000BASE-SX
and 1000BASE-
LX)
Port attributes Working mode l The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex,
100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-
negotiation.
l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex
and auto-negotiation.

TAG attribute l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet

port.
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.
Jumbo frame Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length

of 9600 bytes.
Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that

function complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Services E-Line services Supports the following types of E-Line services:

l E-Line services based on ports
l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs
E-LAN services Supports the following types of E-LAN services:

l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
LAG Inter-board Supported

LAG
Intra-board Supported
LAG
ERPS Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T

G.8032/Y.1344.
Spanning tree protocol Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the
CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
LPT Supported
ETH OAM Ethernet service l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

OAM function.
l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation
monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y.
1731.
Ethernet port Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM

OAM function.
RMON Supported
Clock Clock source Synchronous Ethernet (not supported by the SFP

electrical module)


DCN Inband DCN Each GE port provides one inband DCN channel.
OAM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
Warm reset Supported
Query of SFP Supported

module
information
Table 3-6 provides details about the STM-1/4 service functions that the CSHN supports.
Table 3-6 STM-1/4 service functions

Basic functions Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1/4 signals.
Service categories l STM-1

l STM-4
Port specifications l STM-1: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2

l STM-4: S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2
l The performance characteristics of the ports comply
with ITU-T G.957 and the jitter performance of the
ports complies with ITU-T G.823.
DCN Outband DCN Supported
Protection Linear Supported

multiplex
section
protection
(MSP)
Ring MSP Supported
SNCP Supported
Clock Clock source Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.


OM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths
l Inloops and outloops at STM-1/4 optical ports
Cold reset and Supported

warm reset
Setting of the Supported

on/off state of a
laser
ALS functiona Supported
Query of SFP Supported

optical module
information
NOTE
a: The ALS function is implemented as follows:

l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500
ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down.
l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds
and stops emission for 60 seconds.
l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.
3.3.3 Working Principle

The CSHN consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, cross-
connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSHN

Backplane
GE bus GE bus Ethernet service

GE signal GE signal Packet
switching unit board/Packet switching
access unit unit of the paired board
VC-4
signal Cross- VC-4 signal TDM service
STM-1/4 signal STM-1/4 signal
connect unit unit/Cross-connect unit
processing unit
of the paired board
Control bus
Ethernet NM port Clock signal received

NM serial port from other boards
System control and Clock unit
Clock signal provided
communication unit to other boards
NE cascading port
System control and
FE signal communication unit
Clock signal
Clock signal
received from
provided to
the service
the other units
unit on the
on the board
board
Clock/Time External clock signal
port
Power -48 V 1
3.3 V power supplied to the supply
other units on the board unit -48 V 2
System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
l The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
l The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to
the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.
l The CPU unit enables the packet switching unit using the control bus to groom Ethernet
service packets.
l The CPU unit processes Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit using the
control bus.

l The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading
port.
l The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with
the bus.
l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.
l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
– Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
– Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services
– Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
l The system control and communication unit on a CSHN board communicates with the
system control and communication unit on the paired CSHN board by carrying FE signals
over the communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, 1+1 hot backup between
paired boards is achieved.
Packet Switching Unit

The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for Ethernet services
(including Native Ethernet services and MPLS/PWE3 packets carried over Ethernet).
l After receiving services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or a service board,
the packet switching unit grooms the services based on the configurations that are delivered
by the system control and communication unit.
l After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or a service
board, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system control and
communication unit for processing. After processing, the system control and
communication unit sends the protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The
packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet interface unit or the
service board.
l The packet switching unit exchanges data service signals with the packet switching unit of
the paired board over the GE pass-through bus.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order cross-
connect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-5 shows the functional
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.

Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM SinkTDM

service unit service unit
Higher order
cross-connect
module
HOXC
Lower order
cross-connect
module
LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.
If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order
cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services
back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes
the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
The cross-connect unit exchanges TDM service signals with the cross-connect unit of the paired
board over the TDM pass-through bus.
GE Signal Access Unit

The GE signal access unit allows access of two GE optical signals or two GE electrical signals
and works with the Layer 2 switching unit to provide Ethernet service processing functions.
l In the receive direction: After performing O/E conversion, restructuring, decoding, and
serial/parallel conversion for GE optical signals or after performing restructuring, decoding,
and serial/parallel conversion for GE electrical signals, the GE signal access unit extracts
framed GE signals by delimiting frames and adding preambles. The GE signal access unit
also performs CRC checks and Ethernet performance measurement.
l In the transmit direction: After delimiting frames, adding preambles, calculating CRC
codes, and measuring Ethernet performance, the GE signal access unit performs parallel/
serial conversion and encoding and then transmits GE signals to the GE electrical port or
the GE optical port after performing E/O conversion.
STM-1/4 Signal Processing Unit

The STM-1/4 signal processing unit transmits/receives and processes two STM-1/4 signals,
extracts clock signals, restores data, scrambles/descrambles data, processes overheads, and
processes pointers.
l In the receive direction, the STM-1/4 signal processing unit performs the following
functions:

– Regenerates STM-1/4 signals and performs O/E conversion.

– Restores and descrambles clock data.
– Extracts and processes overhead bytes, adjusts AU pointer, and sends pointer indication
signals and VC-4 signal to the cross-connect unit.
l In the transmit direction, the STM-1/4 signal processing unit performs the following
functions:
– Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit and
processes clock signals.
– Sets AU pointers and overhead bytes.
– Scrambles signals and performs E/O conversion.
Clock Unit
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock
sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the
phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals
and overhead signals to other units on the system control, switching, and timing board and the
other boards.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit combines and then converts the -48 V power inputs into the power supply
required by the chips of the other units on the local board.
3.3.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, buttons, service ports, latches, clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management
ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSHN

1 2 GE1
CSHN
TX RX
PROG
SYNC
LINK1
LINK2
STAT
ACT1
ACT2
LOS1
LOS2
CRIT
ACT
SRV
MAJ
MIN
1 2 1 2
GE SYS STM-1/4 GE
CF RCV RST LAMP NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 MON/TOD2 GE2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1. Indicators 2. Buttons 3. Clock ports, auxiliary

ports, and management ports
4. STM-1/4 optical ports 5. GE optical service ports 6. GE electrical service ports

(using SFP optical modules) (using SFP optical modules) (fixed)
7. Latches - -

Indicators
Table 3-7 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN

Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working properly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.
PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board
100 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.
Blinks on (green) and off at The board software is in BIOS boot state
of the board.
On (green) l When the board is being powered on

or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at The BOOTROM self-check fails during

100 ms intervals the power-on or resetting process of the
board.
On (red) The memory self-check fails or loading

upper layer software fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the
board.
The logic file or upper layer software is
lost during the running process of the
board.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.
SYNC On (green) The clock is working properly.
On (red) The clock source is lost or a clock

switchover occurs.
SRV On (green) The system is working properly.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the

system.

Off There is no power supplied to the system.
ACT On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the active one.
In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the standby one.
In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical port on the line is

reporting the R_LOS alarm.
Off The first optical port on the line is free of

R_LOS alarms.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical port on the line is

Off The second optical port on the line is free

of R_LOS alarms.
LINK1 On (green) The connection at the GE1 port is

working properly.
Off The connection at the GE1 port is

interrupted.
ACT1 On or blinking (yellow) Data is being transmitted or received at

the GE1 port.
Off No data is being transmitted or received

at the GE1 port.

working properly.

interrupted.

the GE2 port.

at the GE2 port.
CRIT On (red) A critical alarm occurs on the NE.
MAJ On (orange) A major alarm occurs on the NE.
MIN On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs on the NE.

Clock Ports, Auxiliary Ports, and Management Ports
Table 3-8 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports
Port Description Connector Type
NMS/COM Ethernet NM port/NM serial port
EXT NE cascading port
CLK/TOD1 External clock port(2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz), or RJ45

wayside E1 port
MON/TOD2 Reserved
NOTE
l The external clock port and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can also transparently
transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes.
This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at a time.
l The MON port is reserved for RS485 monitoring and is not used in this product version.
l Time ports TOD1 and TOD2 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588
protocol) and are not used in this product version.
Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports,
however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Table 3-9 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port
Port Pin Signal
1 Transmitting data (+)
2 Transmitting data (-)
3 Receiving data (+)

NMS/COM
4 Grounding end of the NM serial port
5 Receive end of the NM serial port
6 Receiving data (-)

Port Pin Signal
7 Not defined
8 Transmit end of the NM serial port
Table 3-10 Pin assignments for the EXT port

Port Pin Signal
1 Transmitting data (+)
2 Transmitting data (-)
EXT 3 Receiving data (+)
6 Receiving data (-)
4, 5, 7, 8 Not defined
NOTE
The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit
data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-11 provides status explanation for these
indicators.
Table 3-11 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
LINK (green) On The link is working properly.
Off The link is interrupted.
ACT (yellow) On or blinking The port is transmitting or receiving

data.
Off The port is not transmitting or

receiving data.
NOTE
The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external
Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an
Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated
resetting of NEs.
Figure 3-8 shows the two common incorrect connections.

Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port
1 2 GE1
CSHN
TX RX
PROG
SYNC
LINK1
LINK2
STAT
ACT1
ACT2
LOS1
LOS2
CRIT
ACT
SRV
MAJ
MIN
1 2 1 2
GE SYS STM-1/4 GE
LAN
1 2 GE1
CSHN
TX RX
PROG
SYNC
LINK1
LINK2
STAT
ACT1
ACT2
LOS1
LOS2
CRIT
ACT
SRV
MAJ
MIN 1 2 1 2
GE SYS STM-1/4 GE
Table 3-12 provides details about the pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port.
Table 3-12 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port
Pin Working Mode
External Clock
1 Signal input (-)
2 Signal input (+)
3 Not defined
4 Signal output (-)
5 Signal output (+)
6 Not defined
7 Not defined
8 Not defined
NOTE
The pin assignment when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a wayside E1 service port is the same as that
when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a clock port.
Buttons
Table 3-13 Buttons
Button Name Description
CF RCV CF configuration restoration After this button is pressed and held for
button 8 seconds, the board automatically
restores the NE database from the CF
card.

Button Name Description
RST Warm reset button After this button is pressed, a warm

reset is performed on the board.
LAMP Indicator test button After this button is pressed, the

indicators on all the boards of the NE
become on.
Latches
There is a latch near each ejector lever on the front panel of the board. When removing a board,
you can rotate the ejector levers only after pushing the latches to the middle positions. In addition,
rotating the ejector levers triggers the tact switch on the board and then triggers working/
protection switching.
Service Ports
Table 3-14 Description of the service ports on the CSHN
2xSTM-1 STM-1/4 optical port LC SFP optical module
2xGE GE optical port LC SFP optical module
2xGE GE electrical ports (fixed) RJ45
NOTE
l The four GE ports share two GE channels. That is, the GE1 ports share one GE channel and the GE2
ports share the other GE channel. Only one of the two ports that share one GE channel can transmit/
receive services at one time.
l On the NMS, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively.
SFP optical modules are used to provide GE optical ports and STM-1/4 optical ports; one SFP
optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-9, in which TX
represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port.
Figure 3-9 Ports of the SFP optical module
TX RX
The GE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Table 3-15
and Table 3-16 provide the pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in different modes.

Table 3-15 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin 1000BASE-T
Signal Function
1 BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A (+)
2 BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A (-)
3 BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B (+)
4 BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C (+)
5 BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C (-)
6 BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B (-)
7 BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D (+)
8 BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D (-)
Table 3-16 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode
Pin 1000BASE-T
Signal Function
1 BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B (+)
2 BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B (-)
3 BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A (+)
4 BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D (+)
5 BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D (-)
6 BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A (-)
7 BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C (+)
8 BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C (-)
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. The status explanation for the two indicators is the same
as that for the indicators on the RJ45 connector of the NMS/COM port.
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card

This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card.
NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software
packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system
control, switching, and timing board and hold it for eight seconds, the data stored on the CF card
will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs

on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup
function.
NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing
board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed
to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the
system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the
SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.
Figure 3-10 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
1 2 3 4
ON DIP
1. DIP switches 2. CF card
Table 3-17 Setting DIP switches
Setting of DIP Switchesa Meaning
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 Indicates that the board works with the

watchdog enabled.
0 0 0 1 The value is reserved.
0 0 1 0 Indicates that a memory self-check is

running.
0 0 1 1 Indicates that the board is being debugged.
0 1 0 0 Indicates that the board works with the

watchdog disabled and a full memory check
is running.
0 1 0 1 Indicates the BIOS holdover state.

Setting of DIP Switchesa Meaning
1 2 3 4
0 1 1 0 Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.
0 1 1 1 The value is reserved. (By default, this value

indicates that the board works with the
watchdog enabled.)
1 0 0 0 The value is reserved. (By default, this value

indicates that the board works with the
watchdog enabled.)
1 0 0 1 Restores the data of the CF card.
1 0 1 0 Erases data in the system parameter area.
1 0 1 1 Erases databases.
1 1 0 0 Erases NE software, including patches.
1 1 0 1 Erases databases and NE software, including

patches.
1 1 1 0 Erases all data in the file system.
1 1 1 1 Erases all the data except for the board

manufacturing information.
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
3.3.6 Valid Slots

The CSHN can be inserted in slots 15 and 20. For the NMS to manage function units on the
CSHN, the function units are mapped into specific logical boards and allocated proper logical
slots on the NMS.

Figure 3-11 Slots for the CSHN in the IDU chassis
Slot 28 Slot 20 (CSHN)

(FAN)
Slot 15 (CSHN)
Figure 3-12 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHN
Slot 28 Slot 20 (CSHN) Slot 21 (SL4D) Slot 22 (EG2D)

(FAN)
Slot 15 (CSHN) Slot 16 (SL4D) Slot 17 (EG2D)
Table 3-18 Slot allocation

Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slot 15 > Slot 20
3.3.7 Types of SFP Modules

The GE port and STM-1/4 optical port on the CSHN board support multiple types of SFP
modules.

Table 3-19 Types of SFP modules that the GE port supports
Part Number Type
34060286 1000BASE-SX
34060473 1000BASE-LX
Table 3-20 Types of SFP modules that the STM-1/4 optical port supports
Part Number Type
34060287 Ie-1
34060276 S-1.1
34060281 L-1.1
34060282 L-1.2
34060277 S-4.1
34060280 L-4.1
34060284 L-4.2
3.3.8 Board Parameter Settings

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHN.
Related References
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes
A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes
A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

3.3.9 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, cross-
connection capability, performance of Ethernet ports, STM-1/4 ports, clocks, and wayside
service port, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Packet Switching Capacity

The CSHN supports a 22 Gbit/s packet switching capacity.
Cross-Connection Capability
l Supports higher order cross-connections, which are equivalent to 128x128 VC-4s.
l Supports lower order cross-connections, which are equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s.
Ethernet Port Performance

Ethernet port performance complies with IEEE 802.3. The following tables provide the
specifications of GE optical ports, and GE electrical ports.
Table 3-21 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance

transmission)
Item Performance
Classification code 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km) 1000BASE-LX (10 km)
Nominal wavelength (nm) 850 1310
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 1000
Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode
Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10
Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355
Mean launched power (dBm) -9 to -3 -9 to -3
Receiver minimum -17 -20

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum overload (dBm) 0 -3
Minimum extinction ratio 9.5 9.5

(dB)
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Table 3-22 GE electrical interface performance
Item Performance
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)

100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)
Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)

MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)
Interface type RJ45
STM-1 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.
Table 3-23 STM-1 optical interface performance
Item Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520
Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2
Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

fiber fiber fiber fiber
Transmission distance 2 15 40 80
(km)
Operating wavelength 1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
(nm)
Mean launched power -19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

(dBm)
Receiver minimum -30 -28 -34 -34

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10
Minimum extinction ratio 10 8.2 10 10

(dB)
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP optical modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of
SFP optical modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.


The performance of the STM-4 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957. The following
table provides the typical performance of the interface.
Item Performance
Classification code S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2
Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

fiber fiber fiber
Transmission distance (km) 15 40 80
Operating wavelength (nm) 1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580
Mean launched power (dBm) -15 to -8 -3 to +2 -3 to +2
Minimum receiver sensitivity -28 -28 -28

(dBm)
Minimum overload (dBm) -8 -8 -8
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 10 10
NOTE
SDH optical interface boards use SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types
of SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 3-25 Clock timing and synchronization performance
Item Performance
External synchronization 2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz
source (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)
Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in and pull-out ranges
Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer

Item Performance
Transient response and

holdover performance
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-26 Mechanical behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D) 23.60 mm x 378.40 mm x 205.70 mm
Weight 1.60 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 36.6 W
3.4 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.

The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Table 3-27 lists the functions and features that the IF1 supports.
Table 3-27 Functions and features that the IF1 supports
Basic functions l Receives and transmits one IF signal.

l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Radio type TU/STM-1-based radio
Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IF1.

Protection 1+1 HSB/FD/ Supported

SD protection
N+1 protection Supported
SNCP Supported
License Supports control on the air interface capacity by using

the license file.
K byte pass-through Supported
Clock Clock source Clock at the air interface

l Protection by running the SSM protocol (supported
only in SDH radio mode)
(supported only in SDH radio mode)
DCN Inband DCN Not supported
Outband DCN l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of one DCC byte if the capacity is less
than 16xE1.
l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes if the capacity is
equal to or more than 16xE1.
l The SDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or
twelve DCC bytes.

l Inloops at IF ports
l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite ports
Warm reset and Supported

cold reset
FPGA loading
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query


consumption
information
query
Board Supported
temperature
detection

detection
3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow

This section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the IF1.
Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram of the IF1

Backplane
SMODEM HSM signal bus

unit Paired board
ODU control signal

Logic processing unit
Service bus
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing
Cross-connect unit
Combiner
Interface
IF
Microwave MODEM
unit
unit
frame signal unit Overhead bus

System control and
communication unit
Control bus System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU Power -48 V

+3.3 V power supplied to the other supply
units on the board unit +3.3 V
Clock signal provided to the Clock

other units on the board unit System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-28 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1

Step Function Unit Processing Flow
1 Combiner interface Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals
unit and microwave service signals.
2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates ODU control signals.

l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.
3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of service signals through the

automatic gain control (AGC) circuit.
l Filters signals.
l Performs A/D conversion.
4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Synchronizes frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF

(for SDH microwave alarms.
signal processing) l Performs descrambling.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms
and performance events.
l Checks link IDs and generates specific alarms.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages and reports the changes to the
system control and communication unit over the
control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes, and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Extracts wayside service bytes to form another 2 Mbit/
s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead
signal to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4 signals
to the logic processing unit.

MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers in PDH radio mode

(for PDH microwave and generates specific alarms and performance events.
signal processing) l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode and generates specific alarms and performance
events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode and generates specific alarms and performance
events.
microwave messages in PDH radio mode and reports
the changes to the system control and communication
unit over the control bus.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames in PDH radio mode and transmits
the overhead signals to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts TU pointers.
l Maps TU-12s in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode to the specific positions in VC-4s.
6 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Transmits overhead signals to the system control and
communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the cross-connect unit.
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-29 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1


unit l Demultiplexes 2 Mbit/s overhead signals from 8 Mbit/
s overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.

2 MUX/DEMUX unit l Sets higher order path overheads.

(for SDH microwave l Sets AU pointers.
signal processing)
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Performs scrambling.
MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signals.

(for PDH microwave l Sets the microwave frame overheads in PDH radio
signal processing) mode.
3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.
4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.
5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the
system control and communication unit.
6 Combiner interface Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service

unit signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DC-
DC conversion.
l Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.

3.4.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-14 Front panel of the IF1

ODU-PWR
IF1
IF1
WARNING
IF
STAT
I O
ODU
LINK
RMT
-48V OUTPUT
ACT
SRV
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL
Indicators
Table 3-30 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1
STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.
On (red) The radio link is faulty.
ODU On (green) The ODU is working

properly.
On (red) l The ODU is reporting

critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.
On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor

alarms.

Blinks on (yellow) and off at The antennas are not aligned.

300 ms intervals
RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is

reporting defects.
Off The remote equipment is free

of defects.
ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected system,

standby one.
the board is not activated.
Ports
Table 3-31 Description of the Ports
Port Description Connector Type Corresponding

Cable
IF IF port TNC IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.

The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.4.5 Valid Slots

The IF1 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same as
the physical slots.
Figure 3-15 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (IF1) Slot 14 (IF1)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 50.

Figure 3-16 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS
Slot 63 (ODU) Slot 64 (ODU)
Slot 28 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

(FAN)
Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slots 7 and 9 > Slots 8 and 10 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots
12 and 14 > Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and
2
NOTE
Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and
2, slots 3 and 5, slots 4 and 6, slots 7 and 9, slots 8 and 10, slots 11 and 13, and slots 12 and 14 are paired
slots respectively.

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
Related References
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute

A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute


This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Radio Work Modes
Table 3-33 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board)
Service Capacity Modulation Scheme Channel Spacing (MHz)
4xE1 QPSK 7
4xE1 16QAM 3.5
8xE1 QPSK 14 (13.75)
8xE1 16QAM 7
16xE1 QPSK 28 (27.5)
16xE1 16QAM 14 (13.75)
22xE1 32QAM 14 (13.75)
26xE1 64QAM 14 (13.75)
35xE1 16QAM 28 (27.5)
44xE1 32QAM 28 (27.5)
53xE1 64QAM 28 (27.5)
STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)
NOTE
The channel spacings supported by the OptiX RTN 980 comply with ETSI standards. Channel spacings
3.5/7/14/28/40/56 MHz apply to most frequency bands; but channel spacings 3.5/7/13.75/27.5/40/55 MHz apply
to the 18 GHz frequency band.
IF Performance
Table 3-34 IF performance
Item Performance
IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) 140
ODU O&M signal Modulation scheme ASK

Item Performance
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) 5.5
Interface impedance (ohm) 50
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
Table 3-35 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item Performance
Encoding mode l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals

l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for
SDH microwave signals
Adaptive time- Supported

domain equalizer for
baseband signals
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Weight 0.72 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 12 W
3.5 IFU2
The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the
DC-I power distribution mode.

The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.


The IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
Table 3-37 lists the functions and features that the IFU2 supports. The IFU2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.
Table 3-37 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports

Radio type Integrated IP radio

NOTE
The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.
Service categories Native E1 + Ethernet

NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
AM Supported
E1 priority Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native

TDM services being E1 services
Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IFU2.

SD protection
SNCP for TDM Supported

services
License Air interface Supported

capacity license
AM license Supported
Clock at the Clock source Clock at the air interface

physical layer
DCN Inband DCN Supported.

The DCN bandwidth is configurable.

Outband DCN Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes.
Ethernet service functions See Table 3-38.
MPLS functions See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided

in the section for the system control, switching, and
PWE3 functions timing board.

l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
l Inloops and outloops at composite ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports
NOTE
An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board
operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive
or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP
radio mode.

warm reset
FPGA loading
PRBS BER test Supported

at IF ports
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

consumption
information
query
Board Supported
temperature
detection

detection

Table 3-38 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports

Ethernet E-Line services Supports the following types of E-Line services:

services l E-Line services based on ports


G.8032/Y.1344.
OAM l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

function.
l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM
function.
1731.
LAG Supported
QoS See the description of QoS functions provided in the

section for the system control, switching, and timing
board.
RMON Supported

This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.

Figure 3-17 Functional block diagram of the IFU2

Backplane
SMODEM
HSM signal bus
unit
Paired board
ODU control signal

Service bus
Cross-connect unit
processing
Logic
Overhead bus
unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF processing
interface unit
System control and

Combiner
IF Microwave frame MODEM communication unit

unit
signal unit
Ethernet GE bus
processing Packet switching unit
unit
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU -48 V1

Power
+3.3 V power supplied to the other supply
units on the board unit -48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied to the

+3.3 V
monitoring circuit

other units on the board System clock signal
unit
Table 3-39 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2


3 IF processing unit l Filters signals.



alarms.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP

radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated
IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP
performance events.
microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and
reports the changes to the system control and
communication unit over the control bus.
l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire
bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, SSM bytes, and DCC
bytes in microwave frames and transmits the overhead
signals to the logic processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode
to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits
the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave
frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.
6 Ethernet processing l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/

unit DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby
packet switching units.

unit l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control
and communication unit.
to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE
processing.

Table 3-40 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2

unit l Processes overhead signals.
2 Ethernet processing l Receives GE signal from the packet switching unit.

unit l Processes GE signals.
3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.

l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP
radio mode.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.


l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.


Power Supply Unit


DC conversion.
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
3.5.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-18 Front panel of the IFU2

ODU-PWR
IFU2
IFU2
WARNING
IF
STAT
I O
LINK
ODU
RMT
-48V OUTPUT
ACT
SRV
PULL
Indicators
Table 3-41 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2

l There is no power supplied to the board.

services.

services.
ODU On (green) The ODU is working properly.

On (red) l The ODU is reporting critical or major

alarms.
l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) The antennas are not aligned.

and off at 300 ms
intervals
RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Off The remote equipment is free of defects.
ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system, the board

l In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected system, the board

l In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.
Ports

Cable
NOTE
Labels

3.5.5 Valid Slots

The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
Figure 3-19 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (IFU2) Slot 14 (IFU2)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15
ODU plus 50.

Figure 3-20 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS

(FAN)
Item Description
2
NOTE
slots respectively.

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.

Related References
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes
A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

Radio Work Modes
Table 3-44 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFU2 board)
Channel Spacing Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet

(MHz) Scheme Number of E1s in Throughput
Hybrid (Mbit/s)
Microwave
7 QPSK 5 9 to 12
7 16QAM 10 20 to 24
7 32QAM 12 24 to 29
7 64QAM 15 31 to 37
7 128QAM 18 37 to 44
7 256QAM 21 43 to 51
14 (13.75) QPSK 10 20 to 23
14 (13.75) 16QAM 20 41 to 48
14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 50 to 59
14 (13.75) 64QAM 31 65 to 76
14 (13.75) 128QAM 37 77 to 90
14 (13.75) 256QAM 43 90 to 104
28 (27.5) QPSK 20 41 to 48
28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 82 to 97
28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 108 to 125


Hybrid (Mbit/s)
Microwave
28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 130 to 150
28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 160 to 180
28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 180 to 210
56 (55) QPSK 40 82 to 97
56 (55) 16QAM 75 165 to 190
56 (55) 32QAM 75 208 to 240
56 (55) 64QAM 75 260 to 310
56 (55) 128QAM 75 310 to 360
56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 420
NOTE
For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the IFU2/IFX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on untagged Ethernet frames with a length
ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes
l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
for Ethernet services.
IF Performance

Item Performance


Item Performance
Encoding mode LDPC encoding

baseband signals
Mechanical Behavior

Item Performance
Dimensions (H x W 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

x D)
Weight 0.79 kg
Power Consumption
3.6 IFX2
The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode.
The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.

The IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interference
cancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals.
Table 3-48 lists the functions and features that the IFX2 supports.

Table 3-48 Functions and features that the IFX2 supports


Radio type Integrated IP radio

NOTE
Integrated IP radio is compatible with Hybrid radio and Packet
radio.
Service categories Native E1 + Ethernet

NOTE
Ethernet services can be Native Ethernet services or packet
AM Supported
E1 priority Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode, in which

native TDM services are E1 services
XPIC Supported
Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IFX2.

SD protection
SNCP for TDM Supported

services

capacity license
Clock at the Clock source Clock at an air interface

physical layer
DCN Inband DCN Supported.

The DCN bandwidth is configurable.
Outband DCN Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes.
Ethernet service features See Table 3-49.

MPLS functions See the description of the MPLS/PWE3 functions that

the system control, switching, and timing board
PWE3 functions supports.

l Inloops and outloops at multiplexing ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports
NOTE
An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board
operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive
or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP
radio mode.

warm reset
FPGA loading

at IF ports
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

consumption
information
query
Board Supported
temperature
detection
Board voltage Supported

detection
Table 3-49 Ethernet service functions that the IFX2 supports





G.8032/Y.1344.
ETH-OAM l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

function.
function.
1731.
LAG Supported
QoS See the description of the QoS functions that the system
control, switching, and timing board supports.
RMON Supported

as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.

Figure 3-21 Functional block diagram of the IFX2

Backplane
SMODEM
HSM signal bus
unit
Paired board
ODU control signal Service bus
processing
Cross-connect unit
Logic
MUX/DEMUX unit
unit
System control and
processing
Combiner
interface
IF communication unit
Microwave MODEM Overhead
unit
unit
IF
frame signal unit bus
Ethernet GE bus
unit
Paired XPIC XPIC signal
board
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU Power -48 V1

supply
unit -48 V2
other units on the board
+3.3 V power supplied to
+3.3 V
the monitoring circuit

System clock signal
other units on the board unit
Table 3-50 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFX2



3 IF processing unit l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two
channels of signals.
– Performs A/D conversion for one channel of
filtered signals and transmits the converted signals
to the MODEM unit.
– Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the
XPIC signals.
l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals
transmitted from the paired IFX2 and transmits the
converted signals to the MODEM unit.
4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF

signals transmitted from the paired IFX2 as reference
signals.
l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.
alarms.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP

performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated
IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP
radio mode and generates specific alarms.
microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and
reports the changes to the system control and
communication unit over the control bus.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and SSM
bytes in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode
and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode
to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits
the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
frames in Integrated IP radio mode and transmits to
the Ethernet processing unit.

unit DEMUX unit.


NOTE
processing.
Table 3-51 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFX2


2 Ethernet processing l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.

3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.

l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP
radio mode.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.


l Filters signals.



Power Supply Unit

DC conversion.
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFX2 after
Clock Unit
3.6.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the
front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-22 Front panel of the IFX2

ODU-PWR
IFX2
IFX2
WARNING
IF
STAT
XPIC
I O
LINK
ODU
RMT
-48V OUTPUT
ACT
SRV

PULL X-IN X-OUT
Indicators
Table 3-52 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2
XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal is

normal.
On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.

Off The XPIC function is

disabled.

properly.

l There is no power



properly.

l There is no power

alarms.

300 ms intervals

reporting defects.

of defects.

active one.
the board has been
activated.


standby one.
Ports
Table 3-53 Description of the ports

Cable
X-IN XPIC signal input SMA XPIC cable

port
X-OUT XPIC signal output SMA

port
NOTE
Labels
3.6.5 Valid Slots

The IFX2 can be inserted in slot 1-14. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the same

Figure 3-23 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (IFX2) Slot 14 (IFX2)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15
ODU plus 50.

Figure 3-24 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2

(FAN)

Item Description
2
NOTE
slots respectively.
NOTE
One IFX2 pair must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the same column.

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.

Related References

Radio Work Modes
Table 3-55 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFX2 board)

Hybrid (Mbit/s)
Microwave
7 QPSK 4 9 to 11
7 16QAM 9 19 to 23
7 32QAM 11 24 to 29
7 64QAMa 14 31 to 36
14 (13.75) QPSK 9 20 to 23
14 (13.75) 16QAM 19 40 to 47
14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 50 to 59
14 (13.75) 64QAM 30 63 to 73
14 (13.75) 128QAMa 36 75 to 88
28 (27.5) QPSK 19 41 to 48
28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 84 to 97
28 (27.5) 32QAM 49 103 to 120
28 (27.5) 64QAM 63 130 to 150
28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 160 to 180
28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 180 to 210


Hybrid (Mbit/s)
Microwave
56 (55) QPSK 39 83 to 97
56 (55) 16QAM 75 165 to 190
56 (55) 32QAM 75 210 to 245
56 (55) 64QAM 75 260 to 305
56 (55) 128QAM 75 310 to 360
56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 410

NOTE
For the IFX2 board, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC function is
enabled or disabled.
a: When the XPIC function is enabled for the IFX2 board, the 64QAM/7MHz and 128QAM/14MHz
modulation schemes do not apply to ODUs whose frequency band ranges from 26 GHz to 38 GHz.
NOTE
For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the IFU2/IFX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on untagged Ethernet frames with a length
ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes
l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
IF Performance

Item Performance


Item Performance

baseband signals
Mechanical Behavior

Item Performance

x D)
Weight 0.80 kg
Power Consumption
3.7 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode
at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

The functional version of the ISU2 is SL91.

The ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
Table 3-59 lists the functions and features that the ISU2 supports. The ISU2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.

Table 3-59 Functions and features


Radio type l Integrated IP radio

l SDH radio
NOTE
The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
Service categories in Integrated IP l Native E1 + Ethernet

radio mode l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Service categories in SDH radio l STM-1

mode l 2xSTM-1
AM Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode
Ethernet frame header compression Supported
E1 priority Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native

Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the ISU2.
Link-level 1+1 HSB/FD/ Supported

protection SD protection
LAG protection Supported

at air interfaces
TDM service protection SNCP
PLA Supported


capacity license


physical layer
DCN Inband DCN Supported
Outband DCN l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each
channel in SDH radio mode.


warm reset
FPGA loading

at IF ports
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

consumption
information
query
Board Supported
temperature
detection

detection





G.8032/Y.1344.

function.
function.
1731.
LAG Supported

board.
RMON Supported

as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2.
NOTE
The ISU2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service categories.

Figure 3-25 Functional block diagram of the ISU2

Backplane
SMODEM
HSM signal bus
unit Paired board
processing
Cross-connect unit
Logic
unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
Overhead bus
MODEM unit
IF processing
interface unit
System control and

Combiner
IF Microwave communication unit

unit
frame signal
processing
Ethernet
GE bus
unit
Packet switching unit
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU -48 V1

Power
+3.3 V power supplied to supply
unit -48 V2
the other units on the board
+3.3 V power supplied to +3.3 V
System clock signal
Table 3-61 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2

3 IF processing unit l Filters signals.


alarms.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers and generates

l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates
control bus.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames and transmits to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in
VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic
processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated
IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if
native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are
STM-1 services.

unit DEMUX unit.

NOTE
processing.

Table 3-62 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2


3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are
from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services
in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the
logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native
TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1
services.
l Sets microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals,
and microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.


l Filters signals.



Power Supply Unit

DC conversion.
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
Clock Unit
3.7.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-26 Front panel of the ISU2

ODU-PWR
ISU2
ISU2
WARNING
IF
STAT
I O
LINK
ODU
RMT
-48V OUTPUT
ACT
SRV
PULL
Indicators
Table 3-63 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2

properly.

l There is no power




properly.

l There is no power

alarms.

300 ms intervals

reporting defects.

of defects.

active one.
the board has been
activated.

standby one.
Ports

Cable

NOTE
Labels
3.7.5 Valid Slots

The ISU2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-27 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (ISU2) Slot 14 (ISU2)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15
ODU plus 50.

Figure 3-28 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS

(FAN)
Item Description
2
NOTE
slots respectively.

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISU2.

Related References

Radio Work Modes
Table 3-66 SDH microwave work modes (ISU2 board)

STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)
2xSTM-1 128QAM 56 (55)
Table 3-67 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)
Channel Modulation Maximum Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
Spacing Scheme Number of
(MHz) E1s in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
Hybrid Compressio Frame Frame Frame
Microwave n Header Header Header
Compressio Compressio Compressio
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
3.5 QPSK 2 4 to 5 4 to 6 4 to 6 4 to 10
3.5 16QAM 4 9 to 11 9 to 13 9 to 13 9 to 20
7 QPSK 5 10 to 13 10 to 15 10 to 22 10 to 33
7 16QAM 10 20 to 26 20 to 30 20 to 44 20 to 66
7 32QAM 12 25 to 32 25 to 36 25 to 54 25 to 80
7 64QAM 15 31 to 40 31 to 47 31 to 67 31 to 100
7 128QAM 18 37 to 47 37 to 56 37 to 80 37 to 119
7 256QAM 20 41 to 53 41 to 62 41 to 90 42 to 134


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
14 (13.75) QPSK 10 20 to 26 20 to 31 20 to 44 20 to 66
14 (13.75) 16QAM 20 41 to 52 41 to 61 41 to 89 41 to 132
14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 51 to 65 51 to 77 51 to 110 51 to 164
14 (13.75) 64QAM 31 65 to 83 65 to 96 65 to 140 65 to 209
14 (13.75) 128QAM 37 76 to 97 76 to 113 76 to 165 76 to 245
14 (13.75) 256QAM 42 87 to 111 87 to 131 87 to 189 88 to 281
28 (27.5) QPSK 20 41 to 52 41 to 62 41 to 89 41 to 132
28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265
28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 107 to 136 107 to 161 107 to 230 107 to 343
28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 131 to 168 131 to 198 131 to 283 132 to 424
28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333 156 to 495
28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 577
40 QPSK 27 56 to 72 56 to 84 56 to 122 57 to 182
40 16QAM 55 114 to 145 114 to 172 114 to 247 114 to 366
40 32QAM 71 147 to 187 147 to 221 147 to 318 148 to 474
40 64QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 583
40 128QAM 75 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456 216 to 691
40 256QAM 75 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538 251 to 800
56 (55) QPSK 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265
56 (55) 16QAM 75 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356 167 to 533
56 (55) 32QAM 75 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437 207 to 659
56 (55) 64QAM 75 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567 264 to 836
56 (55) 128QAM 75 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656 311 to 983
56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777 362 to 1000

Table 3-68 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)
Channel Modulation Number of Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

Spacing Scheme STM-1
(MHz) Services in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 (27.5) 128QAM 1 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333 156 to 495
28 (27.5) 256QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 577
40 64QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 583
40 128QAM 1 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456 216 to 691
40 256QAM 1 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538 251 to 800
56 (55) 16QAM 1 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356 167 to 533
56 (55) 32QAM 1 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437 207 to 659
56 (55) 64QAM 1 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567 264 to 836
56 (55) 128QAM 1 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656 311 to 983
56 (55) 256QAM 1 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777 362 to 1000
NOTE
For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the ISU2/ISX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on the following conditions.
l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to
9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from
64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): S-tagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 92
bytes to 9600 bytes
l E1/STM-1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
IF Performance
Item Performance

Item Performance
Item Performance

baseband signals
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance

x D)
Weight 0.60 kg
Power Consumption
3.8 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode.

The functional version of the ISX2 is SL91.


The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the cross-
polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receiving
XPIC reference signals.
Table 3-72 lists the functions and features that the ISX2 supports. The ISX2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions and packet service functions.

Radio type l Integrated IP radio

l SDH radio
NOTE
The integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
Service categories in Integrated IP l Native E1 + Ethernet

radio mode l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Service categories in SDH radio l STM-1

mode l 2xSTM-1
AM Supported only in integrated IP radio mode
Ethernet frame header compression Supported
E1 priority Supported only in integrated IP radio mode with native

XPIC Supported
Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the ISX2.
Link-level 1+1 HSB/FD/ Supported

protection SD protection
LAG protection Supported

at air interfaces
TDM service protection SNCP

PLA Supported


capacity license

physical layer
DCN Inband DCN Supported
Outband DCN l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each
channel in SDH radio mode.


warm reset
FPGA loading

at IF ports
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

consumption
information
query

Board Supported
temperature
detection

detection




G.8032/Y.1344.

function.
function.
1731.
LAG Supported

board.
RMON Supported


as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2.
NOTE
The ISX2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service types.
Figure 3-29 Functional block diagram of the ISX2

Backplane
SMODEM
HSM signal bus
unit
Paired board
processing
Cross-connect unit
Logic
MUX/DEMUX unit
unit
System control and
processing
Combiner
interface
IF communication unit
Microwave MODEM Overhead
unit
unit
IF
frame signal unit bus

Ethernet GE bus
unit
Paired XPIC XPIC signal
board
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU Power -48 V1

supply
unit -48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied to
+3.3 V

System clock signal
Table 3-74 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2



3 IF processing unit l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two
channels of signals.
– Performs A/D conversion for one channel of
filtered signals and transmits the converted signals
to the MODEM unit.
– Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the
XPIC signals.
l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals
transmitted from the paired ISX2 and transmits the
converted signals to the MODEM unit.
4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF

signals transmitted from the paired ISX2 as reference
signals.
l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.
alarms.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers and generates

l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates
control bus.
l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire
bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames and transmits to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in
VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic
processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated
IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if
native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are
STM-1 services.


unit DEMUX unit.

NOTE
processing.
Table 3-75 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2



3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are
from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services
in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the
logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native
TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1
services.
l Sets microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals,
and microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.



l Filters signals.


Power Supply Unit

DC conversion.
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
Clock Unit
3.8.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the
front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-30 Front panel of the ISX2

ODU-PWR
ISX2
ISX2
WARNING
IF
STAT
XPIC
I O
LINK
ODU
RMT
-48V OUTPUT
ACT
SRV

PULL X-IN X-OUT

Indicators
Table 3-76 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2


normal.

disabled.

properly.

l There is no power



properly.

l There is no power

alarms.

300 ms intervals

reporting defects.


of defects.

active one.
the board has been
activated.

standby one.
Ports

Cable
X-IN XPIC signal input SMA XPIC cable

port
X-OUT XPIC signal output SMA

port
NOTE
Labels

3.8.5 Valid Slots

The ISX2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-31 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (ISX2) Slot 14 (ISX2)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15
ODU plus 50.

Figure 3-32 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS

(FAN)

Item Description
2
NOTE
slots respectively.
NOTE
One ISX2 pair for implementing the XPIC function must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the
same column.

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISX2.

Related References

Radio Work Modes
Table 3-79 SDH microwave work modes (ISX2 board)
STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)
2xSTM-1 128QAM 56 (55)

NOTE
For the ISX2 board in SDH service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether
the XPIC function is enabled or disabled.
Table 3-80 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service, XPIC disabled)

n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
7 QPSK 5 10 to 13 10 to 15 10 to 22 10 to 33
7 16QAM 10 20 to 26 20 to 30 20 to 44 20 to 66
7 32QAM 12 25 to 32 25 to 36 25 to 54 25 to 80
7 64QAM 15 31 to 40 31 to 47 31 to 67 31 to 100
7 128QAM 18 37 to 47 37 to 56 37 to 80 37 to 119


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
7 256QAM 20 41 to 53 41 to 62 41 to 90 42 to 134
14 (13.75) QPSK 10 20 to 26 20 to 31 20 to 44 20 to 66
14 (13.75) 16QAM 20 41 to 52 41 to 61 41 to 89 41 to 132
14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 51 to 65 51 to 77 51 to 110 51 to 164
14 (13.75) 64QAM 31 65 to 83 65 to 96 65 to 140 65 to 209
14 (13.75) 128QAM 37 76 to 97 76 to 113 76 to 165 76 to 245
14 (13.75) 256QAM 42 87 to 111 87 to 131 87 to 189 88 to 281
28 (27.5) QPSK 20 41 to 52 41 to 62 41 to 89 41 to 132
28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265
28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 107 to 136 107 to 161 107 to 230 107 to 343
28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 131 to 168 131 to 198 131 to 283 132 to 424
28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333 156 to 495
28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 577
40 QPSK 27 56 to 72 56 to 84 56 to 122 57 to 182
40 16QAM 55 114 to 145 114 to 172 114 to 247 114 to 366
40 32QAM 71 147 to 187 147 to 221 147 to 318 148 to 474
40 64QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 583
40 128QAM 75 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456 216 to 691
40 256QAM 75 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538 251 to 800
56 (55) QPSK 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265
56 (55) 16QAM 75 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356 167 to 533
56 (55) 32QAM 75 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437 207 to 659
56 (55) 64QAM 75 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567 264 to 836
56 (55) 128QAM 75 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656 311 to 983
56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777 362 to 1000

Table 3-81 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service, XPIC enabled)
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
7 QPSK 4 10 to 13 10 to 15 10 to 22 10 to 33
7 16QAM 9 20 to 26 20 to 30 20 to 44 20 to 66
7 32QAM 11 25 to 32 25 to 36 25 to 54 25 to 80
7 64QAMa 14 31 to 40 31 to 47 31 to 67 31 to 100
14 (13.75) QPSK 9 20 to 26 20 to 31 20 to 44 20 to 66
14 (13.75) 16QAM 19 41 to 52 41 to 61 41 to 89 41 to 132
14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 51 to 65 51 to 77 51 to 110 51 to 164
14 (13.75) 64QAM 30 65 to 83 65 to 96 65 to 140 65 to 209
14 (13.75) 128QAMa 36 76 to 97 76 to 113 76 to 165 76 to 245
28 (27.5) QPSK 20 41 to 52 41 to 62 41 to 89 41 to 132
28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265
28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 107 to 136 107 to 161 107 to 230 107 to 343
28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 131 to 168 131 to 198 131 to 283 132 to 424
28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333 156 to 495
28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 577
40 QPSK 27 56 to 72 56 to 84 56 to 122 57 to 182
40 16QAM 55 114 to 145 114 to 172 114 to 247 114 to 366
40 32QAM 71 147 to 187 147 to 221 147 to 318 148 to 474
40 64QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 583
40 128QAM 75 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456 216 to 691
40 256QAM 75 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538 251 to 800
56 (55) QPSK 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178 83 to 265
56 (55) 16QAM 75 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356 167 to 533
56 (55) 32QAM 75 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437 207 to 659
56 (55) 64QAM 75 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567 264 to 836
56 (55) 128QAM 75 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656 311 to 983


n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777 362 to 1000
NOTE
a: In 7MHz/64QAM or 14MHz/128QAM mode, ISX2 boards do not support cooperation with 26 GHz to 38 GHz ODUs if XPIC
is enabled on the ISX2 boards.
Table 3-82 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)
Channel Modulation Number of Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
Spacing Scheme STM-1
(MHz) Services in Without With L2 With L2+L3 With L2+L3
n n (IPv4) n (IPv6)
28 (27.5) 128QAM 1 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333 156 to 495
28 (27.5) 256QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 577
40 64QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388 182 to 583
40 128QAM 1 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456 216 to 691
40 256QAM 1 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538 251 to 800
56 (55) 16QAM 1 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356 167 to 533
56 (55) 32QAM 1 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437 207 to 659
56 (55) 64QAM 1 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567 264 to 836
56 (55) 128QAM 1 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656 311 to 983
56 (55) 256QAM 1 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777 362 to 1000
NOTE
For the ISX2 board in STM-1 + Ethernet service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC
function is enabled or disabled.

NOTE
For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the ISU2/ISX2 board supports:
l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on the following conditions.
l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to
9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from
64 bytes to 9600 bytes
l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): S-tagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 92
bytes to 9600 bytes
l E1/STM-1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided
IF Performance

Item Performance

Item Performance

baseband signals

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance

x D)
Weight 0.60 kg
Power Consumption
3.9 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA
The EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE
electrical ports and two GE ports. The EM6T/EM6TA has similar functions to the EM6F/
EM6FA. The only difference is as follows: The GE ports on the EM6T/EM6TA use fixed
electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F/EM6FA use the SFP modules and therefore
can function as two FE/GE optical or GE electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on the
EM6F/EM6FA and the EM6T/EM6TA are compatible with the FE electrical ports.
NOTE
EM6TA/EM6FA boards have the same functions as EM6T/EM6F boards. The only difference is that
EM6TA/EM6FA boards reserve hardware resources for the IEEE 1588v2 function.

The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is SL91.

The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE
signals and two GE signals. The GE port on the EM6F/EM6FA can receive/transmit 2xFE optical
signals using FE small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical modules.
Table 3-86 lists the functions and features that the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA supports.
The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system
control, switching, and timing board to implement Ethernet service functions.
EM6T/EM6TA EM6F/EM6FA
Basic functions Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works

with the packet switching unit to process the received
FE/GE service signals.

Port FE electrical Provides four Provides four

specifications port 10/100BASE-T(X) ports. 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
GE port Provides two Provides two GE ports by

10/100/1000BASE-T(X) using SFP modules of any
ports (fixed). of the following types:
l Dual-fiber
bidirectional FE/GE
optical module
l Colored CWDM GE
optical module
l Single-fiber
bidirectional FE/GE
module
l 10/100/1000BASE-T
(X) GE electrical
module
Backplane bus bandwidth 1 Gbit/s 1 Gbit/s
Port attributes Working mode l The FE electrical ports on EM6T/EM6F boards

support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M
full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and auto-
negotiation.
l The FE electrical ports on EM6TA/EM6FA boards
support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, and
auto-negotiation.
l The GE electrical ports on EM6T/EM6F boards
support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M
full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex,
l The GE electrical ports on EM6TA/EM6FA boards
support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex,
1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The FE optical ports on EM6F/EM6FA boards
support 100M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.
l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex
TAG attributes l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.
l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet
port.
Jumbo frame Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length

of 9600 bytes.


Services E-Line services Supports the following types of E-Line services:

l E-Line services based on ports
l E-Line services based on port+QinQ

LAG Inter-board Supported Supported

LAG
Intra-board Supported Supported

LAG

G.8032/Y.1344.
LPT Supported Supported
QoS DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying

PHB service classes for service flows based on their
QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried
by the packets.
Complex traffic Supports traffic classification at Ethernet ports based

classification on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-
VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities,
S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values
carried by packets.
CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.
Shaping Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized

queue, or traffic flow.
Queue Supports the following queue scheduling policies:

scheduling l SP
policies
l WRR
l SP+WRR

ETH OAM Ethernet service l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

OAM function.
1731.
Ethernet port Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM

OAM function.
RMON Supported Supported
Clock Clock source Synchronous Ethernet Synchronous Ethernet

(not supported by the SFP
electrical module)

DCN Inband DCN Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel.

Warm reset and Supported Supported

cold reset
Board Supported Supported

manufacturing
information
query
Board power Supported Supported

consumption
information
query
Board voltage Supported Supported

detection
Board Supported Supported

temperature
detection
Query of SFP Not supported Supported

module
information


This section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T/EM6TA, and it serves as an
example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/
EM6FA.
Figure 3-33 Functional block diagram

Backplane
GE signal
GE signal
GE signal
Control signal Ethernet Ethernet
access unit
Ethernet signal Logic signal
processing processing Packet switching unit
unit unit
FE signal Control signal
access unit
FE signal
FE signal
Control bus of the board
Control bus
Logic System control and
control unit communication unit
+3.3 V power supplied to the Power -48 V1

board supply unit
-48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied to some I/O
circuits on the board +3.3 V
Clock signal provided to the Clock unit System clock signal

Table 3-87 Signal processing in the receive direction

1 GE signal access l Receives/Transmits GE/FE signals.

unit/FE signal access l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
unit conversion for GE/FE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
CRC checks, and Ethernet performance measurement
for frame signals.

2 Ethernet processing l Adds tags identifying ingress ports to Ethernet data

unit frames.
l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification
and CAR traffic monitoring for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the logic processing
unit.
3 Logic processing Transmits Ethernet data frames to the main and standby
unit packet switching units.
Table 3-88 Signal processing in the transmit direction
1 Logic processing unit l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet
switching unit.
l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet
processing unit.
2 Ethernet processing l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.

unit l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to proper egress ports
based on egress tags contained in the Ethernet data
frames.
3 GE signal access l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC

unit/FE signal access code computing, and Ethernet performance
unit measurement.
l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for
Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated GE/
FE signals through Ethernet ports.

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit over the
control bus on the board.

The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and
communication units over the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands
from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board
through the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and
the alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unit
also through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit

l Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
l Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and then supplies the +3.3 V power
to some I/O circuits on the board.
Clock Unit
3.9.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-34 Front panel of the EM6T

EM6T
PROG
STAT
SRV
GE1 GE2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4
Figure 3-35 Front panel of the EM6TA

EM6TA
PROG
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-36 Front panel of the EM6F

EM6F
CLASS1
LASER
LINK1
LINK2
PROG
STAT
SRV
PRODUCT
Figure 3-37 Front panel of the EM6FA

EM6FA
CLASS1
LASER
PROG
STAT
SRV
PRODUCT
L/A1
L/A2

Indicators
Table 3-89 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F



system.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.
PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board during
board.
300 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.
On (green) l When the board is being powered on or

being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100 The BOOTROM self-check fails during the
ms intervals power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (red) l The memory self-check fails or loading

board.
l The logic file or upper layer software is
board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
LINK1a On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly and is

not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (green) The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting

data.
Off The GE1 port is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.


data.

NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE ports.
Table 3-90 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6TA/EM6FA



system.
board.
the board.


being initialized.

upper layer software fails during the power-
on or resetting process of the board.
The logic file or upper layer software is lost
during the running process of the board.
L/A1a On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly and is

Blinking (yellow) The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting

data.



data.

NOTE
a: The L/A1 and L/A2 indicators are available only on the EM6FA and indicate the states of the
Ports
Table 3-91 Description of the ports on the EM6T/EM6TA

Cable
GE1 GE service port (fixed RJ45 Network cable

electrical port)
GE2
FE1 FE service port


Cable
FE2
FE3
FE4
Table 3-92 Description of the ports on the EM6F/EM6FA

Cable
GE1 GE service port (using SFP RJ45 SFP electrical 5.9 Network Cable/5.5
modules) module/LC SFP optical Fiber Jumper
GE2 module
FE1 FE service port RJ45 5.9 Network Cable
FE2
FE3
FE4
NOTE
On the NMS, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; FE1 to FE4 correspond to
PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.
The performance of the FE service ports on the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA complies with

the 10/100BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6T/
EM6TA complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service
ports on the EM6F/EM6FA complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP
electrical modules are used. All service ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X
modes. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-93 and Table 3-94. For the front view
of an RJ45 connector, see Figure 3-38.
87654321

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T
Signal Function Signal Function
1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A

(+)
2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A

(-)
3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B

(+)
4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C

(+)
5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C

(-)
6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B

(-)
7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D

(+)
8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D

(-)

(+)

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)


(-)
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table
3-95.

data.

receiving data.
When the SFP ports on the EM6F/EM6FA function as optical ports, optical modules are required.
l When dual-fiber bidirectional SFP optical modules are used to provide ports, one SFP
optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-39, in
which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port. One optical fiber
is connected to each port.
l When single-fiber bidirectional optical modules are used to provide ports, one optical
module provides only the port on the left. This port is an optical port that can receive and
transmit service signals. One optical fiber is connected to this port.
Figure 3-39 Ports of an SFP optical module
TX RX
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F/EM6FA.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.
That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

3.9.5 Valid Slots

The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the EM6T/
EM6F on the NMS are the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-40 Slots for the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 14 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15
Figure 3-41 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA on the NMS

(FAN)

Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3 and 5 >
Slots 12 and 14 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots 8 and
10 > Slots 7 and 9


The FE/GE small form-factor pluggable (SFP) ports on the EM6F/EM6FA support multiple
types of SFP modules.
Table 3-97 Types of SFP modules that the FE/GE port supports
Category Part Number Type Wavelength and

Transmission
Distance
Dual-fiber 34060286 1000Base-SX 850 nm, 0.5 km

bidirectional GE
module 34060473 1000Base-LX 1310 nm, 10 km
34060298 1000BASE-VX 1310 nm, 40 km
34060513 1550 nm, 40 km
34060360 1000BASE-ZX 1550 nm, 80 km
34060416 1000BASE-CWDM 1471 nm, 40 km
34060417 1491 nm, 40 km
34060418 1511 nm, 40 km
34060419 1531 nm, 40 km
34060420 1551 nm, 40 km
34060421 1571 nm, 40 km
34060422 1591 nm, 40 km
34060423 1611 nm, 40 km
34060483 1471 nm, 80 km
34060481 1491 nm, 80 km
34060479 1511 nm, 80 km
34060482 1531 nm, 80 km
34060478 1551 nm, 80 km
34060476 1571 nm, 80 km
34060477 1591 nm, 80 km
34060480 1611 nm, 80 km
Single-fiber 34060475 1000BASE-BX-D Transmit: 1490 nm;

bidirectional GE receive: 1310 nm
module 10 km

Category Part Number Type Wavelength and

Transmission
Distance
34060470 1000BASE-BX-U Transmit: 1310 nm;

receive: 1490 nm
10 km
34060540 1000BASE-BX-D Transmit: 1490 nm;

receive: 1310 nm
40 km

receive: 1490 nm
40 km
Dual-fiber 34060287 100BASE-FX 1310 nm, 2 km

bidirectional FE
module 34060276 100BASE-LX 1310 nm, 15 km
34060281 100BASE-VX 1310 nm, 40 km
34060282 100BASE-ZX 1550 nm, 80 km
Single-fiber 34060364 100BASE-BX-D Transmit: 1550 nm;

bidirectional FE receive: 1310 nm
module 15 km

receive: 1550 nm
15 km
Electrical 34100052 10/100/1000BASE-T -

module (X)
NOTE
For the specifications for each type of optical module, see Table 3-99-Table 3-104 in 3.9.8 Technical
Specifications.
The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by board feature codes
in the bar codes of EM6F boards. A board feature code refers to the number next to the board
name in a bar code. The bar code of the EM6T/EM6TA does not contain a board feature code.
Table 3-98 Board feature code of the EM6F
Board Feature Code Module Type Part Number of the

Module
01 1000BASE-SX 34060286
02 1000BASE-LX 34060473
03 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) 34100052

Board Feature Code Module Type Part Number of the

Module
10 100BASE-FX 34060287
11 100BASE-LX 34060276
NOTE
If the board feature code in the bar code of the EM6T/EM6TA is empty, no SFP module is installed on the
EM6T/EM6TA.

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/
EM6FA.
Related References

This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Performance of FE/GE Optical Ports

The FE/GE optical ports on the EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the
main specifications for the FE/GE optical ports.
NOTE

transmission)
Item Performance

Item Performance

sensitivity (dBm)

(dB)
Table 3-100 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission)

Item Performance
Classification code 1000BASE-VX 1000BASE-VX 1000BASE-ZX

(40 km) (40 km) (80 km)
Nominal wavelength (nm) 1310 1550 1550
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 1000 1000 1000
Mean launched power (dBm) -5 to 0 -5 to 0 -2 to +5
Receiver minimum -23 -22 -22

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum extinction ratio 9 9 9

(dB)

Table 3-101 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, CWDM)

Item Performance
Classification code 1000BASE-CWDM (40 1000BASE-CWDM (80

km) km)
Nominal wavelength (nm) l Channel 1: 1471 l Channel 1: 1471

l Channel 2: 1491 l Channel 2: 1491
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 1000 1000
Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode
Transmission distance (km) 40 80
Operating wavelength (nm) Nominal wavelength ±6.5 Nominal wavelength ±6.5
Mean launched power (dBm) 0 to +5 0 to +5

sensitivity (dBm)

(dB)
Table 3-102 GE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)

Item Performance
1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE-

BX-D (10 BX-U BX-D (40 BX-U
km) (10km) km) (40km)
Nominal wavelength (nm) Tx: 1490 Tx: 1310 Tx: 1490 Tx: 1310
Rx: 1310 Rx: 1490 Rx: 1310 Rx: 1490
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 1000 1000 1000 1000
Fiber type Multi-mode Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode
Transmission distance (km) 10 10 40 40

Item Performance

BX-D (10 BX-U BX-D (40 BX-U
km) (10km) km) (40km)
Operating wavelength (nm) Tx: 1480 to Tx: 1260 to Tx: 1260 to Tx: 1480 to
1500 1360 1360 1500
Rx: 1260 to Rx: 1480 to Rx: 1480 to Rx: 1260 to
1360 1500 1500 1360
Mean launched power (dBm) -9 to -3 -9 to -3 -3 to +3 -3 to +3
Receiver minimum -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum extinction ratio 6 6 6 6

(dB)
Table 3-103 FE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional)

Item Performance

FX (2 km) LX (15 km) VX (40 km) ZX (80 km)
Nominal wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1550
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 100 100 100 100
Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode
Transmission distance (km) 2 15 40 80
Operating wavelength (nm) 1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Mean launched power (dBm) -19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum extinction ratio 10 8.2 10 10.5

(dB)

Table 3-104 FE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional)
Item Performance
Classification code 100BASE-BX-D (15 km) 100BASE-BX-U (15 km)
Nominal wavelength (nm) Tx: 1550 Tx: 1310

Rx: 1310 Rx: 1550
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 100 100
Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode
Transmission distance (km) 15 15
Operating wavelength (nm) Tx: 1480 to 1580 Tx: 1260 to 1360

Rx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to 1580

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum overload (dBm) -8 -8

(dB)
Performance of GE Electrical Ports

The GE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the GE electrical ports.
Item Performance

100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ45
Performance of FE Electrical Ports

The FE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the FE electrical ports.

Table 3-106 FE electrical interface performance
Item Performance

100 (100BASE-TX)

Interface type RJ45
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
EM6T EM6TA EM6F EM6FA
Dimensions (H 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

x W x D)
Weight 0.37 kg 0.40 kg 0.40 kg 0.40 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EM6T: < 10.4 W
Power consumption of the EM6TA: < 16.2 W
Power consumption of the EM6F: < 11.3 W
Power consumption of the EM6FA: < 15.4 W
3.10 EMS6
The EMS6 is an FE/GE EoSDH processing board providing the L2 switching function. It
provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports using small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
optical/electrical modules.

The functional version of the EMS6 is SL91.

The EMS6 receives/transmits 4xFE signals and 2xGE signals from the front panel and 1xGE
packet plane signals from the backplane, and encapsulates these Ethernet signals into

synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) signals to transmit the Ethernet signals on the SDH
network. The EMS6 supports transparent service transmission and Layer 2 switching.
Table 3-108 lists the functions and features that the EMS6 supports.

Basic functions Receives/transmits 4xFE signals, 2xGE signals, and

1xGE packet plane signals, and performs EoSDH
processing.
Port specifications FE Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.

electrical
port
GE port Provides two GE ports by using small form-factor

pluggable (SFP) modules of any of the following types:
l 1000Base-SX
l 1000Base-LX
l 1000Base-VX
l 1000Base-ZX
l 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
Port attributes Working l The FE ports support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-
mode duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The GE electrical ports support 10M full-duplex,
10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-
duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex
TAG l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet

attributes port.
or hybrid.
Jumbo Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length

frame of 9600 bytes.
Traffic Supports the port-based traffic control function that

control complies with IEEE 802.3x.
function
Services Ethernet Supports the EPL services based on ports.

private line
(EPL)
services

Ethernet Supports the following types of EVPL services:

virtual l EVPL services based on port+VLAN
private line
(EVPL) l EVPL services based on QinQ
services
Ethernet Supports the EPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1d

private bridges.
LAN
(EPLAN)
services
Ethernet Supports the following types of EVPLAN services:

virtual l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
private
LAN l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
(EVPLAN)
services
Encapsulation and Encapsulati Supports the following encapsulation formats:

mapping on format l Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)
l High Level Data Link Control (HDLC)
l Link Access Protocol-SDH (LAPS)
Maximum 4xVC-4
TDM
service
capacity
supported
by the
backplane
Maximum 8
number of
VCTRUN
Ks
supported
by the board
Maximum l VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK7: 100 Mbit/s

bandwidth l VCTRUNK8: 622 Mbit/s
supported
by each
VCTRUN
K
Link Supported
capacity
adjustment
scheme
(LCAS)

Link aggregation Inter-board Not supported

group (LAG) LAG
Intra-board Supported
LAG NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support intra-
board LAG.
Ethernet ring protection switching Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T
(ERPS) G.8032/Y.1344.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Supports the STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP), which comply with IEEE 802.1w.
IGMP Snooping Supported
Link state pass through (LPT)a Supported

NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support LPT.
QoS Traffic Supports the following traffic classification modes:

classificatio l Traffic classification based on ports
n
l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+S-VLAN ID
+S-VLAN ID
CoS Schedules packets in traffic flows to eight egress

queues of different CoSs by:
l Simple
l VLAN priority
l IP TOS value
l DSCP value
Committed Provides the CAR function for traffic flows.

access rate
(CAR)
Shaping Supports traffic shaping for a specific port or egress

queue.
Queue Supports the following scheduling policies:

scheduling l SP
policy
l WRR
l SP+WRR

ETH OAM l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

function.
function.
NOTE
Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support IEEE
802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function.
Remote monitoring (RMON) Supported
Port mirroring Supported
Clock Clock Synchronous Ethernet

source NOTE
Ports 7 and 8 (bridging ports) on the EMS6 board do not
support synchronous Ethernet.

l Protection by running the Synchronization Status
Message (SSM) protocol

l Supports inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
excluding ports 7 and 8 (bridging ports).
l Supports inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
excluding port 8 (bridging port).
l Supports inloops on VC-3 paths.
Traffic Supported
monitoring
Warm reset Supported

and cold
reset
Board Supported
manufactur
ing
information
query
Board Supported
power
consumptio
n
information
query

Board Supported
temperature
detection
NOTE
a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur on a service access node or an intermediate
transmission network, and instruct the service access node to immediately start the backup network for
communication. The LPT function ensures the normal transmission of important data.

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EMS6, using FE/GE signal
processing as an example.
Figure 3-42 Functional block diagram of the EMS6

Backplane
Ethernet signal SDH signal

FE signal
FE signal access Ethernet Logic
unit Encapsulation Mapping
processing processing Cross-connect
unit unit
unit unit unit
GE signal
GE signal access
unit
GE signal Packet
switching unit
Management
control signal
Control signal of the board
Logic Control bus System control and

control communication unit
unit
-48 V1
+3.3 V power supplied Power
to the board supply unit -48 V2
+3.3 V backup power
supplied to certain auxiliary +3.3 V
circuits on the board


Table 3-109 Signal processing in the receive direction

1 FE/GE signal access l Receives FE/GE signals. If GE signals are received

unit through a GE optical port, O/E conversion is required.
l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for FE/GE signals.
cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code processing, and
Ethernet performance measurement for frames.
2 Ethernet processing l Receives Ethernet signals from the FE/GE signal

unit access unit and GE signals from the packet switching
unit.
l Performs QoS processing, such as traffic
classification and committed access rate (CAR)
control, for Ethernet data frames based on service
types.
l Processes tags based on service types.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames based on service types.
3 Encapsulation unit Performs the High Level Data Link Control (HDLC),
Link Access Protocol-SDH (LAPS), or Generic Framing
Procedure (GFP) encapsulation for Ethernet frames.
4 Mapping unit Maps encapsulated Ethernet data frames into VC-12s,

VC-3s, VC-12-Xvs, or VC-3-Xvs.
5 Logic processing Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to

unit the cross-connect unit.
Table 3-110 Signal processing in the transmit direction

1 Logic processing unit Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
2 Mapping unit Demaps encapsulated Ethernet data frames from VC-12s,

VC-3s, VC-12-Xvs, or VC-3-Xvs.
3 Encapsulation unit Decapsulates Ethernet data frames after they are

demapped.

4 Ethernet processing l Processes tags based on service types.

unit l Performs QoS processing, such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling, for Ethernet data frames.
l Performs Ethernet data frame delimitation, preamble
addition, CRC code computation, and Ethernet
performance measurement.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE/GE signal
access unit or the GE port connected to the packet
switching unit based on egress tags contained in the
Ethernet data frames.
5 FE signal access unit Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for

Ethernet data frames, and transmits generated FE/GE
signals through Ethernet ports. For a GE optical port, the
FE signal access unit needs to perform E/O conversion
before transmitting signals through the GE optical port.

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit,
and logic processing unit using the control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit using the
system control bus. The logic control unit issues configuration and query commands from the
system control and communication unit to various units on the board, and reports command
responses, alarms, and performance events reported by various units on the board to the system
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48
V power into +3.3 V power using the DC-DC module, and supplies the +3.3 V power to the
other units on the board.
The power supply unit receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to certain auxiliary circuits on the board.
Clock Unit
3.10.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, four FE ports, and two small form-factor pluggable (SFP) GE ports on the
front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-43 Front panel of the EMS6
EMS6
LINK1
PROG
LINK2
STAT
ACT1
ACT2
SRV
GE1 GE2
FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4
Indicators
Table 3-111 Status explanation for indicators on the EMS6

board.
the board.
On (green) l The upper layer software is being

initialized during the power-on or
resetting process of the board.
l The software is running properly during
the running process of the board.

board.
board.
SRV On (green) The system is working normally.


system.
LINK1 On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly.
Blinks on (red) and off at 300 The receive optical power at the GE1 optical
ms intervals port is higher than the upper threshold.
Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700 The receive optical power at the GE1 optical
ms off port is lower than the lower threshold.

ACT1 Blinking (yellow) The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting

data.
Off The GE1 port is not receiving or

transmitting data.


data.

transmitting data.
Ports
Table 3-112 Description of the ports on the EMS6

Port Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable
GE1 GE service port RJ45 SFP electrical module/LC 5.9 Network Cable/5.5 Fiber
(using SFP SFP optical module Jumper
GE2 modules)
FE1 FE service port RJ45 5.9 Network Cable

FE2
FE3
FE4
NOTE
On the network management system (NMS), GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively,
and FE1 to FE4 correspond to PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.
The performance of the FE electrical ports on the EMS6 complies with the 10/100BASE-T(X)
standard, and the performance of the GE electrical ports on the EMS6 complies with the
10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP electrical modules are used. The two types of ports
support the MDI, MDI-X, auto-MDI, and auto-MDI-X modes. For the front view of an RJ45
connector, see Figure 3-44. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-113 and Table
3-114.
87654321

(+)

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)


(+)

(-)

(+)

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

(-)
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table
3-115.

data.


receiving data.
SFP optical modules are used to provide GE ports on the EMS6. One SFP optical module
provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-45, in which TX represents the
transmit port and RX represents the receive port.
Figure 3-45 Ports of an SFP optical module
TX RX
3.10.5 Valid Slots

The EMS6 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EMS6 on the network management
system (NMS) are the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-46 Slots for the EMS6 in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 8
Slot 15
Slot 5 (EMS6) Slot 6 (EMS6)

Figure 3-47 Logical slots for the EMS6 on the NMS
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10

(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 8
Table 3-116 Slot configuration for the EMS6

Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3 and 5

The GE port on the EMS6 board supports multiple types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
modules.
Table 3-117 Types of SFP modules that the GE port supports

Part Number Type
34060286 1000Base-SX
34060473 1000Base-LX
34060298 1000Base-VX (40 km, 1310 nm)
34060513 1000Base-VX (40 km, 1550 nm)
34060360 1000Base-ZX
34100052 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by board feature codes
in the bar codes of EMS6 boards. A board feature code refers to the number next to the board
name in a bar code.

Table 3-118 Board feature codes of the EMS6
Board Feature Code Module Type
01 1000Base-SX
02 1000Base-LX
03 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
NOTE
If the board feature code in the bar code of the EMS6 is empty, no SFP module is installed on the EMS6.

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EMS6.
Related References
A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port
A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port
A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames

This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port
Performance of GE Optical Ports

The GE optical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the GE optical ports.

transmission)
Item Performance

Item Performance

sensitivity (dBm)

(dB)
Table 3-120 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission)

Item Performance
Classification code 1000BASE-VX 1000BASE-VX 1000BASE-ZX

(40 km) (40 km) (80 km)
Nominal wavelength (nm) 1310 1550 1550
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 1000 1000 1000
Mean launched power (dBm) -5 to 0 -5 to 0 -2 to +5
Receiver minimum -23 -22 -22

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum extinction ratio 9 9 9

(dB)
NOTE
Performance of GE Electrical Ports

The GE electrical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the
main specifications for the GE electrical ports.


Item Performance

100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ45

The FE electrical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the FE electrical ports.

Item Performance

100 (100BASE-TX)

Interface type RJ45
Mechanical Behavior

Item Performance
Weight 0.50 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EMS6: < 16.5 W

3.11 EFP8
The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet
plane through its bridging GE port.

The functional version of the EFP8 is SL91.

The EFP8 receives/transmits 8xFE signals from its front panel and 1xGE packet plane signals
from the backplane, and encapsulates the Ethernet signals into E1 signals, and transmits the
Ethernet signals on the PDH network.
Table 3-124 lists the functions and features that the EFP8 supports.
Basic functions Receives/Transmits 8xFE signals and 1xGE packet

plane signals and performs EoPDH processing.
Port FE electrical port: 8

specifications 10/100BASE-T
(X)
Port attributes Working mode The FE port supports 10M full-duplex, 100M full-
duplex, and auto-negotiation.
TAG attributes l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet

port.
or hybrid.
Jumbo frame Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame

length of 2000 bytes.

Services EPL services Supports the EPL services that are based on port.
EVPL services Supports the following types of EVPL services:

l EVPL services based on port+VLAN
l EVPL services based on QinQ
EPLAN services Supports the EPLAN services that are based on IEEE
802.1d bridges.

EVPLAN services Supports the following types of EVPLAN services:

l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad
bridges
Encapsulation Encapsulation Generic framing procedure (GFP)

and mapping format
Maximum number 16
of VCTRUNKs
supported by the
board
Maximum TDM 1xVC-4 (63xE1)

service capacity
supported by the
backplane
Maximum number 16xE1

of E1s that can be
bound with a
single VCTRUNK
Link capacity Supported

adjustment
scheme (LCAS)
LAG Inter-board LAG Not supported
Intra-board LAG Supported

NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) on the EFP8 does not support intra-
board LAG.
IGMP snooping function Supported
LPTa Supported
NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) on the EFP8 does not support LPT.
QoS Traffic l Traffic classification based on ports

classification l Traffic classification based on port+VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port+VLAN ID
+VLAN PRI
l Traffic classification based on port+S-VLAN ID
+S-VLAN ID

CoS Grooms packets in traffic flows to eight egress

queues that belong to different service classes based
on the following conditions:
l Simple
l VLAN priority
l IP TOS value
l DSCP value
CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows.
Shaping Supports traffic shaping for queues at ports.
Queue scheduling Supports SP+WRR.

policies
ETH OAM l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM

function.
function.
NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) of the EFP8 does not support the
OAM function that complies with IEEE 802.3ah.
RMON Supported
Port mirroring Supported
Clock Clock source Synchronous Ethernet

NOTE
Ports 9 and 10 (bridging ports) on the EFP8 board do not
support synchronous Ethernet.
Clock protection Supports the following clock protection schemes:

l Protection based on clock source priorities

excluding ports 9 and 10 (bridging ports)
excluding port 10 (bridging port)
l Inloops on VC-12 paths

cold reset
Board Supported
manufacturing
information query


consumption
information query
Board temperature Supported

detection
NOTE
a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur at a service access node and in an intermediate
transmission network. If a fault is detected, the LPT notifies the equipment that receives the service of
starting the backup network at the earliest time for communication, ensuring normal transmission of
important data.

This section describes how to process one FE signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the EFP8.
Figure 3-48 Functional block diagram of the EFP8

Backplane
Ethernet signal PDH signal
FE signal FE
Ethernet Logic
signal Encapsulation Mapping
processing processing Cross-connect
access unit unit
unit unit unit
unit
Management
control signal
GE signal Packet
switching unit
Control signal of the board
Logic Control bus System control and

control communication unit
unit
-48 V1
+3.3 V power supplied Power
to the board supply unit -48 V2
+3.3 V backup power +3.3 V

supplied to the board


Table 3-125 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EFP8

1 FE signal access unit l Receives/Transmits FE signals.

l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for FE signals.
CRC code checks, and Ethernet performance
measurement for frame signals.
2 Ethernet processing l Receives/Transmits GE signals from the packet

unit switching unit.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification
and CAR for Ethernet data frames based on service
categories.
l Processes tags based on service categories.
l Forwards data frames based on service categories.
3 Encapsulation unit Performs GFP encapsulation for Ethernet frames.
4 Mapping unit l Maps encapsulated data frames based on E1 virtual

concatenation and then encapsulates the data frames
to proper VC-12s.
l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form
one TUG-2.
l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form
one TUG-3.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form
one C-4.
l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to
form one VC-4.
5 Logic processing
unit
Table 3-126 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EFP8

1 Logic processing unit Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals

2 Mapping unit l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Extracts E1 payload from VC-12s and demaps the E1
payload based on E1 virtual concatenation.
3 Encapsulation unit Decapsulates signals after demapping.
4 Ethernet signal l Processes tags based on service categories.

processing unit l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC
code computing, and Ethernet performance
measurement for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE signal access
unit or the GE port that is connected to the packet
switching unit according to the egress flag.
5 FE signal access unit Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for

Ethernet data frames, and sends the generated FE signals
to an Ethernet port.

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit,
and logic processing unit over the control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit over the
system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system control and
communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control unit.
The command response reported by each unit on the board, and alarms and performance events
are reported to the system control and communication unit also through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit

l Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit

3.11.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and eight FE ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-49 Front panel of the EFP8

EFP8
PROG
STAT
SRV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Indicators
Table 3-127 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8


board.
the board.

being initialized.


board.
board.

system.
Ports
Table 3-128 Description of the ports on the EFP8

FE1 to FE port
RJ45 5.9 Network Cable
FE8
The FE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin
assignments for the ports, see Table 3-129 and Table 3-130. For the front view of an RJ45
connector, see Figure 3-50.
87654321

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X)
Signal Function
1 TX+ Transmitting data (+)
2 TX- Transmitting data (-)
3 RX+ Receiving data (+)
4 Reserved -
5 Reserved -
6 RX- Receiving data (-)
7 Reserved -
8 Reserved -
Pin 10/100BASE-T(X)
Signal Function
1 RX+ Receiving data (+)
2 RX- Receiving data (-)
3 TX+ Transmitting data (+)
4 Reserved -
5 Reserved -
6 TX- Transmitting data (-)
7 Reserved -
8 Reserved -
The RJ45 port has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table 3-131.


data.

receiving data.
3.11.5 Valid Slots

The EFP8 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-51 Slots for the EFP8 in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (EFP8) Slot 14 (EFP8)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15
Figure 3-52 Logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS

(FAN)


Item Description
10 > Slots 7 and 9

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EFP8.
Related References

This section describes the board specifications, including the FE port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The FE electrical ports on the EFP8 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the FE electrical ports.

Item Performance

100 (100BASE-TX)

Interface type RJ45

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Weight 0.6 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EFP8: < 13.5 W
3.12 SL1D/SL1DA
The SL1D/SL1DA is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board. The SL1D/SL1DA can also provide
STM-1 electrical ports by using SFP electrical modules. Besides all the functions provided by
the SL1D, the SL1DA supports the K byte pass-through function.

The functional version of the SL1D/SL1DA is SL91.

The SL1D/SL1DA receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals.
Table 3-135 lists the functions and features that the SL1D/SL1DA supports.
Basic functions Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical

signals.
Port Optical ports l Adopts SFP optical modules and supports the
specifications optical ports of Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types.
l The characteristics of all the optical ports comply
with ITU-T G.957.
Electrical ports l Adopts SFP electrical modules.

l The performance of the electrical ports complies
with ITU-T G.703.
Protection Linear MSP Supported
SNCP Supported

Clock Clock source Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.

DCN Outband DCN Each SDH line port can provide one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or
twelve DCC bytes.
K byte pass-through Supported only by the SL1DA

l Outloops at optical/electrical ports
l Inloops at optical/electrical ports
l Outloops on VC-4 paths

cold reset
Setting of the Supported

on/off state of a
laser
ALS functiona Supported
FPGA loading
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

consumption
information
query
Detection and Supported

query of SFP
module
information

NOTE
a: The ALS function is implemented as follows:

l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500
ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down.
l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds
and stops emission for 60 seconds.
l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.

This section describes how to process one STM-1 optical signal, and it serves as an example to
describe the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D/SL1DA.
Figure 3-53 Functional block diagram of the SL1D/SL1DA

Backplane
Logic processing
Cross-
O/E conversion
processing unit
STM-1 Service bus connect unit

Overhead
unit
unit
STM-1 System control and

Overhead bus communication unit
System control and

Control bus communication unit
Logic control
unit
Power supplied to the +3.3 V

Clock signal provided to the

Clock unit System clock signal
Table 3-136 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D/SL1DA
1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.

l Detects R_LOS alarms.
l Converts STM-1 optical signals into electrical signals.

2 Overhead processing l Restores clock signals.

unit l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms.
l Performs descrambling.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms
and performance events.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
to the logic processing unit.

unit l Ttransmits the overhead signals to the system control
to the cross-connect unit.
Table 3-137 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D/SL1DA


2 Overhead processing l Sets higher order path overheads.

unit l Sets AU pointers.
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Performs scrambling.

3 O/E conversion unit Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.
Clock Unit
3.12.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, STM-1 ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-54 Front panel of the SL1D (with optical ports)

SL1D
SL1D
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
LOS1
LOS2
STAT
SRV
TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2
Figure 3-55 Front panel of the SL1DA (with optical ports)

SL1DA
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
LOS1
LOS2
STAT
SRV
TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2
Figure 3-56 Front panel of the SL1D (with electrical ports)

SL1D
SL1D
LOS1
LOS2
STAT
SRV
TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2

Figure 3-57 Front panel of the SL1DA (with electrical ports)
SL1DA
LOS1
LOS2
STAT
SRV
TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2
Indicators
Table 3-138 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D/SL1DA


properly.

l There is no power


Off The services are not

configured.
LOS1 On (red) The first port of the SL1D/

SL1DA is reporting the
R_LOS alarm.
Off The first port of the SL1D/

SL1DA is free of R_LOS
alarms.
LOS2 On (red) The second port of the

SL1D/SL1DA is reporting
the R_LOS alarm.
Off The second port of the

SL1D/SL1DA is free of
R_LOS alarms.

Ports

Cable
TX1 Transmit port of the l SFP optical l SFP optical

first STM-1 port module: LC module: 5.5
l SFP electrical Fiber Jumper
RX1 Receive port of the
module: SAA l SFP electrical
first STM-1 port
straight/female module: 5.6
STM-1 Cable
TX2 Transmit port of the l SFP optical
second STM-1 port module: LC
l SFP electrical
RX2 Receive port of the
module: SAA
second STM-1 port
straight/female
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.
That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.12.5 Valid Slots

The SL1D can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots. The SL1DA can be inserted in slots 1–6. The logical slots of the SL1DA
on the NMS are the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-58 Slots for the SL1D/SL1DA in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (SL1D) Slot 14 (SL1D)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15
Slot 5 (SL1D/SL1DA) Slot 6 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Figure 3-59 Logical slots of the SL1D/SL1DA on the NMS

(FAN)
Item Description
Slot allocation priority SL1D: Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3 and
5 > Slots 12 and 14 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots 8
and 10 > Slots 7 and 9
SL1DA: Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 3
and 5
3.12.6 Board Feature Code

The board feature code of the SL1D/SL1DA indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature
code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 3-141 Board feature code of the SL1D/SL1DA
Feature Code Type of Optical Module Part Number of the

Optical Module
01 Ie-1 34060287
02 S-1.1 34060276
03 L-1.1 34060281
04 L-1.2 34060282
05 STM-1e 34100104


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D/SL1DA.
Related References

This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical/electrical port

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The
Item Performance
Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2
Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

fiber fiber fiber fiber
Transmission distance 2 15 40 80
(km)
Operating wavelength 1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
(nm)
Mean launched power -19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

(dBm)

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum extinction ratio 10 8.2 10 10

(dB)
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP optical modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of
SFP optical modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

STM-1 Electrical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The
Table 3-143 STM-1 electrical interface performance
Item Performance
Code type CMI
Wire pair in each One coaxial wire pair

transmission direction
Impedance (ohm) 75
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP electrical modules to provide electrical interfaces.
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
SL1D SL1DA
Dimensions (H x W x 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

D)
Weight 0.30 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the SL1D: < 3.4 W
Power consumption of the SL1DA: < 3.3 W
3.13 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.

The functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91.


The ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Table 3-145 lists the functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports.
ML1 MD1
Basic functions Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports

flexible configuration of E1 service categories.
E1 service categories Supports the following E1 service categories:

l CES E1
l ATM/IMA E1
Port 75-ohm/120- 16 32
specifications ohm E1 port
Fractional E1 Supports transparent service transmission at the 64

kbit/s level.
ATM/IMA Maximum 64
number of ATM
services
Maximum 256
number of ATM
connections
ATM traffic Supported

management
ATM Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes:

encapsulation l N-to-one VPC
mode
l N-to-one VCC
l One-to-one VPC
l One-to-one VCC
Maximum 31
number of
concatenated
ATM cells
ATM OAM Supports F4 OAM (VP level) and F5 OAM (VC level),
including the following functions:
l Alarm indication signal (AIS)/Remote defect
indication (RDI)
l Continuity check test
l Loopback test

ML1 MD1
Maximum 16 32
number of IMA
groups
Maximum 16
number of
members in an
IMA group
CES Maximum 16 32
number of
services
Encapsulation Supports the following encapsulation modes:

mode l CESoPSN
l SAToP
Service Point-to-point services

category
Compression of Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only)

vacant slots
Jitter buffering 375-16000

time (us)
Packet loading 125-5000

time (us)
CES ACR Supported
Retiming Supported
Clock protection Supports clock protection based on clock source

priorities.
OM Loopback Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.

warm reset
PRBS tests at E1 Supported

ports
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

consumption
information
query


This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1.
Figure 3-60 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1

Backplane
Logic processing
Signal interface
processing unit
E1
Service
Service GE bus
unit
unit
Packet switching unit

bus
E1
Control bus System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit
+3.3 V power Power -48 V1

supplied to the board supply unit -48 V2
+3.3 V backup power
supplied to the board +3.3 V
other units of the board
Table 3-146 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1
1 Signal interface unit l Receives external E1 signals.

l Matches the resistance.
l Equalizes signals.
l Converts the level.
l Recovers clock signals.
l Buffers the received data.
l Performs HDB3 decoding.

2 Service processing l Frames E1 signals.

unit l Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3
services into Ethernet services.
3 Logic processing l Implements the conversion from the internal service

unit bus into the GE bus in the backplane.
l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.
Table 3-147 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1

1 Logic processing l Receives service signals from the packet switching

unit unit.
l Implements the conversion from the GE bus in the
backplane into the internal service bus.
2 Service processing l Decapsulates service signals.

unit l Re-forms CES packets or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1
signals to the signal interface unit.
3 Signal interface unit l Performs HDB3 coding.

l Performs clock re-timing.
l Performs pulse shaping.
l Drives the line.
l Sends E1 signals to a port.


Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
3.13.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-61 Front panel of the ML1

ML1
16
STAT
E1 1
SRV
Figure 3-62 Front panel of the MD1

MD1
16 32
STAT
SRV
1 17
Indicators
Table 3-148 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1

properly.

l There is no power




configured.
Ports
Table 3-149 Description of the ports on the ML1

Port Description Connector Corresponding Cable
Type
1 to 16 The first to sixteenth Anea 96 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to

E1 ports the External Equipment or
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel
Table 3-150 Description of the ports on the MD1

Type
1 to 16 The first to sixteenth Anea 96 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to

the E1 Panel
17 to 32 The seventeenth to Anea 96 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to

thirty-second E1 the External Equipment or
ports 5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel
The ports on the ML1/MD1 use the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-63 shows the front view of an
Anea 96 connector and Table 3-151 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-63 Front view of an Anea 96 connector

POS.1
POS.96

Table 3-151 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 The first received E1 25 The first transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

differential signal (-) signal (-)
3 The second received E1 27 The second transmitted E1 differential


5 The third received E1 29 The third transmitted E1 differential


7 The fourth received E1 31 The fourth transmitted E1 differential


9 The fifth received E1 33 The fifth transmitted E1 differential


11 The sixth received E1 35 The sixth transmitted E1 differential


13 The seventh received E1 37 The seventh transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)
15 The eighth received E1 39 The eighth transmitted E1 differential


17 The ninth received E1 41 The ninth transmitted E1 differential



19 The tenth received E1 43 The tenth transmitted E1 differential


21 The eleventh received E1 45 The eleventh transmitted E1


23 The twelfth received E1 47 The twelfth transmitted E1


49 The thirteenth received E1 73 The thirteenth transmitted E1


51 The fourteenth received E1 75 The fourteenth transmitted E1


53 The fifteenth received E1 77 The fifteenth transmitted E1


55 The sixteenth received E1 79 The sixteenth transmitted E1


3.13.5 Valid Slots

The ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS
are the same as the physical slots.

Figure 3-64 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (ML1/MD1) Slot 14 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15
Figure 3-65 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS

(FAN)

Item Description
10 > Slots 7 and 9


The board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature code
refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 3-153 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1

Board Feature Code Port Impedance (Ohm)
A 75
B 120

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ML1/MD1.
Related References
A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes
A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes

This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-154 E1 interface performance

Item Performance
Code pattern HDB3
Impedance (ohm) 75 120
Wire pair in each One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
ML1 MD1
Dimensions (H x W x 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

D)
Weight 0.45 kg 0.50 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the ML1: < 7.0 W
Power consumption of the MD1: < 12.2 W
3.14 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.

The SP3S has two functional versions: SL91SP3SVER.B and SL91SP3SVER.C. The SP3D also
has two functional versions: TNH1SP3DVER.B and TNH1SP3DVER.C. The difference
between VER.B and VER.C is that path indication on the front panel is optimized and the board
power consumption is reduced.

The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Table 3-156 lists the functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports.
SP3S SP3D
Basic functions Receives and transmits E1 signals.
Port 75-ohm/120- 16 32
specifications ohm E1 port
Clock Clock source Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the
first or fifth E1 signal.

SP3S SP3D
Clock Supports clock protection based on clock source

protection priorities.
E1 retiming Supported
function
OM Loopback Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.

warm reset
PRBS tests at E1 Supported

ports
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

consumption
information
query

This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.

Figure 3-66 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D

Backplane
Mapping/Demapping
E1 signal Service bus
Logic processing
E1
Interface unit
Codec unit
unit
unit
Cross-connect unit
E1
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
+3.3 V power supplied Power -48 V1

to the board supply unit
-48 V2
+3.3 V backup power

+3.3 V
supplied to the board
Clock signal provided to the Clock System clock signal

NOTE
The power supply units on the SP3SVER.C and SP3DVER.C boards do not support conversion from -48
V power into +3.3 V power.
Table 3-157 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D

1 Interface unit External E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and

then transmitted to the board.
2 Codec unit l Equalizes the received signals.

l Recovers clock signals.
l Detects T_ALOS alarms.
l Performs HDB3 decoding.

3 Mapping/ l Asynchronously maps signals into C-12s.

Demapping unit l Adds path overhead bytes to C-12s to form VC-12s.
l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form
one TUG-2.
l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form
one TUG-3.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form
one C-4.
l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to
form one VC-4.

unit l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
Table 3-158 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D

unit l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
2 Mapping/ l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

Demapping unit l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects
l Extracts E1 signals.
3 Codec unit Performs HDB3 coding.
4 Interface unit E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then

transmitted to an external cable.


Power Supply Unit

l Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into +3.3
V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. The power
supply units on the SP3SVER.C and SP3DVER.C boards do not support conversion from
-48 V power into +3.3 V power.
Clock Unit
3.14.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-67 Front panel of the SP3SVER.B

SP3S
SP3S
STAT
E1
SRV
1-16
Figure 3-68 Front panel of the SP3SVER.C

SP3S
16
E1
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-69 Front panel of the SP3DVER.B

SP3D
SP3D
21 42
STAT
SRV
1 22
Figure 3-70 Front panel of the SP3DVER.C

SP3D
16 32
STAT
SRV
1 17

Indicators
Table 3-159 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D

properly.

l There is no power



configured.
Ports
Table 3-160 Description of the ports on the SP3S(VER.B and VER.C)

Type
1-16 The first to sixteenth Anea 96 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to

the E1 Panel
Table 3-161 Description of the ports on the SP3DVER.B

Type

the E1 Panel


Type
22-42 The seventeenth to Anea 96 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to

the E1 Panel
NOTE
On the OptiX RTN 980, only ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D are used. Ports 1-16 correspond to E1
signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.
Table 3-162 Description of the ports on the SP3DVER.C

Type

the E1 Panel
17-32 The seventeenth to Anea 96 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to

the E1 Panel
The ports on the SP3S/SP3D use Anea 96 connectors. Figure 3-71 shows the front view of an
Anea 96 connector and Table 3-163 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-71 Front view of an Anea 96 connector

POS.1
POS.96

Table 3-163 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector


































3.14.5 Valid Slots

The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
are the same as the physical slots.

Figure 3-72 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 14 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15
Figure 3-73 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS

(FAN)

Item Description
10 > Slots 7 and 9


The board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature
code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 3-165 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D

Board Feature Code Port Impedance (Ohm)
A 120
B 75

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.
Related References
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports

This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-166 E1 interface performance

Item Performance
Code pattern HDB3
Impedance (ohm) 75 120
Wire pair in each One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
SP3SVER.B SP3SVER.C SP3DVER.B SP3SVER.C
Dimensio 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

ns (H x W
x D)
Weight 0.50 kg 0.40 kg 0.64 kg 0.54 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the SP3SVER.B: < 5.7 W
Power consumption of the SP3SVER.C: < 4.8 W
Power consumption of the SP3DVER.B: < 9.6 W
Power consumption of the SP3DVER.C: < 8.3 W
3.15 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 980. One NE can house
only one AUX.

The functional version of the AUX is SL91.

The AUX provides the system with one orderwire phone port, one synchronous data port, one
asynchronous data port, and one four-input/two-output external alarm port.
Table 3-168 lists the functions and features that the AUX supports.
Orderwire phone port 1
Synchronous data port 1

The transmission rate of the port is 64 kbit/s and its
specifications comply with ITU-T G.703.

Asynchronous data port 1

The transmission rate of the port is equal to or less than 19.2
kbit/s and the interfacing level complies with RS-232.
External alarm port Four inputs and two outputs
Hot swapping function Supported
Board power consumption Supported

information query
Power detection Supported

The AUX consists of the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit.
Figure 3-74 Functional block diagram of the AUX

Backplane
Power
supply unit +3.3 V
Power dip
4-input/2-output alarm port detection signal
One orderwire phone port

Orderwire System bus
64 kbit/s unit Logic control System control and
synchronous data port unit communication unit
19.2 kbit/s
asynchronous data port
Clock unit Clock Board status System control and

signal detection unit communication unit
Power Supply Unit

l Receives the +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies it to the other units on
the AUX.
l Receives and shuts down control signals.
Orderwire Unit
l Supports the input of four channels of alarms.
l Supports the output of two channels of alarms.
l Provides one orderwire port.

l Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port.

l Provides one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port.
NOTE
The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit orderwire byte. One port, however, can implement
only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data port and transparent transmission of orderwire byte.
Logic Control Unit

l Provides an interface with the CPU unit and works with the CPU unit to implement the
board control function.
l Processes orderwire bytes and overhead bytes.
l Processes clock signals.
l Provides board status information.
l Checks the status of the main and standby system control, switching, and timing boards.
l Checks the status of the main and standby clocks.
l Supports the switching of system clock reference sources automatically and by running
specific commands.
l Supports the detection and reporting of the key clock status of each board in the system.
Board Status Detection Unit

l Detects board performance data such as board voltage.
l Stores board manufacturing information.
Clock Unit
Provides clock signals to the logic control unit.
3.15.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, management ports, and auxiliary ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-75 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AUX.
Figure 3-75 Front panel of the AUX

AUX
STAT
SRV
F1/S1 PHONE ALMO ALMI

Indicators
Table 3-169 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX

board.

system.

system.
Auxiliary Ports and Management Ports
Table 3-170 Description of the auxiliary ports and management ports
F1/S1 Synchronous/Asynchronous data port RJ45
ALMI Alarm input port
ALMO Alarm output port
PHONE Orderwire phone port
The auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the
ports, however, are different. Figure 3-76 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
87654321

Table 3-171 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.
Table 3-171 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port
Port Pin Signal
F1/S1 1 Transmitting asynchronous data signals
2 Grounding end
3 Receiving asynchronous data signals
4 Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)
5 Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)
6 Grounding end
7 Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)
8 Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)
For the pin assignments for the ALMI and ALMO ports, see Table 3-172 and see Table
3-173.
Table 3-172 Pin assignments for the ALMI port
Port Pin Signal
ALMI 1 The first external alarm input signal
2 Grounding end for the first external alarm input signal
3 The second external alarm input signal
4 The third external alarm input signal
5 Grounding end for the third external alarm input signal
6 Grounding end for the second external alarm input

signal
7 The forth external alarm input signal
8 Grounding end for the forth external alarm input signal
Table 3-173 Pin assignments for the ALMO port
Port Pin Signal
ALMO 1 The first external alarm output signal (+)

Port Pin Signal
2 The first external alarm output signal (-)
3 The second external alarm output signal (+)
4 Connected in parallel with pin 1
6 The second external alarm output signal (-)
3.15.5 Valid Slots

The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-77 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (AUX) Slot 14 (AUX)
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 15

Figure 3-78 Logical slots of the AUX on the NMS

(FAN)
Item Description
10 > Slots 7 and 9

This section describes the board specifications, including auxiliary port performance, board
Orderwire Interface Performance
Table 3-175 Orderwire interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-
defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Orderwire type Addressing call
Wire pair in each One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 600

NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when OptiX RTN
equipment calls 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in the
orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance
Table 3-176 Synchronous data interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined
byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Interface type Codirectional
Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.
Asynchronous Data Interface
Table 3-177 Asynchronous data interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the
Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) ≤ 19.2
Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Weight 0.27 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 1.3 W

3.16 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 980 supports two PIUs, each of which
accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.

The functional version of the PIU is SLB1.

The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, power
detection, filtering, and information reporting.
Table 3-179 lists the functions and features that the PIU supports.

Basic functions Power access Two PIUs are provided and each accesses one -48 V
DC or -60 V DC power input.
Power output The PIU provides other boards with +3.3 V power or
-48 V power.
Protection Protection Supports 1+1 HSB protection.
Power l Protection against overcurrent

protection l Protection against short circuits
Surge Supported
protection
Power detection Supported
Board power consumption Supported

information query
Surge protection status monitoring Supported
EMI filtering Supported

The PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, power detection unit, DC/DC unit, EMI
filtering unit, and communication control unit.

Figure 3-79 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU.

Figure 3-79 Functional block diagram of the PIU

Backplane
-48 V/-60 V -48 V Board operating in distributed

Protection and EMI filtering power supply mode
detection unit unit -48 V
Power Fan
detection unit
Detection signal +5.0 V

+3.3 V +3.3 V
DC/DC unit Other boards
Communication
Detection signal control unit Detection signal System control and
communication unit
Protection and Detection Unit

The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the PIU. It performs the
following functions:
l Provides protection against lightning strike and surge.
l Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure
alarm.
l Monitors PIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and
communication unit through the communication control unit.
l Detects whether -48 V power is available.
l Performs soft-start and mis-connection prevention functions.
Power Detection Unit

The power detection unit detects the voltage, current, and power consumption, and reports the
information to the system control unit through the communication control unit.
EMI Filtering Unit

The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filtering and low-frequency
interference filtering.
DC/DC Unit
The DC/DC unit converts the input -48 V power into the voltages that each part of the system
requires. The DC/DC unit performs the following functions:
l Converts -48 V power into +3.3 V power and supplies +3.3 V power to the communication
control unit of the PIU.
l Converts -48 V power into +3.3 V power and supplies +3.3 V power to other boards.
l Converts -48 V power into +5.0 V power and supplies +5.0 V power to the power detection
unit of the PIU.
Communication Control Unit

The communication control unit achieves communication between the system control and
communication unit and the PIU and reports the following information to the system control
and communication unit:

l PIU manufacturing information

l PCB version information
l Power detection information
l Surge-protection failure information
l PIU temperature
3.16.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-80 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.
Figure 3-80 Front panel of the PIU

NEG(-) RTN(+)
PIU
ALM
PWR
-48V/-60V
Indicators
Table 3-180 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU
Indicator Status Description
PWR On (green) The power supply is normal.
Off There is no power supply.
ALM On (orange) The board is in the initialization state.
On (red) An alarm is reported on the PIU.
Off No alarm occurs.
Ports
The PIU accesses one power supply. Table 3-181 lists the types of the ports on the PIU and their
respective usage.
Table 3-181 Description of the ports on the PIU
Port Port Connector Type Corresponding Cable

Description
NEG -48 V power M6 screws, which can be 5.1 Power Cable

(-) input port installed with OT terminals

Port Port Connector Type Corresponding Cable

Description
RTN BGND power

(+) input port
Labels
Caution label for power operations: prompting you to read the operation guide before any power
operations.
CAUTION
Do not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is powered on. That is, turn off all the power
supplies of the PIU before removing or installing it.
3.16.5 Valid Slots

The PIU can be inserted in slots 26 and 27.
Figure 3-81 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10
Slot 28 Slot 20
Slot 7 Slot 8
Slot 15
Slot 5 Slot 6
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 1 Slot 2

Figure 3-82 Logical slots of the PIU on the NMS
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10
Slot 7 Slot 8
Slot 5 Slot 6
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 1 Slot 2

This section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanical
behavior, and board power consumption.
Table 3-182 lists the technical specifications for the PIU.
Table 3-182 Technical specifications for the PIU

Item Performance
Dimensions 27.2 mm x 193.4 mm x 196.5 mm
Weight 1.00 kg
Power consumption < 25.0 W
Input voltage -38.4 V to -72.0 V
3.17 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.

The functional version of the FAN is SLBE1.

The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
Table 3-183 lists the functions and features that the FAN supports.

Power input
Accesses the -48 V power from the PIU through the power
bus in the backplane.
Number of fans 9
Intelligent fan speed Supported

adjustment
Protection Provides soft-start for the power supply of the fans, protects
fans against overcurrent, and filters out high-frequency
signals.
OM l Reports the information about the fan rotating speed,

alarms, version number, and board in-position status.
l Provides alarm indicators.
l Supports board power consumption information query
NOTE
l When one fan fails, it is recommended that you replace it within 96 hours if the ambient temperature
reaches 40°C; it is recommended that you replace it within 24 hours if the ambient temperature exceeds
40°C.
l When more than one fan fails, it is recommended that you replace the failed fans immediately.

The FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit.
Figure 3-83 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN.
Figure 3-83 Functional block diagram of the FAN

Backplane
-48 V
-48 V
Fan unit Power unit
-48 V
Communication
detection signal
Communication
Communication detection signal System control and
monitoring unit communication unit

Power Unit
l Receives -48 V power from the backplane.
l Provides the fan power with the following functions: soft-start, filtering, supply
combining, and overcurrent protection.
Fan Unit
Nine air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system.
Communication Monitoring Unit

l Detects the manufacturing information, PCB version information, and environmental
temperature of the FAN, and reports the information to the system control and
communication unit.
l Detects the fan rotating speed and adjusts the speed according to the pulse-width
modulation signal from the system control and communication unit.
The system adjusts the fan rotating speed based on the working temperature, as listed in
Table 3-184.
Table 3-184 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed

Working Temperature Rotating Speed
≤ 25°C 3600 rounds/minute
25°C to 60°C Linear increase in accordance with the

temperature
≥ 60°C 12000 rounds/minute
3.17.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-84 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.

Figure 3-84 Front panel of the FAN
OptiX RTN 980

28 26 PIU 27 PIU
13 EXT 14 EXT
11 EXT 12 EXT
9 EXT 10 EXT
F 20
NCS
A
7 EXT 8 EXT
N 15
NCS
5 EXT 6 EXT
3 EXT 4 EXT
1 EXT 2 EXT
FAN
CAUTION
Hazardous
moving parts,keep
fingers and other
body parts away.
严禁在风扇旋转时
接触扇叶！
Indicators
Table 3-185 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN

FAN On (green) The fan is working properly.
On (red) The fan is faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

ESD Wrist Strap Jack

An ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to achieve the proper
grounding of the human body.
Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels:
l ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.
l Fan warning label: warns you not to touch fan leaves when a fan is rotating.
3.17.5 Valid Slots

The FAN can be inserted in slot 28 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS
is the same as the physical slot.
Figure 3-85 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis
Slot 26 Slot 27
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 8
Slot 15
Slot 5 Slot 6
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 1 Slot 2
Figure 3-86 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS
Slot 26 Slot 27
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10

(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 8
Slot 5 Slot 6
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 1 Slot 2


This section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and board
power consumption.
Table 3-186 lists the technical specifications for the FAN.
Table 3-186 Technical specifications for the FAN

Item Performance
Weight 1.66 kg
Power consumption < 15.9 W (room temperature)

< 103.5 W (high temperature)

IDU Hardware Description 4 Accessories
4 Accessories
About This Chapter
The accessories of the OptiX RTN 980 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit
(PDU). Select appropriate accessories based on the requirements.
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1
panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.
4.2 PDU
The Power Distribution Unit (PDU) is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet or an ETSI cabinet.
The PDU is used to distribute the input power to the equipment in the cabinet. The OptiX RTN
980 equipment uses the C3 DC PDU.

4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1
panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the E1 panel are 42 mm x 483 mm x 33 mm. An E1 panel
provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16
1-8
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 9-16
Ports
Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel

T1-T16 Transmit ports for the first to BNC

sixteenth E1 ports (connected
to external equipment)
R1-R16 Receive ports for the first to

sixteenth E1 ports (connected
to external equipment)
1-8 The first to eighth E1 ports DB37

(connected to an IDU)
9-16 The ninth to sixteenth E1

ports (connected to an IDU)
Grounding bolt Connecting a PGND cable -
NOTE
The port impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.
Figure 4-2 shows the front view of an E1 port that is connected to an IDU. Table 4-2 provides
the pin assignments for the E1 port.

Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)
Pos. 1
Pos. 37
Table 4-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel)
20 The first E1 received differential 21 The first E1 transmitted

signal (+) differential signal (+)
2 The first E1 received differential 3 The first E1 transmitted

signal (-) differential signal (-)
22 The second E1 received 23 The second E1 transmitted

4 The second E1 received 5 The second E1 transmitted

24 The third E1 received differential 25 The third E1 transmitted

6 The third E1 received differential 7 The third E1 transmitted

26 The fourth E1 received 27 The fourth E1 transmitted

8 The fourth E1 received 9 The fourth E1 transmitted

36 The fifth E1 received differential 35 The fifth E1 transmitted

17 The fifth E1 received differential 16 The fifth E1 transmitted

34 The sixth E1 received differential 33 The sixth E1 transmitted

15 The sixth E1 received differential 14 The sixth E1 transmitted

32 The seventh E1 received 31 The seventh E1 transmitted

13 The seventh E1 received 12 The seventh E1 transmitted


30 The eighth E1 received 29 The eighth E1 transmitted

11 The eighth E1 received 10 The eighth E1 transmitted

Others Reserved - -
4.2 PDU
The Power Distribution Unit (PDU) is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet or an ETSI cabinet.
The PDU is used to distribute the input power to the equipment in the cabinet. The OptiX RTN
980 equipment uses the C3 DC PDU.
NOTE
Because OptiX RTN 980 is nodal microwave equipment that consumes high power, it is recommended
that the power distribution cabinet directly supply power to the equipment. If the power distribution cabinet
fails to supply 40 A power distribution terminals, the C3 DC PDU is also applicable.
4.2.1 Appearance
The C3 PDU is a simple-designed PDU.
Figure 4-3 shows the C3 PDU.
Figure 4-3 Appearance of the C3 PDU
NOTE
Normally, there is a cover in the input power terminal area.

4.2.2 Front Panel

There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of the C3 PDU.
Front panel diagram
Figure 4-4 Front panel of the DC PDU

1 2 3
RTN1(+) NEG1(-)
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

PGND RTN2(+) NEG2(-)
1. Output power terminal area 2. Power switch area

3. Input power terminal area -
Port
Table 4-3 Description of ports on the DC PDU
Positio Port Port Description Port Specifications

n Identifi
er
Output -48 V Output power supply -48 V Four output power supplies (when
power used with the OptiX RTN 980),
termina GND Output power supply GND Cord end terminal (12-10AWG),
l area terminals maximum cable diameter 6 mm2
Input RTN1 The first input power (+) M8 OT terminal, maximum cable
power (+) diameter 16 mm2.
termina
l area RTN2 The second input power (+)
(+)
NEG1 The first input power (-)

(-)
NEG2 The second input power (-)

(-)
PGND PGND terminals
Power SW1 Output power switch 1 controls The fuse capacity is 40 A.

switch the first output power.

Positio Port Port Description Port Specifications

n Identifi
er
SW2 Output power switch 2 controls

the second output power.

the third output power.

the fourth output power.
When the C3 PDU is used together with the OptiX RTN 980, each output power occupies four
output terminals, each power switch controls one output power, and each output power can only
provide one input power to the OptiX RTN 980. The mapping relationship between power
switches on the front panel and output power terminals that the switches control is showed in
Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-5 Mapping relationship between power switches and output power terminals
- - G G - - G G - - G G - - G G S S S S
48 48 N N 48 48 N N 48 48 N N 48 48 N N W W W W
V V D D V V D D V V D D V V D D 1 2 3 4
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

Power switch area
4.2.3 Functions and Working Principles

The C3 PDU realizes the simple power distribution function and distributes the input power to
the equipment in a cabinet.
Functions
l The PDU supports two inputs of -48 V/-60 V DC power.
l Each input power supply supports two outputs.
l The fuse capacity of the switch of each output power is 40 A.
l Each power switch controls one output power (when the PDU is used with OptiX RTN
980).
l The PDU is protected against short circuit and overload.
l The PDU can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or in an ETSI cabinet.
l The PDU supports the DC-I power distribution mode.
Working principles
The PDU mainly consists of input terminals, output terminals, and air circuit breakers. The PDU
supports the simple power distribution function for the input power.

Figure 4-6 Functional block diagram of the DC PDU
OUTPUT
INPUT
SW1 -48V
-48V
NEG1(-) SW2
BGND
SW3 BGND
NEG2(-) -48V
SW4
-48V
RTN1(+) BGND
BGND BGND
RTN2(+) -48V
-48V
BGND
BGND
-48V
-48V
PGND BGND
BGND
BGND

IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables
5 Cables
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignments of various cables used on
the IDU 980.
5.1 Power Cable

A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU
on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.
5.2 PGND Cable
PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.
5.3 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit
IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the
IDU.
5.4 XPIC Cable
An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC
workgroup to implement the XPIC function.
5.5 Fiber Jumper
A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector
that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 980. The connector
at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to
be connected.
5.6 STM-1 Cable
An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA
connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the
STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.
5.7 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment
and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.
5.8 Orderwire Cable
An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the

PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the
orderwire phone.
5.9 Network Cable
A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.

5.1 Power Cable

A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU
on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-1 Power cable
Table 5-1 Power cable specifications

Model Cable Terminal
6 mm2 Power cable, 450 V/750 Naked crimping terminal, OT, 6 mm2, M6, tin
power cable V, H07Z-K UL3386, 6 plating, 12-10 AWG, yellow
and terminal mm2, blue/black, low
smoke zero Halogen
cable
10 mm2 Power cable, 450 V/750 Naked crimping terminal, OT, 16 mm2, M6, tin
power cable V, H07Z-K UL3386, 16 plating, naked ring terminal
and terminal mm2, blue/black, low
smoke zero Halogen
cable

NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 980, power cables with a 6 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance
of 10 m, and power cables with a 16 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance of 25 m.
5.2 PGND Cable

PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable

An IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of external
equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipment
share the same ground.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable

Main label
1 Cable tie H.S.tube
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignments
None.
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable

An E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
external equipment share the same ground.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable

Main label
Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignments
None.
5.3 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit
IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the
IDU.
An IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper has a type-N connector that is
connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper has a TNC connector that is connected
to the IF board.
NOTE
l A 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

l If an RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-inch
IF cable to the IF board.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-4 IF jumper

1
H.S.tube 2 PCS 2
L = 3 cm
2000 mm
1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female
Pin Assignments
None.
5.4 XPIC Cable

An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC
workgroup to implement the XPIC function.
An XPIC cable is an RG316 cable that has SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC
cable is connected to the X-IN port of one XPIC board in an XPIC workgroup, and the other
end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other XPIC board in the same
XPIC work group.
When the XPIC function is disabled for XPIC boards, an XPIC cable is used to connect the X-
IN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC board to loop back signals.
XPIC cables are available in the following types:
l XPIC cables with angle connectors: These XPIC cables are long and used to connect two
XPIC boards in the horizontal direction, for example, XPIC boards in slots 3 and 4.
l XPIC cables with straight connectors: These XPIC cables are short and used to connect
two XPIC boards in the vertical direction, for example, IFX2 boards in slots 3 and 5. These
XPIC cables are also used to connect the X-IN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC
board to loop back signals.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-5 XPIC cable

1
1
L1
2
2
L2
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male 2. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, straight, male
Pin Assignments
None.
5.5 Fiber Jumper

A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector
that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 980. The connector
at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to
be connected.
Types of Fiber Jumpers
Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers
Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable
LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber

Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable
LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 980, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to 1000BASE-SX GE optical ports.
Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector,
SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector.
Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector

Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector
Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector
5.6 STM-1 Cable

An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA
connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the
STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-9 STM-1 cable
1. Coaxial connector, SAA straight/male 2. Main label 3. Coaxial cable
Pin Assignments
None.
Cable Specifications
Item Description
Connector Coaxial connector, SAA connector (1.0/2.3), 75-ohm straight/male
Cable model Coaxial cable, 75-ohm, 3.9 mm, 2.1 mm, 0.34 mm, shielded
Number of cores One
Core diameter Diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm), diameter of the internal
insulation layer (2.1 mm), diameter of the internal conductor (0.34
mm)
Length 10 m
Fireproof class CM
5.7 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment
and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.
5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment

An E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directly
receive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment.
Each E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1
signals. There are two types of E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment: 75-ohm
coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the external equipment
Main label
1
W
X1 A
ViewA Pos.96
Cable connector, Anea,
96-pin,female
Pos.1
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
NOTE
l A 120-ohm E1 cable and a 75-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance.

l The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening of
2.5 mm (0.098-inch) to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1 coaxial
connector.
Pin Assignments
Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable
Pin W Remark Pin W Remark

s s
Core Serial Core Serial
No. No.
1 Tip 1 R0 25 Tip 2 T0
2 Ring 26 Ring
3 Tip 3 R1 27 Tip 4 T1
4 Ring 28 Ring
5 Tip 5 R2 29 Tip 6 T2
6 Ring 30 Ring
7 Tip 7 R3 31 Tip 8 T3

Pin W Remark Pin W Remark

s s
Core Serial Core Serial
No. No.
8 Ring 32 Ring
9 Tip 9 R4 33 Tip 10 T4
10 Ring 34 Ring
11 Tip 11 R5 35 Tip 12 T5
12 Ring 36 Ring
13 Tip 13 R6 37 Tip 14 T6
14 Ring 38 Ring
15 Tip 15 R7 39 Tip 16 T7
16 Ring 40 Ring
18 Ring 17 R8 42 Ring 18 T8
17 Tip 41 Tip
20 Ring 19 R9 44 Ring 20 T9
19 Tip 43 Tip
22 Ring 21 R10 46 Ring 22 T10
21 Tip 45 Tip
24 Ring 23 R11 48 Ring 24 T11
23 Tip 47 Tip
50 Ring 25 R12 74 Ring 26 T12
49 Tip 73 Tip
52 Ring 27 R13 76 Ring 28 T13
51 Tip 75 Tip
54 Ring 29 R14 78 Ring 30 T14
53 Tip 75 Tip
56 Ring 31 R15 80 Ring 32 T15
55 Tip 79 Tip
Shell Braid Shell Braid

Table 5-4 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable

Pin W Rema Tape Pin W Rema Tape
rks Color rks Color
Color Relati Color Relati
of the onshi of the onshi
Core p Core p
1 White Twiste R0 Blue 25 White Twiste T0 Blue

d pair d pair
2 Blue 26 Orang
e
3 White Twiste R1 27 White Twiste T1

d pair d pair
4 Green 28 Brown
5 White Twiste R2 29 Red Twiste T2

d pair d pair
6 Grey 30 Blue
7 Red Twiste R3 31 Red Twiste T3

d pair d pair
8 Orang 32 Green
e

d pair d pair
10 Brown 34 Grey
11 Black Twiste R5 35 Black Twiste T5

d pair d pair
12 Blue 36 Orang
e

d pair d pair
14 Green 38 Brown
15 Black Twiste R7 39 Yello Twiste T7

d pair w d pair
16 Grey 40 Blue
17 White Twiste R8 Orang 41 White Twiste T8 Orang

d pair e d pair e
18 Blue 42 Orang
e
19 White Twiste R9 43 White Twiste T9

d pair d pair
20 Green 44 Brown
21 White Twiste R10 45 Red Twiste T10

d pair d pair
22 Grey 46 Blue

d pair d pair

Pin W Rema Tape Pin W Rema Tape

rks Color rks Color
Color Relati Color Relati
of the onshi of the onshi
Core p Core p
24 Orang 48 Green
e

d pair d pair
50 Brown 74 Grey

d pair d pair
52 Blue 76 Orang
e

d pair d pair
54 Green 78 Brown
55 Black Twiste R15 79 Yello Twiste T15

d pair w d pair
56 Grey 80 Blue
5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel

An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF.
One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel.
Each E1 cable can transmit 16 E1 signals. The port impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-11 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel
X1: Cable connector, Anea 96, female X2/X3: Cable connector, type D, 37 male
Label 1: "CHAN 0-7" Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"
Pin Assignments
Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37
connector
Wire Connecto Connecto Remarks Connecto Connecto Remarks

r X1 r X2/X3 r X1 r X2/X3
W1 X1.2 X2.20 R0 X1.10 X2.36 R4
X1.1 X2.2 X1.9 X2.17
X1.26 X2.21 T0 X1.34 X2.35 T4
X1.25 X2.3 X1.33 X2.16
X1.4 X2.22 R1 X1.12 X2.34 R5
X1.3 X2.4 X1.11 X2.15
X1.28 X2.23 T1 X1.36 X2.33 T5
X1.27 X2.5 X1.35 X2.14
X1.6 X2.24 R2 X1.14 X2.32 R6

Wire Connecto Connecto Remarks Connecto Connecto Remarks

r X1 r X2/X3 r X1 r X2/X3
X1.5 X2.6 X1.13 X2.13
X1.30 X2.25 T2 X1.38 X2.31 T6
X1.29 X2.7 X1.37 X2.12
X1.8 X2.26 R3 X1.16 X2.30 R7
X1.7 X2.8 X1.15 X2.11
X1.32 X2.27 T3 X1.40 X2.29 T7
X1.31 X2.9 X1.39 X2.10
W2 X1.18 X3.20 R8 X1.50 X3.36 R12
X1.17 X3.2 X1.49 X3.17
X1.42 X3.21 T8 X1.74 X3.35 T12
X1.41 X3.3 X1.73 X3.16
X1.20 X3.22 R9 X1.52 X3.34 R13
X1.19 X3.4 X1.51 X3.15
X1.44 X3.23 T9 X1.76 X3.33 T13
X1.43 X3.5 X1.75 X3.14
X1.22 X3.24 R10 X1.54 X3.32 R14
X1.21 X3.6 X1.53 X3.13
X1.46 X3.25 T10 X1.78 X3.31 T14
X1.45 X3.7 X1.77 X3.12
X1.24 X3.26 R11 X1.56 X3.30 R15
X1.23 X3.8 X1.55 X3.11
X1.48 X3.27 T11 X1.80 X3.29 T15
X1.47 X3.9 X1.79 X3.10
5.8 Orderwire Cable

An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the
orderwire phone.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable

1 Main label
6 6
1 1
X1 X2
1. Orderwire port, RJ11 connector
Pin Assignments
Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Function
X1.3 X2.3 Tip
X1.4 X2.4 Ring
5.9 Network Cable

A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.
Two types of interfaces use RJ45 connectors, which are medium dependent interfaces (MDIs)
and MDI-Xs. MDIs are used by terminal equipment, for example, network card. The pin
assignments for MDIs are provided in Table 5-7. MDI-Xs are used by network equipment. The
pin assignments for MDI-Xs are provided in Table 5-8.
Table 5-7 Pin assignments for MDIs

(+)

(-)

(+)


(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

(-)
Table 5-8 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs


(+)

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

(-)
Straight-through cables are used between MDIs and MDI-Xs, and crossover cables are used
between MDIs or between MDI-Xs. The only difference between straight-through cables and
crossover cables is with regard to the pin assignment.
The NMS/COM port, NE cascading port, and Ethernet electrical service ports of the OptiX RTN
980 support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Straight-through cables and

crossover cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM port, EXT port, and Ethernet electrical
service ports to MDIs or MDI-Xs.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-13 Network cable

1
Label 1 Main label Label 2
8 8
1 1
1. Network port connector, RJ45
Pin Assignments
Table 5-9 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation
X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
Table 5-10 Pin assignments for the crossover cable
X1.6 X2.2 Orange Twisted pair
X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange
X1.1 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown

IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
A Parameters Description
This chapter describes the parameters used in this document.
A.1 Parameters for Network Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management.
A.2 Radio Link Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the
packet plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port
parameters, and QoS parameters.
A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoS/EoPDH Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the EoS/
EoPDH plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet
port parameters, and QoS parameters.
A.8 RMON Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services
This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services.
A.10 Clock Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.
A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.

A.1 Parameters for Network Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management.
A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).
A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching

This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
Navigation Path
Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.

Parameters for the Search Field

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Address Type IP Address of GNE IP Address Range of GNE l If the OSI protocol is
NSAP Address used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
IP Address Range of GNE based on NSAP
Address only.
l If the IP protocol is
used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on IP Address
of GNE or IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To search for all the
NEs that communicate
with the gateway NE,
select IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To select the gateway
NE only, select IP
Address of GNE.
NOTE
If Address Type is set to IP
Address of GNE or IP
Address Range of GNE,
and if the U2000 (server)
and the gateway NE are
located in different network
segments, ensure that the
U2000 and relevant routers
are configured with the IP
routes for the network
segment in which the
U2000 and gateway NE are
located.
If Address Type is set to
NSAP Address, ensure that
the OSI protocol stack is
installed.

Search Address - - l If Address Type is set

to IP Address of
GNE, enter the IP
address of the gateway
NE, such as 129.9.x.x.
l If Address Type is set
to IP Address Range
of GNE, enter the
number of the IP
network segment in
which the gateway NE
is located, such as
129.9.255.255.
l If Address Type is set
to NSAP Address,
enter the NSAP
address of the gateway
NE.
User Name - - This parameter specifies

the user name of the
gateway NE.
Password - - This parameter specifies

the password of the
gateway NE.

Parameter for Searching for NEs

Create NE after search Selected Deselected l To create NEs in

Deselected batches, it is
recommended that you
select Create NE
after search. The NEs
are automatically
created after they are
found.
l After Create NE after
search is selected,
enter NE User and
Password that are
used for creating an
NE.
NOTE
If only Create NE after
search is selected, Search
for NE is selected
automatically.
NE User - - l This parameter

specifies the user name
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Password - - l This parameter

specifies the password
NE is created.
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.

Upload after create Selected Deselected l This parameter

Deselected specifies whether to
automatically upload
the NE data after the
NE is found and
created.
l If only Upload after
create is selected,
Search for NE and
Create NE after
search are selected
automatically.
Parameter for the Found NEs

NE ID - - This parameter indicates

the ID of the found NE,
which consists of
extended ID and NE ID.
GNE Address - - This parameter indicates

the address of the gateway
NE that is connected to the
found NE.
GNE ID - - This parameter indicates

the ID of the gateway NE
that is connected to the
found NE.
Created As GNE Yes Yes l This parameter

No specifies the password
NE is created.
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Connection Mode Common Common The communication

Security SSL between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Port - 1400 This parameter specifies

the communication port.

NE Status Created - This parameter indicates

Uncreated whether the found NE is
created.
A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.
Navigation Path
1. Choose File > Creat > NE from the Main Menu.
2. Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 980 from the Object Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface

Type - - This parameter indicates

the type of the NE to be
created.
ID 1 to 49135 - l The ID refers to the

basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
l The NE ID consisting
of the basic ID and
extended ID identifies
an NE on the NMS.
Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existing

NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
Extended ID.

Name - - l This parameter

specifies the name of
the NE.
l After you have
specified the name of
the NE, the name is
displayed under the
icon of the NE.
Remarks - - This parameter specifies

the remarks of the NE.
Gateway Type Non-Gateway Non-Gateway l This parameter is set to

Gateway Gateway if the new
NE is a gateway NE.
l This parameter is set to
Non-Gateway if the
new NE is a non-
gateway NE.
according to the DCN
planning if the new NE
can function as a
gateway NE or a non-
gateway NE.
Gateway - - This parameter indicates

the gateway NE of the new
NE when Gateway Type
is set to Non-Gateway.
Protocol IP IP l This parameter needs

OSI to be set when
Gateway Type is set
to Gateway.
l When the OSI over
DCC solution is used,
this parameter is set to
OSI.
l In other cases, this
parameter is set to IP.
IP Address - - This parameter indicates

the IP address of the new
NE. This parameter needs
to be set when Affiliated
Gateway Protocol is set
to IP.

Connection Mode Common Common The communication

Security SSL between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Port - 1400 This parameter specifies

the communication port.
NE User - - This parameter specifies

the user name to be
entered when an NE is
created.
Password - - This parameter specifies

the password to be entered
when an NE is created.
NSAP Address - - This parameter indicates

the NSAP address of the
new NE. This parameter
needs to be set when
Affiliated Gateway
Protocol is set to OSI.
You need to set the area ID
only, and the other parts
are automatically
generated by the NE.
A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs

This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
Navigation Path
1. In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be changed.
2. Choose Object Attributes.
3. Click Modify NE ID.

Parameters for Changing NE IDs

New ID - - l The new ID refers to

the basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
according to the
network plan.
NOTE
The NE ID consisting of the
basic ID and extended ID
identifies an NE on the
NMS.
New Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existing

NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
the extended ID.
A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization

This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.
Navigation Path
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from
the Main Menu.
2. Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.
Parameters for NE Time Synchronization

NE Name - - This parameter indicates

the name of the NE.
NE ID - - This parameter indicates

the ID of the NE.

Synchronous Mode Standard NTP Null l If this parameter is set

NM to NM, the NE
synchronizes the time
Null of the NMS server.
l If this parameter is set
to Standard NTP, the
NE synchronizes the
Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server
through the standard
NTP.
Standard NTP Enabled Disabled This parameter is valid

Authentication Disabled only when Synchronous
Mode is set to Standard
NTP.
Parameters for the Standard NTP Server

Standard NTP Server NE ID NE ID l If the NE functions as

Identifier IP the gateway NE, this
l If the NE functions as
a non-gateway NE and
communicates with
the gateway NE
through the HWECC
protocol, this
parameter is set to NE
ID.
a non-gateway NE and
communicates with
the gateway NE
through the IP
protocol, this

Standard NTP Server - - l If the NE functions as

the gateway NE, this
parameter is set to the
IP address of the
external NTP server.
a non-gateway NE,
the ID or IP address of
the gateway NE.
Standard NTP Server 0 to 1024 0 l If the NTP server does

Key not need to
authenticated, this
parameter is set to the
value "0".
l If the NTP server
needs to be
authenticated, the
authentication is
performed according
to the allocated key of
the NTP server. In this
case, the NE
authenticates the NTP
server based on the key
and the corresponding
password (specified in
the management of the
standard NTP key).
Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization

Synchronization - - l This parameter

Starting Time specifies the start time
of the synchronization
period. After this
parameter is specified,
the NMS and the NE
synchronize the time
once at the intervals of
Synchronization
Period(days).
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.

DST Selected Deselected l This parameter

Deselected indicates whether
Synchronization
Starting Time is the
daylight saving time.
according to the actual
situation.
Synchronization Period 1 to 300 1 l This parameter

(days) indicates the period of
synchronizing the time
of the NE with the time
of the NMS.
you use the default
value.
A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE
time.
Navigation Path
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Localization
Management from the Main Menu.
2. Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click
Parameters for Localization Management of the NE Time

NE - - This parameter indicates the name of the

NE.
TimeZone - - This parameter indicates the time zone.
DST - - This parameter indicates whether DST is

enabled.

Parameters for Time Zone

Time Zone - - l After the time zone is changed, the

current time of the NE is changed
accordingly.
l This parameter is set according to the
place where the NE is located.
DST Selected Deselected l The parameters related to daylight

Deselected saving time can be valid only when this
parameter is selected.
situation whether daylight saving time is
used in the place where the NE is located.
Offset 1 to 120 - This parameter specifies the offset value of

Unit: minute(s) the daylight saving time.
Start Rule WEEK WEEK This parameter specifies the method of

DATE adjusting the daylight saving time.
Start Time - - This parameter specifies the start daylight

saving time.
End Rule WEEK WEEK This parameter specifies the method of

DATE adjusting the daylight saving time.
End Time - - This parameter specifies the end daylight

saving time.
A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.
Navigation Path
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from
the Main Menu.
2. Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.


Key 1 to 1024 - l This parameter

indicates the key for
NTP authentication.
according to the
requirements of the
Password - - l This parameter

indicates the password
that corresponds to
Key.
according to the
requirements of the
Trusted Yes Yes l When this parameter is

No set to No, the key
verification is not
trusted. After
receiving the key, the
NE rejects the clock
synchronization
service.
l When this parameter is
set to Yes, the key
verification is trusted.
After receiving the
key, the NE provides
the clock
synchronization
service.
l After receiving an
unknown or incorrect
key, the NE rejects the
clock synchronization
service. Hence, it is
set a trusted key only.
A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the license.

Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > License
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the License Management tab.
Parameters for Managing Licenses

Board - - This parameter displays the boards that need

to be supported by licenses.
License File Type - - This parameter displays the license type

corresponding to each board.
Capacity - - This parameter displays the capacity of each

board.
Loaded - - This parameter displays whether the

corresponding license file is loaded to each
board.
A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions
of an NE.
Navigation Path
1. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic
Disabling of NE Function.
2. Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and
then click .
Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEs

NE Name - - This parameter indicates the name of the

NE.
NE Type OptiX RTN 980 - This parameter indicates the type of the NE.
Operation Type - - This parameter indicates the type of the

operation, such as loopback, and shutdown
of the laser.
Auto Disabling Disabled Enabled This parameter specifies whether to

Enabled automatically disable the operations such as
loopback, and shutdown of the laser.

Auto Disabling 1 to 2880 5 This parameter specifies the time of

Time(min) automatically disabling the operations such
as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Parameters for NE Communication Setting

IP Address - Before delivery, the In the HWECC solution, an IP address is set

IP address of the NE according to the following rules:
is set to 129.9.0.x. l The IP address, subnet mask, and default
The letter x indicates gateway of the gateway NE should meet
the basic ID. the planning requirements of the
external DCN.
Gateway IP - 0.0.0.0
Address l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP
address must be in the same network
Subnet Mask - 255.255.0.0 segment.
l The IP address of other NEs should be
set according to the NE ID. In this case,
the IP address of an NE should be set in
the format of 0x81000000+ID. That is,
if the ID is 0x090001, the IP address
should be set to 129.9.0.1.
Extended ID 1 to 254 9 l Do not change the extended ID when the

number of actual NEs does not exceed
the range permitted by the basic NE ID.
l It is recommended that this parameter
takes the default value.

NSAP Address - - This parameter is valid only when the OSI

over DCC solution is applied. This
parameter is used to set only the area ID of
an NSAP address. The other parts of the
NSAP address are automatically generated
by the NE.
Connection Mode Common + Security Common + Security l Specifies the connection mode that the
SSL SSL gateway NE allows the NMS to use for
Common connecting to the gateway NE.
Security SSL l If the gateway NE has no special
security requirement for connection to
the NMS, Connection Mode can be set
to Common.
l If the gateway NE requests secure
connection to the NMS for preventing
information interception and cracking,
Connection Mode needs to be set to
Security SSL.
l If NE communication security level
needs to be the same as NMS
communication security level,
Connection Mode needs to be set to
Common + Security SSL.
l The default parameter value is
recommended unless the gateway NE
requires that the NMS use the SSL
connection mode.
l The parameter value takes effect only
when it is set for a gateway NE and the
gateway NE is connected to the NMS by
means of the IP protocol.
A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
2. Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.

Parameters for DCC Rate Configuration

Port - - This parameter indicates the port that is

connected to the DCC channel.
Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled It is recommended that you use the default

Disabled value, except for the following cases:
l If the port is connected to the other ECC
subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
l If the port is connected to a third-party
network and does not exchange the
network management information with
other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
Channel D1-D3 D1-D1 (for the PDH It is recommended that you use the default
D4-D12 radio whose value, except for the following cases:
transmission l If the IP DCN or OSI over DCC solution
D1-D12 capacity is less than is adopted, Channel for the SDH line
D1-D1 16xE1) ports is set to a value that is the same as
D1-D3 (for other the value for third-party network.
cases) l If the DCC transparent transmission
solution is adopted, the value of
Channel for the SDH line ports should
not conflict with the value that is set for
the third-party network.
DCC Resources - - This parameter indicates the DCC

resources.
Communication - - This parameter indicates the

Status communication status.
Protocol Type HWECC HWECC It is recommended that you use the default
TCP/IP value, except for the following cases:
OSI l If the IP DCN solution is adopted,
Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.
L2DCN
l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted,
Protocol Type is set to OSI.
l When the L2 DCN solution is used, set
Protocol Type to L2DCN.
IP Address - - l IP Address is available only if Protocol

Type is set to TCP/IP.
l When the IP DCN solution is used and
the NE functions as an ABR, this
parameter specifies the interface IP
address of the non-backbone area port on
the ABR.

Subnet Mask - - l Subnet Mask is available only if

Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.
parameter specifies the subnet mask of
the non-backbone area port on the ABR.
A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission

Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
2. Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab.
3. Click Create.
Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission Management

Source Timeslot/ - - This parameter specifies the source timeslot

Porta or port.

Transparent D1 - l Only one overhead byte can be selected

Transmission of D2 each time.
Overhead Bytes at l X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate the
Source Port D3
customized overhead bytes that are used
D4 for transmitting asynchronous data
D5 services.
D6 l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that
D7 is used. For example, an overhead byte
cannot be a byte in the used DCC
D8
channel.
D9 NOTE
D10 Only the ISU2/ISX2/SL1DA board supports
transparent transmission of the K1/K2 byte.
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
Sink Timeslot/ - - This parameter specifies the sink timeslot or

Porta port.

Transparent D1 - l Only one overhead byte can be selected

Transmission of D2 each time.
Overhead Bytes at l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that
Sink Port D3
is used. For example, an overhead byte
D4 cannot be a byte in the used DCC
D5 channel.
D6 l Generally, Transparent Transmission
D7 of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can be
set to a value that is the same as or
D8
different from the value in the case of
D9 Transparent Transmission of
D10 Overhead Bytes at Source Port.
D11 NOTE
Only the ISU2/ISX2/SL1DA board supports
D12 transparent transmission of the K1/K2 byte.
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
NOTE
a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions
the same regardless of the source port or sink port.
A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the
Function Tree.
Parameters for the ECC Extended Mode

ECC Extended Auto mode Auto mode It is recommended that you use the default
Mode Specified mode value.

Parameters for Setting the Server

IP - - This parameter indicates the IP address of

the server.
Port 1601 to 1699 0 l This parameter is valid only when ECC

Extended Mode is set to Specified
mode.
l This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the server of the
extended ECC. In normal cases, the NE
that is close to the NMS functions as the
server.
l This parameter can be set to any value
from 1601 to 1699.
Parameters for Setting the Client

Opposite IP - 0.0.0.0 l This parameter is valid only when ECC

Extended Mode is set to Specified
Port 1601 to 1699 0 mode.
l This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the client of the
extended ECC. Except for the NE that
functions as the server, all other NEs that
use the extended ECC can function as the
client.
l Opposite IP and Port are respectively
set to the IP address of the server NE and
the specified port number.
A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC
Link Management from the Function Tree.

Parameter for NE ECC Link Management

Destination NE - - This parameter specifies the sink NE of the

ECC connection.
Transfer NE - - This parameter specifies the next transfer

NE and the direction of the ECC route.
Distance - - l This parameter specifies the number of

NEs (excluding the source NE and sink
NE) through which the ECC route
passes, namely, the number of ECC
packet forwarding attempts. The value
can be set to a value that is greater than
the number of actual ECC packet
forwarding attempts. If the value is set to
a value that is less than the number of
actual ECC packet forwarding attempts,
however, the destination NE fails to be
accessed.
l If the value is set to 0, it indicates that the
source NE is adjacent to the destination
NE.
Level - - l This parameter indicates that multiple

ECC routes from the source NE to the
destination NE may be available. An
ECC route of a higher priority is selected
to transmit the packets to the destination
NE.
l If the ECC route is generated
automatically, the priority is 4.
l If the ECC route is added manually, the
priority is 5.
Mode - - This parameter indicates the ECC routing

mode.
SCC No. - - This parameter specifies the physical port

through which the ECC route passes. The
value of this parameter is automatically
assigned the NE.
A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: ECC Link Management_Availability Test

This topic describes the parameters that are used to test ECC availability.

Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > NE ECC Link Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click Reachability Test and choose Ping Test or Trace Route from the drop-down menu.
Ping Test Parameters

Target NE - - Specifies the NE for which a ping test will

be performed.
Packet Length 0-800 64 l Specifies the test packet length.

(Byte) l It is recommended that this parameter
take its default value.
Packet Quantity 1-65535 3 l Specifies the number of test packets.

Sending Interval 0-65535 0 l Specifies the test packet transmission

(ms) interval.
To Be Translated 1-65535 1000 l Specifies the maximum time for test

(ms) packet to wait until being responded to.
Traceroute Parameters
Target NE - - Specifies the NE for which a traceroute test

will be performed.

Forwarding NEs 0-255 64 Specifies the number of NEs that test

packets will traverse during the forwarding
process.

A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route

Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IP Route Management tab.
Parameters for IP Route Management

Destination - - This parameter indicates the destination

Address address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Subnet Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask of

the destination address of the packets.
Gateway - - This parameter indicates the IP address of

the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.
Protocol - - l DIRECT: indicates the route between

the local NE and an adjacent NE.
l STATIC: indicates the route that is
created manually.
l OSPF: indicates the route between the
local NE and a non-adjacent NE.
l RIP: indicates the route that is
discovered by the routing information
protocol.
l OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whose
Destination Address is beyond the
OSPF domain.
l OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whose
Destination Address is in a not so
stubby area (NSSA).
l A route can be deleted in the case of
STATIC only, but cannot be edited in
the other cases.
l Compared with a dynamic route, a static
route has a higher priority. If any conflict
occurs, the static route is preferred.

Interface - - This parameter indicates the interface that is

used on the route. Interface is a concept
specified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. In
the TCP/IP protocol stack, you can create
multiple types of interface, such as a
loopback interface (namely, the interface
whose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernet
interface, and PPP interface. Each interface
must have a unique interface name.
Metric - - This parameter indicates the maximum

number of routers through which the
packets are transmitted. Metric is used to
indicate the overhead bytes that are
transmitted to the destination address. The
smaller the value, the less the overhead
bytes. If multiple routes can reach the same
destination address, a route whose overhead
is less is preferred to transmit the packets.
A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route

Management Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.
Navigation Path
2. Click the IP Route Management tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for Creating IP Routes

Destination - - This parameter specifies the destination

Address address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Subnet Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask of

the destination address of the packets.

Gateway - - This parameter specifies the IP address of

the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.
A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_Availability Test

This topic describes the parameters that are used to test IP DCN availability.
Navigation Path
Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click Reachability Test and choose Ping Test or Trace Route from the drop-down menu.
Ping Test Parameters

Target NE IP - - Specifies the NE for which a ping test will

be performed.
Packet Length 0-800 64 l Specifies the test packet length.

(Byte) l It is recommended that this parameter
Packet Quantity 1-65535 3 l Specifies the number of test packets.

Sending Interval 0-65535 0 l Specifies the test packet transmission

(ms) interval.

Traceroute Parameters
Target NE IP - - Specifies the NE for which a traceroute test

will be performed.

Max Hops 1-30 10 Specifies the number of hops which test

packets traverse during the packet
transmission process.
A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter

Settings
This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.
Navigation Path
2. Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
OSPF Parameters
Area - 0.0.0.0 l If only an OSPF area is configured on an

NE, set this parameter according to the
l If multiple OSPF areas are configured on
an NE, this parameter takes its default
value 0.0.0.0.
DCC Hello Timer 1 to 255 10 l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hello
(s) packet timer for the DCC channel or
inband DCN.
l The Hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that
is connected to the router. By
periodically transmitting the hello
packets, you can determine whether the
interface on the neighbor router is still in
the active status.
l DCC Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer to
transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is
recommended that this parameter take its
default value.

DCC Neighbor 1 to 65535 40 l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies

Dead Time(s) the dead time of a neighbor router for the
DCC channel or inband DCN.
l If the local router fails to receive the
hello packets from the connected
neighbor router within the time specified
in DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s), it
considers that the neighbor router is
unavailable.
l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) should
be set to a value that is a minimum of
twice the value of DCC Hello Timer
(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
default value.
DCC 1 to 65535 5 l DCC Retransmission Timer(s)

Retransmission specifies the interval for transmitting a
Timer(s) request through the DCC channel or
inband DCN to retransmit the link state
advertisement (LSA) packets.
default value.
DCC Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay time

to transmit the LSA packets through the
DCC channel or inband DCN.
l The LSA packets in the LSA database of
the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network.
Hence, before the LSA packets are
transmitted, you need to increase the age
of the LSA packets based on the value of
DCC Delay(s).
default value.

LAN Hello Timer 1 to 255 10 l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hello
(s) packet timer at the Ethernet network
management port or NE cascading port.
l The hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that
is connected to the router. By
periodically transmitting the hello
packets, you can determine whether the
interface on the neighbor router is still in
the active status.
l LAN Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer of the
NE to transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
default value.
LAN Neighbor 1 to 65535 40 l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies

Dead Time(s) the dead time of a neighbor router at the
LAN interface.
l If the local router fails to receive the
hello packets from the connected
neighbor router within the time specified
in LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s), it
considers that the neighbor router is
unavailable.
l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be
set to a value that is a minimum of two
times the value of LAN Neighbor Dead
Time(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
default value.

LAN 1 to 65535 5 l LAN Retransmission Timer(s)

Retransmission specifies the time for transmitting a
Timer(s) request for retransmission of the LSA
packets through the Ethernet network
default value.
LAN Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay time

to transmit the LSA packets through the
Ethernet network management port or
NE cascading port.
l The LSA packets in the LSA database of
the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network.
Hence, before the LSA packets are
transmitted, you need to increase the age
of the LSA packets based on the value of
LAN Delay(s).
default value.
OSPF Status Enabled Enabled Specifies whether the OSPF protocol is

Disabled enabled. If an NE uses only static routes
with OSPF disabled, set this parameter to
Disabled.
STUB Area Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the STUB

Disabled Area.
l Set this parameter as required.
l A backbone area cannot be a STUB area.
NSSA Area Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the NSSA

Disabled Area.
l A backbone area cannot be an NSSA
area.
Direct route Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether the direct route

Disabled automatic flooding function is enabled.
l Direct route: the route detected by the
link layer protocol.

Static route Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether the static route

l Static route: the route manually
configured by the network
administrator.
RIP route Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether the RIP route

l RIP route: the route detected by the RIP
protocol.
Default route Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether the default route

Disabled automatic flooding function is enabled
for ASBRs.
l Default OSPF routes are routes whose
destination addresses and subnet masks
are 0s.
l Set this parameter according to the
Router ID - - The Router IP address is always the NE IP

address.
Opaque LSA of Enabled Enabled l Specifies whether the Ethernet network

External Network Disabled management port or NE cascading port
Port transmits Type-10 LSAs.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled, the
Ethernet network management port or
NE cascading port transmits network
management information.
LAN Interface Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether the OSPF protocol is

Disabled enabled for the Ethernet network
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
OSPF protocol is communicated with
other equipment through the Ethernet
network management port or NE
cascading port.

OSPF authentication parameters

Interface Type - - l Displays the DCN port types that allow

the OSPF authentication key to be
specified.
l LAN indicates the Ethernet network
l DCC indicates the DCC channels or
inband DCN port.
Authentication none none l Specifies the OSPF authentication mode

Type MD5 for which a key needs to be set.
simple l If Authentication Type is MD5, a key
needs to be set for the MD5
authentication mode.
l If Authentication Type is simple, a key
needs to be set for the simple
authentication mode.
l If Authentication Type is none, all
preset keys for the related port type are
cleared.
Authentication - - Specifies the OSPF authentication password

Password for each port type.
MD5 Key 1-255 - MD5 Key is available only when

Authentication Type is MD5.
A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Proxy ARP tab.

Parameters for configuring the proxy ARP

Proxy ARP Disabled Disabled l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the
Enabled same network segment but different
domains to communicate with each
other.
l To realize communication between such
NEs, the source NE sends the ARP
broadcast packet to address the route to
the destination NE. The NE with the
proxy ARP function enabled checks the
routing table after sensing the ARP
broadcast packet. If the routing table
contains the destination address that the
ARP broadcast packet looks for, the NE
returns an ARP spoofing packet, which
enables the NE that sends the ARP
broadcast packet to consider that the
MAC address of the NE that returns the
ARP spoofing packet is the MAC
address of the destination NE. In this
manner, the packet that is to be sent to
the destination NE is first sent to the NE
with the proxy ARP function enabled
and then forwarded to the destination
NE.
A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas

This topic describes the parameters that are related to management of multiple OSPF areas.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack
2. Click the Multi-OSPF Management tab.
Parameters Required for Configuring Multiple OSPF Areas

ID - - Displays the area ID.
Default Area - - Displays whether an area is the default area.
Authentication none none l Specifies the OSPF authentication type

Type MD5 used by an area.
simple l none indicates no authentication.

Automatic Route Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether automatic route

Aggregation Disabled aggregation is enabled for an area.
l The number of routes after automatic
route aggregation is the same as the
number of Networks.
Stub Type - - Displays the STUB type of an area.
Network Parameters
IP Address - - Displays the IP addresses of the Networks

in an area.
Subnet Mask - - Displays the subnet masks of the Networks

in an area.
Parameters for Configuring Manual Route Aggregation

IP Address - - Displays the IP address of the Network

where route aggregation is manually
enabled.
Subnet Mask - - Displays the subnet mask of the Network

where route aggregation is manually
enabled.
A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding

OSPF Areas
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding OSFP areas.
Navigation Path
3. Click New.

Parameters Required for Creating OSPF Areas

ID - - l Set the area ID of a new OSPF area

according to the planning information.
l An NE can be configured with a
maximum of four OSPF areas.
IP Address - - l Set the IP addresses of the Networks in

an area according to planning
information.
l An area supports a maximum of four
Networks.
Subnet Mask - - Set the subnet masks of the Networks in an

area according to planning information. A
subnet mask can contain a maximum of 30
bits.
Authentication none none Specifies the OSPF authentication type used

Type MD5 by an area according to planning
information.
simple
l none indicates no authentication.
l MD5 indicates that authentication is
performed based on the preset password,
with the password encrypted in MD5
mode.
l simple: indicates that authentication is
performed based on the preset password,
with the password not encrypted.
Automatic Route Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether automatic route

Aggregation Disabled aggregation is enabled for an area.
l The number of routes after automatic
route aggregation is the same as the
number of Networks.
STUB Type NON-STUB NON-STUB Set the STUB type of an area according to
STUB planning information.
NSSA l For the backbone area, this parameter
must be set to NON-STUB.
l For other areas, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to NON-STUB. If
required, this parameter can also be set
to STUB or NSSA.
A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding

Routes to Be Manually Aggregated
This topic describes the parameters for adding routes to be manually aggregated.

Navigation Path
3. In Manual Route Aggregation, click Add.
Parameters for Configuring Manual Route Aggregation

ID Address - - Specifies the IP address of the Network

where routes need to be aggregated
manually.
Subnet Mask - - Specifies the subnet mask of the Network

where routes need to be aggregated
manually.
A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting

This section describes the parameters that are used for setting port OSPF parameters.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol
Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
Port OSPF Parameters

Port - - Displays the ports that allow OSPF

parameters to be set.
Path Type - - Displays the current DCC channel type.
OSPF Status Enabled Enabled l Specifies whether to enable the OSPF.

Disabled l Set this parameter as required.
Opaque LSA of Enabled Enabled l Specifies whether DCC channels support

External Network Disabled Opaque LSAs.
Port l Set this parameter as required.
A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol
model.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
2. Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.
Network Layer Parameters


NE.
Configuration Role ES L1 l An NE whose Configuration Role is set

L1 to L1 cannot function as a neighbor of an
NE in the other area. It uses a route in the
L2 local area only and accesses the other
area by distributing the default route of
the nearest L2 NE.
l An NE whose Configuration Role is set
to L2 can function as a neighbor of an
NE in the other area and can use a route
in the backbone area. The backbone area
is a collection that is formed by
consecutive L2 NEs. That is, the L2 NE
of all the roles must be consecutive
(connected to each other).
NOTE
Configuration Role cannot be set to ES.
Current Role - - This parameter indicates the current role.
A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table

This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Routing Table tab.
Parameters for Link Adjacency Table

Port - - This parameter indicates the port used for

OSI communication.
Data Link Layer - - This parameter indicates the protocol that is

used at the data link layer.

Adjacency No. - - l This parameter specifies the identifier of

the adjacency that is set up by two NEs
through the OSI protocol. One adjacency
number corresponds to an OSI
adjacency.
l The value is dynamically allocated by
the NE.
Adjacency Type - - This parameter indicates the type of the

adjacency.
Adjacency State - - This parameter indicates the state of the

adjacency.
Peer End Area ID - - This parameter indicates the area ID that is

contained in the NSAP address of the
opposite NE.
Peer End System - - This parameter indicates the system ID of

ID the opposite NE. Generally, the system ID
is the MAC address.
Parameters for L1 and L2 Routing Tables

Destination SYSID - - This parameter indicates the system ID of

the destination NE. Generally, the system
ID is the MAC address.
Metric - - This parameter indicates the number of hops

that reach the destination NE or destination
area.
Adjacency No.1 - - This parameter indicates the number of the

adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.
Adjacency No.2 - - This parameter indicates the number of the

adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.
A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.

Navigation Path
2. Click the OSI Tunnel tab.
Parameters for OSI Tunnel Attributes

Remote IP Address - - This parameter indicates the IP address of

the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
LAPD Actor User User l This parameter specifies the LAPD

Network actor.
l If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol,
they can perform the LAPD negotiation
only when the LAPD actor is set to
User at one end and is set to Network at
the other end.
Efficient LAPD - - This parameter indicates whether the

Enable current LAPD is enabled.
Configurable Enabled Enabled This parameter specifies whether the LAPD

LAPD Enable Disabled is enabled.
LAPD Parameters
Remote IP Address - - This parameter indicates the IP address of

the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
L2 Wait Time to 1 to 20 1 l This parameter specifies L2 Wait Time

Retry(s) to Retry(s).
l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates the
interval for retransmitting packets at the
LAPD link layer.
l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to be
set according to the network situation. If
the network is in good situation, L2 Wait
Time to Retry(s) can be set to a smaller
value. Otherwise, it is recommended that
you set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to a
greater value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.

L2 Retry Times 2 to 6 3 l This parameter specifies L2 Retry

Times.
l L2 Retry Times indicates the maximum
number of packet retransmission
attempts at the LAPD link layer.
l L2 Retry Times needs to be set
according to the network situation. If the
network is in good situation, L2 Retry
Times can be set to a smaller value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L2 Retry Times to a greater value.
default value.
L3 Hello Timer(s) 1 to 100 3 l This parameter specifies L3 Hello

Timer(s).
l L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hello
packet timer at the LAPD link network
layer. It is used for periodical
transmission of the Hello packets.
l The Hello timer determines the interval
for transmitting the Hello packets once.
L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be set
network is in good situation, L3 Hello
Timer(s) can be set to a greater value.
set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.
default value.

L3 ES Timer(s) 1 to 200 50 l This parameter specifies L3 ES Timer

(s).
l L3 ES Timer(s) indicates the ES
configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information on the ES route.
l L3 ES Timer(s) needs to be set
network is in good situation, L3 ES
Timer(s) can be set to a greater value.
set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.
default value.
L3 IS Timer(s) 1 to 200 10 l This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer

(s).
l L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the IS
configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information through the L1/L2 router.
l L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set according
to the network situation. If the network
is in good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) can
be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is
recommended that you set L3 IS Timer
(s) to a smaller value.
default value.

L3 Hold Timer(s) 2 to 63 5 l This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer

(s).
l L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the hold
timer at the LAPD link network layer.
l L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be set
network is in good situation, L3 Hold
Timer(s) can be set to a smaller value.
set L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value.
default value.
COST 1 to 63 20 l This parameter specifies COST.

l COST indicates the overhead value of
the virtual LAPD that corresponds to the
OSI tunnel.
l The overhead value determines whether
this link is perverted. If the overhead
value is smaller, this link has a higher
priority to be selected.
l This parameter needs to set according to
the planning information.
A.1.2.19 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Port Parameters

This topic describes the OSI port parameters.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose
Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port Parameters tab.
OSI port parameters

LAPD Role User User l This parameter is available only when

Network Protocol Type is OSI.
l Set LAPD Role to User at one end of a
DCC and to Network at the other end of
the DCC.

LAPD MTU - - This parameter displays the maximum

LAPD packet length.
A.1.2.20 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
2. Click the Bandwidth Management tab.
Parameters for Bandwidth Management

Ethernet Board 2 to 4094 4094 l The equipment on the traditional DCN

VLAN ID can be connected to the NMS through the
SCC board, but the OptiX RTN 980 can
also be connected to the NMS through an
Ethernet interface. If an Ethernet port is
used to carry the network management
information, the NE differentiates the
network management information and
Ethernet service information according
to the VLAN ID.
l If the default VLAN ID of the inband
DCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in the
service, the Ethernet Board VLAN ID
of the inband DCN can be changed
manually. The same VLAN ID must be,
however, is used on the network-wide
inband DCN.
Bandwidth(Kbit/s) 64 to 1000 512 Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidth

for inband DCN messaging on the Ethernet
link.
E1 Port - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this

Bandwidth(Kbit/s) parameter.
Tunnel Bandwidth - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
(Kbit/s) parameter.
IF Port Bandwidth 64 to 1000 512 IF Port Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the

(Kbit/s) bandwidth for inband DCN messaging on
the radio link.

A.1.2.21 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
2. Click the Port Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting Ports

Port Name - - This parameter indicates the port name.
Enabled Status Enabled Enabled l Enabled Status specifies the enabling

Disabled status of the port.
l The network management information
can be transmitted over the inband DCN
when the DCN function is enabled for
the ports at both ends of a link.
Protocol Type IP IP l Specifies the DCN protocol used by the

HWECC inband DCN.
L2DCN l If Protocol Type is set to different
values for two interconnected sets of
equipment, equipment interconnection
fails. Therefore, set Protocol Type to the
same value for both ends of a link.
IP Address - - l This parameter is available only when

Protocol Type is set to IP.
parameter specifies the interface IP
address of the non-backbone area port on
the ABR.
Subnet Mask - - l This parameter is available only when

Protocol Type is set to IP.
parameter specifies the subnet mask of
the non-backbone area port on the ABR.
A.1.2.22 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control

This section describes the parameters for configuring access control.

Navigation Path
l In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
l Click the Access Control tab.
Parameters
Port Name - - Displays the Ethernet ports that support this

function.
Enabled Status Disabled Disabled l Specifies the enabling status of the port.
Enabled l If the Enabled Status is set to
Enabled, this port can be used to support
access of the management information
from the NMS.
l If the Enabled Status is set to
Disabled, this port cannot be used to
support access of the management
information from the NMS.
IP Address - 0.0.0.0 Specifies the IP address of the port.
Subnet Mask - 0.0.0.0 Specifies the submask of the port.
A.1.2.23 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Packet Control

This topic describes the parameters for controlling the priority of inband DCN packets.
Navigation Path
l In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
l Click the Packet Control tab.

Packet Type - - Displays the packet type for which the

packet priority can be manually specified.
Supported - - This parameter cannot be specified

Application manually.

Packet Priority CS6 CS6 (Packet Type Specifies the PHB service class of inband
EF is VLAN) DCN packets.
AF4 BE (Packet Type is
DSCP)
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
A.1.2.24 Parameter Description: L2 DCN Management

This section describes the parameters that are related to L2 DCN management.
Navigation Path
l In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > L2DCN Management from the Function Tree.
l Click Query.

Config Status Auto Auto When the OptiX RTN 980 uses the L2 DCN
Disabled solution, the RSTP protocol can be used to
prevent L2 forwarding loops. It is
recommended that the RSTP protocol uses
its default enable/disable mode Auto for the
OptiX RTN 980 NE level. That is, the RSTP
protocol is automatically enabled/disabled
depending on the enable/disable status of
the L2 DCN function over IF ports.
Real Status Disabled - l Real Status is queried to be Disabled in

Enabled the following scenarios:
– Config Status is set to Disabled.
– When Config Status is set to Auto,
the L2 DCN function is disabled for
all IF ports on the NE.
l When Config Status is set to Auto, the
L2 DCN function is enabled for at least
one IF port on the NE. In this case, the
RSTP protocol will automatically work.
At this time, the queried Real Status is
Enabled.

A.1.2.25 Parameter Description: Access Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access
Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters for Ethernet Access Control

Enable Ethernet Selected - After The First Network Port is set to

Access Deselected Enabled for Ethernet access, the NE can
access the NMS through the Ethernet port.
PORT - - This parameter displays the NMS port and

the NE cascading port on the system control,
switching, and timing board.
Work Mode adapt - This parameter specifies the working modes

10M Half_Duplex of the NMS port and the NE cascading port
on the system control, switching, and timing
10M Full_Duplex board.
100M Half_Duplex
100M Full_Duplex
Actual Work Mode - - This parameter displays the working modes

of the NMS port and the NE cascading port
on the system control, switching, and timing
board.
Enabled/Disabled Enabled Specifies whether the Ethernet network

Disabled management port or NE cascading port is
enabled.
Parameters for Access Control over Serial Ports

Enable Serial Port Selected Selected After Enable Serial Port Access is
Access Deselected selected, the NE can access the NMS or
command lines through the serial port.
Access Command Selected Deselected If Access Command Line is selected, the

Line Deselected serial interface can be used to access the
command line terminal.
Access NM Selected Deselected If Access NM is selected, the serial interface

Deselected can be used to access the NMS.

Baud Rate 1200 9600 l This parameter specifies the data

2400 transmission rate in the communications
through serial ports.
4800
9600 rate of the serial port at the opposite end,
19200 and the rates at both ends must be the
38400 same.
57600
115200
A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to network security management.
A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE user management.
Navigation Path
1. Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE
User Management from the Function Tree.
A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
2. Close the dialog box.
Parameters for NE user management

NE - - Displays the current NE

name.
NE User - - Displays the registered NE

user name.
User Level - - Displays the registered NE

user level.
NE User Flag - - Displays whether a

registered NE user is
logged in.
A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an NE user.

Navigation Path
1. Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE
User Management from the Function Tree. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful.
2. Close the dialog box.
3. Click Add.

NE User - - Specifies the name of a

registered NE user.
NOTE
The name of an NE cannot
contain any space or
Chinese characters.

User Level Monitor Level Monitor Level l A Debug Level NE

Operation Level user has all security
and configuration
Maintenance Level authorities, and has the
System Level right to run debugging
Debug Level commands.
l A System Level NE
user has all security
and configuration
authorities.
l A Maintenance
Level NE user has
some security
authorities, some
configuration
authorities, the
communication setting
authority, and the log
management
authority.
l An Operation Level
NE user has all fault
performance
authorities, some
security authorities,
and some
configuration
authorities.
l A Monitor Level NE
user has the right to use
all query commands, to
log in, to log out, and to
change its own
password.

NE User Flag LCT NE User LCT NE User l Specifies the NE user

EMS NE User flag.
CMD NE User l LCT NE User
indicates NE users for
General NE User NE management on
the U2000 Local Craft
Terminal (U2000
LCT).
l EMS NE User
NE management on
the U2000.
l CMD NE User
NE management on
the CMD.
l General NE User
all NMS types.
Detailed Description - - Describes a configured

NE user.
New Password - - l Specifies the password

for a new NE user.
Confirm Password - - Enter the same value as

New Password.
Immediate Password Yes Yes Specifies whether the

Change No password of a registered
NE user can be changed.
A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access
Parameters for LCT Access Control


NE.

LCT Access Access Allowed Access Allowed l No NMS user logs in to the NE. In this
Control Switch Disable Access case, when the LCT requests an LCT
user to log in to the NE, the NE does not
check the status of LCT Access Control
Switch, and directly allows the LCT user
to log in to the NE.
l An NMS user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the LCT requests an LCT
user to log in to the NE, the NE
determines whether to allow the LCT
user to log in to the NE through the LCT
according to the status of LCT Access
Control Switch.
l An LCT user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the NMS requests an
NMS user to log in to the NE, the NMS
user can directly log in to the NE. After
the NMS user successfully logs in to the
NE, the online LCT user is not affected.
l When both the LCT user and NMS user
log in to the NE, the online LCT user is
not affected after LCT Access Control
Switch is set to Disable Access.
A.1.3.4 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RADIUS configuration.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Security > NE
RADIUS Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Parameters
Function - - Specifies the desired RADIUS function, the

authentication server ID, and the server type.
Server ID - -
l Function, Server ID, and Server Type are
Server Type - - associated with the servers that are
configured in Creating a RADIUS Server
or a RADIUS Proxy Server.
l Select the desired RADIUS server or proxy
server according to planning information.

Server Status Active Active Specifies the active/standby status of the

Standby RADIUS server or proxy server.
l If no standby server is required, set Server
Status to Active.
l The OptiX RTN 980 supports one active
server and one standby server. If both the
active and standby servers are configured,
set Server Status of the active server to
Active and Server Status of the standby
server to Standby.
Shared Key - - Specifies the key for communication between

an NE and the RADIUS server.
l Set Shared Key to the same value on the
NE and on the RADIUS server.
l If Server Type is Proxy Server, Shared
Key is not available.
Interval of Packet 3-10 5 Specifies the number of packet retransmission

Transmission attempts and the interval between the attempts.
l If an NE does not receive the response from
Packet 1-5 3
the RADIUS server within a specific
Retransmission
period, the NE re-transmits the
Attempts
authentication request for the configured
attempt times and at the configured
interval.
l It is recommended that Interval of Packet
Transmission and Packet
Retransmission Attempts take their
default values.
A.1.3.5 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_RADIUS Server

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RADIUS server configuration.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Security > NE
2. Click the RADIUS Server Configuration tab.
The RADIUS Server Information dialog box is displayed.
3. Click New.

Parameters
Function Authentication Authentication Specifies the RADIUS function that an NE

Accounting needs to use.
Authentication + l For NE RADIUS authentication, select
Accounting Authentication.
l For both NE RADIUS authentication and
NE usage accounting, set this parameter to
Authentication + Accounting or
Accounting (when the Authentication
function has been enabled).
Server Type RADIUS Server RADIUS Server Specifies the server type used for NE RADIUS
Proxy Server authentication.
l When an NE uses RADIUS authentication
in the NAS mode or functions as a proxy
server, set Server Type to RADIUS
Server.
in the proxy NAS mode, set Server Type
to Proxy Server.
Server ID IP Address IP Address Specifies the address of the server that is used
NE ID for NE RADIUS authentication.
l If Server Type is RADIUS Server, set
Server ID to IP Address and specify the
IP address of the RADIUS server.
l If Server Type is Proxy Server, it is
recommended that you set Server ID to
NE ID and set the gateway NE as the proxy
server.
l If Server Type is Proxy Server and there
is no IP route between the NE and the proxy
server, Server ID can be set to only NE
ID. If Server Type is Proxy Server and
there is an IP route between the NE and the
proxy server, Server ID can be set to NE
ID or IP Address.
A.1.3.6 Parameter Description: Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function

This topic describes the parameters that are required for enabling/disabling the RADIUS
function.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Security > NE

Parameters
NE - - Displays the NE name.
RADIUS Client Open Close Specifies whether an NE has the ability to be

Close a RADIUS client. The RADIUS function can
be enabled on an NE only if RADIUS Client
is set to Open for the NE.
Proxy Server Open Close Specifies whether an NE has the ability to be

Close a proxy server.
l If an NE needs to function as a proxy
server, set Proxy Server to Open for the
NE.
l Proxy Server can be set to Open only if
RADIUS Client is set to Open.
in the proxy NAS mode, set Proxy
Server to Close.
A.2 Radio Link Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC

Workgroup_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the XPIC tab.
3. Click New.

Parameters
IF Channel ISX2: - l This parameter specifies the channel

Bandwidth 7M spacing when the XPIC function is
enabled.
14M
l When this parameter is set to 56M or
28M 40M, the high-power ODU must be
40M used.
56M
IFX2:
7M
14M
28M
56M
Polarization - - l This parameter indicates the polarization

Direction-V direction of a radio link.
l It is recommended that you set the IF port
Polarization
on the XPIC IF board that has a smaller
Direction-H
slot number to Link ID-V and the IF port
on the other XPIC IF board to Link ID-
H.
Link ID-V 1 to 4094 1 l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H.

l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link
Link ID-H 2
and is used to prevent the radio links
between sites from being wrongly
connected.
l When the link ID received by an NE is
different from the link ID set for the NE,
the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and
inserts the AIS.
l These two parameters are set according
to the planning information. These two
parameters must be set to different
values, but Link ID-V must be set to the
same value at both ends of a link and
Link ID-H must also be set to the same
value at both ends of a link.

Transmit Power - - l This parameter specifies the transmit

(dBm) power of an ODU. The value of this
parameter must not exceed the rated
power range supported by the ODU.
l It is recommended that you set the
transmit power of the ODU to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can
ensure stable radio services.
Maximum - - l This parameter specifies the maximum

Transmit Power transmit power of the ODU. This
(dBm) parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module.
l This parameter is set to limit the
maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
l The maximum transmit power adjusted
by using the ATPC function should not
exceed this value.
Transmission - - l This parameter indicates the channel

Frequency(MHz) central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower transmit
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper transmit frequency
limit supported by the ODU and a half of
the channel spacing.

T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacing

between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
mutual interference between the
transmitter and the receiver.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX
high, the transmit frequency is one T/R
spacing higher than the receive
frequency. If Station Type of the ODU
is TX low, the transmit frequency is one
T/R spacing lower than the receive
frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing
supported by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
Transmission unmute unmute l When this parameter is set to mute, the

Status mute ODU does not transmit microwave
signals but can normally receive
microwave signals.
l When this parameter is set to unmute,
the ODU normally transmits and
receives microwave signals.
l In normal cases, Transmission Status is
set to unmute.

ATPC Enabled Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the

Enabled ATPC function is enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if
the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher
or lower than the central value between
the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold at the receive end, the
receiver notifies the transmitter to
decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is
2 dB higher or lower than the central
value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold.
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must
be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.
ATPC Upper - -45.0 l The central value between the ATPC

Threshold(dBm) upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold is set as the expected receive
ATPC Lower - -70.0 power.
Threshold(dBm)
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold
and 10 dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable Status is set to
Disabled.

ATPC Automatic Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the

Threshold Enable Enabled ATPC automatic threshold function is
Status enabled.
equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
2. Click the XPIC tab.

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the work

group.
Polarization - - This parameter indicates the IF port to which

Direction-V the polarization direction V corresponds.
Link ID-V - - This parameter indicates the link ID to

which the polarization direction V
corresponds.

Direction-H the polarization direction H corresponds.
Link ID-H - - This parameter indicates the link ID to

which the polarization direction H
corresponds.

IF Channel ISX2: - l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the

Bandwidth 7M channel spacing of the corresponding
radio links.
14M
l When this parameter is set to 56M or
28M 40M, the high-power ODU must be
40M used.
56M l This parameter is set according to the
IFX2: planning information.
7M
14M
28M
56M
Power to Be -90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set the

Received -V(dBm) expected receive power of the ODU and
is mainly used in the antenna alignment
stage. After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB
lower than the power expected to be
received, the ODU indicator on the IF
board connected to the ODU blinks
yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off),
indicating that the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l When this parameter takes the default
value, the antenna misalignment
indicating function is disabled.

Power to Be -90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set the

Received -H(dBm) expected receive power of the ODU and
is mainly used in the antenna alignment
stage. After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When this parameter takes the default
value, the antenna misalignment
indicating function is disabled.
Maximum - - l This parameter specifies the maximum

Transmit Power transmit power of the ODU. This
modulation module.
exceed this value.

Transmit Power - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

(dBm) transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
Transmission - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Frequency(MHz) transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the channel central frequency.
less than the sum of the lower TX
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
l The difference between the transmit
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
to the planning information.

T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference between the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing
supported by the ODU is used.
radio link.
Transmission unmute unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Status mute transmit status of the ODU.
l If this parameter is set to mute, the
transmitter of the ODU does not work
but can normally receive microwave
signals.
l If this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
unmute.
Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the work

group.

direction the polarization direction H or the
polarization direction V corresponds.

AM Enable Status Disabled Disabled l When AM Enable Status is set to

Enabled Disabled, the radio link uses only the
specified modulation scheme. In this
case, you need to select Manually
Specified Modulation Mode.
l When AM Enable Status is set to
Enabled, the radio link uses the
corresponding modulation scheme
according to the channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the
reliable transmission of the E1 services and
provide bandwidth adaptively for the
Ethernet services when the AM function is
enabled.
Modulation Mode QPSK - This parameter specifies the highest-gain

of the Guarantee 16QAM modulation scheme that the AM function
AM Capacity supports. This parameter is set according to
32QAM the planning information. Generally, the
64QAM value of this parameter is determined by the
128QAM bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
256QAM availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.
Modulation Mode QPSK - This parameter specifies the highest-gain

of the Full AM 16QAM modulation scheme that the AM function
Capacity supports. This parameter is set according to
32QAM the planning information. Generally, the
64QAM value of this parameter is determined by the
128QAM bandwidth of the services that need to be
256QAM availability of the radio link that
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity.

Manually Specified QPSK QPSK This parameter specifies the modulation

Modulation Mode 16QAM scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
32QAM
64QAM Enable Status is set to Disabled.
128QAM
256QAM
Transmit-End - - Displays the modulation mode at the

Modulation Mode transmit end.
Receive-End - - Displays the modulation mode at the receive

Modulation Mode end.
Parameters for ATPC Management

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.
ATPC Enable Disabled - l This parameter specifies whether the

Status Enabled ATPC function is enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if
the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher
or lower than the central value between
the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold at the receive end, the
receiver notifies the transmitter to
decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is
2 dB higher or lower than the central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold.
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
attributes.
ATPC Upper - - l Set the central value between the ATPC


ATPC Lower - - threshold to a value for the expected

Threshold(dBm) receive power.
Lower Threshold(dBm) o the
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10
dB.
l You can set this parameter only when
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Disabled.
ATPC Automatic Disabled - l This parameter specifies whether the

Threshold Enable Enabled ATPC automatic threshold function is
Status enabled.
equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you
need to manually set ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm).
A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.


WTR time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-
restore (WTR) time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
SD enable Enabled Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the

Disabled signal degradation switching function of
N+1 protection is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the signal degradation condition is
considered as a trigger condition of
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Enabled.
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters

Select Mapping Work Unit Work Unit l This parameter specifies the mapping
Direction Protection Unit direction of N+1 protection.
Select Mapping - - l In the case of N+1 protection, map N IF

Way ports as Work Unit and map the
remaining IF port as Protection Unit.
Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the working unit

and protection unit that have been set.
A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection Group Parameters

Protection Group - - This parameter indicates the ID of the

ID protection group.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

WTR time.
occurs.
default value.
SD Enable Enabled - l This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether the SD switching function of N
+1 protection is enabled.
the SD condition is considered as a
trigger condition of protection
switching.
Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the status of the

switching control protocol.
Protection Unit Parameters

Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates the protection unit.
Line - - This parameter indicates the information

about the working board or protection
board.
Switching Status - - This parameter indicates the switching state.
Protected Unit - - This parameter indicates the protected unit.
Remote/Local End - - This parameter indicates the local end or

Indication remote end.

A.2.5 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
2. Click Create.
Parameters
Working Mode HSB HSB l This parameter specifies the working

FD mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
SD l When Working Mode is set to HSB, the
equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby
configuration for the IF board and ODU
at both ends of each hop of a radio link
to realize the protection.
l When Working Mode is set to FD, the
system uses two channels that have a
frequency spacing between them, to
transmit and receive the same signal. The
remote end selects signals from the two
received signals. With FD protection, the
impact of the fading on signal
transmission is reduced.
l When Working Mode is set to SD, the
system uses two antennas that have a
space distance between them, to receive
the same signal. The equipment selects
signals from the two received signals.
With SD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
network plan.

Revertive Mode Revertive Mode Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertive
Non-Revertive mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
l When Revertive Mode is set to
Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the
switching state releases the switching
and enables the former working channel
to return to the normal state some time
after the former working channel is
restored to normal. It is recommended
that you set this parameter to Revertive
Mode.
l When Revertive Mode is set to Non-
Revertive, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-
restore (WTR) time.
set WTR Time(s), a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode. It is recommended that you use
the default value.

Enable Reverse Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates whether the

Switching Disabled reverse switching function is enabled.
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to
the source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
Enable Reverse Switching at the source
end is set to Enabled and the reverse
switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1
protection switching occurs at the source
end.
l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only
when Working Mode is set to HSB or
SD.
l Generally, if Working Mode is set to
HSB, it is recommended that you set
Enable Reverse Switching to
Disabled; if Working Mode is set to
SD, it is recommended that you set
Enable Reverse Switching to
Enabled.
Working Board - - This parameter specifies the working board

of the protection group.
Protection Board - - This parameter specifies the protection

board of the protection group.
Alarm Report Only board alarms Only board alarms l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
Mode Only protection Only board alarms, only IF board
group alarms alarms are reported.
Protection group l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
and board alarms Only protection group alarms, alarms
are reported if a protection group fails or
degrades and suppress IF board alarms
and radio link alarms.
l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
Protection group and board alarms,
IF board alarms and protection group
alarms are reported.
l It is recommended that you set Alarm
Report Mode to Only protection
group alarms. In this case, protection
group alarms are reported to indicate
radio link faults.
NOTE
The faulty board reports related fault alarms
regardless of parameter settings.

Anti-jitter Time(s) 0 to 600 300 l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0,

a protection group does not report an
alarm immediately after it is degraded,
but reports the alarm after the specified
anti-jitter time expires.
l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time
(s) take its default value.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s),Anti-jitter Time(s) and Enable
Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1



Working Mode HSB - l This parameter indicates the working

FD mode of the created IF 1+1 protection
group.
SD
l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a
1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF
board and ODU at both ends of each hop
of a radio link to realize the protection.
l In FD mode, the system uses two
channels that have a frequency spacing
between them, to transmit and receive
the same signal. The remote end selects
signals from the two received signals.
With FD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l In SD mode, the system uses two
antennas that have a space distance
between them, to receive the same signal.
The equipment selects signals from the
two received signals. With SD
protection, the impact of the fading on
signal transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
Revertive Mode Revertive Mode - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Non-Revertive revertive mode of the protection group.
Mode l When this parameter is set to Revertive
Mode, the NE that is in the switching
state releases the switching and enables
the former working channel to return to
the normal state some time after the
former working channel is restored to
normal.
l When this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the
parameter to Revertive Mode.


WTR time.
occurs.
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.
default value.
Enable Reverse Enabled - l This parameter indicates or specifies

Switching Disabled whether the reverse switching function is
enabled.
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to
the source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
this parameter at the source end is set to
Enabled and the reverse switching
conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection
switching occurs at the source end.
l This parameter is valid only when
Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
NE Switching - - l This parameter indicates the switching

Status state on the equipment side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.
Channel Switching - - l This parameter indicates the switching

Status state on the channel side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.
Active Port of - - This parameter indicates the current

Device working board on the equipment side.
Active Port of - - This parameter indicates the current

Channel working board on the channel side.

Alarm Report Only board alarms - l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
Mode Only Protection Only board alarms, only IF board
group alarms alarms are reported.
Protection group l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
and board alarms Only protection group alarms, alarms
are reported if a protection group fails or
degrades and suppress IF board alarms
and radio link alarms.
l When Alarm Report Mode is set to
Protection group and board alarms, IF
board alarms and protection group
alarms are reported.
l It is recommended that you set Alarm
Report Mode to Only protection group
alarms. In this case, protection group
alarms are reported to indicate radio link
faults.
NOTE
The faulty board reports related fault alarms
regardless of parameter settings.
Anti-jitter Time 0 to 600 - l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0,

a protection group does not report an
alarm immediately after it is degraded,
but reports the alarm after the specified
anti-jitter time expires.
l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time
(s) take its default value.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, and WTR Time(s) must be set to the same
value at both ends of a radio hop.

Unit - - This parameter indicates the working board

and protection board.
Slot Mapping - - This parameter indicates the names and

Relation ports of the working board and protection
board.
Working Status of - - This parameter indicates the working state

Device on the equipment side.

Signal Status of - - This parameter indicates the status of the

Channel link signal.
A.2.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_Creating a PLA

Group
This topic describes the parameters for creating a PLA group.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Physical Link Aggregation from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Parameters for Creating a PLA group

PLA ID 1 to 7 - This parameter specifies the ID of a PLA

group.
Main Board - - This parameter specifies the main IF board

in a PLA group.
Main Port - - This parameter specifies the main port in a

PLA group.
Board - - This parameter specifies the slave IF board

in a PLA group.
Port - - This parameter specifies the slave port in a

PLA group.
Selected Slave - - This parameter displays the slave IF board

Ports and slave port that have been selected.
A.2.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_PLA

This topic describes PLA parameters.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Physical Link Aggregation from the Function Tree.

PLA Parameters
PLA ID - - This parameter displays the ID of a PLA

group.
Main Board - - This parameter displays the main IF board

in a PLA group.
Main Port - - This parameter displays the main port in a

PLA group.
Hardware Status - - This parameter displays whether the main IF

of Main Port board in a PLA group is functional.
Link Status of - - This parameter displays whether the main

Main Port link in a PLA group is functional.
Work Status of - - This parameter displays the working status

Main Port of the main port in a PLA group.
Minimum Active - - This parameter specifies the minimum

Links number of available links in a PLA group
and helps to trigger ERPS switching even if
not all members in the PLA group fail
For example, if you set Minimum Active
Links to 2, ERPS switching is triggered
when either PLA member link fails.
Slave Board - - This parameter displays the slave IF board

in a PLA group.
Slave Port - - This parameter displays the slave port in a

PLA group.
Hardware Status - - This parameter displays whether the slave IF

of Slave Port board in a PLA group is functional.
Link Status of - - This parameter displays whether the slave

Slave Port link in a PLA group is functional.
Work Status of - - This parameter displays the working status

Slave Port of the slave port in a PLA group.
A.2.9 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

Parameters for Configuring the IF

Work Mode 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

2,4E1,3.5MHz, work mode of the radio link in "work
16QAM mode number, service capacity, channel
spacing, modulation mode" format.
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K l This parameter is set according to the
network plan. The work modes of the IF
4,8E1,7MHz, boards at the two ends of a radio link
16QAM must be the same.
5,16E1,28MHz,QP NOTE
SK The IF1 board supports this parameter.
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM
Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of

a radio link. As the identifier of a radio
link, this parameter is used to prevent
incorrect connections of radio links
between sites.
l If the value of Received Radio Link
ID does not match the preset value of
Link ID at the local end, the local end
inserts the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same time,
the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to
the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do
not match.
l Link ID is set according to the network
plan. Each radio link of an NE should
have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at
both ends of a radio link should be the
same.

Received Link ID - - l This parameter indicates the received ID

of the radio link.
Radio Link ID at the local end, the local
end inserts the AIS signal to the
downstream direction of the service. At
the same time, the local end reports an
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link
IDs do not match.
l When the radio link becomes faulty, this
parameter is displayed as an invalid
value.
IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1 Hybrid(Native E1 l Displays or specifies the type of services

+ETH) +ETH) carried by the IF board.
Hybrid(Native l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
STM-1+ETH) Native E1 services, set this parameter to
SDH Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
Native STM-1 services, set this
parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1
+ETH).
l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services,
set this parameter to SDH.
NOTE
The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this
parameter.
IF Channel 3.5M - IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the

Bandwidth 7M channel spacing of the corresponding radio
link. This parameter is set according to the
14M network plan.
28M NOTE
40M l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1
56M board.
l The IFU2 board does not support the value
40M.
l The IFX2 board does not support the values
40M.
l IF Channel Bandwidth can be set to 3.5M
only for the ISU2 board.
AM Mode - - This parameter is not applicable to the OptiX

RTN 980.


l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure
the reliable transmission of the E1
services and provide bandwidth
adaptively for the Ethernet services
when the AM function is enabled.
l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM
function when IF Service Type is
SDH.
l When IF Channel Bandwidth is 3.5M
for the ISU2 board, the AM function is
unavailable and AM Enable Status
must be set to Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Manually Specified QPSK QPSK l This parameter specifies the modulation

Modulation Mode 16QAM scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
32QAM
l This parameter is valid only when AM
64QAM
Enable Status is set to Disabled.
128QAM
NOTE
256QAM This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Modulation Mode QPSK QPSK l This parameter is valid only when AM

of the Guarantee 16QAM Enable Status is set to Enabled.
AM Capacity l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee
32QAM
AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order
64QAM modulation scheme that the AM function
128QAM supports. This parameter is set according
256QAM to the network plan. Generally, the value
of this parameter is determined by the
service transmission bandwidth that the
Hybrid radio must ensure and the
availability of the radio link that
NOTE


of the Full AM 16QAM Enable Status is set to Enabled.
Capacity l Modulation Mode of the Full AM
32QAM
Capacity specifies the highest-order
bandwidth of the services that need to be
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity must be higher than Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
NOTE
STM-1 Capacity - - l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF

board.
l This parameter is available only when IF
Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH) and SDH.
l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set
to 0 or 1.
l If IF Service Type is SDH, this
parameter can be set to 1 or 2.
NOTE
The IF1, IFU2, and IFX2 boards do not support
this parameter.
Guarantee E1 - - l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled,

Capacity this parameter needs to be set according
to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity,
and the actually transmitted services.
l If AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, this parameter needs to be set
according to IF Channel Bandwidth,
Manually Specified Modulation
Mode, and the actually transmitted
services.
l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this
parameter is available when IF Service
Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE

Guarantee E1 - - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF

Capacity Range board in guarantee capacity modulation
mode.
Data Service - - Displays the data service bandwidth of the

Bandwidth(Mbit/ IF board.
s)
Enable E1 Priority Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether to

Enabled enable the E1 priority function.
NOTE
Full E1 Capacity - - l This parameter specifies the number of

transmitted E1 services in Modulation
Mode of the Full AM Capacity.
l This parameter is valid if Enable E1
Priority is set to Enabled.
l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity
mode ≤ Service bandwidth in full
capacity mode - Service bandwidth in
guarantee capacity mode + E1 service
bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode.
In addition, the number of E1 services in
full capacity modulation mode should be
smaller than or equal to the maximum
number of E1 services in full capacity
modulation mode.
l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the
same value at both ends of a radio link.
NOTE
Full E1 Capacity - - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF

Range board in full capacity modulation mode.

Parameters for Configuring the RF

TX Frequency - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

(MHz) transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the channel central frequency.
less than the sum of the lower TX
between the upper TX frequency limit
channel spacing.
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
to the network plan.
Range of TX - - l This parameter indicates the range of the

Frequency(MHz) transmit frequency of the ODU.
l The Range of Frequency(MHz)
depends on the specifications of the
ODU.
Actual TX - - This parameter indicates the actual transmit

Frequency(MHz) frequency of the ODU.
Actual RX - - This parameter indicates the actual receive


T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacing

between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
interference between them.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX
high, the TX frequency is one T/R
spacing higher than the receive
frequency. If Station Type of the ODU
is TX low, the TX frequency is one T/R
spacing lower than the receive
frequency.
spacing, set this parameter to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.
Actual T/R - - This parameter indicates the actual T/R

Spacing(MHz) spacing of the ODU.

Parameters for Configuring the Power

TX Power(dBm) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
l This parameter cannot take a value
greater than the preset value of
Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).
Range of TX - - This parameter indicates the range of the

Power(dBm) transmit power of the ODU.
Actual TX Power - - l This parameter indicates the actual

(dBm) transmit power of the ODU.
l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.

Power to Be -90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to

Received(dBm) set the expected receive power of the
ODU and is mainly used in the antenna
alignment stage. After this parameter is
set, the NE automatically enables the
antenna misalignment indicating
function.
indicating function is enabled, When the
antenna non-alignment indication
function is enabled, if the actual receive
power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the
power expected to be received, the ODU
indicator on the IF board connected to
the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300
ms off), indicating that the antenna is not
aligned.
l When Power to Be Received(dBm)
takes the default value (-10.0), the
function is disabled.
network plan.
Actual RX Power - - This parameter indicates the actual receive

(dBm) power of the ODU.
TX Status Unmute Unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Mute transmit status of the ODU.
l When this parameter is set to Mute, the
transmitter of the ODU does not work
but can normally receive microwave
signals.
l When this parameter is set to Unmute,
the ODU can normally transmit and
receive microwave signals.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set TX Status to unmute.
Actual TX Status - - This parameter indicates the actual transmit

status of the ODU.

Equipment Information
Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter indicates the frequency band

where the ODU operates.
Equip Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipment

type of the ODU.
l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission
capacity only and are irrelevant to the
type of transmitted service.
Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether the

ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
l The transmit frequency of a Tx high
station is one T/R spacing higher than the
transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Produce SN - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing

serial number and the manufacturer code of
the ODU.
Transmission - - This parameter indicates the level of the

Power Level output power of the ODU.
A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear
MS from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.


Parameter Value Range Default Description
Value
Protection Type 1+1 Protection 1+1 Protection l This parameter specifies the
1:N Protection protection type of the linear
MSP group.
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP,
one working channel and one
protection channel are
required. When the working
channel fails, the service is
switched from the working
channel to the protection
channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP,
N working channels and one
protection channel are
required. Normal services are
transmitted on the working
channels and extra services
are transmitted on the
protection channel. When one
working channel fails, the
services are switched from
this working channel to the
protection channel, and the
extra services are interrupted.
l If extra services need to be
transmitted or several
working channels are
required, select 1:N
Protection.
according to the planning
information.


Value
Switching Mode Single-Ended Single-Ended l This parameter specifies the

Switching Switching (1 switching mode of the linear
Dual-Ended +1 Protection) MSP.
Switching Dual-Ended l In single-ended mode, the
Switching (1:N switching occurs only at one
Protection) end and the state of the other
end remains unchanged.
l In dual-ended mode, the
switching occurs at both ends
at the same time.
l If the linear MSP type is set to
1:N Protection, Switching
Mode can be set to Dual-
Ended Switching only.
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies the

Revertive (1+1 revertive mode of the linear
Protection) MSP.
Revertive (1:N l When this parameter is set to
Protection) Revertive, the NE that is in
the switching state releases
the switching and enables the
former working channel to
return to the normal state
some time after the former
working channel is restored to
normal.
l When this parameter is set to
Non-Revertive, the NE that
is in the switching state keeps
the current state unchanged
unless another switching
occurs even though the
former working channel is
restored to normal.
l It is recommended that you
set this parameter to
Revertive.
l If the linear MSP type is set to
1:N Protection, Revertive
Mode can be set to
Revertive only.


Value
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the

WTR time.
l When the time after the
former working channel is
restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive
switching occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s)
only when Revertive Mode
is set to Revertive.
use the default value.
SD Enable Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates or

Disabled specifies whether the
switching at the SD alarm of
the linear MSP is enabled.
Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is
considered as a switching
condition.
Enabled.
Protocol Type New Protocol New Protocol l The new protocol is

Restructure supported at the early stage,
Protocol and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
l The restructure protocol
optimizes the new protocol
and provides better measures
to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new
protocol runs in a better
manner.
l The new protocol is more
mature, and the restructure
protocol complies with the
standard. It is recommended
that you use the new protocol.
l You must ensure that the
interconnected NEs run the
protocols of the same type.


Select Mapping West Working Unit West Working Unit This parameter specifies the mapping
Direction West Protection direction of the linear MSP.
Unit
Select Mapping - - l This parameter specifies the mapping

Mode board and port in the mapping direction.
l If the protection type is set to 1+1
Protection, only one line port can be
mapped as West Working Unit.
l Only one line port can be mapped as
West Protection Unit.
l The line port mapped as West
Protection Unit and the line port
mapped as West Working Unit should
be configured for different boards if
possible.
Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the preset slot

mapping relations, including the mapping
direction and the corresponding mapping
mode.
A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP

This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS
from the Function Tree.



Protection Type - - l This parameter indicates the protection

type of the linear MSP group.
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one
working channel and one protection
channel are required. When the working
channel fails, the service is switched
from the working channel to the
protection channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working
channels and one protection channel are
required. Normal services are
transmitted on the working channels and
extra services are transmitted on the
protection channel. When one working
channel fails, the services are switched
from this working channel to the
protection channel, and the extra
services are interrupted.
l If extra services need to be transmitted
or several working channels are
required, select 1:N Protection.
Switching Mode Single-Ended - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Switching switching mode of the linear MSP.
Dual-Ended l In single-ended mode, the switching
Switching occurs only at one end and the state of
the other end remains unchanged.
l In dual-ended mode, the switching
occurs at both ends at the same time.
l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N
Protection, Switching Mode can be set
to Dual-Ended Switching only.

Revertive Mode Non-Revertive - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Revertive revertive mode of the linear MSP.
switching state releases the switching
and enables the former working channel
to return to the normal state some time
after the former working channel is
restored to normal.
parameter to Revertive.
l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N
Protection, Revertive Mode can be set
to Revertive only.

WTR time.
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
default value.
SD Enable Enabled - l This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether the reverse switching function
is enabled.
the B2_SD alarm is considered as a
switching condition.

Protocol Type New Protocol - l The new protocol is supported at the

Restructure Protocol early stage, and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
l The restructure protocol optimizes the
new protocol and provides better
measures to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new protocol runs
in a better manner.
l You must ensure that the interconnected
NEs run the protocols of the same type.
l The new protocol is more mature, and
the restructure protocol complies with
the standard. It is recommended that you
use the new protocol.
Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the protocol status

of the linear MSP.
Protection Subnet - - This parameter displays the protection

subnet where the MS protection is
configured.

Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates that which of the

units, namely, the west protection unit or the
west working unit, is currently in the
protection status.
West Line - - This parameter indicates the west protection

unit and the west working unit of the linear
MSP.
West Switching - - This parameter indicates the switching

Status status of the line.
Protected Unit - - This parameter indicates the working

channel protected by the current protection
channel.
Remote/Local End - - When Switching Mode is set to Dual-

Indication Ended Switching, the central office end
that issues the switching command is
displayed.

A.3.3 Parameter Description: Ring MSP_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ring MSP groups.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ring MS from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.
A dialog box is displayed, prompting for confirmation.
3. Click OK.

Level STM-4 STM-4 Specifies the transmission level of ring MSP

services. The parameter value is always
STM-4.
Protection Type 2-fiber Bidirectional 2-fiber Bidirectional Specifies the ring MSP protection type. The
Multiplex Section Multiplex Section parameter value is always 2-fiber
Bidirectional Multiplex Section.
Local Node 0-15 0 Specifies the node ID that the local NE uses
on the MSP ring. Node IDs of NEs on the
ring must be different from each other.
West Node 0-15 0 Specifies the node ID of the NE that is

connected to the west line board on the local
NE. The parameter value must be different
from Local Node.
East Node 0-15 0 Specifies the node ID of the NE that is

connected to the east line board on the local
NE. The parameter value must be different
from Local Node.
WTR Time(s) 300-720 600 l Specifies the WTR time for the local NE.
After the working channel recovers,
services are switched back from the
protection channel to the working
channel when the WTR time expires.
l Prevents frequent service switches. The
default value is recommended.

SD Enable Enabled Enabled l Specifies whether the B2_SD alarm on

Disabled the local NE functions as a switching
trigger condition. When the parameter
value is Enabled, the B2_SD alarm on
the local NE functions as a switching
trigger condition.
Protocol Type New Protocol New Protocol l The new MSP protocol is supported
Restructure Protocol from an early stage, and is still widely
used.
l Compared with the new MSP protocol,
the restructure MSP protocol is
optimized and more stable,
incorporating better protection
measures.
l The new MSP protocol has higher
technology maturity than the restructure
MSP protocol, and therefore is generally
recommended. The restructure MSP
protocol, however, features higher
standard compliance than the new MSP
protocol. Therefore, the restructure MSP
protocol is used when the new MSP
protocol fails to support interconnection
between Huawei RTN equipment and
third-party equipment.
l Two interconnected NEs must use the
same MSP protocol type.
Parameters for Slot Mapping Relationships

Select Mapping West Line 1 West Line 1 Specifies the mapping direction of a
Direction East Line 1 member in a ring MSP protection group.
Select Mapping - - l Specifies the mapped board and port in

Mode the mapping direction.
l It is recommended that you map the
SL4D-1 port to West Line 1 and map the
SL4D-2 port to East Line 1.
Mapped Board - - Displays the configured slot mapping

relationship, including the mapping
direction and the mapping mode.

A.3.4 Parameter Description: Ring MSP

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ring MSP.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Ring MS from the Function Tree.

Protection Group - - Displays the ID of a ring MSP protection

ID group.
Level - - Displays the transmission level of ring MSP

services. The parameter value is always
STM-4.
Protection Type - - Displays the ring MSP protection type. The

parameter value is always 2-fiber
Bidirectional Multiplex Section.
Local Node - - Displays the node ID that the local NE uses

on the MSP ring.
West Node - - Displays the node ID of the NE that is

connected to the west line board on the local
NE.
East Node - - Displays the node ID of the NE that is

connected to the east line board on the local
NE.
WTR Time(s) - - Displays the wait-to-restore (WTR) time of

- the local NE. After the working channel is
restored, revertive switching occurs when
the WTR time expires.
SD Enable - - Displays whether SD Enable is Enabled for

the local NE. If SD Enable is Enabled, the
B2_SD alarm is regarded as a switching
trigger condition.

Protocol Type - - l Displays the protocol type used by the

local NE.
l The new MSP protocol is supported
from an early stage, and is still widely
used.
l Compared with the new MSP protocol,
the restructure MSP protocol is
optimized and more stable,
incorporating better protection
measures.
Protocol Status - - Displays the current protocol status of the

local NE.
Protection Subnet - - Displays the current protection subnet.
Parameters for Slot Mapping Relationships

Mapping Direction - - Displays the direction of an MSP ring.
Slot Mapping - - Displays the slot mapping relationship in a

ring MSP protection group.
Switching Status - - Displays the current switching status of the

local NE.
A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-
connections.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-
connection.
3. Click Create.

Parameters
Level VC12 VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of the

VC3 service to be created.
VC4 l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.
Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to

Unidirectional Unidirectional, create only the cross-
connections from the service source to
the service sink.
Bidirectional, create the cross-
connections from the service source to
the service sink and the cross-
connections from the service sink to the
service source.
you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Source Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the

service source.
Source VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of

the VC-4 channel where the service
source is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when
Source Slot is set to the slot of the
tributary board.
Source Timeslot - - l This parameter indicates the timeslot

Range(e.g.1,3-6) range of the service source.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
network plan.

Sink Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the

service sink.
Sink VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of

the VC-4 channel where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when Sink
Slot is set to the slot of the tributary
board.
Sink Timeslot - - l This parameter specifies the timeslot

Range(e.g.1,3-6) range of the service sink.
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
network plan.
E1 Priority High - l This parameter specifies the priority of

Low an E1 service. This parameter is
available only if the E1 priority function
None is enabled for the ports configured in the
cross-connections.
l If E1 Priority is set to High,
transmission of the E1 service is ensured
in any modulation scheme.
l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission
of the E1 service is ensured only in full-
capacity modulation scheme
l If the service priority is not specified
during service creation, E1 Priority is
None. In this case, the E1 priority of a
service needs to be changed after the
service is created.
Activate Yes Yes l This parameter specifies whether to

Immediately No immediately activate the configured
service.
l To immediately deliver the configured
SDH service to the NE, set this parameter
to Yes.

A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP

Service Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
Navigation Path
2. Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-
connection.
3. Click Create SNCP Service.

Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of the
service to be created is SNCP.

Unidirectional Unidirectional, create only the cross-
connections from the SNCP service
source to the SNCP service sink.
Bidirectional, create the cross-
connections from the SNCP service
source to the service sink and the cross-
connections from the SNCP service sink
to the service source.
Level VC12 VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of the

VC3 SCNP service to be created.
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.

Hold-off Time 0 to 100 0 l This parameter specifies the duration of

(100ms) the hold-off time.
l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching
can be performed on the NE after a delay
of time to prevent the situation where the
NE performs SNCP switching and other
protection switching at the same time.
l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set
to prevent SNCP protection switching,
when SNCP works with N+1 protection.
Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer
than the switching time of any protection
mode that works with SNCP. Generally,
Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms.
l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD,
trigger conditions for HSM switching or
SNCP switching trigger HSM switching
but do not trigger SNCP switching.
Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does
not need to be set in this case.
l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection is much longer than that of
SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service
interruptions, it is recommended that you
do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when
SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection.
l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it
is recommended that you set the hold-off
time to 0.
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies whether to

Revertive switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified.
l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the
service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
If this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, the service is not switched
from the protection channel to the
original working channel.

WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the WTR time.
occurs.
default value.

service source.

source is located.
tributary board.

1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

service sink.

is located.
board.


1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Configure SNCP Selected Deselected l After the Configure SNCP Tangent

Tangent Ring Deselected Ring checkbox is selected, you can
quickly configure the SNCP service for
the SNCP ring tangent point.
you do not select this checkbox.
Activate Selected Selected l This parameter specifies whether to

Immediately Deselected immediately activate the configured
SNCP service.
l After the Activate Immediately
checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.
A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service

Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP
services.
Navigation Path
2. Optional: If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in Cross-
Connection. Right-click the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from
the shortcut menu.
3. Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to
SNCP Service from the shortcut menu.


Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of the
service to be created is SNCP.
Direction Unidirectional - This parameter indicates the direction of the

SNCP service.
Level - - l This parameter indicates the level of the

SNCP service.
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
channels, the parameter value is VC12.
bound with VC-3 channels, the
parameter value is VC3.
through the NE, the parameter value is
VC4.

Hold-off Time 0 to 100 0 l This parameter specifies the duration of

protection.
time to 0.
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies whether to

Revertive switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified. If this
parameter is set to "Revertive", the

WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the WTR time.
occurs.
default value.

service source.

source is located.
tributary board.

1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

service sink.

is located.
board.


1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Configure SNCP - - After the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring

Tangent Ring checkbox is selected, you can quickly
configure the SNCP service for the SNCP
ring tangent point.
Activate - - l This parameter indicates whether to

Immediately immediately activate the configured
SNCP service.
l After the Activate Immediately
checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.
A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,
configuring cross-connections).
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service

Cross-Connection Parameters
Level VC12 - l This parameter indicates the level of the

VC3 service.
channels, VC12 is displayed.
bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is
displayed.
through the NE, VC4 is displayed.
Source Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the

service source.
Source Timeslot/ - - This parameter indicates the timeslot or

Path timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the

source sink.
Sink Timeslot/ - - This parameter indicates the timeslot or

Path timeslot range of the service sink.
E1 Priority High - l This parameter specifies the priority of

Low an E1 service. This parameter is
available only if the E1 priority function
None is enabled for the ports configured in the
cross-connections.
l If E1 Priority is set to High,
transmission of the E1 service is ensured
in any modulation scheme.
l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission
of the E1 service is ensured only in full-
capacity modulation scheme
l If the service priority is not specified
during service creation, E1 Priority is
None. In this case, the E1 priority of a
service needs to be changed after the
service is created.
Activation Status Yes - This parameter indicates whether to activate

No the service.
Bound Group - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
Number parameter.
Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
parameter.

Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
parameter.
Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
parameter.
Parameters for Automatically Created Cross-Connections


VC3 service.
displayed.
Source Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the

service source.
Source Timeslot/ - - This parameter indicates the timeslot or

Path timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the

source sink.
Sink Timeslot/ - - This parameter indicates the timeslot or

Path timeslot range of the service sink.
Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
parameter.
Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
parameter.
Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
parameter.
A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service

Service Type - - This parameter indicates the service

protection type of the protection group.
Source - - This parameter indicates the timeslots where

the working service source and protection
service source of the protection group are
located.
Sink - - This parameter indicates the timeslots where

the working service sink and protection
service sink of the protection group are
located.

VC3 service.
displayed.
Current Status - - This parameter indicates the current

switching mode and switching status of the
services of the protection group.
Revertive Mode Revertive - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Non-Revertive revertive mode of the service.
l This parameter determines whether to
switch the service from the protection
channel to the original working channel
after the fault is rectified.


WTR time.
occurs.
default value.
Hold-off Time 0 to 100 - l This parameter specifies the duration of

protection.
time to 0.

SD Initiation - Null l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Condition conditions that trigger the protection
switching of the service.
l After being selected as SD Initiation
Condition, an alarm becomes a
condition for triggering switching of an
SNCP service.
l It is recommended that you set SD
Initiation Condition to the same
condition for Working Service and
Protection Service.
l The protection switching conditions in
SD Initiation Condition are optional
values not included in the default values,
and they are set according to the planning
information.
Trail Status - - This parameter indicates the status of the

working service and protection service of
the protection group.
Service Grouping - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
parameter.
Group Type - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
parameter.
Active Channel - - This parameter indicates whether the

working service or protection service is
currently received by the protection group.
Trail Name - - Displays the trail name.
A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion

This section describes the parameters for TU_AIS insertion.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the IF board from the Object Tree and choose Alarm > Triggered
Alarm Insertion from the Function Tree.

Table A-1 Parameters on the main interface

Port - - Displays the slot ID of the IF board and the

ID of the IF port.
High Channel - - Displays the higher order path number of the

IF board.
Low Channel - - Displays the lower order path number of the

IF board.
Insert TU_AIS to Enable Auto l When Insert TU_AIS to E1_AIS is

E1_AIS Disable Auto, the TU_AIS is automatically
inserted after the E1_AIS is detected in
Auto the E1 channel.
l Generally, it is recommended that Auto
A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to PDH ports supported by Smart E1 interface
boards.
A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of PDH ports.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the General Attributes tab.

Port - - Displays the ID of a

service port.
Name - - Specifies or displays the

customized port name.

Port Mode Layer 1 Layer 2 l Specifies the working

Layer 2 mode of a PDH port.
set to Layer 1, the port
can transmit TDM
signals. A port can
transmit CES and
serial services only if
Layer 1.
set to Layer 2, the port
can transmit ATM
signals.
Encapsulation Type - - l Displays

Encapsulation Type
of a PDH port.
l When Port Mode is
Layer 1,
Encapsulation Type
takes its default value
Null.
l When Port Mode is
Layer 2,
Encapsulation Type
ATM.
A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of PDH ports.
Navigation Path
Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Port - - Displays the name of a

service port.

Frame Format Unframe CRC-4 Multiframe l Specifies the frame

Double Frame format.
CRC-4 Multiframe l If a CES service uses
the emulation mode of
CESoPSN, this
parameter can assume
the value CRC-4
Multiframe or
Double Frame. The
value CRC-4
Multiframe is
recommended.
l If a CES service uses
the emulation mode of
SAToP, this parameter
needs to assume the
value Unframe.
l The value of Frame
Format must be the
same at the local and
opposite ends.
Line Encoding Format - - Displays the line encoding

format. The parameter
value is always HDB3.

Loopback Mode Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l Specifies the loopback

Inloop status for a port.
Outloop l Non-Loopback
indicates that
loopbacks are
cancelled or not
performed.
l Inloop indicates that
the signals that need to
be transmitted to the
opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that
the received signals are
looped back.
l This function is used
for fault locating for
the PDH ports. This
function affects
services over related
ports. Therefore,
exercise precaution
before starting this
function.
l Generally, this
parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
Impedance - - Displays the port

impedance.

Frame Mode 30(ATM) - l 30 timeslots: In an E1

31(ATM,CES) frame format,
timeslots 1 to 15 and 17
to 31 are used to
transmit service data,
and timeslot 16 is used
to transmit signaling.
l 31 timeslots: In an E1
frame format,
timeslots 1 to 31 are
used to transmit
service data.
l This parameter is
unavailable if Frame
Format is Unframe.
l The port frame modes
need to be the same at
the local and opposite
ends.
Clock Mode Master Mode Master Mode l Master Mode: The

Slave Mode system clock is used as
the output clock of
System Clock Mode services.
l Slave Mode: The CES
ACR clock is used as
the output clock of
services. The port
inputting E1 clocks on
Slave is set to Slave
Mode.
l System Clock Mode:
The upstream E1 line
clock of the opposite
equipment is used as
the output clock of
services. The port
inputting E1 clocks on
Master is set to System
Clock Mode
Composite Port - - For the OptiX RTN 980,

Loopback this parameter cannot be
configured.
Service Load Indication - - For the OptiX RTN 980,

this parameter cannot be
configured.

Equalize Input Signal - - For the OptiX RTN 980,

configured.
Equalize Outpput Signal - - For the OptiX RTN 980,

configured.
A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards

This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the packet plane.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

Port - - Displays the port name.
Name - - Specifies the port name.
Enable Port Enabled Enabled l Specifies whether an

Disabled Ethernet port is
enabled. An Ethernet
port can receive,
process, and forward
Ethernet services only
if this parameter is set
to Enabled.
l Set this parameter
according to the
NOTE
Port 10 of the EFP8 board
does not support this
parameter.
Port 8 of the EMS6 board
parameter.

Port Mode Layer 2 Layer 2 l Port Mode specifies

Layer 3 the mode of the
Ethernet port.
Layer Mix
l If Port Mode is Layer
2, Encapsulation
Type can be set to
Null, 802.1Q, or
QinQ.
l If Port Mode is Layer
3, Encapsulation
Type can be set to
802.1Q only and the
port can carry MPLS
tunnels.
NOTE
does not support the value
Layer 3 and Layer Mix.
does not support the value
Layer 3 and Layer Mix.
Encapsulation Type Null - l Encapsulation Type

802.1Q specifies the method of
the port to process the
QinQ received packets.
l If you set
Encapsulation Type
to Null, the port
transparently
transmits the received
packets.
l If you set
Encapsulation Type
to 802.1Q, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1q standard.
l If you set
Encapsulation Type
to QinQ, the port
IEEE 802.1ad QinQ
standard.

Working Mode Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation l The Ethernet ports of

10M Half-Duplex different types support
different Working
10M Full-Duplex Mode.
100M Half-Duplex l When the equipment
100M Full-Duplex on the opposite side
1000M Full-Duplex works in auto-
negotiation mode, set
the Working Mode of
the equipment on the
local side to Auto-
Negotiation.
l When the equipment
on the opposite side
works in full-duplex
mode, set the
Working Mode of the
equipment on the local
side to 10M Full-
Duplex, 100M Full-
Duplex, or 1000M
Full-Duplex
depending on the port
rate of the equipment
on the opposite side.
l When the equipment
on the opposite side
works in half-duplex
mode, set the
Working Mode of the
equipment on the local
side to 10M Half-
Duplex, 100M Half-
Duplex, or Auto-
Negotiation
depending on the port
rate of the equipment
on the opposite side.
l GE electrical ports
support 10M full-
duplex, 10M half-
duplex, 100M full-
duplex, 100M half-
duplex, 1000M full-
duplex, and auto-
negotiation.
l GE optical ports
support 1000M full-

duplex and auto-

negotiation.
NOTE
parameter.
parameter.
The logical EG2D board
does not support half-
duplex.
Max Frame Length 1518 to 9600 1522 The value of Max Frame
(byte) Length(byte) should be
greater than the length of
any frame to be
transported.
Auto-Negotiation 10M Half-Duplex FE: 100M Full-Duplex l Auto-Negotiation

Ability 10M Full-Duplex GE: 1000M Full-Duplex Ability specifies the
auto-negotiation
100M Half-Duplex capability of the
100M Full-Duplex Ethernet port.
1000M Full-Duplex l For GE optical ports,
Auto-Negotiation
Ability can be set to
1000M Full-Duplex
only.
l Auto-Negotiation
Ability is valid only
when Working Mode
is set to Auto-
Negotiation.
Logical Port Attribute Optical Port - l This parameter

Electrical Port specifies the attribute
of the logical port.
l The SFP on the
EM6F,EM6FA,
CSHN board supports
the optical port and
electrical port.
Physical Port Attribute - - This parameter indicates

the attribute of the
physical port.

Traffic Monitoring Enabled Disabled This parameters indicates

Status Disabled the enabled status of the
traffic monitoring
function over an Ethernet
port.
Traffic Monitoring 1 to 30 15 This parameter indicates

Period (min) the traffic monitoring
period.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Flow Control tab.

Port - - This parameter indicates

the port name.

Non-Autonegotiation Disabled Disabled l Non-Autonegotiation

Flow Control Mode Enable Symmetric Flow Flow Control Mode is
Control valid only when
Working Mode is not
set to Auto-
Negotiation.
l Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
of the equipment on
the local side must be
consistent with the
non-autonegotiation
flow control mode of
the equipment on the
opposite side
l The OptiX RTN 980
supports only two non-
auto-negotiation flow
control modes,
namely, Disabled
mode and Enable
Symmetric Flow
Control mode.
NOTE
parameter.
parameter.

Auto-Negotiation Flow Disabled Disabled l Auto-Negotiation

Control Mode Enable Symmetric Flow Flow Control Mode is
Control valid only when
Working Mode is set
to Auto-Negotiation.
l Auto-Negotiation
Flow Control Mode
of the equipment on
the local side must be
consistent with the
control mode of the
equipment on the
opposite side
l The OptiX RTN 980
supports only two
control modes,
namely, Disabled
mode and Enable
Symmetric Flow
Control mode.
NOTE
parameter.
parameter.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.

NOTE
The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.


the port name.
QinQ Type Domain - - l When Encapsulation

Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to QinQ, you need
to set QinQ Type
Domain. The default
value is 88A8.
l When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to Null or 802.1Q,
you cannot set QinQ
Type Domain. In this
case, QinQ Type
Domain is displayed
as FFFF and cannot be
changed.
l QinQ Type Domain
should be set to the
same value for all the
ports on the EM6T/
EM6TA/EM6F/
EM6FA board or the
EG2D logical board.
TAG Tag Aware Tag Aware l If all the accessed

Access services are frames
with the VLAN tag
Hybrid (tagged frames), set
TAG to Tag Aware.
l If all the accessed
services are frames
without the VLAN tag
(untagged frames), set
TAG to Access.
l If the accessed
services contain
tagged frames and
untagged frames, set
TAG to Hybrid.
NOTE
TAG specifies the TAG
flag of a port. For details
about the TAG flags and
associated frame-
processing methods, see
Table A-2.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l Default VLAN ID is

valid only when TAG
is set to Access or
Hybrid.
l Default VLAN ID is
set according to the
actual situations.
NOTE
For details about the
functions of Default VLAN
ID, see Table A-2.
VLAN Priority 0 to 7 0 l VLAN Priority is

valid only when TAG
is set to Access or
Hybrid.
l When the VLAN
priority is required to
divide streams or to be
used for other
purposes, VLAN
Priority is set
according to the
In normal cases, it is
NOTE
For details about the
functions of VLAN
Priority, see Table A-2.
Table A-2 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames

Port Type of Data Processing Method
Frame
Tag Aware Access Hybrid
Ingress UNI Tagged frame The port receives the The port discards The port receives
frame. the frame. the frame.
Untagged frame The port discards the The ports add the The ports add the
frame. VLAN tag, to which VLAN tag, to which
Default VLAN ID Default VLAN ID
and VLAN and VLAN
Priority Priority
correspond, to the correspond, to the
frame and receive frame and receive
the frame. the frame.

Port Type of Data Processing Method

Frame
Egress UNI Tagged frame The port transmits The port strips the l If the VLAN ID
the frame. VLAN tag from the in the frame is
frame and then Default VLAN
transmits the frame. ID, the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not Default
VLAN ID, the
port directly
transmits the
frame.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

NOTE
Layer 3 Attributes is valid only if Port Mode is set to Layer 3.
Enable Tunnel Disabled Enabled l If Enable Tunnel is set

Enabled Enabled, a port
identifies and
processes MPLS
labels.
l Enable Tunnel is
available if you set
Port Mode to Layer 3
in the General
Attributes tab.

Specify IP Address Manually Unspecified l Specifies the method of

Unspecified setting the IP address
of a port.
l The value
Unspecified indicates
that the IP addresses do
not need to be
configured.
l The value Manually
indicates that the IP
address of the port can
be manually
configured.
IP Address - 0.0.0.0 l Specifies the IP

address of a port.
l This parameter is
available when Specify
IP Address is
Manually.
l The IP addresses of
different ports on the
NE cannot be in the
same network
segment, but the IP
addresses of the ports
at both ends of the
MPLS tunnel must be
in the same network
segment.
IP Mask - 255.255.255.252 l Specifies the subnet

mask of a port.
l This parameter is
available when Specify
IP Address is
Manually.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
Navigation Path



the port name.
Port Physical - - This parameter indicates

Parameters the physical parameters of
the port.
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter

Inloop specifies the loopback
state at the MAC layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet signals
transmitted to the
opposite end are
looped back.
l In normal cases, it is
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter

Inloop specifies the loopback
state at the PHY layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet signals
transmitted to the
opposite end are
looped back.
l In normal cases, it is
MAC Address - - This parameter indicates

the MAC address of the
port.
Transmitting Rate(kbit/ - - This parameter indicates

s) the rate at which the data
packets are transmitted.
Receiving Rate(kbit/s) - - This parameter indicates

the rate at which the data
packets are received.
Loopback Check Enabled Disabled This parameter specifies

Disabled whether to enable loop
detection, which is used to
check whether a loop
exists on the port.

Loopback Port Block Enabled Disabled This parameter indicates

Disabled whether to enable the loop
port shutdown function.
Egress PIR Bandwidth - - This parameter indicates

(Kbit/s) the egress PIR bandwidth.
Broadcast Packet Disabled Disabled l This parameter

Suppression Enabled specifies whether to
limit the traffic rate of
the broadcast packets
according to the
proportion of the
broadcast packets in
the total packets.
When the equipment at
the opposite end may
encounter a broadcast
storm, this parameter
is set to Enabled.
l If Ethernet services are
E-LAN services, the
recommended value is
Enabled.
l This parameter takes
effect only for E-LAN
services in the ingress
direction.
Broadcast Packet 0 to 100 30 When the proportion of

Suppression Threshold the broadcast packets in
the total packets exceeds
the value of this
parameter, the received
broadcast packets are
discarded. The value of
this parameter should be
more than the proportion
of the broadcast packets in
the total packets before
the broadcast storm
occurs. In normal cases,
default value.
Network Cable Mode - - This parameter displays

the working mode of the
network cable connected
to an Ethernet port.

A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to serial ports.
A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of series ports.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Port from the Function Tree.

Port - - Displays the name of the

port where a serial service
is configured.

Level - - l Specifies or displays

the serial port level.
l 64K Timeslot: 64 kbit/
s timeslots of E1
signals can be bound.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports 64K Timeslot
only.
Used Port - - Displays the physical port

that carries a serial
service.
64K Timeslot - - Displays the timeslots that

a serial service occupies.
The timeslots can be
consecutive or not.
Port Mode Layer 2 Layer 3 l Displays or specifies

Layer 3 the port mode.
l A port supports ATM
encapsulation if its
Port Mode is Layer
2. A port does not
support encapsulation
if its Port Mode is
Layer 3.

Encapsulation Type - - l Displays and specifies

the encapsulation type
of a PW.
l When Port Mode is
Layer 2, this
parameter displays
ATM; when Port
Mode is Layer 3, this
parameter displays
Null.
A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports

This topic describes parameters that are used for creating serial ports.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the New tab.

Port Number(e.g:1,3-6) - - Specifies the port where

the serial service is
configured.
Name - - Specifies the customized

port name.
Level 64K Timeslot 64K Timeslot l Specifies the serial

port level.
set to 64K Timeslot ,
E1 timeslots can be
bound.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports only the parameter
value 64K Timeslot .
Used Board - - Specifies the board where

a serial port is located.
Used Port - - Displays the board where

a serial port is located.

High Channel - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this parameter.
Low Channel(e.g:1,3-6) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

64K Timeslot(e.g:1,3-6) - - Specifies the 64 kbit/s

timeslots to be bound with
the serial port. The
timeslots can be
consecutive or not.
A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF_ETH interfaces.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
Parameters
Port - - This parameter indicates the corresponding

IF port.
Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

Port Mode Layer 2 Layer 2 l If Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation

Layer 3 Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or
QinQ.
Layer Mix
l If Port Mode is Layer 3, Encapsulation
Type can be set to 802.1Q only and the
port can carry tunnels.
l If Port Mode is Layer Mix,
Encapsulation Type can be set to only
802.1Q or QinQ and the port can carry
both tunnels and Native Ethernet
services.

Encapsulation Null 802.1Q l Encapsulation Type specifies the

Type 802.1Q method of the port to process the
received packets.
QinQ
l If Encapsulation Type is set to Null, the
port transparently transmits the received
packets.
l If Encapsulation Type is set to
802.1Q, the port identifies the packets
that comply with the IEEE 802.1Q
standard.
l If Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ,
the port identifies the packets that
comply with the IEEE 802.1ad QinQ
standard.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
Parameters for Layer 2 Attributes

NOTE
The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.

IF port.
QinQ Type - - l When Encapsulation Type in the

Domain General Attributes tab page is set to
QinQ, you need to set QinQ Type
Domain. The default value is 88A8.
l When Encapsulation Type in the
General Attributes tab page is set to
Null or 802.1Q, you cannot set QinQ
Type Domain. In this case, QinQ Type
Domain is displayed as FFFF and
cannot be changed.

Tag Tag Aware Tag Aware l If all the accessed services are frames
Access that contain the VLAN tag (tagged
frames), set Tag to "Tag Aware".
Hybrid
l If all the accessed services are frames
that do not contain the VLAN tag
(untagged frames), set Tag to "Access".
l If the accessed services contain tagged
frames and untagged frames, set Tag to
"Hybrid".
NOTE
Tag specifies the TAG flag of a port. For details
about the TAG flags and associated frame-
processing methods, see Table A-3.
Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l Default VLAN ID is valid only when

TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l Default VLAN ID needs to be set
according to the actual situations.
NOTE
For details about the functions of Default VLAN
ID, see Table A-3.
VLAN Priority 0 0 l VLAN Priority is valid only when

1 TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l When the VLAN priority is required to
2
divide streams or to be used for other
3 purposes, VLAN Priority needs to be set
4 according to the planning information. In
normal cases, it is recommended that you
5 use the default value.
6 NOTE
For details about the functions of VLAN
7
Priority, see Table A-3.
Table A-3 Data frame processing

Status Type of Data Processing Method
Frame
Ingress Port Tagged frame The port receives the The port discards The port receives
frame. the frame. the frame.

Status Type of Data Processing Method

Frame
Untagged frame The port discards the The port receives The port receives
frame. the frame after the the frame after the
VLAN tag that VLAN tag that
corresponds to corresponds to
"Default VLAN ID" "Default VLAN ID"
and "VLAN and "VLAN
Priority" is added to Priority" is added to
the frame. the frame.
Egress Port Tagged frame The port transmits The port strips the l If the VLAN ID
the frame. VLAN tag from the in the frame is
frame and then "Default VLAN
transmits the frame. ID", the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not "Default
VLAN ID", the
port directly
transmits the
frame.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of an IF_ETH port.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.

Port - - Displays the

corresponding IF port.

Enable Tunnel Disabled Disabled l A port identifies and

Enabled processes MPLS
labels, if its Enable
Tunnel is set
Enabled.
l Enable Tunnel is
available if you set
Port Mode to Layer
3 in the General
Attributes tab.
Specify IP Address Manually Unspecified l Specifies the method

Unspecified of setting the IP
address of a port.
l The value
Unspecified indicates
that the IP addresses do
not need to be
configured for a port.
l The value Manually
indicates that the IP
address of a port can be
manually configured.
IP Address - 0.0.0.0 l Specifies the IP

address for a port.
l This parameter is
available when
Specify IP Address is
Manually.
l The IP addresses of
different ports on the
NE cannot be in the
same network
segment, but the IP
addresses of the ports
at both ends of the
MPLS tunnel must be
in the same network
segment.
IP Mask - 255.255.255.252 l Specifies the subnet

mask of a port.
l This parameter is
available when
Specify IP Address is
Manually.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
Parameters for Advanced Attributes


IF port.
Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter specifies the ID of the

radio link. As the identifier of a radio
between sites.
l The ID of each radio link of an NE must
be unique, and the link IDs at both ends
of a radio link must be the same.
Received Radio - - l This parameter indicates the received ID

Link ID of the radio link.
ID does not match with the preset value
of Radio Link ID at the local end, the
local end inserts the AIS signal to the
IDs do not match.

IF Port Loopback - - l This parameter indicates the loopback

status of the IF interface.
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is cancelled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the IF signals
transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received IF
signals are looped back.
l Generally, this parameter is used to
locate the faults that occur at each IF
interface. The IF loopback is used for
diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the
services at the related ports are affected.
In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
Composite Port - - l This parameter indicates the loopback

Loopback status on the composite interface.
l Inloop indicates that the composite
signals transmitted to the opposite end
are looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received
composite signals are looped back.
Non-Loopback.
Error Frame Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Discard Enabled Disabled whether to discard the Ethernet frame
when a CRC error occurs in an Ethernet
frame.
l If the Ethernet service transmitted on the
IF_ETH port is a voice service or a video
service, you can set this parameter to
Disabled.
MAC Address - - This parameter indicates the MAC address

of the port.
Transmitting Rate - - This parameter indicates the transmit rate of

(Kbit/s) the local port.
Receiving Rate - - This parameter indicates the receive rate of

(Kbit/s) the local port.

MAC Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter specifies the loopback

Inloop state at the MAC layer. When this
parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet
signals transmitted to the opposite end
are looped back.
you use the default value.
NOTE
The ISU2 and ISX2 boards can not be set to
Inloop.
Speed Disabled Disabled l If Speed Transmission at L2 is set to

Transmission at Enabled Enabled, the Layer-2 Ethernet packets
L2 transmitted at microwave ports will be
compressed to improve transmission
efficiency.
l If the Layer 2 header compression
function can be enabled for the ISU2 or
ISX2 board, it is recommended that you
set Speed Transmission at L2 to
Enabled.
l The settings of Speed Transmission at
L2 must be the same at both ends of a
radio link.
NOTE
parameter.
Speed Disabled Disabled l If Speed Transmission at L3 is set to

Transmission at Enabled Enabled, the IP packets transmitted at
L3 microwave ports will be compressed to
improve transmission efficiency.
l If the Layer 3 header compression
function can be enabled for the ISU2 or
ISX2 board, it is recommended that you
set Speed Transmission at L3 to
Enabled.
l The settings of Speed Transmission at
L3 must be the same at both ends of a
radio link.
NOTE
l The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this
parameter.
l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to
Enabled, Encapsulation Type of the ISU2
and ISX2 boards cannot be set to Null.
Loopback Check Disabled Disabled This parameter specifies whether to enable

Enabled loop detection, which is used to check
whether a loop exists on the port.

Loopback Port Disabled Disabled This parameter indicates whether to enable

Shutdown Enabled the automatic shut-down of looped ports.
Enabling Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether to limit

Broadcast Packet Enabled the traffic rate of the broadcast packets
Suppression according to the proportion of the
broadcast packets in the total packets.
When the equipment at the opposite end
may encounter a broadcast storm, this
parameter is set to Enabled.
l If Ethernet services are E-LAN services,
the recommended value is Enabled.
l This parameter takes effect only for E-
LAN services in the ingress direction.
Enabling 0 to 100 30 When the proportion of the broadcast

Broadcast Packet packets in the total packets exceeds the value
Suppression of this parameter, the received broadcast
Threshold packets are discarded. The value of this
parameter should be more than the
proportion of the broadcast packets in the
total packets before the broadcast storm
occurs. In normal cases, this parameter is set
to default value.
A.5.5 IF Board Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to IF boards.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.
Navigation Path
l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the IF Attributes tab.
Parameters

IF interface.

Radio Link ID 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

2,4E1,3.5MHz, work mode of the radio link in "work
16QAM mode number, service capacity, channel
spacing, modulation mode" format.
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K l This parameter is set according to the
network plan. The work modes of the IF
4,8E1,7MHz, boards at the two ends of a radio link
16QAM must be the same.
5,16E1,28MHz,QP NOTE
SK The IF1 board supports this parameter.
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM
IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1 Hybrid(Native E1 l Displays or specifies the type of services

+ETH) +ETH) carried by the IF board.
Hybrid(Native l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
STM-1+ETH) Native E1 services, set this parameter to
SDH Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
Native STM-1 services, set this
parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1
+ETH).
l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services,
set this parameter to SDH.
NOTE
parameter.

Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of

a radio link. As the identifier of a radio
between sites.
Link ID at the local end, the local end
inserts the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same
time, the local end reports MW_LIM
IDs do not match.
l Link ID is set according to the network
plan. Each radio link of an NE should
have a unique link ID, and the link IDs
at both ends of a radio link should be the
same.
Received Radio - - l This parameter indicates the received ID

Link ID of the radio link.
Radio Link ID at the local end, the local
end inserts the AIS signal to the
IDs do not match.
l When the radio link becomes faulty, this
parameter is displayed as an invalid
value.

IF Port Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Inloop loopback status of the IF interface.
Outloop l Non-Loopback indicates that the
l Inloop indicates that the IF signals
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received IF
l Generally, IF Port Loopback is used to
locate the faults that occur at each IF
interface. The IF loopback is used for
diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the
services at the related ports are affected.
In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
2M Wayside Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Enable Statusa Enabled whether the radio link transmits the
wayside E1 service.
l The wayside E1 service can be supported
by the IF1 board in the
7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM,
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM mode.
2M Wayside Input - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Boarda slot in which the 2M wayside service is
accessed.
l This parameter can be set only when 2M
Wayside Enable Status is set to
Enabled.
l The wayside E1 service can be supported
by the IF1 board in the
7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM,
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM mode.
350 MHz Stop Stop l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Consecutive Wave Start status of transmitting the 350 MHz
Status carrier signals at the IF interface.
l 350 MHz Consecutive Wave Status
can be set to Start in the commissioning
process only. In normal cases, this
parameter is set to Stop. Otherwise, the
services are interrupted.

XPIC Enabledb Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether the XPIC function of the XPIC
IF board is enabled.
l If the XPIC IF board does not perform
the XPIC function, XPIC Enabled
should be set to Disabled.
Enable IEEE-1588 Enabled Disabled Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot needs to be

Timeslotc Disabled set consistently between two ends of a radio
link.
NOTE
l a. The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support way-side services.

l b. The IFU2, ISU2, and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function.
l c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.
Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration

NOTE
The IF1 board does not support Hybrid/AM configuration.

IF port.
IF Channel 3.5M - IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the

Bandwidth 7M channel spacing of the corresponding radio
link. This parameter is set according to the
14M network plan.
28M NOTE
40M l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1
56M board.
l The IFU2 board does not support the value
40M.
l The IFX2 board does not support the values
40M.
l IF Channel Bandwidth can be set to 3.5M
only for the ISU2 board.


l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure
the reliable transmission of the E1
services and provide bandwidth
adaptively for the Ethernet services
when the AM function is enabled.
l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM
function when IF Service Type is
SDH.
l When IF Channel Bandwidth is 3.5M
for the ISU2 board, the AM function is
unavailable and AM Enable Status
must be set to Disabled.

of the Guarantee 16QAM Enable Status is set to Enabled.
AM Capacity l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee
32QAM
AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order
service transmission bandwidth that the
Hybrid radio must ensure and the


of the Full AM 16QAM Enable Status is set to Enabled.
Capacity l Modulation Mode of the Full AM
32QAM
Capacity specifies the highest-order
bandwidth of the services that need to be
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity must be higher than Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
Manually QPSK QPSK l This parameter specifies the modulation

Specified 16QAM scheme that the radio link uses for signal
Modulation Mode transmission.
32QAM
64QAM Enable Status is set to Disabled.
128QAM
256QAM
STM-1 Capacity - - l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF

board.
l This parameter is available only when IF
Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH) and SDH.
l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set
to 0 or 1.
l If IF Service Type is SDH, this
parameter can be set to 1 or 2.
NOTE
The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support this
parameter.
Enable E1 Priority Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether to

Enabled enable the E1 priority function.

Guarantee E1 - - l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled,

Capacity this parameter needs to be set according
to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity,
and the actually transmitted services.
l If AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, this parameter needs to be set
according to IF Channel Bandwidth,
Manually Specified Modulation
Mode, and the actually transmitted
services.
Guarantee E1 - - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF

Capacity Range board in guarantee capacity modulation
mode.
Data Service - - Displays the data service bandwidth of the

Bandwidth(Mbit/ IF board.
s)
Full E1 Capacity - - l This parameter specifies the number of

transmitted E1 services in Modulation
Mode of the Full AM Capacity.
l This parameter is valid if Enable E1
Priority is set to Enabled.
l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity
mode ≤ Service bandwidth in full
capacity mode - Service bandwidth in
guarantee capacity mode + E1 service
bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode.
In addition, the number of E1 services in
full capacity modulation mode should be
smaller than or equal to the maximum
number of E1 services in full capacity
modulation mode.
l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the
same value at both ends of a radio link.
Full E1 Capacity - - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF

board in full capacity modulation mode.
Transmit-End - - Displays the modulation mode at the

Modulation Mode transmit mode.

Receive-End - - Displays the modulation mode at the receive

Modulation Mode mode.
Guarantee AM - - Displays the guarantee AM service capacity.

Service Capacity
(Mbit/s)
Full AM Service - - Displays the full AM service capacity.

Capacity(Mbit/s)
Transmitted AM - - Displays the transmitted AM service

Service Capacity capacity.
(Mbit/s)
Received AM - - Displays the received AM service capacity.

Service Capacity
(Mbit/s)
E1 Capacity For - - Displays the number of configured high-

High Priority priority E1s.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
Navigation Path
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
Parameters

IF interface.

ATPC Enable Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the

Status Enabled ATPC function is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled
and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB
higher or lower than the central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold at the receive
end, the receiver notifies the transmitter
to decrease or increase the transmit
power until the RSL is within the range
that is 2 dB higher or lower than the
central value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold.
is recommended that you set ATPC
Enable Status to Disabled.
attributes.
ATPC Upper - -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPC
threshold to a value for the expected
ATPC Lower - -70.0 receive power.
Threshold(dBm)
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10
dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic
Threshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.

ATPC Automatic Enabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the

Threshold Enable Disabled ATPC automatic threshold function is
Status enabled.
l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Enabled, the equipment
automatically uses the preset ATPC
upper and lower thresholds according to
the work mode of the radio link.
l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Disabled, you need to
manually set ATPC Upper Automatic
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Automatic Threshold(dBm).
ATPC Upper - - l This parameter indicates that the

Automatic equipment automatically uses the preset
Threshold(dBm) ATPC upper and lower thresholds.
l This parameter is valid only when ATPC
ATPC Lower - -
Automatic Threshold Enable Status is
Automatic
set to Enabled.
Threshold(dBm)

This section describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
Navigation Path
l In the NE Explorer, select the IF board, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface
l Click the AM Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters

IF interface.
Modulation Mode - - Displays the modulation schemes.

E1 Capacity - - l You can specify the number of E1s that

can be transmitted in intermediate
modulation scheme, by setting the
advanced attributes correspondingly.
l Generally, it is recommended that this
parameter takes the default value. To
ensure that a specific number of E1s can
be transmitted in intermediate
modulation scheme, adjust the E1
capacity in each modulation scheme
according to the network planning
information.
l If the E1 priority function is enabled, the
maximum number of allowed E1
services in the current mode = Min
{[Bandwidth of the air interface in the
current mode - (Bandwidth for the
assured capacity - Assured E1 number x
2Mbps)]/2Mbps, E1 number in the
highest-gain modulation mode}.
Data Service - - Displays the data service bandwidth.

Bandwidth(Mbit/
s)
A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Port - - This parameter indicates the port for the

ATPC adjustment.
Event NO. - - This parameter indicates the number of the

ATPC adjustment event.
Adjustment Time - - This parameter indicates the time of the

ATPC adjustment.
Adjustment - - This parameter indicates the direction of the

Direction adjustment at the port.

Switchover - - This parameter indicates the switching

operation at the port.
Transmitted - - This parameter indicates the transmitted

Power(dBm) power of the port to be switched.
Received Power - - This parameter indicates the received power

(dBm) of the port to be switched.
A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
Navigation Path
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters

PRBS test.
Direction Cross Cross l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Tributary direction of the PRBS test.
l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test
is performed to check the connectivity of
the cable from the tributary board to the
DDF.
l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS
test is performed to check the processing
of the service from the tributary board to
the NE at the remote end.
Duration 1 to 255 1 This parameter indicates or specifies the

duration of the PRBS test.
Measured Time s s This parameter indicates or specifies the

10min time unit used for the PRBS test.
h
Start Time - - This parameter indicates the start time of the

PRBS test.
Progress - - This parameter indicates the progress

percentage of the PRBS test.

Total PRBS - - This parameter indicates the number of bit

errors that occur in the PRBS test.
Accumulating Selected Deselected This parameter specifies whether to display

Mode Deselected the values in accumulative mode. If
Accumulating Mode is selected, it
indicates that the values are displayed in
accumulative mode.
A.5.6 ODU Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to ODUs.
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.
Navigation Path
l Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.
Parameters
Board - - This parameter indicates the corresponding

ODU.
Transmit - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Frequency(MHz) transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the central frequency of the channel.
l The value of Transmit Frequency
(MHz) must not be less than the sum of
the minimum transmit frequency
channel spacing, and must not be more
than the difference between the
maximum transmit frequency supported
by the ODU and a half of the channel
spacing.
frequencies at both ends of a radio link
should be one T/R spacing.

T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference of the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
spacing, T/R Spacing(MHz) is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
by the ODU itself, and T/R Spacing
(MHz) should be set according to the
technical specifications of the ODU.
radio link.
Actual Transmit - - This parameter indicates the actual transmit

Actual Receive - - This parameter indicates the actual receive

Actual T/R - - This parameter indicates the actual T/R

Spacing(MHz) spacing of the ODU.
The range of - - This parameter indicates the working range

frequency point of the frequency of the ODU.
(MHz)
A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
l Click the Power Attributes tab.

Parameters

ODU.
Maximum - - l Maximum Transmit Power(dBm) is

Transmit Power set according to the network plan. This
modulation module.
exceed Maximum Transmit Power
(dBm).
Transmit Power - - l Transmit Power(dBm) is set according

(dBm) to the network plan. This parameter
specifies the transmit power of the ODU.
This parameter cannot be set to a value
that exceeds the nominal power rang of
the ODU or a value that exceeds
Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).

Power to Be -90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to

Received(dBm) set the expected receive power of the
ODU and is mainly used in the antenna
alignment stage. After this parameter is
set, the NE automatically enables the
function.
l Power to Be Received(dBm) is set
according to the network plan. When this
parameter takes the default value, the
function is disabled.
TX High - - l If the value of the actual transmit power

Threshold(dBm) of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the
system separately records the duration
when the value of the actual transmit
power of the ODU is greater than the
preset value of TX High Threshold
(dBm) and the duration when the value
of the actual transmit power of the ODU
is greater than the preset value of TX
Low Threshold(dBm) in the
performance events.
l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and
is lower than the preset value of TX High
Threshold(dBm), the system records
the duration when the value of the actual
transmit power of the ODU is greater
than the preset value of TX Low
Threshold(dBm) in the performance
events.

TX Low Threshold - - l If the value of the actual transmit power

(dBm) of the ODU is lower than the preset value
of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the
system does not record it.
l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX
Low Threshold(dBm) are valid only
when the ATPC function is enabled.
RX High - - l If the value of the actual receive power

Threshold(dBm) of the ODU is lower than the preset value
of RX Low Threshold(dBm), the
system records the duration when the
value of the actual receive power of the
ODU is lower than the preset value of
RX Low Threshold(dBm) and duration
when the value of the actual transmit
power of the ODU is lower than the
preset value of RX High Threshold
(dBm)in the performance events.
l If the value of the actual receive power
value of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and
is lower than the preset value of RX High
Threshold(dBm), the system records
the duration when the value of the actual
receive power of the ODU is Lower than
the preset value of RX High Threshold
(dBm) in the performance events.
l If the value of the actual receive power

RX Low Threshold - - value of RX High Threshold(dBm), the

(dBm) system does not record it.
Actual Transmit - - l This parameter indicates the actual

Power(dBm) transmit power of the ODU.
l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.
Actual Receive - - This parameter indicates the actual receive

Power(dBm) power of the ODU.
Actual range of - - This parameter indicates the range of the

Power(dBm) actual transmit power of the ODU.

Power Type output power of the ODU.
A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of
the ODU.
Navigation Path
Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Equipment Information tab.

Parameters

ODU.
Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter indicates the frequency band

where the ODU operates.
Equipment Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipment

type of the ODU.
l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission
capacity only and are irrelevant to the
type of transmitted service.
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - This parameter indicates the T/R spacing of

the ODU.
Intermediate - - This parameter indicates the IF frequency

Frequency bandwidth of the ODU.
Bandwidth (MHz)
IF Bandwidth - - Displays the IF bandwidth type.

Type
Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether the

ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
l The transmit frequency of a Tx high
station is one T/R spacing higher than the
transmit frequency of a Tx low station.

Power Type output power of the ODU.
Produce Time - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing

time of the ODU.
Produce SN - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing

serial number and the manufacturer code of
the ODU.
A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
l Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Parameters

ODU.
RF Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Inloop loopback status of the RF interface of the
ODU.
loopback is canceled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the RF signals
looped back.
l RF Loopback function is used for fault
locating for the RF interfaces. The RF
Loopback function is used for diagnosis
and may affect the services that are
transmitted over the interfaces. Hence,
exercise caution before starting this
function.
l In normal cases, RF Loopback is set to
Non-Loopback.
Configure unmute unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Transmission mute transmit status of the ODU.
Status l If Configure Transmission Status is set
to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does
not work but can normally receive
microwave signals.
l If Configure Transmission Status is set
to unmute, the ODU can normally
transmit and receive microwave signals.
l In normal cases, Configure
Transmission Status is set to unmute.
Actual - - Displays the ODU manufacturer

Transmission information.
Status
Factory - - This parameter indicates the manufacturer

Information information about the ODU.
Remarks - - Specifies the remarks of the ODU.
A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards

This topic describes parameters that are related to SDH interface boards.


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
1. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.
Parameters

SDH interface.
Optical Interface - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

Namea name of the optical interface.
Laser Switcha On On l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Off on/off state of the laser.
l This parameter is set for SDH optical
interfaces only.
On.
Optical(Electrical) Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Interface Inloop loopback status on the SDH interface.
Loopbacka l Non-Loopback indicates that the
Outloop
l Inloop indicates that the SDH signals
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received SDH
l This function is used for fault locating
for the SDH interfaces. The Optical
(Electrical) Interface Loopback
function is used for diagnosis and may
affect the services that are transmitted
over the interfaces. Hence, exercise
precaution before starting this function.
Non-Loopback.

VC4 Loopbackb Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Inloop loopback status in the VC-4 path.
Outloop l Non-Loopback indicates that the
l Inloop indicates that the VC-4 signals
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received
VC-4 signals are looped back.
for the VC-4 paths. The VC4
Loopback function is used for diagnosis
and may affect the services that are
transmitted over the interfaces. Hence,
exercise precaution before starting this
function.
Non-Loopback.
NOTE
l a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box.
l b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.
A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Optical Interface - - This parameter indicates the corresponding

optical interface.

Auto Shutdown Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Enabled whether the Auto Laser Shutdown
function is enabled or disabled for the
laser.
l The ALS function allows the laser to shut
down automatically when an optical port
does not carry services, an optical fiber
is broken, or no optical signal is received.
l You can set On Period(ms), Off Period
(ms), and Continuously On-test Period
(ms) only when this parameter is set to
Enabled.
On Period(ms) 1000 to 3000 2000 This parameter indicates or specifies the

period when a shutdown laser automatically
starts up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.
Off Period(ms) 2000 to 300000 60000 This parameter indicates or specifies the
period when the laser does not work (with
the ALS function being enabled).
Continuously On- 2000 to 300000 90000 This parameter indicates or specifies the
test Period(ms) period when a shutdown laser is manually
started up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.
A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards

This topic describes parameters that are related to PDH interface boards.
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH ports.
Navigation Path
Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select By Board/Port(Channel).
3. Select Port from the list box.

Parameters

port.
Port Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

name of the port.
Tributary Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Loopback Inloop loopback status in the associated path of
the tributary unit.
Outloop
l Inloop indicates that the PDH signals
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received PDH
for the paths of the tributary unit. The
Tributary Loopback function is used
for diagnosis and may affect the services
that are transmitted over the interfaces.
Hence, exercise precaution before
starting this function.
Non-Loopback.
Port Impedance - - This parameter indicates the impedance of a

path, which depends on the tributary unit.
Service Load Load Load l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Indication Non-Loaded service loading status in a specific path.
l When this parameter is set to Load, the
board detects whether alarms exist in the
path.
Loaded, the board does not detect
whether there are alarms in the path.
l If a path does not carry any services, you
can set this parameter to Non-Loaded
for the path to mask all the alarms. If a
path carries services, you need to set this
parameter to Load for the path.
Input Signal Unequalized Unequalized l This parameter indicates whether the

Equalization Equalized input signals are equalized.
parameter to default value.

Retiming Mode Normal Normal l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Retiming Mode of retiming mode of a specific path.
Tributary Clock l By using the retiming function, the
Retiming Mode of retiming reference signal from the SDH
Cross-Connect network and the service data signal are
Clock combined and then sent to the client
equipment, therefore decreasing the
output jitter in the signal. In this way, the
retiming function ensures that the service
code flow can normally transfer the
retiming reference signal.
l When this parameter is set to Normal,
the retiming function is not used.
l When this parameter is set to Retiming
Mode of Tributary Clock, the retiming
function is used with the clock of the
upstream tributary unit traced.
l When this parameter is set to Retiming
Mode of Cross-Connect Clock, the
retiming function is used with the clock
of the cross-connect unit traced.
l It is recommended that the external
clock, instead of the retiming function,
should be used to provide reference
clock signals for the equipment.
l If the retiming function is required, it is
recommended that you set this parameter
to Retiming Mode of Cross-connect
Clock.
Port Service Type - - This parameter indicates the type of services

that are processed in a path. It depends on
the services that are transmitted in a path.
Output Signal Unequalized Unequalized l This parameter indicates whether the

Equalization Equalized output signals are equalized.
default value.

E1 Frame Format Unframe Unframe Specifies the E1 frame format for E1 ports.
Double Frame l To detect E1 BER performance on the
CRC-4 Multiframe OptiX RTN 980, set E1 Frame
Format of the local E1 port to the same
value as that of the opposite E1 port. It is
recommended that E1 Frame Format of
both the local and opposite E1 ports be
CRC-4 Multiframe.
l In other scenarios wherein the OptiX
RTN 980 is used, it is recommended that
E1 Frame Format take its default value
Unframe. If E1 Frame Format is
Unframe, the OptiX RTN 980
transparently transmits E1 frames and
the local E1 port allows for
interconnection with another E1 port
whose E1 Frame Format is Double
Frame or CRC-4 Multiframe.
NOTE
E1 Frame Format needs to be set to the same
value at both ends of an E1 link.
A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
Navigation Path
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters

PRBS test.

Direction Cross Cross l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Tributary direction of the PRBS test.
l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test
is performed to check the connectivity of
the cable from the tributary board to the
DDF.
l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS
test is performed to check the processing
of the service from the tributary board to
the NE at the remote end.
Duration 1 to 255 1 This parameter indicates or specifies the

duration of the PRBS test.
Measured Time s s This parameter indicates or specifies the

10min time unit used for the PRBS test.
h
Start Time - - This parameter indicates the start time of the

PRBS test.
Progress - - This parameter indicates the progress

percentage of the PRBS test.
Total PRBS - - This parameter indicates the number of bit

errors that occur in the PRBS test.
Accumulating Selected Deselected This parameter specifies whether to display

Mode Deselected the values in accumulative mode. If
Accumulating Mode is selected, it
indicates that the values are displayed in
accumulative mode.
A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead

This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads
(RSOHs).
Navigation Path
1. Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead
Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.
2. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.

Parameters for Setting the Display Format

Display in Text Selected Selected This parameter specifies the display in the
Format Deselected text format.
Display in Selected Deselected This parameter specifies the display in the

Hexadecimal Deselected hexadecimal format.

Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.
J0 to be Sent - [16 Bytes]HuaWei If the NE at the opposite end reports the

([Mode]Content) SBS J0_MM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the J0 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
J0 to be Received - [Disabled] l This parameter specifies the J0 byte to be

([Mode]Content) received.
l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the
board does not monitor the received J0
byte.
default value.
J0 Received - - This parameter indicates the J0 byte that is

([Mode]Content) actually received.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).
Navigation Path
1. Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.



Parameters for the Trace Byte J1


([Mode]Content) SBS HP_TIM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the J1 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
J1 to be Received - [Disabled] l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the

([Mode]Content) board does not monitor the received J1
byte.
default value.
J1 Received - - This parameter displays the J1 byte that is

([Mode]Content) actually received.
Parameters for the Signal Flag C2

C2 to be Sent - - If the NE at the opposite end reports the

HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the C2 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
C2 to be Received - - If the NE at the local end reports the

HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the C2 byte to be sent at the
opposite end.
C2 Received - - This parameter displays the C2 byte that is

actually received.

Parameters for Overhead Termination

VC4 Overhead Termination Auto l If this parameter is set to Pass-

Termination Pass-Through Through, the NE forwards the original
overhead after monitoring the VC-4 path
Auto overhead regardless of the C2 byte.
l If this parameter is set to Termination,
the NE generates the new VC-4 path
overhead according to the board setting
after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead
regardless of the C2 byte.
l If this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4
path overhead in the VC-4 pass-through
service is passed through, and the VC-4
path overhead in the VC-12 service is
terminated.
default value.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-12 path overheads (POHs).
Navigation Path
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function
Tree.



Parameters for the Trace Byte


SBS LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC12 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the J2 byte to
be received by the NE at the opposite end.
J2 to be Received - [Disabled] l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the

board does not monitor the received J2
byte.
default value.
NOTE
IF boards do not support this parameter.
J2 Received - - This parameter displays the J2 byte that is

actually received.
Parameters for the Signal Flag

Signal Label - - If the NE at the opposite end reports the

(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm, this
be Sent parameter is set according to the V5 byte to
be received at the opposite end.
Signal Label - - If the NE at the local end reports the

(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm, this
be Received parameter is set according to the V5 byte to
be sent at the opposite end.
NOTE
IF boards do not support this parameter.
Signal Label - - This parameter displays the V5 byte that is

(L1,L2,L3 of V5) actually received.
Received
A.5.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Virtual Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters of Ethernet virtual interfaces.

Navigation Path
Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Virtual Interface from the Function
Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
3. Choose New > Create Ethernet Virtual Interface.
Basic Attributes of Ethernet Virtual Interfaces

Port 1 to 8191 - This parameter displays or specifies the port

number of an Ethernet virtual interface.
Name - - This parameter displays or specifies the port

name of an Ethernet virtual interface.
Port Type EoA Virtual EoA Virtual This parameter displays or specifies the port
Interface Interface type of an Ethernet virtual interface.
VLAN Sub Interface The OptiX RTN 980 allows Port Type to be
set to VLAN Sub Interface only.
Board - - This parameter displays or specifies the

board where an Ethernet virtual interface is
located.
Port - - This parameter displays or specifies the port

where an Ethernet virtual interface is
located.
VPI - - Setting this parameter is not available.
VCI - - Setting this parameter is not available.
AAL5 - - Setting this parameter is not available.

Encapsulation
Type
VLAN - - This parameter specifies the VLAN ID that

an Ethernet virtual interface uses.
This parameter can be set when Port Type
is VLAN Sub Interface.
Specify IP Address Manually Unspecified This parameter specifies whether to set the
Unspecified IP address for a port.
l Unspecified: indicates that the IP
address will not be specified for a port.
l Manually: indicates that the IP address
will be specified for a port. If the
specified IP address is a valid value, it
will become the IP address of this port.

IP Address - 0.0.0.0 This parameter specifies the IP address of a

port.
l This parameter can be set only when
Specify IP Address is Manually.
l The IP addresses of different ports on an
NE must be in different network
segments, but the IP addresses of the
ports at both ends of an MPLS tunnel
must be in the same network segment.
IP Mask - 255.255.255.252 This parameter specifies the subnet mask for

a port.
This parameter can be set only when Specify
IP Address is Manually.
Enable Tunnel Enabled Disabled This parameter specifies whether to enable

Disabled an MPLS tunnel.
This parameter specifies the MPLS enabled
status for a port. If you set Enable Tunnel
to Enabled for a port, the port identifies and
processes MPLS labels.
MAC Address - - This parameter displays the port MAC

address of an Ethernet virtual interface.
Layer 3 Attributes
Port - - This parameter displays an IF port.
Enable Tunnel Enabled Disabled This parameter displays or specifies whether

Disabled to enable an MPLS tunnel.
Set the MPLS enabled status for a port. If
you set Enable Tunnel to Enabled, the port
identifies and processes MPLS labels.
Specify IP Manually Unspecified This parameter displays or specifies whether

Address Unspecified to set the IP address for a port.
l Unspecified: indicates that the IP
address will not be specified for a port.
l Manually: indicates that the IP address
will be specified for a port. If the
specified IP address is a valid value, it
will become the IP address of this port.

IP Address - 0.0.0.0 This parameter displays or specifies the IP

address of a port.
l This parameter can be set only when
Specify IP Address is Manually.
l The IP addresses of different ports on an
NE must be in different network
segments, but the IP addresses of the
ports at both ends of an MPLS tunnel
must be in the same network segment.
IP Mask - 255.255.255.252 This parameter displays or specifies the

subnet mask of a port.
This parameter can be set only when Specify
IP Address is Manually.
A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features

on the Packet Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the
packet plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port
parameters, and QoS parameters.
A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services

This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.
A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation

This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)
service.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.

Table A-4 Service direction of UNI-UNI

Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter specifies

the ID of the E-Line
service.
Service Name - - This parameter specifies

the name of the E-Line
service.
Direction UNI-UNI UNI-UNI l This parameter

UNI-NNI specifies the direction
of the E-Line service.
NNI-NNI
l Set this parameter to
UNI-UNI.

BPDU Not Transparently Not Transparently l This parameter

Transmitted Transmitted specifies the
Transparently transparent
Transmitted transmission ID of the
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU) packets.
It is used to indicate
whether the E-Line
service transparently
transmits the BPDU
packets.
l If the BPDU packets
are used as the service
packets and
transparently
transmitted to the
opposite end, set this
parameter to
Transparently
Transmitted. That is,
the parameter value
Transparently
Transmitted takes
effect only if
Encapsulation Type
of the source and sink
ports of the E-Line
service are Null.
l In other cases, set this
parameter to Not
Transparently
Transmitted.
according to the
MTU(bytes) - - This parameter cannot be

set here.
Service Tag Role - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.

Source Port - - l Before setting this

parameter, check and
ensure that the
attributes in Ethernet
Interface of the port
are set correctly and
are the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
the same as the value
of sink port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the

Source VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can be

set to null, a number,
or several numbers.
When setting this
parameter to several
numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers,
or use the endash (-) to
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l The number and value
of VLANs must be the
same value of Sink
VLANs.
to null, all the services
at the source port are
used as the service
source.
l If this parameter is not
set to null, only the
service that contains
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be used
as the service source.

Sink Port - - l Before setting this

ensure that the
are the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
of Source Port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the

Sink VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can be

or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
l The number and value
of VLANs must be the
same value of Source
VLANs.
at the sink port are
used as the service
sink.
the VLAN ID at the
sink port can be used
as the service sink.
Table A-5 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by PWs)


service.

service.

NNI-NNI
UNI-NNI.

BPDU Not Transparently Not Transparently For UNI-NNI ETH

Transmitted Transmitted PWE3 services, the
Transparently parameter value is always
Transmitted Not Transparently
Transmitted.

set here.

not support this
parameter.

ensure that the
are the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
of sink port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the


or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
used as the service
source.
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be
used as the service
source.
PRI - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.
Bearer Type QinQ Link PW For UNI-NNI ETH

PW PWE3 services, the
parameter value is always
PW.

Protection Type No Protection No Protection l If this parameter is set

PW APS to PW APS, working
and protection PWs
Slave Protection Pair need to be configured.
to Slave Protection
Pair, you need to bind
the slave PW APS
protection group with
the master PW APS
protection group. The
switching of the
master PW APS
protection group
triggers the switching
of the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
Table A-6 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by QinQ links)


service.

service.

NNI-NNI
UNI-NNI.
BPDU Not Transparently Not Transparently For UNI-NNI QinQ

Transmitted Transmitted services, the parameter
Transparently value is always Not
Transmitted Transparently
Transmitted.

set here.

not support this
parameter.


ensure that the
are the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
of sink port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the

or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
used as the service
source.
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be used
as the service source.


not support this
parameter.
Bearer Type QinQ Link PW For NNI-NNI QinQ

PW services, the parameter
value is always QinQ
Link.
QinQ Link ID - - Selects or specifies the ID

of a QinQ link. You can
create a QinQ link or
select an existing QinQ
link.
Table A-7 Service direction of NNI-NNI


service.

service.

NNI-NNI
NNI-NNI.
BPDU Not Transparently Not Transparently For NNI-NNI QinQ

Transmitted Transmitted services, the parameter
Transparently value is always
Transmitted Not Transparently
Transmitted
.

set here.

not support this
parameter.

not support this
parameter.

Bearer Type 1 QinQ Link QinQ Link Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line service.
QinQ Link ID 1 - - l Selects the QinQ link

ID of the first QinQ
link.
l The QinQ link ID is
preset in QinQ Link.
Bearer Type 2 QinQ Link QinQ Link Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line service.
QinQ Link ID 2 - - l Selects the QinQ link

ID of the second QinQ
link.
l The QinQ link ID is
QinQ Link ID - - Selects or specifies the ID

of a QinQ link. You can
create a QinQ link or
select an existing QinQ
link.
Parameters of PWs
NOTE
l Parameters of PWs need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.
l If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters
of working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working
PW as an example.
PW ID - - Specifies the ID of the PW

that carries services.
PW Signaling Type Static Static Labels for static PWs need

to be manually assigned.

PW Type Ethernet Ethernet l Specifies the type of

Ethernet Tagged Mode the PW.
l PW Type indicates
whether P-TAG is
added to Ethernet
frames that are
encapsulated for
transmission on PWs.
If it is not required to
add VLAN IDs, set this
parameter to
Ethernet. If it is
required to add VLAN
IDs, set this parameter
to Ethernet Tagged
Mode and then set
Request VLAN in the
Advanced Attributes
tab.
PW Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Displays the direction of

the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type MPLS MPLS Displays the

encapsulation type of the
packets on the PW.
PW Ingress Label/ 16 to 1048575 - Specifies the PW Ingress

Source Port label.
PW Egress Label/Sink 16 to 1048575 - Specifies the PW Egress

Port label.
Tunnel selection mode - - Displays the method to

select tunnels.
Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS Displays the type of the

tunnel that carries the PW.
Tunnel - - A tunnel needs to be

selected. If no tunnel is
available, creation of a
PW will fail.
Egress Tunnel - - For a bidirectional tunnel,

the system will configure
the egress tunnel
automatically.

Peer LSR ID - - Specifies the LSR ID of

the PW at the remote end.
If an existing tunnel is
selected, the LSR ID will
be automatically assigned.
QoS Parameters (PW)

NOTE
QoS parameters need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.
Bandwidth Limit - - Specifies whether the

bandwidth limit function
is enabled.
l This function limits the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ETH PWE3 service
corresponds to a PW.
Therefore, this
function can also limit
the bandwidth of ETH
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
Policy - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

CIR(Kbit/s) - - Specifies the committed

information rate (CIR) of
a PW.
It is recommended that
you set this parameter to
the same value as PIR.
CBS(byte) - - Specifies the committed

burst size (CBS) of a PW.
PIR(Kbit/s) - - Specifies the peak

information rate (PIR) of a
PW.
the same value as CIR.

PBS(byte) - - Specifies the peak burst

size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

LSP Mode Pipe Pipe Pipe: When stripping

MPLS tunnel labels from
packets, an egress node
does not update the
scheduling priority for the
packets.
Parameters of Advanced Attributes (PW)

Control Word No Use No Use For ETH PWE3 services,

the parameter value is
always No Use.
Control Channel Type None Alert Label l Specifies the mode of

Alert Label PW connectivity
check.
l None indicates that
VCCV is not used.
l Alert Label indicates
VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation mode.
VCCV Verification Ping Ping l Specifies the VCCV

Mode None verification mode. The
VCCV verification is
used for PW
connectivity check.
l If the VCCV-Ping test
is required, do not set
this parameter to
None.

Request VLAN - - l Set this parameter

when PW Type is
Ethernet Tagged
Mode.
l If the received packets
do not carry any
VLAN IDs, the PW
will add VLAN IDs to
the packets as required
by the setting of this
parameter.
TPID - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support request VLAN
TPID of the PW level.
Protection Group Parameters (PW APS)

NOTE
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to
PW APS.
Protection Type - - Specifies the protection

type.
Protection Group ID - - Specifies the protection

group ID.
Enabling Status Disabled Disabled l Specifies the enabling

Enabled status of the PW
protection group.
l During the creation of
a protection group, set
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
APS protection group
is configured at both
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
Protection Mode - - Displays the protection

mode.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports 1:1 protection
mode.

Working PW ID - - Displays the ID of the

working PW.
Protection PW ID - - Displays the ID of the

protection PW.
Switching Mode - - Displays the switching

mode to be used when a
PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports dual-ended
switching.
Revertive Mode Non-revertive Revertive l This parameter

Revertive specifies whether to
switch services back to
the original working
PW after it recovers.
l The value Revertive
indicates that services
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
that services are not
switched to the
original working PW.
l The value Revertive is
recommended.
Switchover Restoration 1 to 12 1 l Specifies the WTR

Time(min) time of the protection
group.
l When the preset WTR
time expires after the
original working PW
recovers, services are
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
l The default value is
recommended.

Switchover Delay Time 0 to 100 0 l Specifies the hold-off

(100ms) time of the protection
group.
to a value other than 0,
the protection group
does not trigger
switching once it
detects faults, but waits
until the hold-off time
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist. If any
faults persist, the
switching is triggered;
otherwise, no
switching is triggered.
recommended.
Detection mode - - Displays the detection

mode of the PW APS
protection group.
OAM Parameters
NOTE
l The OAM parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of
PWs is set to PW APS.
l To configure PW OAM parameters, choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management >
PW OAM Parameter from the Function Tree.
OAM Status - - Displays the enabling

status of PW OAM.

Detection Mode Auto-Sensing Auto-Sensing l Specifies the detection

Manual mode of OAM packets.
l Manual: The
connectivity check
(CC) packets are sent
at the interval specified
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
l If Detection Mode is
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
packets to be received
and transmitted.
l The value Auto-
Sensing is
recommended.

Detection Packet Type CV CV l CV: The detection

FFD packets are sent at a
fixed interval.
l FFD: The detection
packets are sent at the
interval specified by
the user.
set to Auto-Sensing,
this parameter
specifies the PW OAM
detection packets to be
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
parameter specifies the
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
connectivity check on
PWs.
Detection Packet Period 3.3 50 l Specifies the period of

(ms) 10 detection packets.
20 l This parameter is
configurable when
50 Detection Packet
100 Type is FFD and
200 assumes the fixed
value of 1000 when
500
Detection Packet
Type is CV.
3.3 for PW APS.
LSR ID to be Received - - Specifies the LSR ID to be

received.
PW ID to be Received - - Specifies the PW ID to be

received.

Protection Group Parameters (Slave Protection Pair)

NOTE
Slave Protection Pair.

mode.
Protection Group ID - - Specifies the ID of the

slave protection pair. The
switching of the master
PW APS protection group
triggers the switching of
the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.

working PW in the slave
protection pair.

protection PW in the slave
protection pair.
A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet

Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter indicates

service.
Service Name - - This parameter indicates

or specifies the name of
the E-Line service.
Source Node - - This parameter indicates

the source node.

Sink Node - - This parameter indicates

the sink node.

not support this
parameter.
MTU(byte) - - This parameter cannot be

queried here.
BPDU Not Transparently - This parameter indicates

Transmitted the transparent
Transparently transmission tag of the
Transmitted bridge protocol data unit
(BPDU) packets. This
parameter is used to
indicate whether the
Ethernet line
transparently transmits
the BPDU packets.
Deployment Status - - This parameter indicates

whether E-Line service is
deployed.
Parameters Associated with UNI Ports


the UNI port.

VLANs 1 to 4094 - This parameter indicates

or specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
l This parameter can be
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
only when Direction
is set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.
services of the UNI
port whose VLAN IDs
are included in the set
value of this parameter
work as the service
source or service sink.
NNI Parameters (PW)

PW ID - - This parameter displays

the PW ID.
Working Status - - This parameter displays

the working status of a
PW.

Enable Status - - This parameter displays

whether a PW is enabled.
PW Signaling Type - - This parameter displays

the PW signaling type.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses
static PWs only.
PW Type - - This parameter displays

the configured PW type.
PW Direction - - This parameter displays

the direction of the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type - - This parameter displays

the PW encapsulation
type.
NOTE
MPLS only.
PW Ingress Label/ - - This parameter displays

Source Port the configured PW ingress
label.
PW Egress Label/Sink - - This parameter displays

Port the configured PW egress
label.
Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS This parameter displays

the type of the tunnel that
carries a PW.
Peer LSR ID - - This parameter displays

the opposite LSR ID.
Tunnel - - This parameter displays

the tunnel.
Control Word - - For ETH PWE3 services,

always No Use.
Control Channel Type - - This parameter displays

the control channel type.
VCCV Verification - - This parameter displays

Mode the VCCV mode.
Local Working Status - - Displays the working

status of the PW at the
local end.

Remote Working Status - - This parameter displays

the working status of the
PW at the remote end.
Compositive Working - - This parameter displays

Status the comprehensive
working status of the PW.
Request VLAN - - This parameter displays

the request VLAN.
Deployment Status - - This parameter displays

the deployment status.
Tunnel Automatic - - This parameter displays

Selection Policy the automatic tunnel
selection policy.

not support request
VLAN TPID of the PW
level.
Parameters Associated with NNI Ports

QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - l This parameter

indicates the QinQ link
ID of the QinQ link
connected to the NNI
port.
only when Direction
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
Port - - l This parameter

indicates the NNI port.
only when Direction
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.

S-VLAN ID - - l This parameter

indicates or specifies
the VLAN ID of the
NNI port.
only when Direction
is set to UNI-NNI or
NNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
l This parameter is
QoS Parameters

the PW ID.
Direction - - l This parameter

displays the direction
of the PW.
l Egress indicates the
egress direction of the
PW.
l Ingress indicates the
ingress direction of the
PW.

Bandwidth Limit - - This parameter displays or

specifies whether the
is enabled for a PW to
prevent network
congestion.
l Regarding
transmission channels,
this function can be
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ETH PWE3
service corresponds to
a PW. Therefore, this
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.

not support this
parameter.
CIR (Kbit/s) - - This parameter displays or

specifies the committed
a PW.
CBS (kbyte) - - This parameter displays or

PIR (kbit/s) - - This parameter displays or

specifies the peak
information rate (PIR) of
a PW.
PBS (kbyte) - - This parameter displays or

specifies the peak burst
size (PBS) of a PW.


not support this
parameter.

does not update the
packets.
Parameters for the Port Attributes

Port - - Displays the port

information.
Enable Port - - l This parameter

indicates whether to
enable the port.
l This parameter is
preset in General
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface.

Encapsulation Type Null - l This parameter

802.1Q indicates the
encapsulation type of
QinQ the port.
only when Direction
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
to Null, the port
transparently
transmits the received
packets.
to 802.1Q, the port
IEEE 802.1Q
standard.
to QinQ, the port
IEEE 802.1 QinQ
standard.
l This parameter is
preset in General
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface.
TAG Tag Aware - l This parameter

Access displays the tag of the
port.
Hybrid
l This parameter is
preset in Layer 2
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface .

NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the PW APS protection group is configured.

Protection Group ID - - Displays the ID of the

protection group to be
created.

working PW.

protection PW.

mode.
Enabling Status Enabled - l Displays or specifies

Disabled the enabling status of
the PW protection
group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
Switchover Mode - - Displays the switching

PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supporting dual-ended
switching.
Restoration Mode Non-revertive - l Specifies whether to

Revertive switch services to the
original working PW
after the fault is
rectified.
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.

Switchover Restoration 1 to 12 - l Displays or specifies

Time(min) the WTR time of the
protection group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
Switchover Delay Time 0 to 100 - l Displays or specifies

(100ms) the hold-off time of the
protection group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
Deployment Status - - Display the deployment

status of the protection
group.
Switchover Status - - Displays the switchover

group.
Protocol Status - - Displays the enabling

status of the protocol.
Working Path Status - - Displays the status of the

current working path.
Protection Path Status - - Display the status of the

current protection path.


NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.

the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.

protection pair.

protection pair.
DNI PW ID - - Displays the DNI PW ID.
PW Type - - Displays the PW type.
Deployment Status - - Displays the deployment

status of the slave
protection pair.
A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Items for E-Line

Services_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.
Navigation Path
2. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table Item

Source Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifies

the network attribute of
the source interface.

Source Interface - - This parameter specifies

the source interface.
Source VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifies

the VLAN ID of the
source service.
Sink Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifies

the network attribute of
the sink interface.
Sink Interface - - This parameter specifies

the sink interface.
Sink VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifies

the VLAN ID of the sink
service.
NOTE
l The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item is
created. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified in
Sink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface.
l The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted from
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when the
other VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely.
l In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion of
VLAN IDs.
A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (E-
LAN) service.
Navigation Path
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.


Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameter

specifies the ID of the
E-LAN service.
l The OptiX RTN 980
supports simultaneous
creation of an E-LAN
service only.

the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU - - l This parameter

indicates the
transparent
transmission tag of the
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an E-
LAN service, this
parameter supports
only Not
Transparently
Transmitted and
cannot be set
manually.
l Not Transparently
Transmitted
indicates that the
BPDU packets are
used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network.

Tag Type C-Awared C-Awared l C-Awared indicates

S-Awared that the packets are
learnt according to C-
Tag-Transparent Tag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to C-
Awared.
l S-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to S-
Tag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to S-
Awared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that the
packets are
transparently
transmitted. To create
the 802.1d bridge, set
this parameter to Tag-
Transparent.
according to the

Self-Learning MAC Enabled Enabled l This parameter

Address Disabled specifies whether to
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
l If the MAC self-
learning function of an
Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.
l If the MAC self-
Ethernet LAN is
disabled, a static MAC
address forwarding
table is recommended
to be configured.
MAC Address Learning IVL - l This parameter

Mode SVL indicates the mode
used to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.

whether E-LAN service is
deployed.

set here.

not support this
parameter.

Parameters for UNIs


the UNI port.
SVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the UNI port.
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
according to the
VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.
services of the UNI
port whose VLAN IDs
are included in the set
work as the service
source or service sink.

Parameters of NNIs

only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
SVLANs - - l This parameter

ID of the NNI port.
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group

Split Horizon Group ID - 1 l This parameter

indicates the ID of the
split horizon group.
l The default split
horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.

Split Horizon Group - - l A split horizon group

Member member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon
group.
l The port members that
are added to the same
split horizon group
cannot communicate
with each other.
l The OptiX RTN 980
supports only the
division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
l If a UNI or NNI logical
port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.
A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.
Navigation Path
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.


Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameter

E-LAN service.
l The supports
simultaneous creation
of an E-LAN service
only.

the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU - - l This parameter

indicates the
transparent
transmission tag of the
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an E-
LAN service, this
parameter supports
only Not
Transparently
Transmitted and
cannot be set
manually.
l Not Transparently
Transmitted
indicates that the
BPDU packets are
used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network.

Tag Type C-Awared C-Awared l C-Awared indicates

S-Awared that the packets are
learnt according to C-
Tag-Transparent Tag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to C-
Awared.
l S-Awared indicates
learnt according to S-
Tag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to S-
Awared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that the
packets are
transparently
transmitted. To create
the 802.1d bridge, set
this parameter to Tag-
Transparent.

Self-Learning MAC Enabled Enabled l This parameter

Address indicates whether to
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
l If the MAC self-
Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.
l If the MAC self-
Ethernet LAN is
disabled, a static MAC
address forwarding
table is recommended
to be configured.
MAC Address Learning - - l This parameter

Mode indicates the mode
used to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.

queried here.

not support this
parameter.

whether E-LAN service is
deployed.

Parameters for UNIs


the UNI port.

ID of the UNI port.
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
according to the
VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

of the UNI port.
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
to null, the E-LAN
service exclusively
uses the corresponding
UNI physical port.
That is, the entire port
is mounted to the
bridge.
to a non-null value,
only the
corresponding UNI
port whose service
packets contain this
VLAN ID works as the
logical port and is
mounted to the bridge.

Parameters for NNIs


only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
SVLANs - - l This parameter

ID of the UNI port.
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.

Parameters for Static MAC Addresses

VLAN ID - - l This parameter is

invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset static MAC
address entries are
valid for all VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset
static MAC address
entries are valid for
only the VLANs
whose VLAN ID is
equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
according to the
MAC Address - - l This parameter

the static MAC
address.
l A static MAC address
is an address that is set
manually. It is not
aged automatically
and needs to be deleted
manually.
l Generally, a static
MAC address is used
for the port that
receives but does not
forward Ethernet
service packets or the
port whose MAC
address need not be
aged automatically.
Egress Interface - - l This parameter

specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds
to the MAC address.
according to the

Parameters for Self-Learning MAC Address

VLAN ID - - l This parameter is

invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset self-learning
MAC address entries
are valid for all
VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset self-
learning MAC address
entries are valid for
only the VLANs
whose VLAN ID is
equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
according to the

the self-learning MAC
address. A self-
learning MAC address
is also called a
dynamic MAC
address.
l A self-learning MAC
address is an entry
obtained by a bridge in
SVL or IVL learning
mode. A self-learning
MAC address can be
aged.
Egress Interface - - l This parameter

specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds
to the MAC address.
according to the

Parameters Associated with MAC Address Learning

Aging Ability Enabled Enabled The OptiX RTN 980

Disabled supports enabling/
disabling of the aging
Aging Time(min) 1 to 640 5 function and aging time
for the MAC address
table.
If one routing entry is not
updated in a certain
period, that is, if no new
packet from this MAC
address is received to
enable the re-learning of
this MAC address, this
routing entry is
automatically deleted.
This mechanism is called
aging, and this period is
called aging time. The
aging time of a MAC
address table is 5 minutes
by default.
Parameters for Disabled MAC Addresses

VLAN ID - - This parameter indicates

or specifies the VLAN ID
of the service. A disabled
MAC address is valid for
the VLAN whose VLAN
ID is equal to the preset
VLAN ID.


specifies or indicates
the disabled MAC
address. A disabled
MAC address is also
called a blacklisted
MAC address.
l This parameter is used
for discarding an
entry, also called a
black hole entry,
whose data frame that
contains a specific
destination MAC
address. A disabled
MAC address needs to
be set manually and
cannot be aged.
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group

Split Horizon Group ID - 1 l This parameter

split horizon group.
l The default split
horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.

Split Horizon Group - - l A split horizon group

Member member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon
group.
l The port members that
are added to different
split horizon groups
cannot communicate
with each other.
l The supports only the
division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
l If a UNI or NNI logical
port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.
Parameters for Unknown Frame Processing

Frame Type Unicast - This parameter indicates

Multicast the type of the received
unknown frame.
Handing Mode Discard Broadcast Selects the method of

Broadcast processing the unknown
frame. If this parameter is
set to Discard, the
unknown frame is directly
discarded. If this
parameter is set to
Broadcast, the unknown
frame is broadcast at the
forwarding port.

A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
Navigation Path
Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Parameters for the General Attributes

QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - This parameter specifies

the ID of the QinQ link.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports 1024 QinQ links,
whose IDs must be different
from each other.
Board - - This parameter specifies

the board where the QinQ
link is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies

the port where the QinQ
link is located.
S-Vlan ID 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

(at the network
operator side) for the
QinQ link.
according to the
A.6.1.7 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services_Creation

This topic describes the parameters for creating E-AGGR services.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function
Tree.
2. Click New.



the ID of an E-AGGR
service.

the name of an E-AGGR
service.
MTU(bytes) - - Setting this parameter is

not available.
Service Tag Role - - Setting this parameter is

not available.
UNI Parameters
Location Sink - This parameter specifies

Source whether a port functions
as a service source or sink.
You can configure one or
more source ports but only
one sink port for an E-
AGGR service.
Otherwise, configuration
of the E-AGGR service
will fail.
Port - - This parameter displays

UNI ports.

VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

for a UNI port.
l Set this parameter to a
numeral or several
numerals. When you
several numerals, use
","s to separate
discrete values and use
" - "s to indicate
consecutive numerals.
For example, 1, 3 - 6
indicates numerals 1,
3, 4, 5, and 6.
you do not set this
parameter to null.
Priority - - Setting this parameter is

not available.
NNI (PW) Parameters
Table A-8 Basic attributes
Location Sink - This parameter specifies

Source whether a port functions
You can configure one or
more source ports but only
one sink port for an E-
AGGR service.
Otherwise, configuration
of the E-AGGR service
will fail.
PW ID 1 to 4294967295 - This parameter specifies

the ID of a PW.
PW Signaling Type Static Static This parameter displays

the signaling type of a
PW.
You need to allocate the
same PW label for both
ends of a static PW.

PW Type Ethernet Ethernet l This parameter

Ethernet Tagged Mode specifies whether P-
TAGs will be added to
Ethernet frames when
the Ethernet frames are
encapsulated on a PW.
l If Request VLAN
does not need to be
added to Ethernet
frames that are
encapsulated on a PW,
Ethernet. If Request
VLAN needs to be
added to Ethernet
frames that are
encapsulated on a PW,
Ethernet Tagged
Mode.
Currently, this parameter
can be set only to
Ethernet because E-
AGGR services on the
OptiX RTN 980 do not
support PWs in Ethernet
tagged mode.

the direction of a PW.
PW Encapsulation Type MPLS MPLS This parameter displays

the encapsulation type of
a PW.
PW Incoming Label 16 to 1048575 - This parameter specifies

the ingress label for a PW.
PW Outgoing Label 16 to 1048575 - This parameter specifies

the egress label for a PW.
Tunnel Selection Mode - - This parameter displays

whether an existing
MPLS tunnel or a new
MPLS tunnel is used.
Tunnel Type - - This parameter displays

the type of a tunnel.

Tunnel - - This parameter requires

you to select an existing
static MPLS tunnel. If
there is no static MPLS
tunnel available, PW
creation will fail.
Peer LSR ID - - This parameter specifies

the LSR ID for the NE at
the opposite end of a PW.
If an existing MPLS
tunnel is used, the peer
LSR ID is automatically
generated based on the
local LSR ID.
Table A-9 Advanced attributes

Control Word Not in use Not in use For ETH PWE3 services,
this parameter has a fixed
value of Not in use.
Control Channel Type Alert Label This parameter specifies

None the control channel type,
which determines the PW
continuity check (CC)
mode.
l None: indicates that
virtual circuit
connectivity
verification (VCCV)
packets are not used.
l
l Alert Label: indicates
that VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation mode
are used.

VCCV Verification Ping Ping l This parameter

Mode None specifies the VCCV
verification mode,
which is used for a PW
CC test.
l If the LSP ping
function is used to
implement VCCV,
VCCV Verification
Mode cannot be set to
None.
Request VLAN - - Setting this parameter is

not available.
TPID - - Setting this parameter is

not available.
Parameters for a VLAN Forwarding Table


the network attribute for a
source port.
Source Interface - - This parameter specifies a

source port.

the source VLAN ID.

the network attribute for
the sink port.

the sink port.

the sink VLAN ID.

NOTE
l Regardless of whether VLAN ID swapping is required by an E-AGGR service, a VLAN forwarding table
needs to be configured, specifying the source and sink VLAN IDs of each VLAN-based service.
l A VLAN forwarding table enables VLAN ID swapping for an E-AGGR service. After a VLAN forwarding
table is created, a service from Source Interface will carry the VLAN ID specified in Sink VLAN ID when
leaving Sink Interface.
l For an E-AGGR service, the VLAN forwarding table specifies bidirectional VLAN ID swapping
relationships. This means that swapping from Sink VLAN ID to Source VLAN ID and swapping from
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID will be implemented once a VLAN forwarding entry for changing
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID is configured.
l For service aggregation from UNI ports to an NNI port, Source VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs
that have been configured for UNI ports.
l For service aggregation from NNI ports to a UNI port, Sink VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs that
have been configured for UNI ports.
QoS (PW)

the ID of a PW.

of a PW.
l Egress: indicates the
egress direction of a
PW.
l Ingress: indicates the
ingress direction of a
PW.

the type of a PW.


prevent network
congestion.
l For transmission
channels, the
bandwidth limit
function controls the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs as required.
l For services, the
bandwidth limit
bandwidth of each
ETH PWE3 service in
an MPLS tunnel,
because an ETH
PWE3 service
Policy - - Setting this parameter is

not available.
CIR(Kbit/s) - - This parameter displays or

information rate (CIR) for
a PW.
The CIR is recommended
to be the same as the PIR.
CBS(Kbit/s) - - This parameter displays or

burst size (CBS) for a PW.
PIR(Kbit/s) - - This parameter displays or

specifies the peak
information rate (PIR) for
a PW.
The PIR is recommended
to be the same as the CIR.
PBS(Kbit/s) - - This parameter displays or

size (PBS) for a PW.
EXP - - Setting this parameter is

not available.

LSP Mode Pipe Pipe Pipe: When an egress

node strips off the MPLS
tunnel labels in the
received service packets,
it does not renew the
packet scheduling
priorities.
A.6.1.8 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services

This topic describes E-AGGR service parameters.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function
Tree.


the ID of an E-AGGR
service.

the name of an E-AGGR
service.
MTU(byte) - - Setting this parameter is

not available.
Service Tag Role - - Setting this parameter is

not available. OptiX RTN
980.
Deployment Status - - This parameter displays

whether an E-AGGR
service has been deployed.
UNI Parameters
ID - - This parameter displays

the ID of a UNI port.

Location - - This parameter displays

whether a port functions

UNI ports.
VLANs - - This parameter displays

the VLAN ID of a UNI
port.
Priority - - Setting this parameter is

not available.
NNI (PW) Parameters
Table A-10 Basic attributes
ID - - This parameter displays

the ID of an NNI port.
Location - - This parameter displays

whether a port functions

the ID of a PW.
PW Status - - This parameter displays

whether a PW is enabled.
PW Signaling Type - - This parameter displays

the signaling type of a
PW.

the type of a PW.

the direction of a PW.
PW Encapsulation Type - - This parameter displays

the encapsulation type of
a PW.
PW Incoming Label - - This parameter displays

the ingress label of a PW.
PW Outgoing Label - - This parameter displays

the egress label of a PW.

Peer LSR ID - - This parameter displays

the LSR ID for the NE at
the opposite end of a PW.
Tunnel Type - - This parameter displays

the type of a tunnel.
Tunnel - - This parameter displays

the tunnel carrying PWs.
Select an existing static
MPLS tunnel. If there is
no static MPLS tunnel
available, PW creation
will fail.
Control Word - - This parameter displays

whether the control word
is used.
Control Channel Type - - This parameter displays

the control channel type.
VCCV Verification - - This parameter displays

Mode the VCCV verification
mode.
Local Operation Status - - This parameter displays

the PW running status at
the local end.
Local Operation Status - - This parameter displays

the PW running status at
the opposite end.
Overall Operation - - This parameter displays

Status the overall PW running
status.
Request VLAN - - This parameter displays

the request VLAN ID.
Automatic Tunnel - - This parameter displays

Selection Policy the automatic tunnel
selection policy.

not allow TPIDs in
request VLANs to be
specified for a PW.

Parameters for a VLAN Forwarding Table


the network attribute for a
source port.
Source Interface - - This parameter specifies a

source port.

the source VLAN ID.

the network attribute for
the sink port.

the sink port.

the sink VLAN ID.
NOTE
l Regardless of whether VLAN ID swapping is required by an E-AGGR service, a VLAN forwarding table
needs to be configured, specifying the source and sink VLAN IDs of each VLAN-based service.
l A VLAN forwarding table enables VLAN ID swapping for an E-AGGR service. After a VLAN forwarding
table is created, a service from Source Interface will carry the VLAN ID specified in Sink VLAN ID when
leaving Sink Interface.
l For an E-AGGR service, the VLAN forwarding table specifies bidirectional VLAN ID swapping
relationships. This means that swapping from Sink VLAN ID to Source VLAN ID and swapping from
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID will be implemented once a VLAN forwarding entry for changing
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID is configured.
l For service aggregation from UNI ports to an NNI port, Source VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs
that have been configured for UNI ports.
l For service aggregation from NNI ports to a UNI port, Sink VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs that
have been configured for UNI ports.
QoS (PW)

the ID of a PW.


of a PW.
l Egress: indicates the
egress direction of a
PW.
l Ingress: indicates the
ingress direction of a
PW.

the type of a PW.

prevent network
congestion.
l For transmission
channels, the
bandwidth limit
bandwidth of one or
more PWs as required.
l For services, the
bandwidth limit
bandwidth of each
ETH PWE3 service in
an MPLS tunnel,
because an ETH
PWE3 service
Policy - - Setting this parameter is

not available.
CIR(Kbit/s) - - This parameter displays or

information rate (CIR) for
a PW.
The CIR is recommended
to be the same as the PIR.
CBS(Kbit/s) - - This parameter displays or

burst size (CBS) for a PW.

PIR(Kbit/s) - - This parameter displays or

specifies the peak
information rate (PIR) for
a PW.
The PIR is recommended
to be the same as the CIR.
PBS(Kbit/s) - - This parameter displays or

size (PBS) for a PW.
EXP - - Setting this parameter is

not available.
LSP Mode Pipe Pipe Pipe: When an egress

node strips off the MPLS
tunnel labels in the
received service packets,
it does not renew the
packet scheduling
priorities.
A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.
A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
Navigation Path
Protection > ERPS Management.
2. Click New.

Parameters
ERPS ID 1 to 8 - l This parameter

Ethernet ring
protection switching
(ERPS) instance.
l The IDs of ERPS
instances on an NE
must be different from
each other.
East Port - - This parameter specifies

the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port - - This parameter specifies

the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node Yes No l This parameter

Flag No specifies whether the
node on the ring is the
ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
l Only one node on the
ring can be set as the
RPL owner for each
Ethernet ring.
l An RPL owner needs
to balance the traffic
on each link of an
Ethernet ring.
Therefore, it is not
select a convergence
node as an RPL owner.
Instead, select the NE
that is farthest away
from the convergence

RPL Port - - l This parameter

specifies the RPL port.
l There is only one RPL
port and this RPL port
must be the east or
west port on the RPL
owner node.
you set the east port on
an RPL owner as an
RPL Port.
Control VLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

of Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets on
the dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
isolating the dedicated
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be duplicate
with the VLAN IDs
that are contained in
the service packets.
l The ID of a Control
VLAN must not be the
same as any VLAN ID
used by Ethernet
services. All ring
nodes should use the
same Control VLAN
ID.
Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 01-19-A7-00-00-01 This parameter indicates

destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19-
A7-00-00-01.

A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
management.
Navigation Path
Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters
ERPS ID 1 to 8 - This parameter indicates

the ID of the ERPS
instance.
East Port - - This parameter indicates

instance.
West Port - - This parameter indicates

instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node Yes - This parameter indicates

Flag No whether a node on the ring
is the ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
RPL Port - - This parameter indicates

the RPL port.


the VLAN ID of
Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be duplicate
with the VLAN IDs
the service packets or
inband DCN packets.
l The Control VLAN
must be set to the same
value for all the NEs
on an ERPS ring.
Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 - This parameter indicates

A7-00-00-01.

Hold-Off Time(ms) 0 to 10000, in step of 100 0 l This parameter

the hold-off time of the
ERPS hold-off timer.
l The hold-off timer is
used for negotiating
the protection
switching sequence
when the ERPS
coexists with other
protection schemes so
that the fault can be
rectified in the case of
other protection
switching (such as
LAG protection)
before the ERPS
occurs. When a node
on the ring detects one
or more new faults, it
starts up the hold-off
timer if the preset
hold-off time is set to a
value that is not 0.
During the hold-off
time, the fault is not
reported to trigger an
ERPS. When the hold-
off timer times out, the
node checks the link
status regardless
whether the fault that
triggers the startup of
the timer exists. If the
fault exists, the node
reports it to trigger an
ERPS. This fault can
be the same as or
different from the fault
that triggers the initial
startup of the hold-off
timer.

Guard Time(ms) 10 to 2000, in step of 10 500 l This parameter

the guard time of the
ERPS guard timer.
l The nodes on the ring
continuously forward
the R-APS packets to
the Ethernet ring. As a
result, the outdated R-
APS packets may exist
on the ring network.
After a node on the
ring receives the
outdated R-APS
packets, an incorrect
ERPS may occur. The
ERPS guard timer is an
R-APS timer used for
preventing a node on
the ring from receiving
outdated R-APS
packets. When a faulty
node on the ring
detects that the
switching condition is
cleared, the node starts
up the guard timer and
starts to forward the R-
APS (NR) packets.
During this period, the
R-APS packets
received by the node
are discarded. The
received R-APS
packets are forwarded
only after the time of
the guard timer
expires.

WTR Time(mm:ss) 5 to 12, in step of 1 5 l This parameter

the WTR time of the
WRT timer in the case
of ERPS protection.
l The WTR time refers
to the duration from
the time when the
working channel is
restored to the time
when the switching is
released. When the
working channel is
restored, the WTR
timer of the RPL
owner starts up. In
addition, a signal that
indicates the operation
of the WTR timer is
continuously output in
the timing process.
When the WTR timer
times out and no
switching request of a
higher priority is
received, the signal
indicating the
operation of the WTR
timer is not
transmitted. In
addition, the WTR
release signal is
continuously output.
l The WTR timer is used
to prevent frequent
switching caused by
the unstable working
channel.
Packet Transmit 1 to 10 5 This parameter displays or

Interval(s) specifies the interval for
sending R-APS packets
periodically.
Entity Level 0 to 7 4 This parameter indicates

or specifies the level of the
maintenance entity.
Last Switching Request - - This parameter indicates

the last switching request.

RB Status - - This parameter indicates

the RB (RPL Blocked)
status of the packets
received by the working
node.
l noRB: The RPL is not
blocked.
l RB: The RPL is
blocked.
DNF Status - - This parameter indicates

the DNF status of the
packets received by the
working node.
l noDNF: The R-APS
packets do not contain
the DNF flag. In this
case, the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
a non-RPL link, and
the node that receives
the packets is
requested to clear the
forwarding address
table.
l DNF: The R-APS
packets contain the
DNF flags. In this
an RPL link, and the
node that receives the
packets is informed
not to clear the
forwarding address
table.

State Machine Status - - This parameter indicates

the status of the state
machine at the working
node.
l Idle: The Ethernet ring
is in normal state. For
example, no node on
the Ethernet ring
detects any faults or
receives the R_APS
(NR, RB) packets.
l Protection: The
Ethernet ring is in
protected state. For
example, a fault on the
node triggers the
ERPS, or a node on the
ring is in the WTR
period after the fault is
rectified.
Node Carried with - - This parameter indicates

Current Packet the MAC address carried
in the R-APS packets
received by the current
node. The MAC address
refers to the MAC address
of the source node that
initiates the switching
request.
East Port Status - - Displays the status of the

east port.
West Port Status - - Displays the status of the

west port.
A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
Navigation Path
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3. Click Create.


Protocol Type MSTP MSTP This parameter specifies

STP the protocol type.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 980
supports the CIST
MSTP only.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Enable Protocol Enabled Disabled l This parameter

Disabled specifies whether to
enable the protocol of
the port group or a
member port in the
port group.
l If the STP or MSTP is
enabled, the spanning
tree topology is
automatically re-
configured. As a
result, the services are
interrupted.
Parameters for Application Ports


the board where the
member of port group is
located.
Available Port List - - This parameter indicates

the available port list in
which a port can be added
to the port group.
Selected Port List - - This parameter indicates

the selected ports that can
be added to the port group.

A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3. On the main interface, select the port group to be configured.
4. Click Config. The Config Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Parameters for the Added Port


the board where the
member of port group is
located.
Available Port List - - This parameter indicates

the available port list in
which a port needs to be
added to the port group.
Selected Port List - - This parameter indicates

the selected ports that
need to be added to the
port group.
A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Bridge Parameters tab.


Port Group ID - - l This parameter

port group.
set to only the port
group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
MST Domain Name - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.
Redaction Level - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.
Mapping List - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.
Bridge Parameters
Port Group ID - - l This parameter

port group.
set to only the port
Group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
MST Domain Max Hop - 20 Specifies the maximum

Count hop count of the MSTP.

Network Diameter 2 to 7 7 l This parameter

specifies the MSTP
network diameter.
l Network Diameter is
related to the link
whose number of
switches is the most
and is indicated by the
number of switches
that are connected to
the link. When you set
Network Diameter
for the switches, the
MSTP automatically
sets Max Age(s),
Hello Time(s), and
Forward Delay(s) to
the more appropriate
values for the
switches.
l If the value of
Network Diameter is
greater, the network is
in a larger scale.
Hello Time(s) 1 to 10 2 l This parameter

specifies the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
l The greater the value
of this parameter, the
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.

Max Age(s) 6 to 40 20 l This parameter

specifies the
maximum age of the
CBPDU packet that is
recorded by the port.
l The greater the value,
the longer the
transmission distance
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
is greater, it is less
possible that the bridge
detects the link fault in
a timely manner and
thus the network
adaptation ability is
reduced.
Forward Delay(s) 4 to 30 15 l This parameter

specifies the holdoff
time of a port in the
listening state and in
the learning state.
the longer the delay of
the network state
change. Hence, the
topology changes are
slower and the
recovery in the case of
faults is slower.
Port Parameters

the port in the port group.

Enable Edge Attribute Disabled Disabled l This parameter

Enabled specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
l This parameter
specifies whether to
set the port as an edge
port. The edge port
refers to the bridge
port that is connected
to the LAN. In normal
cases, this port does
not receive or transmit
BPDU messages.
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
Actual Edge Attribute - - This parameter indicates

the actual management
edge attributes of the port.

Point-to-Point Attribute false auto l This parameter

true specifies the point-to-
point attribute of the
auto port.
l false: forced non-
point-to-point link
attribute
l true: forced point-to-
point link attribute
l auto: automatically
detected point-to-
to auto, the bridge
determines Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute of the port
working mode. If the
actual working mode
is full-duplex, the
actual point-to-point
attribute is true. If the
actual working mode
is half-duplex, Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is false.
l Only the designated
port whose Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is "True"
can transmit the rapid
state migration request
and response.
you use the default
value.
Actual Point-to-Point - - This parameter indicates

Attribute the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.

Max Transmit Packet 1 to 255 3 l This parameter

Count specifies the
maximum number of
packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.
l This parameter needs
to be set according to
the planning
information.
A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.
Navigation Path
2. Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.

Port Group - - This parameter specifies

the port group.
MSTI ID 0 0 This parameter indicates

the MSTI ID. The value 0
indicates common and
internal spanning tree
(CIST). The OptiX RTN
980 supports only the
MSTP that uses CIST.

Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l The most significant

16 bits of the bridge ID
indicate the priority of
the bridge.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher. As a result, the
bridge is more possible
to be selected as the
root bridge.
l If the priorities of all
the bridges in the STP/
MSTP network use the
same value, the bridge
whose MAC address is
the smallest is selected
as the root bridge.
Port Parameters

Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significant

eight bits of the port ID
indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Path Cost 1 to 200000000 FE Port: 200000 l This parameter

GE Port: 20000 indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
l In the case of the
bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.

A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About

the CIST
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP
CIST.
Navigation Path
2. Click the CIST Running Information tab.

Port Group ID - - This parameter indicates

the ID of the port group.
Protocol Running Mode MSTP - l This parameter

STP indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 980
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.

Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l This parameter

indicates the priority
of the bridge.
l The most significant
the bridge.
l When the value is
root bridge.
the bridges in the STP
network use the same
value, the bridge
as the root bridge.
Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicates

bridge.
Root Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 This parameter indicates
the priority of the root
bridge.
Root Bridge MAC - - This parameter indicates

Address the MAC address of the
root bridge.
External Path Cost - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

ERPC not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Priority not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

MAC Address not support this
parameter.
Internal Path Cost IRPC - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.

Root Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l This parameter

of the root port.
l The most significant
eight bits of the ID of
the root port indicate
the priority of the root
port.
l When the value is
higher.
Root Port - - This parameter indicates

the root port.
Hello Time(s) - 2 l This parameter

indicates the interval
for transmitting
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.

specifies the
maximum age of the
the longer the
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
a timely manner and
thus the network
reduced.


specifies the holdoff
the learning state.
the network state
change. Hence, the
slower and the
faults is slower.
MST Domain Max Hop - - This parameter indicates

Count the maximum hop count
of the MSTP.
Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicates

the identifier of the
topology change.
Last Topology Change - - This parameter indicates

Time(s) the duration of the last
topology change.
Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicates

the count of the topology
changes.
Port Parameters

Enable Protocol Enabled Disabled This parameter indicates

Disabled whether the protocol of
the port group or a
member of the port group
is enabled.
Port Role - Disabled This parameter indicates

the role of a port.

Port Status Discarding Discarding This parameter indicates

Learning the state of a port.
Forwarding l Discarding: receives
only BPDU packets
l Learning: only
receives or transmits
BPDU packets
l Forwarding: forwards
user traffic, and
transmits/receives
BPDU packets
Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significant

indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Path Cost 1 to 200000000 200000 l This parameter

indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
l In the case of the
bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.
Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l The most significant

the bridge.
l When the value is
root bridge.
the bridges in the STP
network use the same
value, the bridge
as the root bridge.

Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicates

bridge.
Designated Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 0 l The most significant

indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Design Port - 0 This parameter indicates

the designated port.
Edge Port Attribute Disabled Disabled l This parameter

Enabled specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
l This parameter
specifies whether to
set the port as an edge
port. The edge port
refers to the bridge
port that is connected
to the LAN. In normal
cases, this port does
not receive or transmit
BPDU messages.
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
Actual Edge Port - Disabled This parameter indicates

Attribute the actual management
edge attributes of the port.

Point to Point false auto l This parameter

true specifies the point-to-
point attribute of the
auto port.
l false: forced non-
point-to-point link
attribute
l true: forced point-to-
l auto: automatically
detected point-to-
to auto, the bridge
determines Actual
Point to Point
Attribute of the port
working mode. If the
actual working mode
is full-duplex, the
actual point-to-point
attribute is true. If the
actual working mode
is half-duplex, Actual
Point to Point
Attribute is false.
l Only the designated
port whose Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is "True"
can transmit the rapid
state migration request
and response.
you use the default
value.
Actual Point to Point - - This parameter indicates

the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.

Max Count of 1 to 255 3 l This parameter

Transmitting Message indicates the
maximum number of
packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.
Protocol Running Mode STP - l This parameter

MSTP indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 980
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Hello Time(s) 1 to 10 2 l This parameter

indicates the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.


specifies the
maximum age of the
the longer the
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
a timely manner and
thus the network
reduced.

specifies the holding
the learning state.
the network state
change. Hence, the
slower and the
faults is slower.
Remain Hop - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.
A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG

Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
Navigation Path
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.

3. Click New.

LAG No. - 1 l This parameter

specifies the LAG
number to be set
manually.
only when
Automatically
Assign is not selected.
Automatically Assign Selected Selected l This parameter

Deselected indicates whether
LAG No. is allocated
automatically.
l When Automatically
Assign is selected,
LAG No. cannot be
set.
LAG Name - - This parameter specifies

the LAG name.

LAG Type Static Static l Static: You can create

Manual a LAG. When you add
or delete a member
port to or from the
LAG, the Link
Aggregation Control
Protocol (LACP)
protocol is required. In
a LAG, a port can be in
selected, standby, or
unselected state. The
aggregation
information is
exchanged among
different equipment
through the LACP
protocol to ensure that
the aggregation
information is the
same among all the
nodes.
l Manual: You can
create a LAG. When
you add or delete a
member port, the
LACP protocol is not
required. The port can
be in the up or down
state. The system
determines whether to
aggregate a port
according to its
physical state (UP or
DOWN), working
mode, and rate.
Switch Protocol - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.
Switch Mode - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.
Link Trace Protocol - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.

Revertive Mode Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Mode l Revertive Mode can

Non-Revertive Mode be set only when Load
Sharing is set to Non-
Sharing.
l When Revertive
Mode is set to
Revertive Mode, the
services are switched
back to the former
working channel after
this channel is restored
to normal.
l When Revertive
Mode is set to Non-
Revertive Mode, the
status of the LAG does
not change after the
former working
channel is restored to
normal. That is, the
services are still
transmitted on the
protection channel.

Load Sharing Sharing Non-Sharing l Set Load Sharing to

Non-Sharing the same value as the
peer equipment. It is
set Load Sharing to
Non-Sharing at both
ends if the LAGs are
used for protection and
set Load Sharing to
Sharing at both ends if
the LAGs are used for
increasing
bandwidths.
l Sharing: Each member
link of a LAG
processes traffic at the
same time and shares
the traffic load. The
sharing mode can
increase a bandwidth
utilization for the link.
When the LAG
members change, or
certain links fail, the
system automatically
re-allocates the traffic.
l Non-Sharing: Only
one member link of a
LAG carries traffic,
and the other link is in
the standby state. In
this case, a hot backup
mechanism is
provided. When the
active link of a LAG is
faulty, the system
activates the standby
link, thus preventing
link failure.

Load Sharing Hash Source MAC Source MAC l This parameter is valid
Algorithm Destination MAC only when Load
Sharing of a LAG is
Source and Destination set to Sharing.
MAC
l The load sharing
Source IP computation methods
Destination IP include computation
Source and Destination IP based on MAC
addresses (based on
MPLS Label
the source MAC
address, based on the
destination MAC
address, and based on
the source MAC
address + sink MAC
address), computation
based on IP addresses
(based on the source IP
address, based on the
destination IP address,
and based on the
source IP address and
sink IP address), and
computation based on
MPLS labels.
l After the configuration
data is deployed, Load
Sharing Hash
Algorithm takes
effect for the entire
NE.
l For PW-carried UNI-
NNI E-Line services,
Load Sharing Hash
Algorithm cannot be
set to MPLS Label.

System Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l System Priority

of a LAG. The smaller
the value of System
Priority, the higher
the priority.
l When a local LAG
negotiates with an
opposite LAG through
LACP packets, both
LAGs can obtain the
system priorities of
each other. Then, the
LAG of the higher
system priority is
considered as the
comparison result of
both LAGs so that the
aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs. If the priorities
of both LAGs are the
same, the system MAC
addresses are
compared. Then, the
comparison result
based on the LAG with
smaller system MAC
address is considered
as the result of both
LAGs and is used to
ensure that the
aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs.
WTR Time(min) 1 to 30 10 l Specifies the WTR

time for the LAG.
l WTR Time(min)
takes effect only when
Revertive Mode is
Revertive Mode.

Switch LAG upon Air Disabled Enabled l This parameter

Interface SD Enabled specifies whether to
enable the switching
triggered by bit errors.
l If Switch LAG upon
Air Interface SD is set
to Enabled, the
MW_BER_SD alarm
will trigger the LAG
switching at the air
interface.
Port Settings Parameters

Main Board - - l This parameter

specifies the main
board in a LAG.
according to the
Main Port - - l This parameter

specifies the main port
in a LAG.
l After a LAG is created,
you can add Ethernet
services to the main
port only. Services
cannot be added to a
slave port. When Load
Sharing is set to Non-
Sharing, the link
connected to the main
port is used to transmit
the services, and the
link connected to the
slave port is used for
protection.
Board (Available Slave - - l This parameter

Ports) specifies the slave
board in a LAG.
according to the

Port (Available Slave - - l This parameter

Ports) specifies the salve port
in a LAG.
l The slave ports in a
LAG are fixed. Unless
they are manually
modified, the system
does not automatically
add them to or delete
them from the LAG.
Selected Standby Ports - - This parameter indicates

the selected slave ports.
A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation

This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities.
Navigation Path
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port Priority tab.


the port whose priority can
be set.
Port Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l This parameter

indicates the priorities
of the ports in a LAG
as defined in the LACP
protocol. The smaller
the value, the higher
the priority.
l When ports are added
into a LAG, the port of
the highest priority is
preferred for service
transmission.

A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT

This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-point LPT.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
Management > LPT from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.
Parameters on the main interface

Binding Status - - This parameter displays

the binding status of point-
to-point services.
Primary Function Point - - This parameter displays

the port where the primary
point of point-to-point
LPT resides.
Secondary Function - - This parameter displays

Point Type the type of secondary
point for point-to-point
LPT.
Secondary Function - - This parameter displays

Point the port where the
secondary point of point-
to-point LPT resides.
LPT Instance Status - - This parameter displays

the status of point-to-point
LPT.
LPT Enabled Enabled Disabled This parameter displays or

Disabled specifies the enabling
status of point-to-point
LPT.
The LPT function can take
effect only when LPT
Enabled is set to
Enabled.
Recovery Times(s) 1-600 1 This parameter displays or

specifies the recovery time
of point-to-point LPT.
Hold-Off Times(ms) 0-10000 1000 This parameter displays or

specifies the hold-off time
of point-to-point LPT.

Switching Mode - - This parameter displays

the switching mode of
point-to-point LPT. Point-
to-point LPT is available
only in strict mode.
Fault Detection Mode PW OAM LPT OAM This parameter displays

LPT OAM the fault detection mode of
point-to-multipoint LPT.
l LPT-enabled NEs
periodically transmit
LPT OAM packets in
specific formats to
check the status of an
L2 service network or
QinQ service network.
If the LPT OAM
packets are absent for
3.5 fault detection
periods or the number
and contents of
received LPT OAM
packets are incorrect,
the NEs consider that a
network-side fault
occurred and the LPT
l To detect a network-
side fault on a PSN,
LPT OAM or PW
OAM packets can be
used. Note that the PW
OAM function must be
enabled on NEs before
usage of PW OAM
packets.
Fault Detection Period 10-100 10 This parameter displays or

(100ms) specifies the fault
detection period of point-
to-point LPT.
User-Side Port Status - - This parameter displays

the status of a user-side
port.
L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID - - This parameter displays

the NET IDs of LPT
packet out ports at both
ends.

A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-point LPT.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.
3. Click Bind in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.
4. Choose PW+QinQ or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.

L2 net ID 1-4294967295 - This parameter specifies

the NET ID of LPT packet
out port at the local end.
L2 Peer net ID 1-4294967295 - This parameter specifies

the NET ID of LPT packet
out port at the opposite
end.
Primary Function Point - - This parameter specifies

point of point-to-point
LPT resides.
VLAN ID 1-4094 - This parameter specifies

the VLAN ID that is
carried by a point-to-point
LPT packet to traverse an
L2 network.
LPT package out port - - This parameter specifies

the out port of a point-to-
point LPT packet.
A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT

This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-multipoint LPT.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.

Parameters of Primary Point


Type the type of primary point
for point-to-multipoint
LPT.

point of point-to-
multipoint LPT resides.
LPT Instance Status - - This parameter displays

the status of point-to-
multipoint LPT.
LPT Enabled Enabled Disabled This parameter displays

Recovery Times(s) 1-600 1 This parameter displays or

specifies the recovery time
of point-to-multipoint
LPT.
Hold-Off Times(ms) 0-10000 1000 This parameter displays or

specifies the hold-off time
of point-to-multipoint
LPT.
Switching Mode Strict mode Strict mode This parameter displays

Non-strict mode the switching mode of
Point-to-point LPT is
available only in strict
mode.
l Strict mode
A primary point
triggers LPT switching
when all its secondary
points detect faults.
l Non-strict mode
A primary point
triggers LPT switching
when anyone of its
secondary points
detects a fault.

Fault Detection Mode PW OAM LPT OAM This parameter displays

LPT OAM the fault detection mode of
l LPT-enabled NEs
periodically transmit
LPT OAM packets in
specific formats to
check the status of an
L2 service network or
QinQ service network.
If the LPT OAM
packets are absent for
3.5 fault detection
periods or the number
and contents of
received LPT OAM
packets are incorrect,
the NEs consider that a
network-side fault
occurred and the LPT
l To detect a network-
side fault on a PSN,
LPT OAM or PW
OAM packets can be
used. Note that the PW
OAM function must be
enabled on NEs before
usage of PW OAM
packets.
Fault Detection Period 10-100 10 This parameter displays or

(100ms) specifies the fault
detection period of point-
to-multipoint LPT.

port.

the NET IDs of LPT
ends, when the service
network is an L2 network.

Parameters of Secondary Point

Access Point Type - - This parameter displays

the type of second point
LPT.
Access Point - - This parameter displays

the port or PW ID for the
to-multipoint LPT.

port.

the NET IDs of LPT
ends, when the service
network is an L2 network.
A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint

LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-multipoint LPT.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.
3. Click New in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.
4. Choose PW, QinQ, or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.

Parameters of primary point

Point Type UNI - This parameter specifies

PW the type of primary point
QinQ LPT. The value range of
L2 net this parameter pertains to
the type of service
network.
If the primary point is on
the access side, select
UNI; if the primary point
is on the network side, set
the parameter as follows.
l If the service network
is a PSN, select PW.
is a QinQ network,
select QinQ.
is an L2 network,
select L2 net.

the board where the
primary point of point-to-
This parameter is valid
only when Point Type is
set to UNI.

point of point-to-
set to UNI.
Point ID - - This parameter specifies

the service ID for the
primary point of point-to-
multipoint LPT.
set to PW or QinQ.


the NET ID of a local NE.
only when Point Type of
the primary point is set to
UNI, and when Point
Type of the secondary
point is set to L2 net.

the NET ID of an opposite
NE.
set to L2 net.

the VLAN ID that is
carried by an LPT packet
to traverse an L2 network.
set to L2 net.
LPT package out port - - This parameter specifies

the out port of an LPT
packet.
set to L2 net.
Parameters of secondary point

Point Type UNI - This parameter displays or

PW specifies the type of
secondary point for point-
QinQ to-multipoint LPT.
L2 net


the board where the
to-multipoint LPT resides.
set to PW, QinQ, or L2
net.
Available Points - - This parameter displays

the available ports where
the secondary point of
point-to-multipoint LPT
can reside.
net.
Selected Points - - This parameter displays

the selected port where the
to-multipoint LPT resides.
net.

the NET ID of a local NE.
set to UNI.

the NET ID of an opposite
NE.
UNI, and when Point


the VLAN ID that is
carried by an LPT packet
to traverse an L2 network.
UNI, and when Point
LPT Package out port - - This parameter specifies

the out port of an LPT
packet.
UNI, and when Point
A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and
maintenance (OAM).
A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance

Domain Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.
Navigation Path
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.


Maintenance - default l This parameter specifies the name of the

Domain Name maintenance domain.
l The maintenance domain refers to the
network for the Ethernet OAM.
l This parameter can contain a maximum
of eight bytes.
Maintenance 0 4 l Maintenance Domain Level specifies

Domain Level 1 the level of the maintenance domain.
2 l The values 0 to 7 indicates maintenance
domain levels in an ascending order.
3
l MEPs transparently transmit OAM
4 protocol packets if the packets have a
5 higher level than the parameter value.
6 l MEPs discard OAM protocol packets if
7 the packets have a lower level than the
parameter value.
l MEPs respond to or terminate OAM
protocol packets based on the packet type
if the packets have the same level as the
parameter value.
A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance

Association Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.
Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created.
Choose New > New Maintenance Association.

Maintenance - - This parameter indicates the maintenance

Domain Name domain of the created maintenance
association.

Maintenance - - l This parameter specifies the name of the

Association Name maintenance association, which is a
domain related to a service. Through
maintenance association division, the
connectivity check (CC) can be
performed on the network that transmits
a service instance.
l This parameter can contain a maximum
of eight bytes.
Relevant Service - - This parameter specifies the service

instance that is related to the maintenance
association.
CC Test Transmit 1s 1s l This parameter specifies the interval for

Period 10s transmitting packets in the CC.
1m l The CC is performed to check the
availability of the service.
10m
A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end
point (MEP).
Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New >
New MEP Point.


Domain Name domain of the created MEP.

Association Name association of the created MEP.
Board - - This parameter specifies the board where

the MEP is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port where the

MEP is located.

VLAN - - This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of

the current service.
MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MEP ID.

l Each MEP needs to be configured with
an MP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance association. The MP ID is
required in the OAM operation.
Direction Ingress Ingress l Direction specifies the direction of the

Egress MEP.
l Ingress indicates the direction in which
the packets are transmitted to the port,
and Egress indicates the direction in
which the packets are transmitted from
the port.
CC Status Active Active l This parameter specifies whether to

Inactive enable the CC function of the MEP.
l In the case of the tests based on the MP
IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.
AIS Active Status Active Active l This parameter specifies the AIS active
Inactive status.
l If several MDs exist on a link, to locate
a fault accurately, set AIS Active
Status to Active and Client Layer
Level that functions to suppress the AIS
information.
l After a fault is detected by an MP, if this
MP activates the AIS, it sends the AIS
packet to a higher level MP, informing
the higher level MP of the fault
information; if this MP does not activate
the AIS, it does not report the fault.
Client Layer Level 1 to 7 1 l Normally, if an MP is set to level n,

Client Layer Level that functions to
suppress the AIS information should be
set to n+1.
l Client Layer Level is valid only if AIS
Active Status is Active.
A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP

Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.

Navigation Path
3. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. The Manage Remote MEP Point dialog
box is displayed.
4. Click New.


Domain Name domain of the MEP.

Association Name association of the created MEP.
Remote 1 to 2048 - l This parameter specifies the ID of the

Maintenance Point remote MEP.
ID(e.g:1,3-6) l If other MEPs will initiate OAM
operations to an MEP in the same MA,
set these MEPs as remote MEPs.
A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association
intermediate point (MIP).
Navigation Path
2. Click the MIP Point tab.
3. Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.


Domain Name domain of the MIP.
Board - - This parameter specifies the board where

the MIP is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port where the

MIP is located.

MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MIP ID.

l Each MIP needs to be configured with an
MP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance domain. The MP ID is
required in the OAM operation.
NOTE
To create MEPs and MIPs in a service at a
port, ensure that only one MIP can be created
and the level of the MIP must be higher than
the level of the MEP.
A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.
Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.
4. Choose OAM > Start LB.

Destination Selected Deselected This parameter needs to be selected if the

Maintenance Point Deselected LB test is performed on the basis of
ID Destination Maintenance Point IDs.
Destination Selected Selected This parameter needs to be selected if the

Maintenance Point Deselected LB test is performed on the basis of MAC
MAC Address addresses.
Maintenance - - This parameter indicates the name of the

Domain Name maintenance domain for the LB test.

Association Name maintenance association for the LB test.
Source - - l This parameter specifies the source

Maintenance Point maintenance point in the LB test.
ID l Only the MEP can be set to the source
maintenance point.

Destination - - l This parameter specifies the destination

Maintenance Point maintenance point in the LB test.
ID l Only the MEP ID can be set to the
Destination Maintenance Point ID.
l Destination Maintenance Point ID can
be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination - 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MAC

Maintenance Point address of the port where the destination
MAC Address maintenance point is located in the LB
test.
l Only the MAC address of the MEP can
be set to the MAC address of the
Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address.
l Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address can be set only when Sink
Maintenance Point MAC Address.
Transmitted 1 to 255 3 l This parameter specifies the number of

Packet Count packets transmitted each time in the LB
test.
l When the value is greater, the required
duration is longer.
Transmitted 64 to 1400 64 l This parameter specifies the length of a

Packet Length transmitted LBM packet.
l If the packet length is different, the test
result may be different. In normal cases,
it is recommended that you use the
default value.
Transmitted 0 to 7 7 l This parameter specifies the priority of

Packet Priority transmitting packets.
l 0 indicates the lowest priority, and 7
indicates the highest priority. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to the highest
priority.
Detection Result - - This parameter indicates the relevant

information and result of the LB test.
A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.

Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.
4. Choose OAM > Start LT.
Test Node Parameters

Destination Selected Deselected This parameter needs to be selected if the LT

Maintenance Point Deselected test is performed on the basis of MP IDs.
ID
Destination Selected Selected This parameter needs to be selected if the LT

Maintenance Point Deselected test is performed on the basis of MAC
MAC Address addresses.

Domain Name maintenance domain for the LT test.

Association Name maintenance association for the LT test.
Source - - l This parameter specifies the source

Maintenance Point maintenance point in the LT test.
ID l Only the MEP can be set to the source
maintenance point.
Destination - - l This parameter specifies the destination

ID l Only the MEP ID can be set to the
Destination Maintenance Point ID.
l Destination Maintenance Point ID can
be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination - 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MAC

Maintenance Point address of the port where the destination
MAC Address maintenance point is located in the LT
test.
l Only the MAC address of the MEP can
be set to the MAC address of the
Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address.
l Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address can be set only when Sink
Maintenance Point MAC Address.

Parameters for the Detection Result

Source - - This parameter indicates the source

ID
Destination - - This parameter indicates the MAC address

Maintenance Point of the port where the destination
ID/MAC maintenance point is located in the LT test.
Response - - This parameter indicates the MAC address

Maintenance Point of the port where the responding
ID/MAC maintenance point is located in the LT test.
Hop Count 1 to 64 - l This parameter indicates the number of

hops from the source maintenance point
to the responding maintenance point or
to the destination maintenance point in
the LT test.
l The number of hops indicates the
adjacent relation between the responding
maintenance point to the source
maintenance point. The number of hops
increases by one when a responding
point occurs on the link from the source
maintenance point to the destination
maintenance point.
Test Result - - This parameter indicates the result of the LT

test.
A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling Service Loopback

Detection
This topic describes the parameters for enabling E-LAN service loopback detection.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service
Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.

Parameters for Enabling Service Loopback Detection

Vlans/CVLAN 1 to 4094 1 to 4094 Vlans/CVLAN displays

the VLAN ID of a
loopback service.
Loopback detection can be
performed for only one
service one time.
Packet Timeout Period 3 to 10 3 Loopback detection stops

(s) if no loopback detection
packets are received until
Packet Timeout Period
(s) expires.
Packet Length - - This parameter displays

the loopback detection
packet length.
VLAN Packet Sending - - This parameter displays

Interval(s) the intervals for
transmitting different
VLAN packets.
Disable Service When No No Disable Service When

Loopback is Detected Yes Loopback is Detected
displays whether a
loopback service will be
deactivated.
A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter

This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OAM Parameter tab.


port.

Enable OAM Enabled Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Protocol Disabled whether to enable the OAM protocol.
l After the OAM protocol is enabled, the
current Ethernet port starts to use the
preset mode to create the OAM
connection with the opposite end.
OAM Working Active Active l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Mode Passive working mode of the OAM.
l The port whose OAM working mode is
set to Active can initiate the OAM
connection.
l The port whose OAM working mode is
set to Passive can only wait for the
opposite end to send the OAM
connection request.
l The OAM working mode of the
equipment at only one end can be
Passive.
Link Event Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Notification Disabled whether the local link events can be
notified to the opposite end.
l If the alarms caused by link events can
be reported, that is, if the number of
performance events (for example, error
frame period, error frame, error frame
second, and error frame signal cycle) at
the local end exceeds the preset
threshold, these performance events are
notified to the port at the opposite end
through the link event notification
function.

Remote Side Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Loopback Enabled whether the port responds to the remote
Response loopback.
l Remote loopback indicates that the local
OAM entity transmits packets to the
remote OAM entity for loopback. The
local OAM entity can locate the fault and
test the link performance through
loopback data analysis.
l If a port does not support remote
loopback response, this port does not
respond to the loopback request from the
remote port regardless of the OAM port
status.
Loopback Status Non-Loopback - This parameter indicates the loopback status

Initiate Loopback at at the local end.
Local NOTE
Loopback Status is valid only after you choose
Respond Loopback OAM > Enable Remote Loopback.
of Remote
OAM Discovery - - This parameter indicates the OAM

Status discovery status at the local end.
Port Transmit - - This parameter indicates the status of

Status transmitting packets at the local end.
Port Receive Status - - This parameter indicates the status of

receiving packets at the local end.
A.6.3.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error

Frame Monitoring
This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the
Ethernet port.
Navigation Path
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.


port.

Error Frame 1000 to 60000, in 1000 This parameter specifies the duration of
Monitor Window step of 100 monitoring error frames.
(ms)
Error Frame 1 to 4294967295, in 1 l This parameter specifies the threshold of

Monitor Threshold step of 1 monitoring error frames.
(frames) l Within the specified value of Error
Frame Monitor Window(ms), if the
number of error frames on the link
exceeds the preset value of Error
Frame Monitor Threshold(frame), an
alarm is reported.
Error Frame 1488 to 892800000, 892800000 This parameter specifies the window of
Period Window in step of 1 monitoring the error frame period.
(frame)
Error Frame 1 to 892800000, in 1 l This parameter specifies the threshold of

Period Threshold step of 1 monitoring the error frame period.
(frames) l Within the specified value of Error
Frame Period Window(frame), if the
Frame Period Threshold(frame), an
alarm is reported.
Error Frame 10 to 900, in step of 60 This parameter specifies the time window of
Second Window(s) 1 monitoring the error frame second.
Error Frame 10 to 900, in step of 1 l This parameter specifies the threshold of

Second Threshold 1 monitoring error frame seconds.
(s) l If any error frame occurs in one second,
this second is called an errored frame
second. Within the specified value of
Error Frame Second Window(s), if the
Frame Second Threshold(s), an alarm
is reported.
A.6.4 QoS Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.
A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the
Function Tree.

Mapping Relation ID 1 to 8 1 This parameter indicates

the ID of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.
Mapping Relation Name - Default Map This parameter indicates

the name of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.
NOTE
If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN 980 equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and
Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this
domain.
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation

CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameter

of the C-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l C-VLAN indicates the
client-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates
the highest priority.

of the S-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
indicates the highest
priority.

IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameter

indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
l The differentiated
services code point
(DSCP) refers to bits
0-5 of the
differentiated services
(DS) field in the packet
and indicates the
service class and
discarding priority of
the packet.
MPLS EXP 0 to 7 - l Displays the MPLS

EXP value of ingress
packets.
l When a packet in an
egress queue leaves an
NNI port, the NNI port
obtains the packet
priority value
according to the
mappings between
PHB service classes of
egress queues and
egress packet
priorities (MPLS EXP
values), and writes the
obtained priority value
into the EXP field of
the egress MPLS
packet.
NOTE
The MPLS EXP value can
be modified in the default
Diffserv domain (Default
Map) only.

PHB BE - l This parameter

AF1 indicates the per-hop
behavior (PHB)
AF2 service class of the
AF3 DiffServ domain.
AF4 l The PHB service class
EF refers to the
forwarding behavior
CS6
of the DiffServ node
CS7 on the behavior
aggregate (BA)
operation. The
forwarding behavior
can meet the specific
requirements.
l The PHB service
classes are BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value,
and MPLS EXP value)
contained in the
packets of the DiffServ
domain and the eight
PHB service classes
meet the requirements
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into
three sub service classes,
namely, AF11, AF12, and
AF13, only one of which is
valid. It is the same case
with the AF2, AF3, and
AF4.

Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation


AF1 indicates the PHB
service class of the
AF2 DiffServ domain.
AF4 refers to the
EF forwarding behavior
of the DiffServ node
CS6
on the behavior
CS7 aggregate (BA)
operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
l The PHB service
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value
and MPLS value)
contained in the
packets of the DiffServ
PHB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
AF4.

of the C-VLAN of the
egress packets.


of the S-VLAN of the
egress packets.
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
priority.

indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
l The DSCP refers to
bits 0-5 of the DS field
in the packet and
indicates the service
class and discarding
priority of the packet.
MPLS EXP 0 to 7 - l Displays the MPLS

EXP value of egress
packets.
l When a packet arrives
at an NNI port, the
NNI port obtains the
packet priority value
depending on its
trusted priority type
(MPLS EXP value)
and specifies the PHB
service class of the
packet according to the
mappings between
packet priorities and
PHB service classes.
NOTE
Map) only.



the port that uses the
DiffServ domain.
Packet Type CVLAN CVLAN The packets trusted by the

SVLAN OptiX RTN 980 are the
C_VLAN, S_VLAN and
IP-DSCP IP DSCP packets that
MPLS-EXP contain the C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value or
MPLS value. By default,
the untrusted packets are
mapped to the BE service
class for best-effort
forwarding.
NOTE
l The trusted packet
priorities of a UNI port
include DSCP value, C-
VLAN priority, and S-
VLAN priority. For the
E-Line services that are
transparently
transmitted end to end
(UNI-UNI), a UNI port
only trusts DSCP value.
l An NNI port carrying
MPLS/PWE3 services
trusts only packets with
MPLS EXP values.
priorities of a QinQ link
NNI port are configured
according to the
A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from
the Function Tree.
2. Click New.


Mapping Relation ID 2 to 8 - This parameter specifies

the ID of the mapping
relationship of a DS
domain.
Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter specifies

relationship of a DS
domain.
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation


specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the ingress
packets.

priority of the ingress
packets.
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
priority.


specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
services code point
0-5 of the
and indicates the
service class and
the packet.
MPLS EXP - - l Displays the MPLS

EXP value of ingress
packets.
obtains the packet
priority value
according to the
mappings between
egress queues and
egress packet
the egress MPLS
packet.
NOTE
Map) only.


service class of the DS
AF2 domain.
AF4 refers to the
of the DS node on the
CS6
behavior aggregate
CS7 (BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
l The PHB service
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
and MPLS EXP value)
contained in the
packets of the DS
PHB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relationship.
NOTE
AF4.

Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation


service class of the DS
AF2 domain.
AF4 refers to the
of the DS node on the
CS6
behavior aggregate
CS7 (BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
l The PHB service
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
and MPLS EXP value)
contained in the
packets of the DS
PHB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relationship.
NOTE
AF4.

specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the egress
packets.
client-side VLAN
priority, and the value
7 indicates the highest
priority.


priority of the egress
packets.
server-side VLAN
priority, and the value
priority.

specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the egress
packets.
services code point
0-5 of the
and indicates the
service class and
the packet.
MPLS EXP - - l Displays the MPLS

EXP value of egress
packets.
obtains the packet
priority value
according to the
mappings between
egress queues and
egress packet
the egress MPLS
packet.
NOTE
Map) only.



the board that uses the
mapping relationships
between DS domains.
Available Port - - This parameter displays

the available port list from
which you can select the
port that uses the mapping
relationships between DS
domains.

the selected port list. The
ports in the list use the
mapping relationships
between DS domains.

Packet Type cvlan cvlan l This parameter

svlan specifies the type of
the packet.
ip-dscp
l The packets trusted by
mpls-exp the OptiX RTN 980
are the C_VLAN,
S_VLAN, IP DSCP
and MPLS packets that
contain the C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
or MPLS EXP value.
By default, the
untrusted packets are
mapped to the BE
service class for best-
effort forwarding.
NOTE
transparently
MPLS/PWE3 services
MPLS EXP values.
according to the
A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification

This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied
ports.
Navigation Path
Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from
the Function Tree.
2. Select the DS domain to be changed in the main interface.

3. Click the Apply Port tab.

4. Click Modify.
Parameters for Configuring the Applied Ports

Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter indicates

relation of a DS domain.
Packet Type CVLAN CVLAN The packets trusted by the

SVLAN OptiX RTN 980 are the C-
VLAN, S-VLAN, IP
IP-DSCP DSCP packets, and MPLS
MPLS-EXP packets that respectively
contain the C-VLAN
priority, S-VLAN
priority, IP DSCP value
and MPLS EXP value. By
default, the untrusted
packets are mapped to the
BE service class for best-
effort forwarding.
NOTE
transparently
MPLS/PWE3 services
MPLS EXP values.
according to the

the board where the port is
located.
Available Port - - This parameter indicates

the available port.

Selected Port - - This parameter indicates

the selected port.
The selected port is
applied to the DS domain.
NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 980, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation
Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this domain.
A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.
Navigation Path (Port Policy)

Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2. Click the CoS Configuration tab.
Parameters (Port Policy)

Policy ID - - This parameter indicates

the policy ID of the port.
Policy Name - - This parameter indicates

or specifies the policy
name of the port.
WRR Scheduling Policy - - This parameter indicates

the current WRR
scheduling policy.

CoS CS7 - l The BE, AF1, AF2,

CS6 AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service
EF classes respectively
AF4 map eight queuing
AF3 entities. The OptiX
RTN 980 provides
AF2
different QoS policies
AF1 for the queues at
BE different service
classes.
l CS6-CS7: indicates
the highest service
grade, which is mainly
involved in signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates fast
forwarding. This
service class is
applicable to the traffic
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class is
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
l BE: indicates that the
traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.

Grooming Police After SP CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP l The strict priority (SP)
Reloading WRR AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1: scheduling algorithm
WRR is designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the
key services is that
higher priorities are
required to minimize
the response delay in
the case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
scheduling algorithm
divides each port into
multiple output sub-
queues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each sub-
queue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 980
supports the setting of
the SP+WRR
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
and the value of the SP
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).


according to the
Bandwidth Limit Disabled Disabled l This parameter

Enabled indicates or specifies
whether traffic
shaping is enabled for
an egress queue
corresponding to a
PHB service class.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
(kbit/s), CBS (byte),
and PBS (byte) can be
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
CIR(kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for an

egress queue uses the
single token bucket two
color marker algorithm.
The value of the CIR must
be equal to the value of the
PIR. In actual traffic
shaping processing, only
the PIR is valid.

PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the buffer queue

is empty, the packets
are processed as
follows: If the rate of a
packet is equal to or
lower than the PIR, it
is directly forwarded;
if the rate of a packet is
higher than the PIR, it
enters the buffer queue
and then is forwarded
at a rate equal to the
PIR.
l When the buffer queue
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
passes the restriction
of the PIR directly
enter the buffer queue
and then are forwarded
PIR.
according to the
CBS(byte) - - l It is recommended that

you set the value of the
CBS equal to the value
of the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.
according to the

PBS(byte) - - l When the buffer queue

is empty, certain burst
packets can be
forwarded if the rate of
the packets is equal to
or lower than the PIR
in a certain period. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
according to the
Navigation Path (WRR Scheduling Policy)

Management > Policy Management > WRR Scheduling Policy from the Function Tree.
Parameters (WRR Scheduling Policy)

Policy ID - - This parameter indicates

the policy ID of the WRR
scheduling policy.
Policy Name - - This parameter indicates

the policy name of the
WRR scheduling policy.
Scheduling Weight 1 to 100 - l The eight classes of

service (CoSs),
namely, BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7
correspond to eight
queues.
l The Scheduling
Weight parameter
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
gained by the WRR
queue.

A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.
Navigation Path (Creating a Port Policy)

3. Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.
Parameters (Creating a Port Policy)

Policy ID - - This parameter specifies

the policy ID of the port.
Automatically Assign Selected Deselected This parameter specifies

Deselected whether to automatically
allocate the policy ID of
the port policy. After this
parameter is selected, the
system automatically
allocates the policy ID,
and then the policy ID
cannot be set manually.
Policy Name - - This parameter specifies

port.

WRR Scheduling Policy - - l This parameter

specifies the desired
WRR scheduling
policy.
l The WRR weight set
in the WRR
scheduling policy only
applies to WRR
queues.
l When the total WRR
weight value of all
WRR queues equals to
100%, the WRR
weight set for each
queue in the WRR
scheduling policy is
the actual WRR
weight. For example,
when AF4, AF3, AF2,
and AF1 are all WRR
queues and their
weight values are
25%, 25%, 25%, and
25% respectively,
each queue is actually
allocated with 25%
total bandwidth.
l When the total WRR
weight value of all
WRR queues is less
than 100%, the actual
WRR weight is
recalculated based on
the proportion
between the WRR
weights of different
queues set in the WRR
scheduling policy. For
example, when AF4,
AF3, AF2, and AF1
are all WRR queues
and their weight values
are 20%, 20%, 20%,
and 20% respectively,
the actual bandwidth
allocation weight of
each queue will be
recalculated based on
the proportion

between the set WRR

weight (1:1:1:1). That
is, each queue is
allocated with 25%
total bandwidth.
CoS CS7 - l The BE, AF1, AF2,

CS6 AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service
EF classes respectively
AF4 map eight queuing
AF3 entities. The OptiX
RTN 980 provides
AF2
different QoS policies
AF1 for the queues at
BE different service class.
l CS6-CS7: indicates
the highest service
grade, which is mainly
transmission.
forwarding. This
service class is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
assured forwarding.
that requires rate
limit.
best-effort manner
without special
processing.

Grooming Police After SP CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP l The strict priority (SP)
Reloading WRR AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1: scheduling algorithm
WRR is designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the
key services is that
higher priorities are
required to minimize
the response delay in
the case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
divides each port into
multiple output sub-
queues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each sub-
queue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 980
the SP+WRR
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
and the value of the SP
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).


according to the
Bandwidth Limit Disabled Disabled l Bandwidth Limit

whether traffic
shaping is enabled for
an egress queue
corresponding to a
PHB service class.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
CIR(kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for an

single token bucket two
color marker algorithm.
the PIR is valid.

PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the buffer queue

are processed as
PIR.
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
of the PIR directly
PIR.
according to the
CBS(byte) - - l It is recommended that

you set the value of the
CBS equal to the value
of the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.
according to the

PBS(byte) - - l When the buffer queue

packets can be
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
according to the
Navigation Path (Creating a WRR Scheduling Policy)

Management > Policy Management > WRR Scheduling Policy from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. The Create WRR Policy dialog box is displayed.
Parameters (Creating a WRR Scheduling Policy)

Policy ID - - This parameter specifies

the policy ID of the WRR
scheduling policy.
Assign automatically Selected Deselected This parameter specifies

Deselected whether to automatically
assign the policy ID of the
If this parameter is set to
Selected, the policy ID of
the WRR scheduling
policy can only be
assigned automatically.
Manual assignment is not
available.
Policy Name - - This parameter specifies


Scheduling Weight 1 to 100 - l The eight classes of

service (CoSs),
namely, BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7
correspond to eight
queues.
l The Scheduling
Weight parameter
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
gained by the WRR
queue.
l This parameter must
be set to 0% for SP
queues.
l The scheduling weight
sum of WRR queues
must be 100%.
A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.
3. Click New.

Traffic Classification ID 1 to 512 - l This parameter

traffic classification.
l The OptiX RTN 980
supports a maximum
of 512 flow
classifications.

ACL Action Permit Permit l The access control list

Deny (ACL) determines
whether to forward or
discard the packets
that enter the port
according to the
specified matching
rules.
l When ACL Action is
set to Permit, the
ingress port accepts
and then performs QoS
processing for only the
packets that meet the
specified mapping
rules.
l When ACL Action is
set to Deny, the
ingress port discards
the packets that meet
the specified mapping
rules.
Ingress Parameters
Logical Relation And And l This parameter

Between Matched Rules specifies the logical
relationship between
the traffic
classification
matching rules.
l The OptiX RTN 980
the logical AND
between multiple
matching rules.

Match Type DSCP Value - l After you click Add or

CVlan ID Delete, complex
traffic classification
CVlan priority can be performed on
SVlan ID the traffic that enters
SVlan priority the ingress port
according to the preset
matching rules.
l In the case a specific
service, complex
traffic classification
can be divided into
basic traffic types
according to the DSCP
value, C-VLAN ID, C-
VLAN priority, S-
VLAN ID, or S-
VLAN priority.
Traffic type is based
on the associated
Ethernet packets.
Therefore, this
parameter is set
according to the packet
type and the planning
information.
Match Value DSCP Value: 0 to 63 - l If the matching value

CVlan ID: 1 to 4094 of the packets is the
same as the preset
CVlan priority: 0 to 7 Match Value, the
SVlan ID: 1 to 4094 packets match the
SVlan priority: 0 to 7 rules of complex
traffic classification.
according to the
Wildcard - - This parameter has a fixed

value of 0.

CoS - - l This parameter

CS7 specifies the PHB
service class queue
CS6 mapped by the traffic
EF classification packets.
AF4 l If this parameter is set
AF3 to empty (-), the traffic
classification packets
AF2
map the PHB service
AF1 class queue according
BE the mapping relation
specified in the topic
about Diffserv domain
management.
according to the
Bandwidth Limit Disabled Enabled l This parameter

whether the CAR
operation is performed
for the flow in the
ingress direction.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the

CIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of the

packets is not more
than the CIR, the
packets are marked
blue and pass the CAR
policing. These
packets are first
forwarded in the case
of network congestion.
l When the rate of the
packets is more than
the CIR but not more
than the PIR, the
packets whose rate is
more than the CIR can
pass the restriction of
the CAR and are
marked yellow. The
processing method of
the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
specified queue of a
higher priority (this is
equal to changing the
priority of the packets)
and then forwarded to
the next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked
yellow can be
processed according to
the new priority.
according to the

PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of the

the PIR, the packets
that exceed the rate
restriction are marked
red and directly
discarded.
l When the rate of the
the CIR but not more
than the PIR, the
packets whose rate is
more than the CIR can
pass the restriction of
the CAR and are
marked yellow. The
processing method of
the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
the next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked
yellow can be
processed according to
the new priority.
according to the

CBS(byte) - - l During a certain

period, if the rate of the
packets whose
processing method is
marked "Pass" is not
more than the CIR,
certain burst packets
are allowed and can be
first forwarded in the
case of network
congestion. The
burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
according to the
PBS(byte) - - l During a certain

period, if the rate of the
packets whose
processing method is
marked "Pass" is more
than the CIR but not
more than the PIR,
certain burst packets
are allowed and
marked yellow. The
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
according to the

Coloration Mode Color Blindness Color Blindness l This parameter

specifies the CAR
operation performed
by the equipment on
the packets. The
packets are dyed
according to the result
of the CAR operation.
The dying rule is
determined by the
comparison between
the rate of the packets
and the preset CAR
value.
l The OptiX RTN 980
supports Color
Blindness only.
Packet Color Red - Packets can be dyed in

Yellow three colors: red, yellow,
and green. The packets in
Green red are first discarded.
Handling Mode Discard - l This parameter

Pass specifies the method of
handling the packets.
Remark
l Discard: The packets
are discarded.
l Pass: The packets are
forwarded.
l Remark: The packets
are remarked.
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
the next port.

Relabeled CoS CS7 - If the handling method is

CS6 set to "Remark", you can
reset the CoS of the
EF packets.
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
Egress Parameters
Bandwidth Limit Disabled Enable l This parameter

Enable indicates or specifies
whether the traffic
shaping is performed
in the egress function.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the

CIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that no

packets exist in the
egress queue: When
the rate of the packets
is not more than the
CIR, these packets
directly enter the
egress queue.
l In the case that certain
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
of the PIR directly
enter the egress queue,
which forwards the
packets to the next port
at the CIR.
according to the

PIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that no

egress queue: If the
rate of the packets is
more than the CIR but
is not more than the
PIR, the packets
whose rate is more
than the CIR enter the
egress queue, which
forwards the packets to
the next port at the
CIR. If the rate of the
the PIR, the packets
are directly discarded.
l In the case that certain
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
of the PIR directly
enter the egress queue,
which forwards the
packets to the next port
at the CIR.
according to the
CBS(byte) - - l If the rate of the

packets is not more
than the CIR during a
certain period, the
burst packets are
directly transmitted.
The maximum traffic
of the burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
according to the

PBS(byte) - - l If the rate of the

the CIR but is not more
than the PIR during a
certain period, the
burst packets enter the
egress queue. The
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
according to the
A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
Navigation Path
Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Parameters for Port Shaping Management

Slot No. - - This parameter specifies

the slot ID.

the port.
CIR (kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for an

CBS (byte) - - single token bucket two
PIR (kbit/s) - - color marker algorithm.
the PIR is valid.
If the traffic shaping
function is enabled, OptiX
RTN 980 processes the
packets in the buffer

PBS (byte) - - queue through the

following methods when
no packets are available in
the queue.
are processed as
PIR.
packets can be
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
of the PIR directly
PIR.

A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features

on the EoS/EoPDH Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the EoS/
EoPDH plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet
port parameters, and QoS parameters.
A.7.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services

This section describes the parameters for EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet services.
A.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation

This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet line service.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
2. Deselect Display QinQ Shared Service.
3. Click New.

Board - - Displays the board name.
Service Type EPL EPL Specify the Ethernet service type to EPL.
EVPL(QinQ)

Service Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional l If this parameter is set to

Unidirectional Unidirectional, you only need to create
a service from the service source to the
service sink. That is, there is traffic only
in the direction from the service source
to the sink port.
l If this parameter is set to Bidirectional,
you need to create a service from the
service source to the service sink and a
service from the service sink to the
service source. That is, there is traffic in
the direction from the service source to
the sink port and in the direction from the
service sink to the source port at the same
time.
Source Port - - l Specifies the port of the service source.

l When you create bidirectional Ethernet
services from a PORT to a VCTRUNK,
it is recommended that you set the PORT
to the source port.
Source VLAN(e.g. 1-4095 - l This parameter can be set to null, a

1,3-6) number, or several numbers. When
setting this parameter to several
numbers, use the comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers, or use the hyphen
(-) to represent consecutive numbers. For
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs must be the same
as the value of Sink VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6).
l If this parameter is set to null, all the
services at the source port are used as the
service source.
l If this parameter is not set to null, only
the service that carries a specified VLAN
ID at the source port can be used as the
service source.
Sink Port - - l Specifies the port of the service sink.

l This parameter cannot take the same
value as Source Port.
l When you create bidirectional Ethernet
services from a PORT to a VCTRUNK,
it is recommended that you set the
VCTRUNK to the sink port.

Sink VLAN(e.g. 1-4095 - l This parameter can be set to null, a

1,3-6) number, or several numbers. When
setting this parameter to several
numbers, use the comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers, or use the hyphen
(-) to represent consecutive numbers. For
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs must be the same
as the value of Source VLAN(e.g.
1,3-6).
l If this parameter is set to null, all the
services at the sink port are used as the
service sink.
l If this parameter is not set to null, only
the service that carries a specified VLAN
ID at the sink port can be used as the
service sink.
Table A-12 Parameters for port attributes

Port - - Displays the ports involved in the Ethernet

service.
Port Type - - Displays the network attribute of the

Ethernet port.
Port Enabled Enabled - l When the source port or the sink port is
Disabled set to a PORT, set Port Enabled to
Enabled.
l This parameter need not be set when the
source port or sink port is a VCTRUNK.
TAG Tag Aware - l If all the accessed services are frames

Access with VLAN tags (tagged frames), set this
parameter to Tag Aware.
Hybrid
l If all the accessed services are frames
without VLAN tags (untagged frames),
set this parameter to Access.
l If the accessed services contain tagged
frames and untagged frames, set this
parameter to Hybrid.

Table A-13 Parameters for bound paths

Configurable EFP8: VCTRUNK1 Specifies the VCTRUNK to bind paths.

Ports VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK16
EMS6:
VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK8
Level - - Displays the level of the bound VC path.

In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter
always takes the value of VC12-Xv.
Service Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional l Specifies the direction of the bound path.
Uplink l Set this parameter to Bidirectional
Downlink unless otherwise specified.
Available - - l Displays the available VC4 paths.

Resources l In the case of the EFP8 board, this
parameter always takes the value of
VC4-1.
l For EMS6 boards, when a VCTRUNK
needs to bind VC-12 paths, select VC-12
paths only in VC-4-4s.
Available - - Specifies the available timeslots.

Timeslots
Bound Path - - You need to plan and set this parameter

according to the following principles:
l The capacity of the VCTRUNK is
determined by the actual bandwidth
required by the services.
l The EFP8 board supports 16
VCTRUNKs. Each VCTRUNK can
bind a maximum of 16 VC-12 paths and
the total number of bound VC-12 paths
cannot exceed 63.
l For EMS6 boards, their VCTRUNKs 1-7
each support a maximum bandwidth of
100 Mbit/s. If a bandwidth higher than
100 Mbit/s is required, VCTRUNK8 is
recommended.
Number of Bound - - Displays the number of the bound VC path.

Paths
Activation Status - - Displays the activation status of the bound

VC path.

A.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based

Ethernet Line Services
This section describes the parameters associated with QinQ-based Ethernet line services, which
need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
2. Select Display QinQ Shared Service.
3. Click New.

Service Type EPL EPL Specifies the service type to EVPL(QinQ).

EVPL(QinQ)

Unidirectional Unidirectional, only the service from
the service source to the service sink is
created. That is, the service source is
forwarded only to the sink port.
Bidirectional, both the service from the
service source to the service sink and the
service from the service sink to the
service source are created. That is, when
the service source is forwarded to the
sink port, the service sink is forwarded to
the source port.
parameter to Bidirectional.

Operation Type l Add S-VLAN Strip S-VLAN l When used for private line services,
l Transparently QinQ can process VLAN tags in
transmit C- different manners as required.
VLAN l When Service Direction is set to
l Transparently Unidirectional, you can set Operation
transmit S- Type to Strip S-VLAN.
VLAN l Set this parameter according to actual
l Transparently situations.
transmit S-
VLAN and C-
VLAN
l Translate S-
VLAN
l Translate S-
VLAN and
transparently
transmit C-
VLAN
l Strip S-VLAN
Source Port - - l Specifies the port where the service

source resides.
l When creating a bidirectional Ethernet
service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you use the PORT
as the source port.
Source C-VLAN 1-4095 - l You can set this parameter to null, a

(e.g. 1, 3-6) number, or several numbers. When you
set this parameter to several numbers,
use "," to separate these discrete values
and use "-" to indicate continuous
numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates
numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs set in this
parameter should be the same as the
number of VLANs set in Sink C-VLAN
(e.g. 1, 3-6).
l When you set this parameter to null, all
the services of the source port work as
the service source.
l When you set this parameter to a non-
null value, only the services of the source
port whose VLAN IDs are included in
the value range of this parameter work as
the service source.

Source S-VLAN 1-4095 - l This parameter must be set to a

numerical value.
l Only the service of the source port whose
S-VLAN ID is equal to the value of this
parameter work as the service source.
Sink Port - - l Specifies the port where the service sink

resides.
l This parameter must be set to be a value
different from Source Port.
l When creating a bidirectional Ethernet
service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you use the
VCTRUNK as the sink port.
Sink C-VLAN(e.g. 1-4095 - l You can set this parameter to null, a

1, 3-6) number, or several numbers. When you
set this parameter to several numbers,
use "," to separate these discrete values
and use "-" to indicate continuous
numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates
numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs set in this
parameter should be the same as the
number of VLANs set in Source C-
VLAN(e.g. 1, 3-6).
l When you set this parameter to null, all
the services of the sink port work as the
service sink.
l When you set this parameter to a non-
null value, only the services of the sink
port whose VLAN IDs are included in
the value range of this parameter work as
the service sink.
Sink S-VLAN 1-4095 - l This parameter must be set to a

numerical value.
l Only the services of the sink port whose
S-VLAN IDs are equal to the value of
this parameter work as the service sink.
C-VLAN Priority AUTO AUTO Displays the C-VLAN priority.
S-VLAN Priority AUTO AUTO Specifies the S-VLAN priority. The bigger
Priority 0 to Priority the value, the higher the priority.
7

Table A-15 Parameters of port attributes

Port - - Displays the ports that are configured to

transmit the service.

Ethernet port.
Port Enabled Enabled - l When the source port or the sink port is
Disabled set to a PORT, set Port Enabled to
Enabled.
l This parameter need not be set when the
source port or sink port is a VCTRUNK.
TAG - - This parameter is invalid for QinQ line

services.


Ports VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK16
EMS6:
VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK8


VC4-1.

Timeslots


cannot exceed 63.
recommended.

Paths

VC path.
A.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service

This section describes the parameters for Ethernet line services.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
Table A-17 Parameters on the main interface (Display QinQ Shared Service is not selected)
Service Type - - Displays the service type.
Service Direction - - Displays the service direction.
Source Port - - Displays the port of the service source.
Source VLAN - - Displays the VLAN ID of the service source.
Sink Port - - Displays the port of the service sink.
Sink VLAN - - Displays the VLAN ID of the service sink.

Activation Status - - Displays whether to activate the service.
Table A-18 Parameters on the main interface (Display QinQ Shared Service is selected)
Service Type - - Displays the service type.
Source Port - - Displays the port of the service source.
Source C-VLAN - - Displays the VLAN ID of the service source.
Source S-VLAN - - l Displays the S-VLAN ID of the service

source.
l This parameter can be set only for the
QinQ-based EVPL service.
Sink Port - - Displays the port of the service sink.
Sink C-VLAN - - Displays the VLAN ID of the service sink.
Sink S-VLAN - - l Displays the S-VLAN ID of the service

sink.
C-VLAN Priority - - l Displays the priority of the C-VLAN.

S-VLAN Priority - - l Displays the priority of the S-VLAN.

Activation Status - - Displays whether to activate the service.
Table A-19 Parameters for port attributes


Ethernet port.

Port Enabled - - When the source port or sink port is a PORT,

this parameter indicates whether the port is
enabled.
TAG - - Displays the tag attribute of the Ethernet

port.
VCTRUNK Port - - Displays the VCTRUNK that binds VC

paths.
Level - - Displays the level of the bound VC paths.
Service Direction - - Displays the direction of the bound VC

paths.
Bound Path - - Displays the serial numbers of the bound VC

paths.
Number of Bound - - Displays the number of the bound VC paths.

Paths
Activation Status - - Displays whether the bound VC paths are

activated.
A.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN

Services Based on IEEE 802.1d/802.1q Bridge
This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet LAN service.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Board - - Displays the board that is configured with a

bridge.

VB name - - Describes the bridge. It is recommended that

you set this parameter to a character string
that indicates the function of the bridge.
Bridge Type 802.1q 802.1q l If this parameter is set to 802.1q, an

802.1d IEEE 802.1q bridge is created.
802.1ad l If this parameter is set to 802.1d, an
IEEE 802.1d bridge is created.
Bridge Switch l IVL/Ingress l IVL/Ingress l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all
Mode Filter Enable Filter Enable the VLANs share one MAC address
(supported by the (IEEE 802.1q table. When the bridge uses the IVL
IEEE 802.1q bridge and the mode, each VLAN has an MAC address
bridge and IEEE IEEE 802.1ad table.
802.1ad bridge, bridge) l When the filtering function is enabled at
unsupported by l SVL/Ingress the ingress port, the ingress port checks
the IEEE 802.1d Filter Disable the VLAN tags of all incoming packets.
bridge) (IEEE 802.1d If the VLAN ID contained in the VLAN
l SVL/Ingress bridge) tag of a packet is not included in the
Filter Disable VLAN filtering table, the packet is
(supported by the discarded. When the filtering function is
IEEE 802.1d disabled at the ingress port, the ingress
bridge and IEEE port does not check any VLAN tag of the
802.1ad bridge, incoming packets.
unsupported by
the IEEE 802.1q
bridge)
Bridge Learning - - Displays the learning mode of the bridge.

Mode
Ingress Filter - - Displays whether the filtering function is

enabled at the ingress port.
MAC Address Self- - - Displays whether the MAC address self-

learning learning of the bridge is enabled.
Table A-22 Parameters for mounting services

VB Port - - Displays the ID of the logical port on the

bridge.
Mount Port - - Displays or specifies which physical port or

VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switch board is
Port Type - - Displays the network attribute of the port


Port Enabled Disabled - Displays or specifies whether the port

Enabled mounted to the bridge is enabled.
TAG Access - Displays or specifies the tag attribute of the

Tag Aware port mounted to the bridge.
Hybrid
Default VLAN ID - - Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID

of the port mounted to the bridge.
This parameter is valid only when you set
the tag attribute of the port to Access or
Hybrid.
Working Mode Auto-Negotiation - Displays or specifies the working mode of

10M Half-Duplex the port mounted to the bridge.
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
GE port: 1000M
Full-Duplex
Active - - Displays whether to activate the service.
Service Direction - - Displays the direction of the service.
C-VLAN - - The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not

support this parameter.
S-VLAN - - The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not

S-VLAN Priority - - The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not

C-VLAN Priority - - The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not

Table A-23 Parameters for mounting configuration
Available Mounted - - Displays which physical port or VCTRUNK

Ports on the Ethernet switch board can be mounted
to the bridge.
Selected Mounted - - Displays which physical port or VCTRUNK

Ports on the Ethernet switch board is mounted to
the bridge.



Ports VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK16
EMS6:
VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK8


VC4-1.

Timeslots

cannot exceed 63.
recommended.

Paths

VC path.

A.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad

Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN Service
This section describes the parameters associated with IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based Ethernet LAN
services, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and then choose Configuration >
Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Board - - Displays the board where the bridge is

configured.
VB Name - - This parameter is a string that describes the

bridge. It is recommended that you set this
parameter to a character string that contains
the information about the detailed
application of the bridge.
Bridge Type 802.1q 802.1q When this parameter is set to 802.1ad,

802.1d create the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
802.1ad
Bridge Switch l IVL/Ingress l IVL/Ingress l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all
Mode Filter Enable Filter Enable (the the VLANs share one MAC address
(supported by the 802.1q bridge table. When the bridge uses the IVL
802.1q bridge and the 802.1ad mode, all the VLANs correspond to their
and 802.1ad bridge) respective MAC address tables.
bridge, l SVL/Ingress l If the ingress filter is enabled, the VLAN
unsupported by Filter Disable tag is checked at the ingress port. If the
the 802.1d (the 802.1d VLAN ID does not equal the VLAN ID
bridge) bridge) of the port defined in the VLAN filtering
l SVL/Ingress table, the packet is discarded. If the
Filter Disable ingress filter is disabled, the preceding
(supported by the described check is not conducted.
802.1d bridge
and 802.1ad
bridge,
unsupported by
the 802.1q
bridge)
Bridge Learning - - Displays the bridge learning mode.

Mode

Ingress Filter - - Displays whether the ingress filter function

is enabled.
MAC Address Self- - - Displays whether the MAC address self-

learning learning function of the bridge is enabled.
Table A-26 Parameters of service mounting

VB Port - - Displays the ID of the logical port of the

bridge.
Mount Port - - Displays or specifies the external port or

VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switching
board that is connected to the bridge.

external port/VCTRUNK connected to the
bridge.
Port Enabled Disabled - Displays or specifies whether the external

Enabled port connected to the bridge is enabled.
TAG - - This parameter is invalid in the case of

Ethernet LAN services based on 802.1ad
bridge.
Default VLAN ID - - Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID.

This parameter is valid only when TAG is
set to Access or Hybrid.
Working Mode Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation Displays or specifies the working mode of

10M Half-Duplex the external port.
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
GE port: 1000M
Full-Duplex
Activate - - Displays whether the service is activated.

C-VLAN - - Displays or specifies the C-VLAN ID that

the data frames carry.
Is valid only when the bridge is an IEEE
802.1ad bridge and Operation Type is set
to Add S-VLAN Base for Port and C-
VLAN.
Specifies the mapping relationship between
the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frames
and the S-VLAN ID to be added.
S-VLAN - - Displays or specifies the S-VLAN ID that

the data frames carry.
l When Operation Type is set to Add S-
VLAN Base for Port, this parameter
specifies that the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge need to be
added with the S-VLAN ID.
VLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN,
this parameter and C-VLAN specify the
mapping relationship between the S-
VLAN ID to be added and the C-VLAN
ID carried by the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
l When Operation Type is set to Mount
Port, this parameter is invalid.
Port and Base for Port and S-VLAN,
this parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID
to be carried by the data frames that enter
S-VLAN Priority - - Displays or specifies the S-VLAN priority.
C-VLAN Priority - - Displays or specifies the C-VLAN priority.

Table A-27 Parameters of service mounting

Operation Type Add S-VLAN base Add S-VLAN base For the meaning of each operation type, see
for port for port Application of the QinQ Technology in
Add S-VLAN base 802.1ad Bridge Services.
for Port and C-
VLAN
Mount Port
Mount Port and base
for Port and S-
VLAN
VB Port - - Specifies the ID of the logical port of the

bridge.
Mount Port - - Selects the external port or VCTRUNK on

the Ethernet switching board that is
connected to the bridge.
Port Type - - Displays the port type.
C-VLAN 1-4095 - Is valid only when Operation Type is set to

Add S-VLAN Base for Port and C-
VLAN.
Specifies the mapping relationship between
the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frames
and the S-VLAN ID to be added.
S-VLAN 1-4095 - l When Operation Type is set to Add S-

specifies that the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge need to be
added with the S-VLAN ID.
mapping relationship between the S-
VLAN ID to be added and the C-VLAN
ID carried by the data frames that enter
this parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID

S-VLAN Priority AUTO AUTO Specifies the S-VLAN priority.

Priority 0 to Priority
7
C-VLAN Priority AUTO AUTO Specifies the C-VLAN priority.
Port Enabled - - Displays or specifies whether the external

port connected to the bridge is enabled.


Ports VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK16
EMS6:
VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK8


VC4-1.

Timeslots


cannot exceed 63.
recommended.

Paths

VC path.
A.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service

This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet LAN service.
Navigation Path
Board - - Displays the board that is configured with a

bridge.
VB ID - - Displays the ID of the bridge.
VB Name - - This parameter is a character string that

describes the bridge. It is recommended that
you set this character string to a value that
indicates the specific purpose of the bridge.
Bridge Type - - Displays the type of the bridge.

Bridge Switch - - Displays the switching mode of the bridge.

Mode
Bridge Learning - - Displays the learning mode of the bridge.

Mode
Ingress Filter - - Displays whether the filtering function is

enabled at the ingress port.
MAC Address self- - - Displays whether the MAC address self-

Learning learning of the bridge is enabled.
Active - - Displays whether to activate the service.
Table A-30 Parameters for mounting services


bridge.
Mount Port - - Displays or specifies which physical port or

VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switch board is
Port Type - - Displays the network attribute of the port

Port Enabled - - Displays or specifies whether the port

mounted to the bridge is enabled.
Hub/Spoke Hub Hub Displays or specifies the Hub/Spoke

Spoke attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.
l Hub ports can mutually access each
other.
l Hub ports and Spoke ports can mutually
access each other.
l Spoke ports cannot mutually access each
other.
TAG - - Displays or specifies the TAG attribute of

the mounted port in the case of Ethernet
LAN services based on 802.1d bridge or
802.1q bridge.
This parameter is invalid in the case of
Ethernet LAN services based on 802.1ad
bridge.

Default VLAN ID - - Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID

of the port mounted to the bridge.
This parameter is valid only when you set
the tag attribute of the port to Access or
Hybrid.
Working Mode - - Displays or specifies the working mode of

the port mounted to the bridge.
Service Direction - - Displays the direction of the service.
C-VLAN - - Displays or specifies the C-VLAN ID

carried by the data frame.
This parameter is valid only when the bridge
is an IEEE 802.1ad bridge and Operation
Type is Add S-VLAN Base for Port and
C-VLAN.
This parameter specifies the mapping
relation between the C-VLAN tag carried by
the data frame and the S-VLAN tag to be
added.
S-VLAN - - Displays or specifies the S-VLAN ID

carried by the data frame.
specifies the S-VLAN to be added to the
data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad
bridge.
mapping relation between the S-VLAN
tag to be added and the C-VLAN tag
carried by the data frame that enters the
IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
this parameter specifies the S-VLAN tag
S-VLAN Priority - - Displays the priority of the S-VLAN.
C-VLAN Priority - - Displays the priority of the C-VLAN.

Table A-31 Parameters for VLAN filtering table

VLAN ID - - Displays the VLAN ID that needs to be

filtered in forwarding.

bridge.
Forwarding - - Displays the actually specified forwarding

Physical Port port.
l Selected forwarding ports can send
packets only among themselves.
l Selected forwarding ports can only
forward the packet that carries the
VLAN ID tag. These ports discard the
packet that carries other VLAN tags.
l The broadcast packets transmitted by
any of Selected forwarding ports can
be forwarded only among Selected
forwarding ports.
Activation Status - - Displays whether the VLAN ID entry is

valid.
Table A-32 Parameters for VLAN unicast

VLAN ID - - l This parameter is invalid for the 802.1d

bridge and the 802.1ad bridge that adopt
the SVL learning mode. The entry
applies to all VLANs.
l In the case of the 802.1d bridge and the
802.1ad bridge that adopt the SVL
learning mode, the entry applies to only
the VLAN with the ID specified by this
parameter.

MAC Address - - l Displays or specifies the static MAC

address.
l A static MAC address is an address that
is set manually. It does not age
automatically and needs to be deleted
manually.
l Generally, a static MAC address is used
for the port that receives but does not
forward Ethernet service packets or the
port whose MAC address need not age
automatically.

bridge.
Physical Port - - l Specifies the Ethernet port that

corresponds to the MAC address.
Aging Status - - Displays the aging status of the entries.
Table A-33 Parameters for disabling MAC addresses

VLAN ID(e.g. - - Displays or specifies the VLAN ID of the

1,3-6) service. A disabled MAC address is valid for
the VLAN with the ID as specified by this
parameter.
MAC Address - - l Displays or specifies the disabled MAC

address. A disabled MAC address is also
called a blacklisted MAC address.
l The data frame that contains a disabled
destination MAC address is discarded. A
disabled MAC address needs to be set
manually and does not age.

VCTRUNK Port - - Displays the VCTRUNK to bind VC paths.
Level - - Displays the level of the bound VC paths.

Service Direction - - Displays the direction of the bound VC

paths.
Bound Path - - Displays the bound paths.
Number of Bound - - Displays the number of bound paths.

Paths
Table A-35 Parameters for self-learned MAC addresses

MAC Address - - l Displays or specifies the self-learned

MAC address. A self-learned MAC
address is also called a dynamic MAC
address.
l The entries of self-learned MAC
addresses are obtained when the bridge
uses the SVL or IVL learning mode. A
self-learned MAC address ages.

bridge.
VLAN ID - - l If the bridge uses the SVL learning

mode, this parameter is invalid. That is,
the preset self-learned MAC address
entries are valid for all VLANs.
l If the bridge uses the IVL learning mode,
the preset self-learned MAC address
entries are valid only for the VLAN with
the ID specified by this parameter.
Table A-36 Parameters for VLAN MAC address table capacity

VLAN ID - - Displays the VLAN ID specified for

querying the self-learned MAC addresses.
Actual MAC - - Displays how many MAC addresses are

Address Table actually self-learned in the query condition
Capacity of a specific VLAN ID.

Table A-37 Parameters for VB port MAC address table capacity

bridge. The ID is specified for querying the
self-learned MAC addresses.
Actual MAC - - Displays how many MAC addresses are

Address Table actually self-learned in the query condition
Capacity of a specific VB port.
A.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation

This section describes the parameters for creating VLAN filtering tables.
Navigation Path
2. Select an IEEE 802.1q or 802.1ad bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab.
NOTE
In the case of IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based Ethernet LAN services, the learning mode of the VB must
be IVL.
3. Click New.
VB - - Displays the bridge whose VLAN filtering

table is to be created.
VLAN ID(e.g. 1-4095 1 Specifies the VLAN IDs in the VLAN

1,3-6) filtering table.
l You can set this parameter to a number
or several numbers. When you set this
parameter to several numbers, use "," to
separate these discrete values and use "-"
to indicate continuous numbers. For
example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1,
3, 4, 5, and 6.
Available - - Displays the ports mounted to the bridge.

forwarding ports

Selected - - Displays the selected forwarding ports.

forwarding ports l The selected forwarding ports can send
packets only among themselves.
l The selected forwarding ports can only
forward the packet that carries the
VLAN ID (e.g:1,3-6) tag. These ports
discard the packet that carries other
VLAN tags.
l The broadcast packet that carries the
VLAN ID(e.g.1,3-6) tag can be
forwarded only among the selected
forwarding ports.
A.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries

This section describes the parameters associated with the aging time of MAC address table
entries, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree.

Board - - Displays the Ethernet board.

MAC Address l 1 to 120 Min 5 Min l If one entry is not updated in a certain
Aging Time l 1 to 120 Hour period, that is, if no new packet from this
MAC address is received to enable the
l 1 to 12 Day re-learning of this MAC address, this
entry is deleted automatically. This
mechanism is called aging, and this
period is called the aging time.
l If you set this parameter to a very large
value, the bridge stores excessive MAC
address table entries that are outdated,
which exhausts the resources of the
MAC address forwarding table.
l If you set this parameter to a very small
value, the bridge may delete the MAC
address table entry that is required,
which reduces the forwarding
efficiency.
NOTE
The maximum MAC Address Aging Time
supported by EFP8 and EMS6 boards is 12 days.
A.7.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols

This section describes the parameters for EoS/EoPDH-plane Ethernet protocols.
A.7.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protection > ERPS Management.
2. Click New.

Parameters
ERPS ID 1 to 7 - l This parameter

Ethernet ring
(ERPS) instance.
l The IDs of ERPS
instances on an NE
must be different from
each other.
East Port - - This parameter specifies

instance.
West Port - - This parameter specifies

instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node Yes No l This parameter

Flag No specifies whether the
node on the ring is the
ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
l Only one node on the
ring can be set as the
RPL owner for each
Ethernet ring.
l An RPL owner needs
to balance the traffic
on each link of an
Ethernet ring.
Therefore, it is not
select a convergence
Instead, select the NE
that is farthest away
from the convergence

RPL Port - - l This parameter

specifies the RPL port.
l There is only one RPL
port and this RPL port
must be the east or
west port on the RPL
owner node.
you set the east port on
an RPL owner as an
RPL Port.

of Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be duplicate
with the VLAN IDs
the service packets.
l The ID of a Control
VLAN must not be the
same as any VLAN ID
used by Ethernet
services. All ring
nodes should use the
same Control VLAN
ID.
Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 01-19-A7-00-00-01 This parameter indicates

A7-00-00-01.

A.7.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
management.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection >
ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters
ERPS ID 1 to 8 - This parameter indicates

the ID of the ERPS
instance.
East Port - - This parameter indicates

instance.
West Port - - This parameter indicates

instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node Yes - This parameter indicates

Flag No whether a node on the ring
is the ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
RPL Port - - This parameter indicates

the RPL port.


the VLAN ID of
Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be duplicate
with the VLAN IDs
the service packets or
inband DCN packets.
l The Control VLAN
must be set to the same
value for all the NEs
on an ERPS ring.
Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 - This parameter indicates

A7-00-00-01.

Hold-Off Time(ms) 0 to 10000, in step of 100 0 l This parameter

the hold-off time of the
ERPS hold-off timer.
l The hold-off timer is
used for negotiating
the protection
switching sequence
when the ERPS
coexists with other
protection schemes so
that the fault can be
rectified in the case of
other protection
switching (such as
LAG protection)
before the ERPS
occurs. When a node
on the ring detects one
or more new faults, it
starts up the hold-off
timer if the preset
hold-off time is set to a
value that is not 0.
During the hold-off
time, the fault is not
reported to trigger an
ERPS. When the hold-
off timer times out, the
node checks the link
status regardless
whether the fault that
triggers the startup of
the timer exists. If the
fault exists, the node
reports it to trigger an
ERPS. This fault can
be the same as or
different from the fault
that triggers the initial
startup of the hold-off
timer.

Guard Time(ms) 10 to 2000, in step of 10 500 l This parameter

the guard time of the
ERPS guard timer.
l The nodes on the ring
continuously forward
the R-APS packets to
the Ethernet ring. As a
result, the outdated R-
APS packets may exist
on the ring network.
After a node on the
ring receives the
outdated R-APS
packets, an incorrect
ERPS may occur. The
ERPS guard timer is an
R-APS timer used for
preventing a node on
the ring from receiving
outdated R-APS
packets. When a faulty
node on the ring
detects that the
switching condition is
cleared, the node starts
up the guard timer and
starts to forward the R-
APS (NR) packets.
During this period, the
R-APS packets
received by the node
are discarded. The
received R-APS
packets are forwarded
only after the time of
the guard timer
expires.

WTR Time(mm:ss) 5 to 12, in step of 1 5 l This parameter

the WTR time of the
WRT timer in the case
of ERPS protection.
l The WTR time refers
to the duration from
the time when the
working channel is
restored to the time
when the switching is
released. When the
working channel is
restored, the WTR
timer of the RPL
owner starts up. In
addition, a signal that
indicates the operation
of the WTR timer is
continuously output in
the timing process.
When the WTR timer
times out and no
switching request of a
higher priority is
received, the signal
indicating the
operation of the WTR
timer is not
transmitted. In
addition, the WTR
release signal is
continuously output.
l The WTR timer is used
to prevent frequent
switching caused by
the unstable working
channel.
Packet Transmit 1 to 10 5 This parameter displays or

Interval(s) specifies the interval for
sending R-APS packets
periodically.
Entity Level 0 to 7 4 This parameter indicates

or specifies the level of the
maintenance entity.
Last Switching Request - - This parameter indicates

the last switching request.

RB Status - - This parameter indicates

the RB (RPL Blocked)
status of the packets
received by the working
node.
l noRB: The RPL is not
blocked.
l RB: The RPL is
blocked.
DNF Status - - This parameter indicates

the DNF status of the
packets received by the
working node.
l noDNF: The R-APS
packets do not contain
the DNF flag. In this
a non-RPL link, and
the node that receives
the packets is
requested to clear the
forwarding address
table.
l DNF: The R-APS
packets contain the
DNF flags. In this
an RPL link, and the
node that receives the
packets is informed
not to clear the
forwarding address
table.

State Machine Status - - This parameter indicates

the status of the state
machine at the working
node.
l Idle: The Ethernet ring
is in normal state. For
example, no node on
the Ethernet ring
detects any faults or
receives the R_APS
(NR, RB) packets.
l Protection: The
Ethernet ring is in
protected state. For
example, a fault on the
node triggers the
ERPS, or a node on the
ring is in the WTR
period after the fault is
rectified.
Node Carried with - - This parameter indicates

Current Packet the MAC address carried
in the R-APS packets
received by the current
node. The MAC address
refers to the MAC address
of the source node that
initiates the switching
request.
East Port Status - - Displays the status of the

east port.
West Port Status - - Displays the status of the

west port.
A.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling

This section describes the parameters for the types of spanning tree protocols and for enabling
the spanning tree protocols.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function
Tree.
2. Click the Protocol Enabled tab.


VB - - Displays the created bridge.
Protocol Enabled Enabled Disabled l Indicates whether to enable the spanning

Disabled tree protocol.
l Try to avoid Layer 2 service loopbacks
in the service networking. If no loop
occurs, you need not start the STP/
RSTP.
l If the loop is already formed in the
service networking, you must start the
STP or RSTP.
Protocol Type STP RSTP l This parameter is valid only when

RSTP Protocol Enabled is Enabled.
l The protocol type should be set
according to the requirement of the
interconnected Ethernet equipment. The
default value is recommended unless
otherwise specified.
A.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters

This section describes the parameters for the spanning tree protocol.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function
Tree.
2. Click the Bridge Parameters tab.


Priority 0-61440 32768 l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge

ID indicate the priority of the bridge.
l When the value is smaller, the priority is
higher. As a result, the bridge is more
likely to be selected as the root bridge.
l If the priorities of all the bridges on the
STP network take the same value, the
bridge whose MAC address is the
smallest is selected as the root bridge.
MAC Address - - Displays the MAC address of a bridge.
Max Age(s) 6-40 20 l Indicates the maximum age of the

CBPDU packet that is recorded by the
port.
l The greater the value, the longer the
transmission distance of the CBPDU
packet, and the greater the network
diameter. When the value of this
parameter is greater, however, the link
fault detection of the bridge is slower and
thus the network adaptability is reduced.
Hello Time(s) 1-10 2 l Indicates the interval for transmitting

CBPDU packets through the bridge.
l The greater the value of this parameter,
the less the network resources that are
occupied by the spanning tree. As the
value of this parameter increases,
however, the topology stability
decreases.
Forward Delay(s) 4-30 15 l Indicates the holding time of a port in the

listening state and in the learning state.
l The greater the value, the longer the
delay of the network state change.
Therefore, the topology changes are
slower and recovery in the case of faults
is slower.
TxHoldCout(per 1-10 6 Indicates how many times the port transmits

second) CBPDU packets in every second.
A.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters

This section describes the parameters associated with the spanning tree protocol, which need to
be set on the NMS.

Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port Parameters tab.

Port - - Displays the created bridge.
Priority 0-240 128 l The most significant eight bits of the port
ID indicate the port priority.
l The smaller the value of this parameter,
the higher the priority.
Port Path Cost 1-200000000 - l Indicates the status of the network to

which the port is connected.
l In the case of the bridges on both ends of
the path, set this parameter to the same
value.
Status - - Displays the state of a port.
Admin Edge Enabled Disabled l Is valid only when the RSTP is used.
Attribute Disabled l Specifies whether to set the port to an
edge port. The edge port refers to the
bridge port that is connected only to the
LAN. The edge port receives the BPDU
and does not transmit the BPDU.
l Set this parameter to Enabled only when
the Ethernet port on the Ethernet board
is directly connected to the data
communication terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In other cases, it is
recommended that this parameter takes
the default value.
Protocol Enabled Enabled Enabled l Specifies whether the STP or RSTP is

Disabled enabled for the port.
l When this parameter is set to Disabled,
the port does not process or transmit the
BPDU.

Auto Edge Enabled Disabled l Is valid only when Admin Edge

Detection Disabled Attribute is set to Enabled.
if the bridge detects that this port is
connected to the port of another bridge,
the RSTP considers this port as a non-
edge port.
l When Admin Edge Attribute is set to
Enabled, set this parameter to
Enabled. In other cases, it is
recommended that this parameter takes
the default value.
A.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information

This section describes the parameters associated with the type and enabled status of the spanning
tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Bridge Running Information tab.
Priority - - Displays the priority of the bridge. The most

significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate
the priority of the bridge.
MAC Address - - Displays the MAC address of the bridge.
Designed Root - - Displays the priority of the specified bridge.

Bridge Priority
Designed Root - - Displays the MAC address of the specified

Bridge MAC bridge.
Address
Root Path Cost - - Displays the root path cost. The root path
cost is the path cost of the root port and is
used for calculating the network topology.

Root Port - - Displays the root port of the spanning tree

protocol.
Max Age(s) - - Displays the maximum age of the CBPDU

packet that is recorded by the port.
Hello Time(s) - - Displays the interval for transmitting the

CBPDU packets through the bridge.
Forward Delay(s) - - Displays the holding time of a port in

listening state and in learning state.
HoldCout - - Displays the number of times that each port

transmits CBPDU packets per second.
A.7.2.7 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information

This section describes the parameters associated with the type and enabled status of the spanning
Navigation Path
2. Click the Port Running Information tab.
Port - - Displays the logical port of the bridge.
Port ID - - Displays the port ID.
Port Status - - Displays the port status.
Port Path Cost - - Displays the port path cost.
Designated Port D - - Displays the ID of the specified port.
Designated Root - - Displays the priority of the specified root

Bridge Priority bridge.
Designated Root - - Displays the MAC address of the specified

Bridge MAC root bridge.
Address
Designated Path - - Displays the specified path cost.

Cost

Designated Bridge - - Displays the priority of the specified bridge.

Priority
Designated Bridge - - Displays the MAC address of the specified

MAC Address bridge.
Topology - - Displays the enabled status of topology

Detection detection.
Edge Port Status - - Displays the enabled status of the edge port.
Running Time(s) - - Displays the duration when the topology

remains unchanged.
A.7.2.8 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute

This section describes the parameters associated with the point-to-point attribute of the spanning
Navigation Path
2. Click the Point to Point Attribute tab.

Port - - Displays the internal and external ports on

the Ethernet board.

Point-to-point Adaptive Adaptive connection l This parameter is valid only when the
Attribute connection RSTP is used.
Link connection l If this parameter is set to Adaptive
Shared media connection, the bridge determines the
actual point-to-point attribute of the port
according to the actual working mode of
the port. If the port works in full-duplex
mode, the actual point-to-point attribute
of the port is True. If the port works in
half-duplex mode, the actual point-to-
point attribute of the port is False.
l If you set this parameter to Link
connection, the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port is True.
l If you set this parameter to Shared
media, the actual point-to-point attribute
of the port is False.
l Only the port whose actual point to point
attribute is True can transmit the fast
transition request and response
messages.
A.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling

This section describes the parameters for enabling the IGMP snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the
Function Tree.
2. Click the Enable IGMP Snooping Protocol tab.

VB - - Displays the ID of the bridge.

Protocol Enable Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the IGMP

Disabled snooping protocol.
l If the IGMP multicast router exists on
the interconnected Ethernet network,
enable the IGMP snooping protocol
according to the requirements of the
router.
The Discarded Tag Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies the method of
of the Packet the port to process unknown multicast
Excluded in the packets. When the IEEE 802.1q or
Multicast Group 802.1ad bridge receives the multicast
packets whose multicast addresses are
not included in the multicast table, these
packets are considered as unknown
packets.
Protocol Enable is Enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled,
unknown multicast packets are
broadcast in the VLAN.
l Set this parameter as required by the
IGMP multicast server.
Max.Non- 1 to 4 3 If the bridge transmits an IGMP group query

Response Times packet to the multicast member ports, the
router port starts the timer for the query of
the maximum response time. If the bridge
does not receive the IGMP report packet
within the maximum response time, the
bridge adds one to the no-response times of
the multicast member port. When the no-
response times of the port exceed the preset
threshold, the bridge deletes the multicast
member from the multicast group.
A.7.2.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static

Multicast Table Entries
This section describes the parameters for creating static multicast table entries.
Navigation Path
Function Tree.
2. Click the Static Multicast Table tab.

3. Click New.

VB ID - - Displays the ID of the created bridge.
VLAN ID - - Specifies the VLAN ID of the static

multicast table entry.
MAC Address - - l Specifies the MAC address in the static

multicast table.
Multicast Port - - l Specifies the port as an entry in the static

multicast table.
l An entry in the static multicast table does
not age.
A.7.2.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast

Table Entries
This section describes the parameters for the aging time of multicast table entries.
Navigation Path
Function Tree.
2. Click the Multicast Aging Time tab.


Multicast Aging 1-120 8 l Specifies the aging time for multicast

Time(Min) table entries. When a dynamic multicast
table entry is not updated in a certain
period (that is, no IGMP request from
this multicast address is received), this
entry is automatically deleted. This
mechanism is called aging, and this
period is called aging time.
l If this parameter is set to a very great
value, the bridge stores excessive
multicast table entries that are no longer
needed, which exhausts the resources of
the multicast table.
l If this parameter is set to a very small
value, the bridge may delete the
multicast table entry that is needed,
which reduces the forwarding
efficiency.
l The default value is recommended.
A.7.2.12 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs

This topic describes the parameters for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation
2. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3. Click New.
Attribute Parameters
LAG No EFP8: 1-12 1 Specifies the LAG number.

EMS6: 1-8
LAG Name - - Specifies the LAG name.

LAG Type Static Static l Static: A static LAG is created by the

Manual user. To add or delete a member port, you
need to run the Link Aggregation
Control Protocol (LACP) protocol. In a
static LAG, a port can be in selected,
standby, or unselected state. By running
the LACP protocol, devices exchange
aggregation information so that they
share the same aggregation information.
l Manual: A manual LAG is created by the
user. When you add or delete a member
port, you need not run the LACP
protocol. In a manual LAG, a port can be
in the UP or DOWN state. The system
determines whether to aggregate a port
according to its physical state (UP or
DOWN), working mode, and rate.
Load Sharing Sharing Sharing l Sharing: In a sharing LAG, all member

Non-Sharing ports always share the traffic load. The
sharing mode can improve bandwidth
utilization on a link. When the member
ports are changed or some member ports
fail, the traffic load of each member port
is automatically re-allocated.
l Non-Sharing: In a non-sharing LAG,
only one member port carries the traffic
load and the other member ports are in
Standby state. Actually, a non-sharing
LAG works in hot-standby mode. When
the active port fails, the system selects a
standby port to substitute for the failed
port, thus preventing a link failure.
Sharing Mode IP Sharing Mode IP Sharing Mode You can set this parameter only when Load
MAC Sharing Mode Sharing is Sharing.
Revertive Mode Revertive Revertive l You can set this parameter only when
Non-Revertive Load Sharing is Non-Sharing.
l If this parameter is set to Revertive,
services are automatically switched back
to the working path after the working
path recovers.
l If this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, services are still transmitted
in the protection path after the working
path recovers and the LAG remains the
same.

Port Setting Parameters

Main Port - - l Specifies the main port in a LAG.

l After a LAG is created, you can add
Ethernet services to the main port only.
That is, services cannot be added to a
slave port.
l When Load Sharing is set to Non-
Sharing, the link connected to the main
port is the working path and the links
connected to the slave ports are
protection paths.
Available Standby - - l Specifies the salve port in a LAG.

Ports l After a LAG is created, you need to
perform manual operations to add or
delete a slave port.
Selected Standby - - Displays the selected slave ports.

Ports
A.7.2.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation

This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation
2. Click the Link Aggregation Parameters tab.

Port Priority 0-65535 32768 l This parameter is valid only when LAG
Type of a LAG is set to Static.
l This parameter indicates the priorities of
the ports in a LAG as defined in the
LACP protocol. The smaller the value,
the higher the priority.

Parameters for the system settings

System Priority 0-65535 32768 l This parameter is valid only when LAG
Type of a LAG is set to Static.
l This parameter indicates the priority of a
LAG. The smaller the value, the higher
the priority.
l When the local LAG and the opposite
LAG negotiate through LACP packets,
one can obtain the system priority of the
other. The LAG with the higher system
priority is considered as the comparison
result. Then, the aggregation
information is consistent at both ends. If
the local LAG and the opposite LAG
have the same system priority, the MAC
addresses are compared. The LAG with
a lower MAC address is considered as
the comparison result. Then, the
aggregation information is consistent at
both ends.
System MAC - - Displays the MAC address of the system.

Address
A.7.2.14 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point

Service LPT
This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-point service LPT.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the
Function Tree.
2. Click Query.

VCTRUNK Port - - Displays the VCTRUNK used by the

Ethernet service.

Direction - - l Displays the direction of the Ethernet

service at the port.
l The service direction is set to positive
when the source port is a PORT and the
sink port is a VCTRUNK; the service
direction is set to reverse when the
source port is a VCTRUNK and the sink
port is a PORT.
LPT Yes No Specifies whether to enable the LPT.

No
Bearer Mode GFP(HUAWEI) GFP(HUAWEI) l Specifies the bearer mode of the LPT
Ethernet packets.
GFP-CSF l The default value is recommended.
PORT-Type Port 0-10000 100 l When the link on which Ethernet

Hold-Off Time(ms) services are transmitted is configured
with other protection schemes, you need
to set the hold-off time of LPT. This
enables the NE to notify the equipment
at both ends of a transmission network of
the fault on the transmission link only
when the other protection schemes fail.
l This parameter is valid only in the
positive direction of LPT.
VCTRUNK Port 0-10000 100 l When the link on which Ethernet

Hold-Off Time(ms) services are transmitted is configured
with other protection schemes, you need
to set the hold-off time of LPT. This
enables the NE to notify the equipment
at both ends of a transmission network of
the fault on the transmission link only
when the other protection schemes fail.
l This parameter is valid only in the
reverse direction of LPT.
A.7.2.15 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint

Service LPT
This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-multipoint service LPT.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the
Function Tree.

2. Click PtoMP LPT. Then, the LPT Management dialog box appears.
3. Click New.
Parameters for Convergence Points

Port - - Specifies the port of the convergence point.
Bearer Mode GFP(HUAWEI) GFP(HUAWEI) l This parameter can be set only when the
Ethernet selected port is a VCTRUNK.
Port Hold-Off 0-10000 0 When the link on which Ethernet services

Time(ms) are transmitted is configured with other
protection schemes, you need to set the
hold-off time of LPT. This enables the NE
to notify the equipment at both ends of a
transmission network of the fault on the
transmission link only when the other
protection schemes fail.
Parameters for Access Points

Port - - Specifies the port at the access node.
Bearer Mode GFP(HUAWEI) GFP(HUAWEI) l This parameter can be set only when the
Ethernet selected port is a VCTRUNK.
A.7.2.16 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation

This section describes the parameters for creating port mirroring tasks.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Port Mirroring from the Function
Tree.
2. Click New.


Mirror Listener - - l After the mirroring function of the port

Port is configured, you can monitor all the
mirrored ports by analyzing the packets
at the mirroring port only. As a result,
you can easily manage the ports.
l Mirror Listener Port indicates the port
that sends the packets copied from
Uplink Listened Port and Downlink
Listened Port.
l Mirror Listener Port cannot be set to a
port that carries any service.
Mirrored - - l Mirrored Upstream Port and

Upstream Port Mirrored Downstream Port indicate
the ports that copy packets for Mirror
Mirrored - - Listener Port.
Downstream Port
l Mirrored Upstream Port can be a
PORT or a VCTRUNK. As a PORT, the
port copies the packets that it receives;
as a VCTRUNK, the port copies the
packets that it transmits. Mirror
Listener Port sends the packets copied
from Mirrored Upstream Port.
l Mirrored Downstream Port can be a
PORT or a VCTRUNK. As a PORT, the
port copies the packets that it transmits;
as a VCTRUNK, the port copies the
packets that it receives. Mirror Listener
Port sends the packets copied from
Mirrored Downstream Port.
NOTE
The transmit direction and receive direction
mentioned in this section are related to the local
NE.
A.7.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM

This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet OAM on the EoS/EoPDH plane.
A.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs

This topic describes the parameters for creating maintenance domains (MDs).

Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function
Tree.
2. In the right pane, click OAM Configuration.
3. Click New and choose Create MD from the drop-down list.
Maintenance Domain For example: MD1 - Specifies the name of the

Name MD.
Maintenance Domain Consumer High(7) Operator Low(0) Specifies the level of the
Level Consumer Middle(6) MD. The greater the value,
the higher the level.
Consumer Low(5)
Provider High(4)
Provider Low(3)
Operator High(2)
Operator Middle(1)
Operator Low(0)
A.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs

This section describes the parameters for creating maintenance associations (MAs).
Navigation Path
Tree.
2. In the right pane, click OAM Configuration.
3. Click New and choose Create MA from the drop-down list.
Maintenance Domain For example: MD1 - Displays the MD in which

Name an MA is to be created.

Maintenance For example: MA1 - This parameter specifies

Association Name the name of the MA,
which is a service-related
domain. By creating MAs,
the connectivity check
(CC) can be performed on
the network that transmits
a particular service
instance.
A.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs

This section describes the parameters for creating a maintenance point (MP).
Navigation Path
Tree.
2. Click New.

Maintenance - NULL Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) of

Domain Name the MP.
NOTE
An MD is not required for a common MP. For
the creation of a common MP, select NULL.
Maintenance - NULL Specifies the maintenance association (MA)

Association Name of the MP.
NOTE
An MA is not required for a common MP. For
the creation of a common MP, select NULL.
Node - - Specifies the port where you want to create

an MP.

VLAN ID - - l Configures the ID of the VLAN to which

the service of the MP belongs. The
information is contained in the OAM
data packet. The MPs with the same
VLAN ID in an MD can communicate
with each other.
l This parameter can be null in the case of
PORT services, but need to be set in the
case of PORT+VLAN services.
MP ID Standard MP: 00-00-0000 Uniquely identifies an MP. From the highest

00-00-0000 to FF- to the lowest, the first byte indicates the
FF-1FFF network number, the second byte indicates
Common MP: the number of the node in the local network,
00-00-0000 to FF- and the third and forth bytes indicate the ID
FF-FF00 of the MP on the network node. The MP ID
must be unique in the entire network.
Type MEP MEP Specifies the MP type defined in IEEE

MIP 802.1ag. An MP can be a maintenance
association end point (MEP) or a
maintenance association intermediate point
(MIP).
Direction SDH SDH l Specifies the MEP direction.

IP l Set this parameter to SDH if the OAM
data initiated by the MEP travels through
the Ethernet switching unit on the local
NE. Otherwise, set this parameter to IP.
Table A-49 Parameters for advanced attributes

Level Consumer High(7) Provider High(4) Specifies the level of a common MP. The
Consumer Middle greater the value, the higher the level.
(6) NOTE
This parameter is valid only for a common MP
Consumer Low(5) (NULL).
Provider High(4)
Provider Low(3)
Operator High(2)
Operator Middle(1)
Operator Low(0)

CC Status Active Inactive Specifies whether to enable the connectivity

Inactive check (CC) function at an MP.
LB Timeout(ms) 3000 to 60000, in 5000 l Specifies the timeout duration of an LB

step of 100 test.
l This parameter can be set only for an
MEP.
LT Timeout(ms) 3000 to 60000, in 5000 l Specifies the timeout duration of an LT

step of 100 test.
MEP.
CCM Sending Standard MP: Standard MP Specifies the interval for sending the CCM
Period(ms) 1000 1000 packet at the MP where the CC test is
performed.
10000 Common MP:
l If this parameter takes a very small
6000 5000 value, service bandwidth decreases
600000 significantly.
Common MP: l If this parameter takes a very large value,
1000 to 60000, in the CC test will become less capable in
step of 100 detecting service interruptions. The
default value is recommended.
MEP.
A.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB

This section describes the parameters for enabling the LB.
Navigation Path
Tree.
2. Select the node that requires an LB test, click OAM Operation, and select Start LB.
LB Source MP ID - - Specifies the ID of the

source maintenance point
in the LB test.

LB Sink MP ID - - Specifies the ID of the sink

maintenance point in the
LB test.
Test Result - - Indicates the result of one

LB test.
Test based on the MAC Selected Not selected Select this parameter for
Address Not selected an LB test based on MAC
addresses.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only
for a standard MP.
LB Sink MP MAC - - Specifies the MAC

Address address of the sink
maintenance point in the
LB test. This parameter is
valid only in the case of
Test based on the MAC
Address.
A.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT

This topic describes the parameters for enabling the LT.
Navigation Path
Tree.
2. Select the node that requires an LT test, click OAM Operation, and select Start LT.

LT Source MP ID - - Specifies the source MP in

the LT test.
LT Sink MP ID - - Specifies the sink MP in

the LT test.
Responding MP ID - - Displays the MP that

responds to the test.

Responding MP Type - - Displays the type of the

MP that responds to the
test.
Hop Count - - Displays the count of hops

between the source MP
and the responding MP.
That is, the number of
responding MPs from the
source MP to a certain
responding MP in an LT
test.
Test Result - - Indicates the result of one

LT test.
A.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter

This section describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.

PORT - - Displays the name of the

external Ethernet port.
Enable OAM Protocol Enabled Disabled Specifies whether the

Disabled point-to-point OAM
protocol is enabled.
After the OAM protocol is
enabled, the current
Ethernet port starts to use
the preset mode to set up
an OAM connection with
the opposite end.

OAM Working Mode Active Active The negotiation mode of

Passive Ethernet port OAM
includes active and
passive modes.
If this parameter is set to
Active, the port can
initiate an OAM
connection. If this
parameter is set to
Passive, the port can only
respond to the OAM
connection requests from
the opposite end.
Remote Alarm Support Enabled Enabled Specifies whether the

for Link Event Disabled detected link event is
notified to the opposite
end (for example, error
frame periods, error
frames, and error frame
seconds).
Max OAM Packet - - Displays the maximum

Length(byte) length of the OAM
packets.
This parameter takes the
same value as the
Maximum Frame
Length of the external
port.
Loopback Status - - Displays the loopback

status.
A.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring

This section describes the parameters for monitoring the OAM error frames at the Ethernet port.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.

PORT For example: - Displays the name of the external Ethernet

PORT1 port.
Error Frame 1000 to 60000, in 1000 In the specified Error Frame Monitor
Monitor Window step of 100 Window (ms), if the number of error frames
(ms) exceeds the specified Error Frame
Monitor Threshold (Entries) due to the
link degradation, the link event alarm is
reported.
Error Frame 1 to 4294967295, in 2 Specifies the threshold of monitoring error

Monitor Threshold step of 1 frames.
(frames)
Error Frame 1488 to 89280000, GE port: 1488000 Within the specified value of Error Frame
Period Window in step of 1 FE port: 148800 Period Window (frames), if the number of
(frames) error frames on the link exceeds the preset
value of Error Frame Period Threshold
(frames), an alarm is reported.
Error Frame 1 to 89280000, in 2 Specifies the threshold of monitoring the

Period Threshold step of 1 error frame period.
(frames)
Error Frame 10 to 900, in step of 60 If any error frame occurs in one second, this
Second Window(s) 1 second is called an error frame second.
Within the specified value of Error Frame
Second Window(s), if the number of error
frames on the link exceeds the preset value
of Error Frame Second Threshold (s), an
alarm is reported.
Error Frame 1 to 900, in step of 1 2 Specifies the threshold of monitoring error

Second Threshold frame seconds.
(s)
A.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter

This section describes the parameters for monitoring the OAM errored frames at the Ethernet
port.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Remote OAM parameter tab.


Field Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - Displays the name of the

remote Ethernet port.
Remote OAM Working - - Displays the working

Mode mode of the remote
Ethernet port.
Remote Alarm Support - - Displays whether the

for Link Event remote Ethernet port can
notify link events to the
local port.
Remote Side Loopback - - Displays how the remote

Response Ethernet port responds to a
loopback.
Unidirectional - - Displays whether the

Operation remote Ethernet port
supports unidirectional
operations.
Max.OAM Packet - - Displays the maximum

Length (byte) OAM packet size
supported by the remote
Ethernet port.
A.7.4 QoS Parameters

This section describes the parameters for the QoS on the EoS/EoPDH plane.
A.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows

This parameter describes the parameters for creating flows.
Navigation Path
Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Flow Configuration tab.
3. Click New.


Flow Type Port Flow Port Flow l Port flow: The packets from a certain
Port+VLAN Flow port are classified as a type of flow. The
Ethernet service associated with this
Port+SVLAN Flow flow type is the line service or Layer 2
Port+CVLAN switching service that uses this port as
+SVLAN Flow the service source.
Port+VLAN l Port+VLAN flow: The packets that are
+Priority Flow from a certain port and have a specified
VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow.
The associated Ethernet service of this
flow type is the EVPL service (based on
VLAN) or EVPLAN service (based on
the 802.1q bridge) that uses this PORT
+VLAN as the service source.
l Port+SVLAN flow: The packets that are
from a certain port and have a specified
SVLAN ID are classified as a type of
flow. The associated Ethernet service of
this flow type is the EVPL service (based
on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on
the 802.1ad bridge) that uses this PORT
+SVLAN as the service source.
l Port+CVLAN+SVLAN flow: The
packets that are received from or
transmitted to a certain port and have a
specified CVLAN+SVLAN are
classified as a type of flow. The
associated Ethernet service of this flow
type is the EVPL service (based on
QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on the
802.1ad bridge) that uses this PORT
+CVLAN+SVLAN as the service
source.
l Port+VLAN+Priority flow: The packets
that are from a certain port and have a
specified VLAN ID and a specified
VLAN priority are classified as a type of
flow. The associated Ethernet service of
this flow type is the line service that uses
this Port+VLAN+Priority as the service
source.
NOTE
An EMS6 board does not support Port+VLAN
+Priority Flow.

Port EFP8: PORT1 to PORT1 l When the associated service is the line
PORT9, service, set this parameter to the source
VCTRUNK1 to port or sink port of the associated
VCTRUNK16 Ethernet service.
EMS6: PORT1 to l When the associated service is the Layer
PORT7, 2 switching service, set this parameter to
VCTRUNK1 to a mounted port of the bridge.
VCTRUNK8
VLAN ID 1 to 4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when Flow

Type is set to Port+VLAN Flow or Port
+VLAN+Priority Flow.
l Set this parameter to the source VLAN
of the associated Ethernet service.
C-VLAN 1 to 4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when Flow

Type is set to Port+CVLAN+SVLAN
Flow.
l Set this parameter to the source C-
VLAN of the associated Ethernet
service.
S-VLAN 1 to 4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when Flow

Type is set to Port+SVLAN Flow or
Port+SVLAN+CVLAN Flow.
l Set this parameter to the source S-VLAN
of the associated Ethernet service.
Priority - - l This parameter is valid only when Flow

Type is PORT+VLAN+Priority Flow.
l This parameter indicates the VLAN
priority of the flow-associated Ethernet
services.
NOTE
An EMS6 board does not support Priority.
A.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR

This section describes the parameters for creating CAR.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and then choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the CAR Configuration.
3. Click New.


CAR ID EFP8: 1 to 512 1 This parameter identifies a CAR operation,

EMS6: 1 to 1024 and is used to bind a flow to an associated
CAR operation.
Enabled/Disabled Enabled Disabled Indicates whether to enable the CAR

Disabled operation performed on the flow bound to
the CAR.
Committed EFP8: 0 to 100032, 0 l Indicates the CIR. When the rate of a

information Rate in steps of 64 packet is not more than the CIR, this
(kbit/s) EMS6 (FE ports): 0 packet passes the restriction of the CAR
to 102400, in steps and is forwarded first even in the case of
of 64 network congestion.
EMS6 (GE ports): 0 l The value of this parameter should not
to 1024000, in steps be more than the PIR.
of 64
Committed Burst EFP8: 0 to 1024 0 Indicates the CBS. When the rate of a packet
Size (kbyte) EMS6: 0 to 16384 that passes the restriction of the CAR is not
more than the CIR in a certain period, some
packets can burst. These packets can be
forwarded first even in the case of network
congestion. The maximum traffic of the
burst packets is determined by the CBS.
Note that the CBS has an inherent size, and
this parameter indicates the increment value
only. The inherent size of the CBS is
determined by the CIR. The greater the CIR,
the greater the CBS.
Peak information EFP8: 0 to 100032, 0 l Indicates the PIR. When the rate of a
Rate (kbit/s) in steps of 64 packet is more than the PIR, the packet
EMS6 (FE ports): 0 that exceeds the rate restriction is
to 102400, in steps directly discarded. When the rate of
of 64 packets is more than the CIR but is lower
than or equal to the PIR, these packets
EMS6 (GE ports): 0 whose rate exceeds the CIR can pass the
to 1024000, in steps restriction of the CAR and are marked
of 64 yellow.
l The value of this parameter should not
be more than the port bandwidth.

Maximum Burst EFP8: 0 to 1024 0 Indicates the MBS. When the rate of the
Size (kbyte) EMS6: 0 to 16384 packet that passes the restriction of the CAR
is more than the CIR but is not more than
the PIR, some packets can burst and are
marked yellow. The maximum traffic of the
burst packets is determined by the MBS.
Note that the MBS has an inherent size, and
this parameter indicates the increment value
only. The inherent size of the MBS is
determined by the PIR. The greater the PIR,
the greater the MBS.
A.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS

This section describes the parameters for creating CoS.
Navigation Path
Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
3. Click New.

CoS ID EFP8: 1-64 1 This parameter identifies a CoS operation,

EMS6: 1-65535 and is used to bind a flow to an associated
CoS operation.

CoS Type simple simple l If the CoS type of a flow is set to simple,
VLAN Priority all the packets in this flow are directly
scheduled to a specified egress queue.
IPTOS
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to VLAN
DSCP priority, the packets in this flow are
scheduled to specified egress queues
according to the user priorities specified
in the VLAN tags of these packets.
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to DSCP,
the packets in this flow are scheduled to
specified egress queues according to
differentiated services code point
(DSCP) in the IPv6 tags of these packets.
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to IP TOS,
the packets in this flow are scheduled to
specified egress queues according to the
TOS values carried in the IPv4 packets.
This CoS type is applicable to IPv4
packets.
CoS parameter - - Displays the CoS parameters corresponding

to different CoS types.
CoS Priority 0-7 - This parameter determines to which egress

queue a packet is schedule.
l Each Ethernet port on the EFP8/EMS6
board supports eight egress port queues.
Queues 1-8 respectively correspond to
the CoS priorities from 0 to 7.
l Queue 8, with the CoS priority of 7, is as
SP queue. Queues 1-7, with the CoS
priorities from 0 to 6, are WRR queues.
The weighted proportion of these WRR
queues is 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from
priority 0 to priority 6). On the EFP8
board, the weighted proportion of these
WRR queues cannot be changed. On the
EMS6 board, the weighted proportion of
these WRR queues can be changed.
l If the traffic shaping feature of some
queues is enabled, bandwidth is
allocated first to the queues whose traffic
shaping feature is enabled based on the
CIR. The remaining bandwidth is
allocated to the eight queues by using the
SP+WRR algorithm.

A.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS

This section describes the parameters for creating CAR/CoS.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board, and then choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Flow Configuration tab.
Flow Type - - Displays the type of a flow.
VB ID - - Displays the ID of the bridge.
Port - - Displays the port where a flow is to be

created.
C-VLAN - - l Displays the C-VLAN.

l This parameter is valid is Flow Type is
Port+VLAN Flow, Port+CVLAN
+SVLAN Flow, or Port+VLAN
+Priority Flow.
S-VLAN - - l Displays the S-VLAN.

l This parameter is valid when Flow
Type is Port+SVLAN Flow or Port
+CVLAN+SVLAN Flow.
Priority - - l Displays the priority of the flow.

l This parameter is valid when Flow
Type is Port+VLAN+Priority Flow.
Bound CAR - None This parameter indicates the CAR ID

corresponding to a CAR operation.
Different CAR IDs should be bound to
different flows, even though the parameters
of the CAR operations are the same.
Bound CoS - None Indicates the CoS ID that corresponds to a

CoS operation.
A.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress

Queues
This section describes the parameters for shaping management of egress queues.

Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the required Ethernet switching board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
Click the Port Queue Information tab.

Port Queue - - Displays the queue name.
Status Enabled Disabled Indicates whether to enable the traffic

Disabled shaping feature of an egress queue.
CIR (kbit/s) EFP8: 0 to 100032, 0 l When the rate of a packet is not more
in steps of 64 than the CIR, this packet directly enters
EMS6 (FE ports): 0 the egress queue.
to 102400, in steps l The value of this parameter should not
of 64 be more than the PIR.
EMS6 (GE ports): 0
to 1024000, in steps
of 64
DCBS (kbyte) - 0 Displays the excess burst size.
PIR (kbit/s) EFP8: 0 to 100032, 0 l When the rate of a packet is more than
in steps of 64 the PIR, the packet that exceeds the rate
EMS6 (FE ports): 0 restriction is directly discarded. When
to 102400, in steps the rate of packets is more than the CIR
of 64 but not more than the PIR, the packets
that exceed the restriction of the CIR
EMS6 (GE ports): 0 enter the buffer of the CIR. When the
to 1024000, in steps buffer overflows, the packets are marked
of 64 yellow and enter the egress queue, which
enables the packets to be discarded first
in the case of queue congestion.
l The value of this parameter should not
be more than the port bandwidth.
DMBS (kbyte) - 0 Displays the maximum excess burst size.

Scheduling Mode SP Queue 1: WRR By default, queue 8 (with the CoS priority
WRR Queue 2: WRR of 7) of the EMS6 board is the SP queue, and
queues 1-7 (with the respective CoS priority
Queue 3: WRR of 0-6) are the WRR queues and their
Queue 4: WRR weights are in the proportion of
Queue 5: WRR 1:2:8:16:32:64.
Queue 6: WRR The scheduling principles of the SP+WRR
are as follows:
Queue 7: WRR
l A port immediately transmits the packets
Queue 8: SP
in the SP queue and can transmit the
packets in the WRR queue only when no
packets exist in the SP queue.
l If multiple SP queues exist on a port, the
port compares the SP queues according
to their priorities (queue 8 has the highest
priority and queue 1 has the lowest
priority).
l According to the fixed weight value, you
can allocate the time slice to each WRR
queue. Then, the port transmits the
packets in the corresponding WRR
queue in each time slice. If a WRR queue
in a time slice does not contain any
packets, the WRR queue removes this
time slice and then transmits the packets
in the corresponding WRR queue in the
next time slice.
Weight An integer ranging Queue 1: 1 By default, queue 8 (with the CoS priority
from 1 to 64 Queue 2: 2 of 7) of the EMS6 board is the SP queue, and
queues 1-7 (with the respective CoS priority
Queue 3: 4 of 0-6) are the WRR queues and their
Queue 4: 8 weights are 1:2:4:8:16:32:64.
Queue 5: 16
Queue 6: 32
Queue 7: 64
Queue 8: -
A.7.4.6 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Port Shaping

This section describes the parameters associated with egress port shaping management.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EMS6 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
Click the Port Shaping tab.


Status Enabled Disabled This parameter specifies whether to enable

Disabled the traffic shaping at a port.
PIR (kbit/s) EMS6 (FE ports): 0 0 In the case of an EMS6 board, the PIR of a
to 102400, in steps port meets the following constraints:
of 64 l The PIR of the port is equal to or more
EMS6 (GE ports): 0 than the PIR of any queue at this port.
to 1024000, in steps l The PIR of the port is equal to or more
of 64 than the sum of the CIRs of all the queues
at this port.
A.7.5 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards

This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the EoS/EoPDH plane.

This section describes the parameters for Ethernet external ports.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board and then choose Configuration >
Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select External Port.
Table A-61 Parameters for the basic attributes

Port - - Displays the name of the external port.
Name - - Displays or specifies the name of the

external port.

Enabled/Disabled Enabled Disabled l If the port gains access to services, set

Disabled this parameter to Enabled. Otherwise,
set this parameter to Disabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled for the
port that does not access services, an
ETH_LOS alarm may be generated.
This parameter is invalid for PORT9 on an
EFP8 board.
EMS6 board.
Working Mode EFP8: Auto-Negotiation l Different types of Ethernet ports support

l Auto- different working modes.
Negotiation l If the opposite port works in auto-
l 10M Half- negotiation mode, set this parameter to
Duplex Auto-Negotiation.
l 10M Full- l If the opposite port works in full-duplex
Duplex mode, set this parameter to 10M Full-
Duplex or 100M Full-Duplex,
l 100M Half- depending on the rate of the opposite
Duplex port.
l 100M Full- l If the opposite port works in half-duplex
Duplex mode, set this parameter to 10M Half-
EMS6: Duplex or 100M Half-Duplex,
l Auto- depending on the rate of the opposite
Negotiation port, or set this parameter to Auto-
Negotiation.
l 10M Half-
Duplex l GE optical ports on an EMS6 board
support only Auto-Negotiation and
l 10M Full- 1000M Full-Duplex modes.
Duplex
NOTE
l 100M Half- This parameter is invalid for PORT9 on an EFP8
Duplex board.
l 100M Full- This parameter is invalid for PORT7 on an EMS6
Duplex board.
l 1000M Full-
Duplex
Maximum Frame EFP8: 1518 to 2000 1522 l Set this parameter to a value greater than
Length EMS6: 1518 to 9600 the maximum length of all the data
frames to be transmitted.
l The default value is recommended if the
jumbo frame is not considered and the
data frames contain only one layer of
VLAN tags or even no tags. The value of
1526 or greater is recommended if the
data frames contain two layers of tags,
such as QinQ.

Port Physical - - Displays the actual working status of a

Parameters PORT.
EFP8 board.
EMS6 board.
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l A MAC loopback is to loop back the

Loopback Ethernet frames transmitted to the
opposite port.
l Use the default value unless otherwise
specified.
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l A PHY loopback is to loop back the

Loopback Ethernet physical signals transmitted to
the opposite port.
l Use the default value unless otherwise
specified.
EFP8 board.
EMS6 board.
Table A-62 Parameters for flow control

Non- Disabled Disabled l This parameter is valid only when

Autonegotiation Enable Symmetric Working Mode is not set to Auto-
Flow Control Flow Control Mode Negotiation.
Mode l If this parameter is set to Enable
Send Only
Symmetric Flow Control Mode, the
Receive Only port can send PAUSE frames and
process the received PAUSE frames.
l If this parameter is set to Send Only, the
port can send PAUSE frames in the case
of congestion but cannot process the
received PAUSE frames.
l If this parameter is set to Receive Only,
the port can process the received PAUSE
frames but cannot send PAUSE frames
in the case of congestion.
l Set this parameter to the same as the non-
autonegotiation flow control mode of the
opposite port.

Autonegotiation Disabled Disabled l This parameter is valid only when

Flow Control Enable Working Mode is Auto-Negotiation.
Mode Dissymmetric Flow l If this parameter is set to Enable
Control Symmetric Control, the port can send
Enable Symmetric PAUSE frames and process the received
Control PAUSE frames.
Enable Symmetric/ l If this parameter is set to Enable
Dissymmetric Flow Dissymmetric Flow Control, the port
Control can send PAUSE frames in the case of
congestion but cannot process the
received PAUSE frames.
l If this parameter is set to Enable
Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow
Control, the port can function as
follows:
– Sends and processes PAUSE frames.
– Sends but does not process PAUSE
frames.
– Processes but does not send PAUSE
frames.
autonegotiation flow control mode of the
opposite port.
EFP8 board.
EMS6 board.
Table A-63 Parameters for the tag attributes


TAG Tag Aware Tag Aware l With different tag attributes, the port
Access processes frames in different modes. For
details, see Table A-66.
Hybrid
l Set this parameter to Tag Aware if the
port processes the frames with VLAN
tags (or tagged frames).
l Set this parameter to Access if the port
processes the frames without VLAN tags
(or untagged frames).
l Set this parameter to Hybrid if the port
processes the tagged frames and
untagged frames.
Default VLAN ID 1-4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when

l For the usage of this parameter, see
Table A-66.
VLAN Priority 0-7 0 l This parameter is valid only when

Table A-66.
l When the VLAN priority is required for
traffic classification or other purposes,
set this parameter as required. Use the
default value unless otherwise specified.
Entry Detection Enabled Enabled l Indicates whether to check the incoming

Disabled packets according to the tag attribute.
Table A-64 Parameters for the network attributes


Port Attributes UNI UNI l If this parameter is set to UNI, the port
C-Aware processes data frames according to the
tag attribute.
S-Aware
l If this parameter is set to C-Aware or S-
Aware, the port processes the data
frames by using the processing method
of QinQ services.
l Set this parameter to C-Aware or S-
Aware when the port processes QinQ
services. Otherwise, this parameter takes
the default value.
Table A-65 Parameters for the advanced attributes

Broadcast Packet Disabled Disabled This parameter specifies whether to restrict

Suppression Enabled the traffic of broadcast packets according to
the proportion of the broadcast packets to
the total packets. Set this parameter to
Enabled when a broadcast storm may occur
at the opposite port.
Broadcast Packet 10%-100% 30% When the proportion of the received

Suppression broadcast packets to the total packets
Threshold crosses the threshold, the port discards the
received broadcast packets. Set this
parameter to a value greater than the
proportion when no broadcast storm occurs.
The value of 30% or greater is
recommended.
Traffic Threshold EFP8: - Specifies the traffic threshold of the port.

(Mbit/s) l 0 to 100 (PORT1 You can specify the traffic monitoring
to PORT8) period by setting Port Traffic Threshold
Time Window(Min).
l 0 to 1000
(PORT9)
EMS6:
l 0 to 1000
(PORT1 and
PORT2)
l 0 to 100 (PORT3
to PORT6)
l 0 to 1000
(PORT7)

Port Traffic 0-30 0 Specifies the traffic monitoring period.

Threshold Time l If Port Traffic Threshold Time
Window(Min) Window(Min) is set to 0, an associated
alarm is reported at the moment when the
traffic received at the port crosses the
value of Traffic Threshold(Mbit/s).
l If the Port Traffic Threshold Time
Window(Min) is set to a value other
than 0, an associated alarm is reported
only when the traffic received at the port
always crosses the value of Traffic
Threshold(Mbit/s) in the monitoring
period.
Loop Detection Enabled Disabled This parameter specifies whether to enable

Disabled loop detection, which is used to check
whether a loop exists on the port.
Table A-66 Methods used by ports to process data frames

Direction Type of Data Processing Method
Frame
Tag aware Access Hybrid
Ingress port Tagged frame Receives the frame. Discards the frame. Receives the frame.
Untagged frame Discards the frame. The port receives the The port receives the
frame after adding to frame after adding to
the frame the VLAN the frame the VLAN
tag that contains tag that contains
and VLAN and VLAN
Priority. Priority.


Frame
Egress port Tagged frame Transmits the frame. The port strips the l If the VLAN ID
VLAN tag from the in the frame is
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not Default
VLAN ID, the
port directly
transmits the
frame.

This section describes the parameters for Ethernet internal ports.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8/EMS6 board and then choose Configuration >
Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select Internal Port.
Table A-67 Parameters for the tag attributes

Port - - Displays the name of the internal port.

TAG Tag Aware Tag Aware l With different tag attributes, the port
Access processes frames in different modes. For
details, see Table A-72.
Hybrid
l Set this parameter to Tag Aware if the
port processes the frames with VLAN
tags (or tagged frames).
l Set this parameter to Access if the port
processes the frames without VLAN tags
(or untagged frames).
l Set this parameter to Hybrid if the port
processes the tagged frames and
untagged frames.
Default VLAN ID 1-4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when

Table A-72.
VLAN Priority 0-7 0 l This parameter is valid only when

l For the usage of this parameter, refer to
Table A-72.
l When the VLAN priority is required for
traffic classification or other purposes,
set this parameter as required. The
default value is recommended unless
otherwise specified.
Entry Detection Enabled Enabled l Indicates whether to check the incoming

Disabled packets according to the tag attribute.
Table A-68 Parameters for encapsulation or mapping

Mapping Protocol GFP GFP The default value is recommended.

HDLC The EFP8 board supports GFP only.
LAPS
Scramble Scrambling Mode Scrambling Mode l Indicates the scrambling polynomial

[X43+1] [X43+1] used by the mapping protocol.
Unscrambled l The default value is recommended.

Set Inverse Value - - l This parameter indicates whether the

for CRC value of the CRC field defined in the
LAPS or HDLC encapsulation frame
format will be reversed. This means that
this parameter takes effect only if
Mapping Protocol is set to LAPS or
HDLC.
l Set Set Inverse Value for CRC to the
same value for the VCTRUNKs at both
ends.
Check Field FCS32 FCS32 l When the Ethernet board uses the GFP
Length No mapping protocol, set this parameter to
FCS32 or No.
l When you set this parameter to FCS32,
a 32-bit FCS is used.
FCS Calculated Bit Big endian Big endian l When you set this parameter to Big
Sequence Little endian endian, the least significant byte of the
FCS is placed first and the most
significant byte is placed last.
l When you set this parameter to Little
endian, the most significant byte of the
FCS is placed first and the least
significant byte is placed last.
Table A-69 Parameters for the network attributes

Port Attributes UNI UNI l If this parameter is set to UNI, the port
C-Aware processes data frames according to the
tag attribute.
S-Aware
l If this parameter is set to C-Aware or S-
Aware, the port processes the data
frames by using the processing method
of QinQ services.
l Set this parameter to C-Aware or S-
Aware when the port processes QinQ
services. Otherwise, this parameter takes
the default value.

Table A-70 Parameters for the LCAS

Enabling LCAS Disabled Disabled l Indicates whether to enable the LCAS

Enabled function.
l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the
number of virtual containers for
mapping required services to meet the
bandwidth needs of the applications. As
a result, the bandwidth utilization is
improved.
LCAS Mode Huawei Mode Huawei Mode l Indicates the sequence in which the
Standard Mode LCAS sink sends the MST control
packet and Rs-Ack control packet.
l When you set this parameter to Huawei
Mode, the LCAS sink first sends the Rs-
Ack and then sends the MST.
l When you set this parameter to
Standard Mode, the LCAS sink first
sends the MST and then sends the Rs-
Ack.
l If the equipment at the opposite end is
the third-party equipment and does not
support the Huawei mode, set this
parameter to Standard Mode.
Otherwise, set this parameter to Huawei
Mode.
Hold Off Time(ms) An integer ranging 2000 l When a member link is faulty, the LCAS
from 0, 2000 to performs switching after a delay of time
10000, in the to prevent the situation where an NE
increments of 100 simultaneously performs a protection
switching such as SNCP and performs an
LCAS switching. This parameter
specifies the duration of the delay.
WTR Time(s) 0-720 300 l When the time after a member link is
restored to normal reaches the specified
value of this parameter, the VCG uses
the restored member link.

TSD Disabled Disabled l Indicates whether the TSD is used as a

Enabled condition for determining whether a
member link is faulty. In the case of the
VC-12, the TSD refers to the BIP_SD.
In the case of the VC-3, the TSD refers
to the B3_SD_VC3.
Min. Members- 2-256 16 l Specifies the minimum number of

Transmit Direction members in the transmit direction. After
the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT
alarm is reported when the number of
effective members in the transmit
direction becomes lower than the
minimum number specified by this
parameter.
Mini. Members- 2-256 16 l Specifies the minimum number of

Receive Direction members in the receive direction. After
the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT
alarm is reported when the number of
effective members in the receive
direction becomes lower than the
minimum number specified by this
parameter.


Ports VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK16
EMS6:
VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK8



VC4-1.

Timeslots

cannot exceed 63.
recommended.

Paths

VC path.
Table A-72 Methods used by ports to process data frames

Frame
Ingress port Tagged frame Receives the frame. Discards the frame. Receives the frame.
Untagged frame Discards the frame. The port receives the The port receives the
frame after adding to frame after adding to
the frame the VLAN the frame the VLAN
tag that contains tag that contains
and VLAN and VLAN
Priority. Priority.


Frame
Egress port Tagged frame Transmits the frame. The port strips the l If the VLAN ID
VLAN tag from the in the frame is
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not Default
VLAN ID, the
port directly
transmits the
frame.

This section describes the parameters for setting the type field of QinQ frames.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Advance Attribute > QinQ Type Area Settings from the Function Tree.
Board - - Displays the Ethernet board on which the

type field of QinQ frames needs to be set.
If the Ethernet board is the EFP8 board, this
parameter always takes the value of EFP8.
If the Ethernet board is the EMS6 board, this
parameter always takes the value of EMS6.
QinQ Type Area 81 00 8100 Specifies the type field of QinQ frames. Set
(Hexadecimal) 88 A8 this parameter according to the type field of
the accessed QinQ frames.
91 00
0600 to FFFF

A.8 RMON Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
Navigation Path
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Statistics Group tab.
Parameters
Object - - This parameter specifies the object to be

monitored.
Sampling Period 5 to 150 5 This parameter specifies the duration of the

monitoring period.
Display Selected Deselected l This parameter specifies the method of

Accumulated Deselected displaying the performance events.
Value l If this parameter is not selected, the
displayed value is an increment
compared to the value that is collected in
last sampling period and stored in the
register.
l If this parameter is selected, the
displayed value is an absolute value that
is currently stored in the register.
Display Mode Graphics List l This parameter specifies the method of

List displaying the performance events.
l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the
number of performance events to be
monitored at each time cannot be more
than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Legend Color - l This parameter indicates the description

Description of different colors.
Display Mode is set to Graphics.

Event - - l This parameter indicates the queried

performance events.
Display Mode is set to List.
A.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.
Navigation Path
2. Click the History Group tab.
Parameters
Object - - The parameter indicates the object to be

monitored.
Ended from/to - - This parameter specifies the start time and

end time of the monitoring period.
History Table 30-Second 30-Second This parameter specifies the monitoring

Type 30-Minute period.
Custom Period 1
Custom Period 2
Display Mode Graphics List l This parameter specifies the method of

List displaying the performance events.
l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the
number of performance events to be
monitored at each time cannot be more
than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Legend Color - l This parameter indicates the description

Description of different colors.
Display Mode is set to Graphics.
Event - - l This parameter indicates the queried

performance events.
Display Mode is set to List.

Statistical Item - - This parameter indicates the performance

items to be monitored.
Statistical Value - - This parameter indicates the statistical value

of the monitored performance items.
Time Flag - - This parameter indicates the time point of

each performance event.
A.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control

Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History
Control Group.
Parameters
30-Second Enabled Disabled This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the 30-Second
monitoring function.
30-Minute Enabled Enabled This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the 30-Minute
Custom Period 1 Enabled Disabled This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable Custom Period 1.

Disabled whether to enable Custom Period 2.
Period Length(s) 300 to 43200 900(Custom Period l This parameter indicates or specifies the
(Custom Period 1) 1) monitoring period in Custom Period 1
300 to 86400 86400(Custom and Custom Period 2.
(Custom Period 2) Period 2) l The value must be an integer multiple of
30.
History Register 1 to 50 16 This parameter indicates or specifies the

Count 6(Custom Period 2) quantity of the history registers.
RMON Monitor - - This parameter specifies the RMON start

Start Time time.

A.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
Navigation Path
l Click the RMON Setting tab.
Object Parameters
Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be

collected.
30-Second Enabled - This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the 30-Second
NOTE
In the case of Object, 30-Second cannot be set.
30-Minute Enabled Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

l In RMON History Control Group of
the NE, if 30-Minute is set to Disabled,
Not Supported is displayed for this
parameter.
Custom Period 1 Enabled - l This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 1.
the NE, if Custom Period 1 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.
Custom Period 2 Enabled - l This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 2.
the NE, if Custom Period 2 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.

Event Parameters
Event - - This parameter indicates the performance

event to be monitored.
30-Second Enabled Disabled This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the monitoring function
based on 30-Second.
30-Minute Enabled - This parameter indicates or specifies


based on Custom Period 1Custom Period
1 Monitor.

based on Custom Period 2Custom Period
2 Monitor.
Threshold Detect Report All Report All l This parameter indicates or specifies the
Do Not Detect threshold detection method.
Report Only the l If the number of detected events reaches
Upper Threshold the preset threshold, the events are
reported to the NMS. Otherwise, the
Report Only the events are not reported to the NMS.
Lower Threshold
l If an event does not support this
parameter, Not Supported is displayed.
Upper Threshold - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

upper threshold. If the number of
performance events exceeds the preset
upper threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.
Lower Threshold - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

lower threshold. If the number of
performance events is less than the preset
lower threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.
Threshold Unit - - This parameter indicates the unit of each

threshold of the performance events.
A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services

This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services.

NOTE
For parameters for PW-carried E-Line services, see A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet
Features on the Packet Plane.
A.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS tunnels.
A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels

This topic describes parameters that are related to the basic configurations of MPLS tunnels.
Navigation Path
MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree.

LSR ID - 0.0.0.0 l Specifies or displays

the LSR ID of an NE.
On a PSN, each NE is
assigned a unique LSR
ID.
l This parameter must
be set in IPv4 address
format.
Start of Global Label 0-1015808 0 l Specifies the start

Space value of a global label
space. The OptiX RTN
980 supports a step of
2048.
l The start value of a
global label space is
the smallest unicast
tunnel label. When
Start of Global Label
Space is 0, the smallest
unicast tunnel label is
16, with values 0 to 15
reserved.
l On an MPLS-enabled
network, global label
spaces of NEs are
recommended to
overlap each other if
possible.

Global Label Space Size - - Displays the size of a

global label space.
Start of Multicast Label - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Space not support this parameter.
A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel

This topic describes parameters that are related to static tunnels.
Navigation Path
Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function
Tree.
2. Click the Static Tunnel tab.
3. Click Query.

ID - - Displays the tunnel ID.

customized tunnel name.
Enable State Enabled Enabled l Specifies or displays

Disabled whether a tunnel is
enabled.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports only the value
Enabled.
Node Type - - l Displays the node type.

l For bidirectional
tunnels, this parameter
displays the node types
of forward tunnels.
Direction - - Displays the direction of a

tunnel.

CIR(kbit/s) No Limit - l Specifies or displays

1024-1024000 the committed
information rate (CIR)
of a tunnel.
l Generally, it is
set this parameter to No
Limit. If you need to
enable the CES CAC
function or limit the
PW bandwidth, set this
parameter to be the
same as the planned
tunnel bandwidth.
PIR(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

CBS(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

PBS(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Bandwidth Remaining - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

(kbit/s) not support this parameter.
In Port - - Displays the ingress port

of a forward tunnel, which
is also the egress port of
the mapping reverse
tunnel.
Forward In Label - - Displays the MPLS label

that a forward tunnel
carries when entering a
node.
Reverse Out Label - - Specifies the MPLS label

that a reverse tunnel
carries when entering a
tunnel.
Out Port - - Displays the egress port of

a forward tunnel, which is
also the ingress port of the
mapping reverse tunnel.
Forward Out Label - - Displays the MPLS label

that a forward tunnel
carries when leaving a
node.

Reverse In Label - - Displays the MPLS label

that a reverse tunnel
carries when leaving a
node.
Forward Next Hop - - Displays the IP address of

Address the next-hop port of a
forward tunnel.
Reverse Next Hop - - Displays the IP address of

Address the next-hop port of a
reverse tunnel.
Source Node - - Displays the LSR ID of the

ingress node.
Sink Node - - Displays the LSR ID of the

egress node.
Tunnel Type - - Displays the tunnel type.
EXP 0-7 - l Specifies or displays

None the value of the EXP
field in the packets
transmitted through
MPLS tunnels.
l For unidirectional
is available only if
Node Type is Ingress.
l For bidirectional
cannot be set if Node
Type is Transit.
to a value from 0 to 7,
the EXP field takes its
fixed value.
l If this parameter takes
its default value None,
the EXP field varies
based on the DiffServ
mappings.

LSP Mode Pipe - l Displays or specifies

the LSP mode.
l Pipe: When stripping
MPLS tunnel labels
from packets, an egress
node does not update
the scheduling priority
for the packets.
l For bidirectional
is available only if
Node Type is Egress.
l For bidirectional
cannot be set if Node
Type is Transit.
NOTE
On the OptiX RTN 980, this
parameter can be set to
Pipe only.
MTU(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Protection Group - - Displays the MPLS APS

protection group to which
a tunnel belongs.
VLAN ID - - l Specifies or displays

the VLAN ID that
Ethernet packets carry
when transmitted over
MPLS tunnels.
l If packets need to
traverse a Layer 2
network, set the VLAN
ID for the tunnel
carried by the NNI port
according to the
VLAN planning
requirements on the
Layer 2 network.
the same value for both
ends of a tunnel.

CoS CS7 - l This parameter

CS6 specifies the PHB
service class of an L-
EF LSP, if the type of an
AF4 MPLS tunnel is L-LSP.
AF3 l CS6-CS7: indicates the
AF2 highest service grade,
which is mainly
AF1
BE transmission.
forwarding. This
service class is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
assured forwarding.
that requires rate
limit.
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
Deployment - - Displays the deployment

status of the tunnel.
A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of

Unidirectional Tunnels
This topic describes parameters that are used for creating unidirectional tunnels.
Navigation Path
Tree.

3. Click New and choose Unidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list.
The New Unicast Unidirectional Tunnel dialog box is displayed.
4. Select New Reverse Tunnel.

Tunnel ID 1-65535 - l Specifies the tunnel ID.

l The total number of tunnels and PWs
must be equal to or less than 1024. The
number of tunnels that carry PWs is not
included in the total.
NOTE
If you select New Reverse Tunnel, set forward
tunnel IDs and reverse tunnel IDs respectively.
Tunnel Name - - Specifies the tunnel name.
Node Type Ingress Ingress Specifies the node type of a forward tunnel.
Egress
Transit
Direction - - Indicates the direction of a tunnel.
CIR(kbit/s) No Limit No Limit l Specifies the committed information rate

1024-1024000 (CIR) of a tunnel.
l Generally, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to No Limit. If you need
to enable the CES CAC function or limit
the tunnel bandwidth, set this parameter
to be the same as the planned tunnel
bandwidth.
CBS(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this

parameter.
PIR(Byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this

parameter.
PBS(Byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this

parameter.
In Board/Logic - - Specifies the MPLS port at the ingress

Interface Type direction of a forward tunnel on a transit or
egress node.

In Port - - NOTE
l If the MPLS port is an FE/GE port, ensure
that:
l The Port Mode parameter of the MPLS
port is set to Layer 3 according to Setting
the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports.
l The Enable Tunnel, Specify IP
Address, andIP Address parameters of
the MPLS port are set to the values
specified in the network plan according to
Setting Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet
Ports.
l If the MPLS port is an IF_ETH port, ensure
that:
l The Port Mode parameter of the MPLS
port is set to Layer 3 according to Setting
the General Attributes of IF_ETH Ports.
Address, and IP Address parameters of
the MPLS port are set to the values
specified in the network plan according to
Setting Layer 3 Attributes of IF_ETH
Ports.
In Label 16-1048575 - Specifies the MPLS label at the ingress

direction of a forward tunnel on a transit or
egress node.
Out Board/Logic - - Specifies the MPLS port at the egress

Interface Type direction of a forward tunnel on an ingress or
transit node.
Out Port - -
NOTE
The method and prerequisites for setting
parameters of the MPLS port at the egress
direction of a forward tunnel are the same as those
on the ingress direction.
Out Label 16-1048575 - Specifies the MPLS label at the egress

direction of a forward tunnel on an ingress or
transit node.
Next Hop Address - - l The Next Hop Address parameter needs

to be set only for the egress port on an
ingress or transit node.
l Set the IP address of the MPLS ingress
port on the next hop LSR node to Next
Hop Address according to the network
plan.

Source Node - - l The Source Node parameter needs to be

set only on an egress or transit node.
l Set the LSR ID for the last hop MPLS
node to Source Node according to the
network plan.
Sink Node - - l The Sink Node parameter needs to be set

only on an ingress or transit node.
l Set the LSR ID for the next hop MPLS
node to Sink Node according to the
network plan.
Tunnel Type E-LSP E-LSP l Specifies the tunnel type.

L-LSP l The value E-LSP indicates that the EXP
field is used to identify packet scheduling
priorities of PWs. An E-LSP tunnel can
contain PWs of eight packet scheduling
priorities.
l The value L-LSP indicates that the
MPLS label value is used to identify
packet scheduling priorities of PWs. An
L-LSP tunnel can contain PWs of the
same packet scheduling priority.
EXP 0-7 None l Specifies the value of the EXP field in the
None packets transmitted through MPLS
tunnels.
l This parameter is available only if Node
Type is Ingress.
l If this parameter is set to a value from 0
to 7, the EXP field takes its fixed value.
l If this parameter takes its default value
None, the EXP field is set based on the
DiffServ mappings.
LSP Mode Pipe Pipe l Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel

labels from packets, an egress node does
not update the scheduling priority for the
packets.
l This parameter is available only if Node
Type is Egress.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 supports only the value
Pipe.
MTU - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this

parameter.

CoS CS7 BE l This parameter specifies the PHB service

CS6 class of an L-LSP, if the type of an MPLS
tunnel is L-LSP.
EF
l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest service
AF4 grade, which is mainly involved in
AF3 signaling transmission.
AF2 l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This
AF1 service class is applicable to the traffic
whose delay is small and packet loss ratio
BE
is low, for example, voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates assured forwarding.
This service class is applicable to the
traffic that requires rate guarantee but
does not require delay or jitter limit.
l BE: indicates that the traffic is forwarded
in best-effort manner without special
processing.
A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of

Bidirectional Tunnels
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating bidirectional tunnels.
Navigation Path
Tree.
3. Click New and choose Bidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list.

Tunnel ID 1 to 65535 - l Specifies the tunnel ID.

l The total number of tunnels and PWs
must be equal to or less than 1024.
The number of tunnels that carry
PWs is not included in the total.
Tunnel Name - - Specifies the tunnel name.

Node Type Ingress Ingress Specifies the node type of a forward

Egress tunnel.
Transit
Direction - - Indicates the direction of a tunnel.
CIR(kbit/s) No Limit No Limit l Specifies the committed information

1024-1024000 rate (CIR) of a tunnel.
l Generally, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to No Limit.
If you need to enable the CES CAC
function or limit the PW bandwidth,
set this parameter to be the same as
the planned tunnel bandwidth.
CBS(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support

this parameter.
PIR(Byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support

this parameter.
PBS(Byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support

this parameter.
In Board/Logic - - Specifies the MPLS port at the ingress

Interface Type direction of a forward tunnel on a transit
or egress node.
In Port - -
NOTE
l If the MPLS port is an FE/GE port,
ensure that:
l The Port Mode parameter of the
MPLS port is set to Layer 3
according to Setting the General
Attributes of Ethernet Ports.
Address, and IP Address
parameters of the MPLS port are set
to the values specified in the
network plan according to Setting
Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Ports.
l If the MPLS port is an IF_ETH port,
ensure that:
l The Port Mode parameter of the
MPLS port is set to Layer 3
according to Setting the General
Attributes of IF_ETH Ports.
Address, and IP Address
parameters of the MPLS port are set
to the values specified in the
network plan according to Setting
Layer 3 Attributes of IF_ETH Ports.

Forward In Label 16 to 1048575 - Specifies the MPLS label at the ingress

direction of a forward tunnel on a transit
or egress node.
Reverse Out Label 16 to 1048575 - l Specifies the MPLS label at the

egress direction of a reverse tunnel
on a transit or egress node.
l Reverse Out Label and Forward
In Label can be set to either the same
value or different values.
Out Board/Logic - - Specifies the MPLS port at the egress

Interface Type direction of a forward tunnel on an
Out Port - -
NOTE
The method and prerequisites for setting
parameters of the MPLS port at the egress
direction of a forward tunnel are the same as
those on the ingress direction.
Forward Out Label 16 to 1048575 - Specifies the MPLS label at the egress
direction of a forward tunnel on an
Reverse In Label 16 to 1048575 - l Specifies the MPLS label at the

ingress direction of a reverse tunnel
on an ingress or transit node.
l The Reverse In Label and Forward
Out Label parameters can be set to
either the same value or different
values.
Forward Next Hop - - l The Forward Next Hop Address

Address parameter needs to be set only for the
egress port on an ingress or transit
node.
l Set the IP address of the MPLS
ingress port on the next hop LSR
node to Forward Next Hop
Address according to the network
plan.
Reverse Next Hop - - l The Reverse Next Hop Address

Address parameter needs to be set only for the
ingress port on a transit or egress
node.
l Set the IP address of the MPLS
ingress port on the next hop LSR
node to Reverse Next Hop
Address according to the network
plan.

Source Node - - l The Source Node parameter needs

to be set only on an egress or transit
node.
l Set the LSR ID for the last hop
MPLS node to Source Node
according to the network plan.
Sink Node - - l The Sink Node parameter needs to

be set only on an ingress or transit
node.
l Set the LSR ID for the next hop
MPLS node to Sink Node according
Tunnel Type E-LSP E-LSP l Specifies the tunnel type.

L-LSP l The value E-LSP indicates that the
EXP field is used to identify packet
scheduling priorities of PWs. An E-
LSP tunnel can contain PWs of eight
packet scheduling priorities.
l The value L-LSP indicates that the
MPLS label value is used to identify
packet scheduling priorities of PWs.
An L-LSP tunnel can contain PWs of
the same packet scheduling priority.
EXP 0 to 7 None l Specifies the value of the EXP field

None in the packets transmitted through
MPLS tunnels.
l This parameter cannot be set if Node
Type is Transit.
l If this parameter is set to a value
from 0 to 7, the EXP field takes its
fixed value.
l If this parameter takes its default
value None, the EXP field is set
based on the DiffServ mappings.
LSP Mode Pipe Pipe l Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel

labels from packets, an egress node
does not update the scheduling
priority for the packets.
l This parameter cannot be set if Node
Type is Transit.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 supports only the value
Pipe.

MTU - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support

this parameter.
CoS CS7 BE l This parameter specifies the PHB

CS6 service class of an L-LSP, if the type
of an MPLS tunnel is L-LSP.
EF
l CS6-CS7: indicates the highest
AF4 service grade, which is mainly
AF3 involved in signaling transmission.
AF2 l EF: indicates fast forwarding. This
AF1 service class is applicable to the
traffic whose delay is small and
BE
packet loss ratio is low, for example,
voice and video services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates assured
forwarding. This service class is
applicable to the traffic that requires
rate guarantee but does not require
delay or jitter limit.
l BE: indicates that the traffic is
forwarded in best-effort manner
without special processing.
A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS OAM.
Navigation Path
Tree.

Tunnel ID - - Displays the tunnel ID.
Tunnel Name - - Displays the tunnel name.
Node Type - - l Displays the node type.

l For bidirectional
displays the node types
of forward tunnels.

Tunnel Direction - - Displays the direction of a

tunnel.
OAM Status Enabled Disabled l Specifies or displays

Disabled whether the local node
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If OAM Status is
Enabled, the local NE
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If OAM Status is
Disabled, the local NE
cannot perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If MPLS APS
protection needs to be
configured or a CC test
needs to be performed
for the tunnel, OAM
Status needs to be set
to Enabled.

Detection Mode Auto-Sensing Auto-Sensing l Specifies or displays

Manual the MPLS OAM
detection mode.
l Manual: During a CC
test, MPLS OAM
the user.
l Auto-Sensing: During
a CC test, MPLS OAM
interval for receiving
MPLS OAM packets.
l For a unidirectional
tunnel, this parameter
can be set for its egress
node only.
l For a bidirectional
tunnel, if Detection
Mode is set to
Manual, you need to
set the MPLS OAM
received and
transmitted.
l Generally, the value
Auto-Sensing is
recommended.


fixed interval.
the user.
l For the egress node of
a unidirectional tunnel,
if Detection Mode is
set to Manual, this
type of MPLS OAM
received.
Mode is set to Auto-
Sensing, this
type of MPLS OAM
transmitted.
Mode is set to
Manual, this
types of MPLS OAM
received and
transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for MPLS
APS and the value
CV is assumed for
continuous
MPLS tunnels.

Detection Packet Period 3.3 50 l Displays or specifies

(ms) 10 the OAM detection
period.
20
l This parameter is
50 available only when
100 Detection Packet
200 Type is FFD. It takes
its fixed value of 1000
500
ms when Detection
Packet Type is CV.
3.3 for MPLS APS
usually. If the packet
transmission delay
time of an MPLS
tunnel exceeds 3.3 ms,
the transmission
interval of FFD
packets needs to be a
value greater than the
delay time.
Reverse Tunnel - - l Specifies the mapping

reverse tunnel of a
forward tunnel.
cannot be set.
CV/FFD Status - - Displays whether CV/

FFD is enabled.
LSP Status - - Displays whether an LSP

is available.
LSP Defect Type - - Displays the LSP defect

type.
Disable LSP Duration - - Displays the duration

(ms) when an LSP is
unavailable.
LSP Defect Location - - Displays the LSR ID of a

node where LSP defects
are detected.

SD Threshold 0-100 0 l Specifies or displays

the SD threshold.
When the OAM packet
loss ratio is higher than
the parameter value,
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
node only.
set to 0, SD threshold
detection is not
supported.
SF Threshold 0-100 0 l Specifies or displays

the SF threshold.
When the OAM packet
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
node only.
set to 0, SF threshold
detection is not
supported.
l The SD threshold is not
higher than the SF
threshold.
Source Node - - Displays the source node

of a tunnel.
Sink Node - - Displays the sink node of

a tunnel.
A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI

This topic describes FDI parameters.

Navigation Path
Tree.
2. Click the FDI tab.

Enable FDI Selected Selected l Specifies or displays

Not selected whether Enable FDI is
selected.
l If the FDI function is
enabled for a transit
node, the transit node
inserts an FDI packet
to all LSPs that travel
through the transit
node when a fault
occurs on the link
between the ingress
and transit nodes. On
reception of the FDI
packet, the egress node
reports an alarm. In
this case, if MPLS APS
is configured
correctly, protection
switching is triggered
before the egress node
detects an LSP defect
within a detection
period.
l Generally, the default
parameter value is
recommended.
A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Ping test.
Navigation Path
Tree.
2. Click the OAM Parameters tab.

3. Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose
Ping Test from the drop-down list.

Packet Count 1 to 4294967295 3 Specifies the number of

test request packets.
EXP Value 0 to 7 7 l Specifies the EXP

value of the MPLS
label in test request
packets. The value 7
priority.
recommended.
TTL 1 to 255 255 l Specifies the time-to-

live (TTL) value of the
MPLS label in test
request packets.
recommended.
Transmit Interval 1 to 1000 100 l Specifies the interval

(10ms) for transmitting test
request packets.
recommended.
Packet Length 64 to 1400 64 l Specifies the length of

recommended.
Wait-to-Response 1 to 6000 300 l Specifies the wait-to-

Timeout Time(10ms) response timeout
value.
recommended.

Response Mode IPv4 UDP Response IPv4 UDP Response l Specifies the response
No Response mode of test request
packets.
Application Control
Channel l The value No
Response indicates
that the test
performance event is
reported without
sending response
packets.
l The value Application
Control Channel
indicates that response
is performed through
the reverse channel.
l The value IPv4 UDP
Response indicates
that the IPv4 UDP
packets encapsulating
MPLS echo reply
messages are sent as
response packets.
Response is reserved
for scenarios where all
nodes on an LSP
communicate with
each other over a DCN
running IP protocols.
based on the situation
of the egress node. If
the egress node
supports reverse
channel response, set
this parameter to
Application Control
Channel. If the egress
node does not support
reverse channel
response but supports
DCN channel response
by means of IP
protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.


NOTE
For a unidirectional
tunnel, Response
Application Control
Channel.
A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Traceroute test.
Navigation Path
Tree.
2. Click the OAM Parameters tab.
3. Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose
Traceroute Test from the drop-down list.


value of the MPLS
label in test request
packets. The value 7
priority.
recommended.

MPLS label in test
request packets.
recommended.

recommended.


value.
recommended.

packets.
Application Control
Channel l The value No
Response indicates
that the test
reported without
sending response
packets.
Control Channel
indicates that response
is performed through
the reverse channel.
Response indicates
that the IPv4 UDP
packets encapsulating
MPLS echo reply
messages are sent as
response packets.
Response is reserved
for scenarios where all
nodes on an LSP
communicate with
each other over a DCN
running IP protocols.
of the egress node. If
the egress node
supports reverse
channel response, set
this parameter to
Application Control
Channel. If the egress
node does not support
reverse channel
response but supports
DCN channel response
by means of IP
protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.


NOTE
For a unidirectional
tunnel, Response
Application Control
Channel.
A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management

This topic describes parameters that are related to PW management.
Navigation Path
Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the PW Management tab.

PW ID - - Displays the ID of the PW that carries a

service.
Enable State - - Displays whether a PW is enabled.
PW Signaling - - Displays the PW signaling type.

Type NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses only static PWs.
PW Type - - l Displays the PW type. Different PW types

perform different service processing
modes.
l When a PW transmits E-Line services, set
PW Type to Ethernet or Ethernet
Tagged Mode.
l If a PW transmits CES services, set PW
Type to CESoPSN or SATop.
l If a PW transmits ATM services, set PW
Type to ATM n-to-one VCC Cell
transport, ATM one-to-one VCC Cell
Mode, ATM n-to-one VPC Cell
transport, or ATM one-to-one VPC Cell
Mode.
Direction - - Displays the direction of a PW.
PW Ingress - - Displays the ingress label at the source port of

Label/Source a PW.
Port

PW - - Displays the encapsulation type of the packets

Encapsulation on a PW.
Type NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 supports only MPLS
encapsulation.
PW Egress - - Displays the egress label at the sink port of a

Label/Sink PW.
Port
Opposite LSR - - Displays the LSR ID of the node at the other

ID end of a PW.
Local - - Displays the working status of the PW at the

Working local end.
Status
Remote - - Displays the working status of the PW at the

Working remote end.
Status
Compositive - - Displays the working status of the entire PW.

Working
Status
Tunnel Type - - Displays the type of the tunnel that carries a

PW.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 supports only MPLS tunnels.
Tunnel - - Displays the ID of the tunnel that carries a PW.
Deployment - - Displays the deployment status of a PW.

Status
Tunnel - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this

Automatic parameter.
Selection
Policy
QoS Parameters
Table A-74 CES services

PW ID - - Displays the ID of the PW

that carries the service.

Direction - - Displays the direction of

the PW that carries the
service.
CIR(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does


Table A-75 E-Line services



service.
Bandwidth Limit - - Displays whether the

bandwidth is limited.
CIR(kbit/s) - - Displays the committed

a PW.
CBS(byte) - - Displays the committed

PIR(kbit/s) - - Displays the peak

PW
PBS(byte) - - Displays the peak burst

size (PBS) of a PW.

LSP Mode - - Displays the LSP mode.

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports only Pipe.


Table A-76 ATM services


service.
Bandwidth Limit - - Displays whether the

bandwidth is limited.
CIR(kbit/s) - - Displays the committed

a PW.
CBS(byte) - - Displays the committed

PIR(kbit/s) - - Displays the peak

PW
PBS(byte) - - Displays the peak burst

size (PBS) of a PW.


PW ID - - Displays the PW ID.
RTP Head - - Displays whether the CES

service packets carry an
RTP header.
Packet Loading Time - - Displays the packet

(us) loading time.
Jitter Compensation - - Displays the jitter buffer

Buffering Time(us) time for the received CES
packets.
Ingress Clock Mode - - The OptiX RTN 980 does


Egress Clock Mode - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Control Channel Type - - Displays the control

channel type.
VCCV Verification - - Displays the VCCV mode.

Mode
Enable CES Service - - Displays whether CES

Alarm Transparent service alarms are
Transmission transparently transmitted.
Threshold of Entering R - - Displays the threshold of

bit Inserting Status the packet loss ratio of
CES services. The
corresponding alarm will
be reported if the actual
packet loss ratio crosses
this threshold.
Threshold of Exiting R - - Displays the threshold of

bit Inserting Status received CES service
packets. The
be cleared after the actual
number of received CES
service packets crosses
this threshold.
Sequence Number Mode - - Displays the sequence

number mode.
Control Word - - Displays whether the

control word is used to
transfer packet
information. For ETH
PWE3 services, this
parameter is always not
used.

channel type.

Mode

Request VLAN - - When PW Type is

Ethernet Tag, this
parameter displays the
VLAN ID to be added to
packets that are sent from
the opposite end and do
not carry any VLAN IDs.
TPID - - When PW Type is

Ethernet Tag, this
TPID.

transfer packet
information.

channel type.

Mode
Max Concatenated Cell - - Displays the maximum

Count number of concatenated
cells.

(us) loading time.
A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to MS-PW creation.
Navigation Path
2. Click the MS PW tab.
3. Click New.


ID - - Specifies the ID of MS-PW.
Name - - Specifies the name of MS-PW.
MTU(bytes) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this

parameter.
Service Type Ethernet Service Ethernet Service l Specifies the type of services carried by the
CES Service MS-PW.
ATM Service l Set this parameter according to the
Connection Port Transparent Port Transparent l This parameter is available only when
Type PVP Service Type is ATM Service.
PVC l PVP: Only the VPIs of the source and sink
are exchanged.
l PVP: The VPIs and VCIs of the source and
sink are exchanged.
l Port Transparent: ATM transparent
transmission refers to the transparent
transmission of ATM cells that are
encapsulated into PWs as payloads.
Parameters for the Basic Attributes of PWs


PW Signaling Type Static Static Specifies the signaling

type of the PW. Labels for
static PWs need to be
manually assigned.

PW Type - - l Specifies the type of

the PW.
Ethernet if Service
Type is ETH Service
and no VLAN IDs
need to be added. If it
is required to add
VLAN IDs, set this
parameter to Ethernet
Tag Mode and then set
Request VLAN in the
Advanced Attribute
tab.
l If Service Type is
CES Service, the
value CESoPSN
indicates structure-
aware emulation,
which allows timeslot
compression; the value
SAToP indicates
structure-agnostic
emulation, which does
not allow timeslot
compression.
l If Service Type is
ATM Service, set this
parameter according to
the value of
Connection Type.
PW Direction - - Displays the direction of

the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type - - Displays the

PW.

Source Port label.

Port label.
Tunnel Selection Mode Manually Manually Specifies the method to

select tunnels.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
Manually.

Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS Specifies the type of the

Tunnel - - A created tunnel needs to

be selected. If no tunnel is
available, no PW can be
created.


the reverse tunnel
automatically.
QoS Parameters
CES Services

Ethernet services

is enabled.
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
Therefore, this
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.


CIR(Kbit/s) - - Specifies the committed

a PW.

PIR(Kbit/s) - - Specifies the peak

PW.

size (PBS) of a PW.


does not update the
packets.

ATM services


bandwidth limit is
enabled.
l This function can be
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs, or the
bandwidth of one or
more ATM PWE3
services, in an MPLS
tunnel. (One ATM
PWE3 service
corresponds to one
PW.)
l An ATM PWE3
the bandwidth of ATM
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.

CIR (Kbit/s) - - Specifies the committed

the PW.
CBS (kbyte) - - Specifies the excess burst

size of the PW.
PIR (kbit/s) - - Specifies the peak

the PW.
PBS (kbyte) - - Specifies the maximum

excess burst size of the
PW.


Parameters for the Advanced Attributes of PWs
CES Services
RTP Header Disable Disable l Specifies the RTP

Enable header.
l The RTP header
carries time stamps.
recommended.
Jitter Compensation 375 to 16000 8000 l Specifies the jitter

Buffering Time(us) buffer time for the
received CES packets.
l A greater value of this
parameter means
fewer impacts of
transmission jitters on
CES services, greater
delays of CES
services, and more
resources occupied by
CES services.
recommended.
NOTE
Set Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us) to a
value greater than the value
of Packet Loading Time
(us) at the opposite end and
the local end.

Packet Loading Time 125 to 5000 1000 l Specifies the length of

(us) fragments in the TDM
data stream. Each
fragment is
encapsulated into one
PW packet.
parameter means
higher encapsulation
efficiency but greater
delays of CES
services.
recommended.
Ingress Clock mode - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Egress Clock mode - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Control Channel Type None CW l Specifies the mode of

CW PW connectivity
check.
Alert Label
l The value None
indicates that the
control word is not
supported. That is, the
PW connectivity
check is not supported.
VCCV packets in Alert
Label encapsulation
mode.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
VCCV Verification None Ping l Specifies the VCCV

Mode Ping verification mode. The
used for PW
connectivity check.
this parameter to
None.

64K Timeslot Number 1 to 31 1 l Specifies the number

of 64 kbit/s timeslots
that transmit service
traffic. If Frame
Mode of the opposite
end is 30, the source 64
kbit/s timeslots at the
local end must include
the 16th timeslot.
l On the two ends of a
radio link, the timeslot
lists can be different
but the numbers of
timeslots must be the
same.
l This parameter is
unavailable if PW
Type is SAToP.
Sequence Number Mode Huawei Mode Huawei Mode Specifies the sequence
Standard Mode number mode.
Ethernet services
Control Word No Use No Use For ETH PWE3 services,

always No Use.
Control Channel Type None Alert Label l Specifies the mode of

Alert Label PW connectivity
check.
l None indicates that
VCCV is not used.
VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation mode.


used for PW
connectivity check.
this parameter to
None.
Request VLAN - - l Set this parameter

when PW Type is
Ethernet Tagged
Mode.
l If the received packets
do not carry any
VLAN IDs, the PW
will add VLAN IDs to
the packets as required
by the setting of this
parameter.

not support request VLAN
TPID of the PW level.
ATM services
Control Word Must Use Must Use l Specifies whether to

No Use use the control word.
In the MPLS packet
switching network, the
transmit packet
information.
l Set Control Word to
Must Use if PW
Type is ATM 1:1.

Control Channel Type CW CW l Specifies the mode of

None PW connectivity
check.
Alert Label
l The value None
indicates that the
control word is not
PW connectivity check
is not supported.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
l The value Alert
Label indicates VCCV
packets in Alert
Label encapsulation
mode.

used for PW
connectivity check.
this parameter to
None.
Max. Concatenated Cell 1 to 31 10 l Specifies the

Count maximum number of
concatenated cells.
l If the value 1 is
assumed, only one
ATM cell is
encapsulated in one
packet. If the value
from 2 to 31 is
assumed, a maximum
of 2 to 31 ATM cells
are encapsulated into
one packet.

Packet Loading Time 100 to 50000 1000 l Specifies the packet

(us) loading time. Once the
packet loading time
expires, the packet is
sent out even if the
concatenated cells are
less than the
maximum.
l If Max. Concatenated
Cell Count assumes
the value 1, this
parameter is
ineffective. That is, the
packet will be sent out
once the cell is loaded.
A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM

This topic describes parameters that are related to PW OAM.
Navigation Path
2. Click the PW OAM Parameter tab.


PW Type - - Displays the type of the

PW that carries the
service.

OAM Status Enabled Disabled l Specifies or displays

Disabled whether the local node
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If OAM Status is
Enabled, the local NE
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If OAM Status is
Disabled, the local NE
cannot perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If PW APS protection
needs to be configured
or a CC test needs to be
performed for the
tunnel, OAM Status
needs to be set to
Enabled.
Associate AC State - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Detection Mode Auto-Sensing Auto-Sensing l Specifies or displays

Manual the detection mode for
PW OAM packets.
l Manual: During a CC
test, PW OAM packets
are sent at the interval
specified by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: During
a CC test, PW OAM
interval for receiving
PW OAM packets.
set to Manual, you
need to set the type of
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value Auto-
Sensing is
recommended.


fixed interval.
the user.
this parameter
specifies the type of
PW OAM detection
packets to be
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
type of PW OAM
received and
transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
PWs.
Detection Packet Period 3.3 50 l Displays or specifies

(ms) 10 the OAM detection
period.
20
l If Detection Packet
50 Type is FFD, this
100 parameter can be set; if
200 Detection Packet
Type is CV, the value
500
is always 1000.
3.3 for PW APS
usually. If the packet
transmission delay
time of a PW exceeds
3.3 ms, the
transmission interval
of FFD packets needs
to be a value greater
than the delay time.

SD Threshold (%) 0-100 0 l Specifies or displays

the SD threshold.
When the OAM packet
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
set to 0, SD threshold
detection is not
supported.
SF Threshold (%) 0-100 0 l Specifies or displays

the SF threshold.
When the OAM packet
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
set to 0, SF threshold
detection is not
supported.
l The SD threshold is not
higher than the SF
threshold.
LSR ID to Be Received - - l Specifies or displays

the LSR ID to be
received.
l This parameter is
available only if OAM
Status is Disabled.
PW ID to be Received - - l Specifies or displays

the PW ID to be
received.
l This parameter is
available only if OAM
Status is Disabled.
Local Working Status - - Displays whether PWs at

the local end are available.
Local PW Defect Type - - Displays the local PW

defect type.
Local Disable PW - - Displays the duration

Duration(ms) when the local PW is
unavailable.

Local PW Defect - - Displays the local PW

Location defect location.
Remote Working Status - - Displays whether PWs at

the remote end are
available.
Remote PW Defect Type - - Displays the remote PW

defect type.
Remote Disable PW - - Displays the duration

Duration(ms) when the remote PW is
unavailable.
Remote PW Defect - - Displays the remote PW

Location defect location.
A.9.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Ping test.
Navigation Path
3. Select the required PW and click OAM Operation > Ping Test.

Packet Count 1 to 4294967295 3 Specifies the number of


value of the PW label
in test request packets.
The value 7 indicates
recommended.

PW label in test request
packets.
recommended.

Transmit Interval 1 to 1000 100 l Specifies the interval

(10ms) for transmitting test
request packets.
recommended.

recommended.

value.
recommended.

packets.
Application Control
Channel Response l The value No
Response indicates
that the test
reported without
sending response
packets.
Control Channel
Response indicates
that response is
performed through the
reverse channel.
indicates that the IPv4
UDP packets
encapsulating MPLS
echo reply messages
are sent as response
packets.
l The value IPv4 UDP is
reserved for scenarios
where all nodes on an
LSP communicate
with each other over a
DCN running IP
protocols.
of the remote PE. If the
remote PE supports
reverse channel
response, set this
parameter to
Application Control
Channel Response. If
the remote PE does not
support reverse
channel response but
supports DCN channel
response by means of
IP protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.

Peer PW ID - - Specifies the PW ID of the

peer end.
Peer IP - - Specifies the IP address of

the peer port.
A.9.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Traceroute test.
Navigation Path
3. Select the required PW, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose
Traceroute Test from the drop-down list.


value of the PW label
in test request packets.
The value 7 indicates
recommended.

PW label in test request
packets.
recommended.

recommended.

value.
recommended.

packets.
Application Control
Channel Response l The value No
Response indicates
that the test
reported without
sending response
packets.
Control Channel
Response indicates
that response is
performed through the
reverse channel.
indicates that the IPv4
UDP packets
encapsulating MPLS
echo reply messages
are sent as response
packets.
l The value IPv4 UDP is
reserved for scenarios
where all nodes on an
LSP communicate
with each other over a
DCN running IP
protocols.
of the remote PE. If the
remote PE supports
reverse channel
response, set this
parameter to
Application Control
Channel Response. If
the remote PE does not
support reverse
channel response but
supports DCN channel
response by means of
IP protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.

A.9.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management

This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS APS protection management.
Navigation Path
Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab.

Protection Group ID - - l Displays the protection

group ID.
l The system
automatically assigns
IDs to the protection
groups according to
their creation
sequence.
Protection Type - - Displays the protection

group type.
Switching Mode Dual-Ended - l Displays or specifies

Single-Ended the switching mode of
a protection group.
l The value Single-
Ended indicates that
only in the direction
where faults occur.
l The value Dual-
services in both
positive and reverse
directions are switched
to their protection
channels when faults
occur.
you set this parameter
to Dual-Ended.

BDI Status Disabled - l Specifies or displays

Enabled whether the protection
switching is triggered
upon receiving BDI
packets.
l This parameter is
available only when
Switching Mode is set
to Single-Ended.
l If BDI Status is set to
Enabled, the egress
node notifies the
ingress node of any
detected faults by
sending BDI packets;
upon receiving BDI
packets, the ingress
node triggers
Transmit and receive - - Displays the protocol

Status of Protocol Packet packet status.
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive - l Specifies or displays

Revertive whether to switch
services to the original
working tunnel after
the fault is rectified.
indicates to perform
the switching; the
value Non-Revertive
indicates not to
perform the switching.
to Revertive.

WTR Time(min) 1-12 - l Specifies and displays

the WTR time of the
protection group.
original working
tunnel recovers,
to the original working
tunnel.
l This parameter is
available only when
Revertive Mode is
Revertive.
to 5.
Hold-Time(100ms) 0-100 - l Specifies the hold-off

time of the protection
group.
does not trigger
switching once it
detects faults, but wait
expires, and then
detect whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
to 0.
Protocol Status - - Displays the protocol

status.
Switching Status - - Displays the switching

group.

group.

Unit - - Displays whether a tunnel

is a working or protection
tunnel.
Active Tunnel - - Displays the currently

used tunnel.
Tunnel Status - - Displays the tunnel status.
Tunnel Type - - Displays the tunnel type.
Tunnel Direction - - Displays the direction of a

tunnel.
Ingress Tunnel - - Displays the ingress

tunnel.
Egress Tunnel - - Displays the egress tunnel.
A.9.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating a tunnel protection group.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > APS
Protection Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab.
3. Click New.

Protection Type 1:1 1:1 Specifies the protection

type of the tunnel
protection group.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports only the value 1:1.

Switching Mode Single-Ended Dual-Ended l Specifies the switching

Dual-Ended mode to be adopted
when a tunnel fails.
l The value Single-
only in the direction
where faults occur.
l The value Dual-
to the protection
channel in both
directions when faults
occur.
l The value Dual-
Ended is
recommended.
BDI Status Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether the

Disabled protection switching is
triggered upon
receiving BDI packets.
l This parameter is
available only when
Switching Mode is set
to Single-Ended.
l If BDI Status is set to
Enabled, the egress
node notifies the
ingress node of any
detected faults by
sending BDI packets;
upon receiving BDI
packets, the ingress
node triggers the
Working Tunnel Type MPLS Tunnel MPLS Tunnel Specifies the type of the
working tunnel.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
MPLS Tunnel.

Working Ingress Tunnel - - l Specifies the working

ID tunnel of the protection
group in the ingress
direction.
for a bidirectional
tunnel, a value is
automatically assigned
to the parameter
Working Egress
Tunnel ID.
Working Ingress Tunnel - - Displays the name of the

Name working tunnel in the
ingress direction.
Working Egress Tunnel - - l Specifies the working

ID tunnel of the protection
group in the egress
direction.
tunnel, if the parameter
Working Ingress
Tunnel ID is set, a
value is automatically
assigned to the
parameter Working
Egress Tunnel ID.
Working Egress Tunnel - - Displays the name of the

Name working tunnel in the
egress direction.
Protection Tunnel Type - - Displays the type of

protection tunnel, which is
the same as the type of
working tunnel.
Protection Ingress - - l Specifies the working

Tunnel ID tunnel of the protection
group in the ingress
direction.
for a bidirectional
tunnel, a value is
automatically assigned
to the parameter
Protection Egress
Tunnel ID.

Protection Ingress - - Displays the name of the

Tunnel Name protection tunnel in the
ingress direction.
Protection Egress - - l Specifies the

Tunnel ID protection tunnel of the
protection group in the
egress direction.
tunnel, if the parameter
Protection Ingress
Tunnel ID is set, a
value is automatically
assigned to the
parameter Protection
Egress Tunnel ID.
Protection Egress - - Displays the name of the

Tunnel Name protection tunnel in the
egress direction.
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Non-Revertive l This parameter

tunnel after it recovers.
indicates to switch
services back to the
original working
tunnel after it recovers;
the value Non-
Revertive indicates
not to switch services
back to the original
working tunnel after it
recovers.
recommended.

WTR Time(min) 1 to 12 5 l Specifies the WTR

group.
original working
tunnel recovers,
to the original working
tunnel.
l This parameter is
available only when
Revertive Mode is
Revertive.
recommended.
Hold-Time(100ms) 0 to 100 0 l Specifies the hold-off

group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
recommended.
Protocol Status Disabled Disabled l Specifies the protocol

Enabled status.
Protocol Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Protocol
Status to Enabled.

A.9.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a PW APS protection group.
Navigation Path
The navigation path for CES services is as follows:
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES
Service Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Protection Group tab.
3. Click the PW APS tab.
4. Click New.
The navigation path for E-Line services is as follows:
4. Click New.
The navigation path for ATM services is as follows:
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM
4. Click New.



manually assigned.

the PW.

PW.

Source Port label.


Port label.

select tunnels.


PW will fail.


the reverse tunnel
automatically.
QoS Parameters




Bandwidth Limit Disabled - Specifies whether the

Enabled bandwidth limit function
is enabled.
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
Therefore, this
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.

CIR(kbit/s) - - Specifies the committed

a PW.

PIR(kbit/s) - - Specifies the peak

PW.

size (PBS) of a PW.


NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports only Pipe.



is enabled.
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ATM PWE3
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.

a PW.


PW.

size (PBS) of a PW.





RTP header.

(us) loading time.

packets.


Control Channel Type - - Displays the mode of PW

connectivity check.
VCCV Verification - - Displays the VCCV

Mode verification mode. The
VCCV verification is used
for PW connectivity
check.


CES services. The
this threshold.

packets. The
this threshold.

number mode.



transfer packet
PWE3 services, this
used.

channel type.

Mode

Ethernet Tag, this

not support VLAN TPID
of the PW level.


transfer packet
information.

channel type.

Mode

cells.

(us) loading time.



type.

group ID.

protection group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.

mode.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
mode.

working PW.

protection PW.

PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports dual-ended
switching.


are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.

group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
recommended.


group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
recommended.

mode of the PW APS
protection group.
OAM Parameters

status of PW OAM.


l Manual: The
connectivity check
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value Auto-
Sensing is
recommended.


fixed interval.
the user.
this parameter
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
PWs.

configurable when
50 Detection Packet
100 Type is FFD and
value of 1000 when
500
Detection Packet
Type is CV.
3.3 for PW APS.

received.

received.

A.9.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection

Group_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a slave protection pair of a PW
APS protection group.
Navigation Path
The navigation path for CES services is as follows:
3. Click the Slave Protection Pair tab.
4. Click New.
The navigation path for E-Line services is as follows:
4. Click New.
The navigation path for ATM services is as follows:
4. Click New.



manually assigned.

the PW.

PW.


Source Port label.

Port label.

select tunnels.


PW will fail.


the reverse tunnel
automatically.
QoS Parameters





is enabled.
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
Therefore, this
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.


a PW.


PW.

size (PBS) of a PW.


NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports only Pipe.



is enabled.
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ATM PWE3
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.

a PW.


PW.

size (PBS) of a PW.





RTP header.

(us) loading time.

packets.



connectivity check.

for PW connectivity
check.


CES services. The
this threshold.

packets. The
this threshold.

number mode.



transfer packet
PWE3 services, this
used.

channel type.

Mode

Ethernet Tag, this

not support VLAN TPID
of the PW level.


transfer packet
information.

channel type.

Mode

cells.

(us) loading time.



mode.

the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.

protection pair.

protection pair.
A.9.2 CES Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to CES services.
A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to CES service management.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES

Service ID - - Displays the ID of the CES

service to be created.
Service name - - Displays or specifies the

service name.
Level - - Displays the level of the

received TDM frames.
Source Board - - Displays the source board

of the CES service.

Source High Channel - - For the OptiX RTN 980,

configured.
Source Low Channel - - Displays the source lower

order path.
Source 64K Timeslot - - Displays the source 64

kbit/s timeslot.
Priority List CS7 - l Specifies the priority

CS6 of a CES service. This
parameter is available
EF only when Mode is set
AF4 to UNI-NNI.
AF3 l This parameter needs
AF2 to be configured if QoS
processing needs to be
AF1
performed for different
BE CES services.
l CS6-CS7: indicate the
highest service classes,
which are mainly
transmission.
l EF: indicates the
expedited forwarding
of service, which is
applicable to services
of low transmission
delay and low packet
loss rate, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicate the
assured forwarding
classes of service,
which are applicable to
services that require an
assured rate but no
l BE: is applicable to
services that need not
be processed in a
special manner.
recommended.


that carries the CES
service. This parameter is
meaningful when the CES
service type is UNI-NNI.
Tunnel - - Displays the tunnel that

carries the PW. The tunnel
must have been
configured in advance.
This parameter is
service type is UNI-NNI.
Sink Board - - Displays the sink board of

the CES service. This
parameter is meaningful
when the CES service type
is UNI-UNI.
Sink High Channel - - For the OptiX RTN 980,

configured.
Sink Low Channel - - Displays the sink lower

order path. This parameter
is meaningful when the
CES service type is UNI-
UNI.
Sink 64K Timeslot - - Displays the sink 64 kbit/s

timeslot. This parameter is
service type is UNI-UNI.

status of the CES service.


that carries the CES
service.
Working Status - - Displays working status of

the PW.
PW Status - - Displays the enabling

status of the PW.

PW Signaling Type - - Displays the PW signaling

type.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports static PWs only.
PW Type - - Displays the PW type for

CES service
encapsulation.
CESoPSN: Indicates
structure-aware TDM
circuit emulation service
over packet switched
network. Timeslot
compression can be set.
SAToP: Indicates
structure-agnostic TDM
over packet. Timeslot
compression cannot be
set.
PW Encapsulation Type - - Displays the tunnel type

for PW encapsulation.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports MPLS only.
PW Ingress Label/ - - Displays the Ingress label

Source Port of the PW that carries the
CES service.
PW Egress Label/Sink - - Displays the Egress label

Port of the PW that carries the
CES service.
Peer LSR ID - - Displays the LSR ID of the

PW at the remote end.
Local Working Status - - Displays the working

local end.
Remote Working Status - - Displays the working

remote end.
Compositive Working - - Displays the compositive

Status working status of the PW.
The compositive working
status is up when both
ends are up, and is down
when one end is down.

Tunnel type - - Displays the type of the

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports MPLS tunnels
only.
Tunnel - - Displays the ID of the

tunnel that carries the CES
service.

status of the tunnel.
Tunnel Automatic - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Selection Policy not support this parameter.
QoS Parameters

the PW.
CIR(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does


Parameters of Advanced Attributes

RTP Header - - Displays the RTP header.

The RTP header carries
time stamps.

Jitter Compensation 375 to 16000 - l Displays or specifies

Buffering Time(us) the jitter buffer time.
l The jitter buffer time
guarantees the real-
time performance of
the CES service.
NOTE
the local end.

(us) loading time.



connectivity check.

for PW connectivity
check.
Enable CES Service Enabled - Displays or specifies the

Alarm Transparent Disabled enabling status of the
Transmission transparent transmission
of CES service alarms. If
this function is enabled,
the fault on the AC side of
the CES service is notified
to the remote end. Upon
receiving the fault
notification from the
network side or the remote
end, the local NE inserts
the corresponding alarm to
the AC side.

Threshold of Entering R 1-65535 - Displays or specifies the

Bit Inserting Status threshold of packet loss
ratio of CES services. The
be reported once the actual
this threshold. This
only when the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is enabled.
Threshold of Exiting R 1-65535 - Displays or specifies the

Bit Inserting Status threshold of received CES
service packets. The
this threshold. This
only when the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is enabled.
Sequence Number Mode Huawei Mode - Specifies the sequence

Standard Mode number mode. The
Sequence Number
Mode must be set to the
same value at both ends of
a radio link.

NOTE

created.

working PW.

protection PW.


mode.

the PW protection
group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.

PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
switching.

original working PW
after the fault is
rectified.
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.


protection group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.

protection group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no

group.

group.





NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.

the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.

protection pair.

protection pair.
DNI PW ID - - Displays the DNI PW ID.

status of the slave
protection pair.
A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating CES services.
Navigation Path
2. Click New.

Service ID(e.g.1,3-6) 1 to 4294967295 - Specifies the service ID.
Service name - - Specifies the service

name.

Level E1 E1 The value E1 indicates

that the CES service is
used to transmit the TDM
services from E1 ports.
Mode UNI-NNI UNI-NNI l Specifies the mode of

UNI-UNI CES service.
l The value UNI-NNI
indicates that the CES
service is carried by a
PW. Therefore, the
information about the
PW needs to be
configured.
Source Board - - Specifies the board where

the source (UNI) of the
CES service is located.
Source High Channel - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Source Low Channel - - If Level is set to E1, this

(e.g.1,3-6) parameter indicates the E1
port where the service
source is located. If
Mode is set to UNI-NNI,
this parameter can assume
only one value.
Source 64K Timeslot 1-31 1-31 l Specifies the 64 kbit/s

(e.g.1,3-6) timeslot that transmits
data. This parameter
can assume multiple
values. If Frame
Mode of the opposite
end is 30, the source 64
kbit/s timeslots at the
local end must include
the 16th timeslot.
l On the two ends of a
but the numbers of
timeslots must the
same.
l This parameter does
not need to be set if
Mode is UNI-NNI and
PW Type is SAToP.

Priority List CS7 EF l Specifies the priority

CS6 of a CES service. This
EF only when Mode is set
AF4 to UNI-NNI.
AF3 l This parameter needs
AF2 to be configured if QoS
processing needs to be
AF1
performed for different
BE CES services.
l CS6-CS7: indicate the
highest service classes,
which are mainly
transmission.
l EF: indicates the
expedited forwarding
of service, which is
of low transmission
delay and low packet
loss rate, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicate the
assured forwarding
classes of service,
which are applicable to
services that require an
assured rate but no
l BE: is applicable to
services that need not
be processed in a
special manner.
recommended.

PW Type CESoPSN CESoPSN l Specifies the type of

SAToP the PW. This
only when Mode is
UNI-NNI.
l CESoPSN: Indicates
structure-aware TDM
circuit emulation
service over packet
switched network.
Timeslot compression
can be set. SAToP:
Indicates structure-
agnostic TDM over
packet. Timeslot
compression cannot be
set.
Protection Type No Protection No Protection l Specifies the

PW APS protection mode of the
PW. This parameter is
Slave Protection Pair available only when
Mode is UNI-NNI.
to PW APS, working
and protection PWs
need to be configured.
set to
Slave Protection Pair
, you need to bind the
slave PW APS
protection group with
the master PW APS
protection group. The
PW APS protection
group triggers the
switching of the slave
PW APS protection
group simultaneously.
Sink Board - - l Specifies the board

where the sink of the
CES service is located.
l This parameter is
available only when
Mode is set to UNI-
UNI.

Sink High Channel - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Sink Low Channel(e.g. - - l If Level is set to E1,

1,3-6) this parameter
indicates the E1 port
where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter is
available only when
Mode is set to UNI-
UNI.
Sink 64K Timeslot(e.g. 1-31 1-31 l Specifies the 64 kbit/s

1,3-6) timeslot that the
service sink occupies.
On the two ends of a
but the numbers of
timeslots must the
same.
l This parameter is
available only when
Mode is set to UNI-
UNI.

NOTE
If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters of
working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW
as an example.


manually assigned.

the PW.


PW.

Source Port label.

Port label.

select tunnels.


PW will fail.


the reverse tunnel
automatically.
QoS Parameters


Parameters for the Advanced Attributes of PWs

RTP Header Disable Disable l Specifies the RTP

Enable Huawei RTP header.
l The RTP header
carries time stamps.
recommended.
Jitter Compensation 375 to 16000 8000 l Specifies the jitter

Buffering Time (us) buffer time for the
received CES packets.
The step is 125.
parameter means
fewer impacts of
transmission jitters on
CES services, greater
delays of CES
services, and more
resources occupied by
CES services.
recommended.
NOTE
the local end.
Packet Loading Time 125 to 5000 1000 l Specifies the length of

(us) fragments in the TDM
data stream. The step is
125.
parameter means
higher encapsulation
efficiency but greater
delays of CES
services.
recommended.
Ingress Clock Mode Null Null The OptiX RTN 980 does
Adaptive Clock Mode not support this parameter.


Control Channel Type None CW l Specifies the mode of

CW PW connectivity
check.
Alert Label
l The value None
indicates that the
control word is not
PW connectivity
check is not supported.
VCCV packets in Alert
Label encapsulation
mode.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
VCCV Verification None Ping l Specifies the VCCV

Mode Ping verification mode. The
used for PW
connectivity check.
this parameter to
None.
Enable CES Service Disabled Disabled If this function is enabled,

Alarm Transparent Enabled the fault on the AC side of
Transmission the CES service is notified
to the remote end. On
receiving the fault
notification from the
network side or the remote
end, the local NE inserts
the corresponding alarm
to the AC side.

Threshold of Entering R 1-65535 100 l The corresponding

Bit Inserting Status alarm will be reported
if the number of
consecutive lost
packets crosses the
threshold specified by
this parameter.
l This function is
available only when
the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is
enabled.
Threshold of Exiting R 1-65535 5 l The corresponding

Bit Inserting Status alarm will be cleared if
the number of
consecutive received
packets crosses the
threshold specified by
this parameter.
l This function is
available only when
the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is
enabled.
Sequence Number Mode Huawei Mode Standard Mode Specifies the sequence
Standard Mode number mode. The
Sequence Number
Mode must be set to the
same value at both ends of
a radio link.

NOTE
PW APS.

type.

group ID.


protection group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.

mode.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
mode.

working PW.

protection PW.

PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports dual-ended
switching.

are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.


group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
recommended.

group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
recommended.

mode of the PW APS
protection group.
OAM Parameters
NOTE


status of PW OAM.

l Manual: The
connectivity check
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value Auto-
Sensing is
recommended.


fixed interval.
the user.
this parameter
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
PWs.

configurable when
50 Detection Packet
100 Type is FFD and
value of 1000 when
500
Detection Packet
Type is CV.
3.3 for PW APS.

received.

received.


NOTE

mode.

the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.

protection pair.

protection pair.
A.9.3 ATM Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM services.
A.9.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group management.
Navigation Path
Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IMA Group Management tab.

VCTRUNK - - Displays the ATM

TRUNK.

IMA Protocol Enable Enabled Disabled l Specifies the IMA

Status Disabled protocol enable status.
l Set IMA Protocol
Enable Status to
Enabled if the links
bound in the ATM
TRUNK require the
IMA protocol;
otherwise, set this
parameter to
Disabled.
l After IMA Protocol
Enable Status is set to
Enabled, the E1 links
or Fractional E1
timeslots bound in the
ATM TRUNK start
running the IMA
protocol.
Minimum Number of 1 to 16 1 l The links of the IMA

Active Transmitting group can carry
Links services only when the
number of activated
links in the transmit/
receive direction is not
smaller than the value
of Minimum Number
of Active
Transmitting Links/
Minimum Number of
Active Receiving
Links.
l The values of
Minimum Number of
Active Transmitting
Links and Minimum
Number of Active
Receiving Links must
be the same because
the OptiX RTN 980
supports Symmetrical
Mode and
Symmetrical
Operation only. The
parameters Minimum
Number of Active
Transmitting Links
and Minimum

Minimum Number of 1 to 16 1 Number of Active

Active Receiving Links Receiving Links must
assume the same value
on the two ends of an
IMA link.
recommended.
IMA Protocol Version 1.0 1.1 l Specifies the IMA

1.1 protocol version.
l The parameter IMA
Protocol Version
must assume the same
value on the two ends
of an IMA link.
recommended.

IMA Transmit Frame 32 128 l Specifies the IMA

Length 64 transmit frame length.
128 l Based on the IMA
frame format, the
256 receive end rebuilds
the ATM cell stream
with the cells arriving
from diversely-
delayed links. Longer
IMA frames result in
higher transmission
efficiency and occupy
more resources. Once a
member link fails, the
impact on the entire
IMA group increases
as the length of IMA
frames increases.
l The IMA Transmit
Frame Length must
IMA link.
recommended.

IMA Symmetry Mode Symmetrical Mode and Symmetrical Mode and l Specifies the
Symmetrical Operation Symmetrical Operation symmetrical mode of
the IMA group.
l If the symmetrical
mode and symmetrical
operation is adopted,
the bandwidth of the
IMA group is always
consistent in the
transmit direction and
in the receive
direction, even when
some member links
fail. In symmetrical
mode:
– Bandwidth of the
IMA group = min
{bandwidth in the
transmit direction,
bandwidth in the
receive direction}
– The unidirectional
failure in one
member link is
equivalent to the
bidirectional
failure in one
member link.

Maximum Delay 1 to 120 25 l Specifies the

Between Links (ms) maximum differential
delay that is allowed
between the member
links.
l If the differential delay
between a member link
and the other member
links exceeds the
value, this link will be
deactivated and
deleted from the IMA
group.
to a value higher than
the normal value
range, the delay of
IMA services will be
prolonged and even
packet loss will occur;
if this parameter is set
to a value lower than
the normal value
range, a working link
will be deleted by
mistake.
l The Maximum Delay
Between Links (ms)
must assume the same
value on the two ends
of an IMA link.
recommended.
Clock Mode CTC Mode CTC Mode l Specifies the clock

ITC Mode mode of the IMA
group.
l Clock Mode is set to
the same value for the
interconnected ends of
IMA links.
A.9.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the bound paths in the ATM TRUNK.

Navigation Path
2. Click the Binding tab.
3. Click Configuration.

Available Boards - - Selects the available

boards.
Configurable Ports - - Selects the configurable

ATM trunks.
Level E1 E1 Specifies the level of

Fractional E1 bound paths.
l If ATM/IMA services
need to be mapped into
the ATM TRUNK that
binds one or more E1
ports, select E1 in
Level.
l If ATM/IMA services
need to be mapped into
the ATM TRUNK that
binds one or more
serial ports, select
Fractional E1 in
Level.

bound paths. The fixed
value is bidirectional.
Optical Interface - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Available Resources - - Displays the ports that

carry the available paths
for IMA services.
NOTE
For Fractional ATM/IMA
services, set Port Mode in
PDH Interface to Layer 1
and configure Setting Serial
Port Parameters.
Available Timeslots - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Selected Bound Paths - - Displays the bound paths.

VCTRUNK - - Displays the name of the

ATM TRUNK.
Level - - Displays the level of

bound paths.

Bound Paths - - Displays the bound paths.
Number of Bound Paths - - Displays the number of

bound paths.
Display in Combination Selected Selected Specifies whether to

Not selected display bound paths in
combination.
A.9.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group status.
Navigation Path
2. Click the IMA Group States tab.

VCTRUNK - - Displays the VCTRUNK.
Near-End Group Status - - Displays the status of the

near-end group.
Far-End Group Status - - Displays the status of the

far-end group.
Transmit Rate (cell/s) - - Displays the cell

transmission rate.
Receive Rate (cell/s) - - Displays the cell receiving

rate.
Number of Transmit - - Displays the number of

Links transmit links.
Number of Receive - - Displays the number of

Links receive links.

Number of Activated - - Displays the number of

Transmit Links activated transmit links.
Number of Activated - - Displays the number of

Receive Links activated receive links.
A.9.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA link status.
Navigation Path
2. Click the IMA Link States tab.

E1 Link - - Displays E1 links.
Differential Delay Check - - Displays the status of the

Status deferential delay check.
Near-End Receiving - - Displays the near-end

Status receiving status.
Near-End Transmitting - - Displays the near-end

Status transmitting status.
Far-End Receiving - - Displays the far-end

Status receiving status.
Far-End Transmitting - - Displays the far-end

Status transmitting status.
A.9.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface

Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM interface management.
Navigation Path

2. Click the ATM Interface Management tab.

Port - - Displays the port.
Name - - Displays or specifies the

name of port.
Port Type UNI UNI Specifies the type of ATM

NNI port.
l UNI: the port
connecting user-side
devices. For example,
the UNI port applies to
the user-side interface
on the common ATM
network or to the user-
side interface of the PE
on the PSN network
that transmits ATM
PWE3 services.
l NNI: the port
connecting network-
side devices. For
example, the NNI port
applies to the network-
side interface on the
common ATM
network.

ATM Cell Payload Disabled Enabled Specifies whether to

Scrambling Enabled enable payload
scrambling of ATM cells.
l The ITU-T G.804
stipulates that the
payload (48 bytes) of
ATM cells must be
scrambled before it is
mapped into E1
signals. Therefore, it is
set ATM Cell Payload
Scrambling to
Enabled.
l ATM Cell Payload
Scrambling must
ATM link. Otherwise,
packet loss will occur.
Min. VPI - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Max. VPI - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Min. VCI - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Max. VCI - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

VCC-Supported VPI - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Count not support this parameter.
Loopback No Loopback No Loopback Specifies the loopback

Outloop status of the port.
Inloop
A.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping

Table
This topic describes the parameters that are related to configuration of the ATM service class
mapping table.

Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configuration from
the Function Tree.

Mapping Relation ID - - Specifies the ID of the

mapping table.
Mapping Relation Name - - Specifies the name of the

mapping relationship.
UBR BE UBR: BE Displays or specifies the

AF11 CBR: EF PHB service classes that
CBR correspond to different
AF12 RT-VBR: AF31
RT-VBR ATM service types.
AF13 NRT-VBR: AF21 l Eight PHB service
NRT-VBR AF21 classes are available:
UBR+: AF11
AF22 BE, AF1, AF2, AF3,
UBR+ PORT-TRANS: BE
AF23 AF4, EF, CS6, and
CS7. The OptiX RTN
AF31
980 provides different
AF32 QoS policies for the
AF33 queues of different
AF41 service classes.
AF42 l CS6 to CS7: highest
AF43 service classes, mainly
applicable to signaling
EF transmission.
CS6 l EF: fast forwarding,
CS7 applicable to services
of low transmission
delays and low packet
loss rates.
l AF1 to AF4: assured
forwarding, applicable
to services that require
an assured
transmission rate
rather than delay or
jitter limits.

PORT-TRANS NOTE
The AF1 class includes
three subclasses: AF11,
AF12, and AF13. Only
one of these subclasses
can take effect for one
queue. It is the same
case with AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
l BE: best effort,
that do not require
special processing.
A.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping

Table_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of the ATM service class mapping
table.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configuration
2. Click New.


Mapping Relation ID 2 to 8 - Specifies the ID of the

mapping table.
Mapping Relation Name - - Specifies the name of the

mapping relationship.
UBR BE UBR: BE Specifies the PHB service

AF11 CBR: EF classes that correspond to
CBR different ATM service
AF12 RT-VBR: AF31
RT-VBR types.
AF13 NRT-VBR: AF21
l Eight PHB service
NRT-VBR AF21 UBR+: AF11 classes are available:
AF22 PORT-TRANS: BE BE, AF1, AF2, AF3,
UBR+
AF23 AF4, EF, CS6, and
PORT-TRANS CS7. The OptiX RTN
AF31
980 provides different
AF32 QoS policies for the
AF33 queues of different
AF41 service classes.
AF42 l CS6 to CS7: highest
AF43 service classes, mainly
applicable to signaling
EF transmission.
CS6 l EF: fast forwarding,
CS7 applicable to services
of low transmission
delays and low packet
loss rates.
l AF1 to AF4: assured
forwarding, applicable
to services that require
an assured
transmission rate
rather than delay or
jitter limits.
NOTE
The AF1 class includes
three subclasses: AF11,
AF12, and AF13. Only
one of these subclasses
can take effect for one
queue. It is the same
case with AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
l BE: best effort,
that do not require
special processing.

A.9.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM policy management.
Navigation Path
Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree.
2. Click the ATM Policy tab.

Policy ID - 1 Displays the policy ID of

the ATM service.
Policy Name - - Displays or specifies the

policy name of the ATM
service. The maximum
length of the value is 64
bytes.

Parameters for Configuring ATM Traffic

Service Type UBR UBR Displays or specifies the

CBR type of the ATM service.
RT-VBR l The UBR service is
characterized by non-
NRT-VBR real-time applications
UBR+ and many bursts. The
UBR service does not
specify traffic-related
service guarantees. To
be specific, the UBR
service only requires
that the network side
provides the service
with the best effort.
The network side does
not provide any
assured QoS for the
UBR service. In the
case of network
congestion, the UBR
cells are discarded
first.
l The CBR service
requires tightly
constrained delay
variation and requires
that data be transmitted
at a constant rate. In
addition, the CBR
service requests a
static amount of
bandwidth and the
highest priority. The
CBR service is
characterized by stable
traffic and few bursts.
l The rt-VBR service
requires tightly
constrained delay and
delay variation.
Compared with the
CBR service, the rt-
VBR service allows
sources to transmit
data at a rate that varies
with time.
Equivalently, the
sources can be

described as bursty. In
addition, the rt-VBR
service does not
require a static amount
of bandwidth.
l Compared with the rt-
VBR service, the nrt-
VBR service does not
require tightly
constrained delay or
delay variation, and is
intended for non-real-
time applications.
l The UBR+ service is
supplementary to the
UBR service and is
intended for
applications that
require assured
minimum cell rate,
which is indicated by
the minimum cell rate
(MCR) parameter. The
other characteristics of
the UBR+ service are
the same as the
corresponding
characteristics of the
UBR service.
Traffic Type - - The Table A-93 lists the

ATM service type, traffic
Clp01Pcr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 - type descriptor, and the
Clp01Scr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 - related traffic parameters.
ATM policies are
Clp0Pcr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 - configured based on these
mapping relationships.
Clp0Scr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 -
Max. Cell Burst Size 2 to 200000 -

(cell)
Cell Delay Variation 7 to 13300000 -

Tolerance (0.1us)
Discard Traffic Frame Enabled Disabled Displays or specifies the

Disabled frame discarding mark in
ATM policies. This
parameter is effective to
AAL5 traffic.

UPC/NPC Enabled Disabled Displays or specifies

Disabled UPC/NPC.
l UPC is user-side
parameter control and
NPC is network-side
parameter control.
l After UPC/NPC is
enabled, the cells with
a frame discarding
mark will be discarded
in network congestion.
Table A-93 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, traffic types, and traffic parameters
ATM ATM Traffic Type Traffic Traffic Traffic Traffic
Service Descriptor Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4
Type
UBR NoTrafficDescriptor - - - -
NoClpTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr CDVT - -
NoClpNoScr Clp01Pcr - - -
NoClpNoScrCdvt Clp01Pcr CDVT - -
CBR ClpTransparentNoScr Clp01Pcr CDVT - -
ClpNoTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Pcr - -
ClpTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Pcr - -
nrtVBR NoClpScr Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS -
ClpNoTaggingScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS -
ClpTaggingScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS -
rtVBR ClpTransparentScr Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS CDVT
NoClpScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS CDVT
ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS CDVT
ClpTaggingScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS CDVT
UBR+ atmnotrafficdescriptormcr Clp01Mcr - - -
atmnoclpmcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr - -


Type
atmnoclpmcrcdvt Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr CDVT -
Parameters for the application object

Service ID - - Displays the ID

configured for the ATM
service.
Service Name - - Displays the name

configured for the ATM
service.
Link ID - - Displays the link ID.

the service.
A.9.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM policies.
Navigation Path
Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.

Policy ID - 1 Specifies the policy ID of

the ATM service. The
policy ID can also be
automatically allocated.

Policy Name Synchronous signal Synchronous signal Specifies the policy name
Signaling of the ATM service. The
maximum length of the
Voice value is 64 bytes.
Data NOTE
Video You can select one of the
five ATM service policy
names from the drop-down
list or enter the policy name.

Service Type UBR UBR Specifies the type of the

CBR ATM service.
RT-VBR l The UBR service is
characterized by non-
NRT-VBR real-time applications
UBR+ and many bursts. The
UBR service does not
specify traffic-related
service guarantees. To
be specific, the UBR
service only requires
that the network side
provides the service
with the best effort.
The network side does
not provide any
assured QoS for the
UBR service. In the
case of network
congestion, the UBR
cells are discarded
first.
l The CBR service
requires tightly
constrained delay
variation and requires
that data be transmitted
at a constant rate. In
addition, the CBR
service requests a
static amount of
bandwidth and the
highest priority. The
CBR service is
characterized by stable
traffic and few bursts.
l The rt-VBR service
requires tightly
constrained delay and
delay variation.
Compared with the
CBR service, the rt-
VBR service allows
sources to transmit
data at a rate that varies
with time.
Equivalently, the
sources can be
described as bursty. In

addition, the rt-VBR

service does not
require a static amount
of bandwidth.
l Compared with the rt-
VBR service, the nrt-
VBR service does not
require tightly
constrained delay or
delay variation, and is
intended for non-real-
time applications.
l The UBR+ service is
supplementary to the
UBR service and is
intended for
applications that
require assured
minimum cell rate,
which is indicated by
the minimum cell rate
(MCR) parameter. The
other characteristics of
the UBR+ service are
the same as the
corresponding
characteristics of the
UBR service.
Traffic Type - - For the mapping

relationships between
Clp01Pcr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 - ATM service types, ATM
Clp01Scr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 - traffic type descriptors,
and traffic parameters, see
Clp0Pcr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 - Table A-94. ATM
policies are configured
Clp0Scr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 - based on these mapping
relationships.
Max. Cell Burst Size 2 to 200000 -
(cell)
Cell Delay Variation 7 to 13300000 -

Tolerance (0.1us)
Discard Traffic Frame Enabled Disabled Specifies the frame

Disabled discarding mark in ATM
policies. This parameter is
effective to AAL5 traffic.

UPC/NPC Enabled Disabled l UPC is user-side

Disabled parameter control and
NPC is network-side
parameter control.
l After UPC/NPC is
enabled, the cells with
a frame discarding
mark will be discarded
in network congestion.
Table A-94 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, ATM traffic types, and traffic parameters

Type
UBR NoTrafficDescriptor - - - -
NoClpTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr CDVT - -
CBR ClpTransparentNoScr Clp01Pcr CDVT - -
ClpNoTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Pcr - -
ClpTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Pcr - -
nrtVBR NoClpScr Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS -
ClpNoTaggingScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS -
ClpTaggingScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS -
rtVBR ClpTransparentScr Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS CDVT
NoClpScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS CDVT
ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS CDVT
ClpTaggingScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS CDVT
UBR+ atmnotrafficdescriptormcr Clp01Mcr - - -
atmnoclpmcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr - -
atmnoclpmcrcdvt Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr CDVT -

A.9.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM service management.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM

Service ID - - Displays the service ID.
Service Name - - Displays or specifies the

service name.
Service Type - - Displays the ATM service

type.

status of the ATM service.
Connection Parameters
Connection ID - - Displays the connection

ID of the ATM service.
Connection Name - - Displays or specifies the

connection name of the
ATM service.
Source Port - - Displays the source port of

the ATM service.

that carries ATM PWE3
services, if any.
Sink Port - - Displays the sink board of

the ATM service.
Source VPI - - Displays the VPI of the

source port of the ATM
service.
Source VCI - - Displays the VCI of the

service.

Sink VPI - - Displays the VPI of the

sink port of the ATM
service.
Sink VCI - - Displays the VCI of the

service.
Uplink Policy - - Displays the QoS policy of

the uplink ATM
connection.
Down link Policy - - Displays the QoS policy of

the downlink ATM
connection.
Parameters for Port Attributes

Port - - Displays the port of the

ATM IMA service.
Port Type - - Displays the port type of

the ATM IMA service.
Max. VPI - - Displays the maximum

VPI.
Max. VCI - - Displays the maximum

VCI.
VCC-Supported VPI - - Displays the count of VPIs

Count that are used for VC
exchange.
Parameters for Bound Paths

Level - - Displays the level of

bound paths.

Bound Paths - - Displays the bound paths.

Number of Bound Paths - - Displays the number of

bound paths.
IMA Group Status - - Displays the status of the

IMA group.
Parameters of PWs
Tab Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
General PW ID - - Displays the PW ID.

Attributes
Work Status - - Displays the working
status of a PW.
- - Displays whether a PW
is enabled.
PW Signaling Type - - Displays the PW

signaling type.
NOTE
static PWs only.
PW Type - - l Displays the

configured PW type.
l This parameter
corresponds to the
connection type.
The encapsulation
type can be 1:1 or N:
1 if the connection
type is PVP or PVC.
PW Direction - - Displays the direction

of the PW.
PW Encapsulation - - Displays the

Type encapsulation type of
the packets on the PW.
NOTE
MPLS only.
- - Displays the configured

PW Ingress label.
PW Outgoing - - Displays the configured

Label / Sink Port PW Egress label.
Peer LSR ID - - Displays the LSR ID of

the destination.

Tunnel Type - - Displays the type of the

tunnel.
Ingress Tunnel No - - Displays the tunnel ID

of the ingress tunnel.
Egress Tunnel No - - Displays the tunnel ID

of the egress tunnel.
Local Operating - - Displays the local

Status running status of PW.
Remote Operating - - Displays the remote

Status running status of PW.
Overall Operating - - Displays the

Status comprehensive
working status of the
PW.
Tunnel for Auto - - Displays the tunnel that

Selection is automatically
selected.
QoS PW ID - - Displays the PW ID.
Direction - - Displays the direction

of the PW.
Bandwidth Limit - - Displays or specifies

whether the bandwidth
limit is enabled.
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs, or the
bandwidth of one or
more ATM PWE3
services, in an
MPLS tunnel. (One
ATM PWE3 service
corresponds to one
PW.)
l An ATM PWE3
service corresponds
to a PW. Therefore,
this function can
also limit the
bandwidth of ATM
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.

CIR (Kbit/s) - - Displays or specifies

the committed
information rate.
CBS (kbyte) - - Displays or specifies

the excess burst size of
the PW.
PIR (kbit/s) - - Displays or specifies

the peak information
rate.
PBS (kbyte) - - Displays or specifies

the maximum excess
burst size of the PW.
EXP - - The OptiX RTN 980

parameter.
Policy - - The OptiX RTN 980

parameter.
Advanced Control Word Must Use - Displays or specifies

Attributes No Use whether to use the
control word. In the
MPLS packet switching
network, the control
word is used to transmit
packet information.

Control Channel CW - l Displays or

Type None specifies the mode
of PW connectivity
Alert Label check.
l The value None
indicates that the
control word is not
supported. That is,
the PW connectivity
check is not
supported.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
l The value Alert
Label indicates
VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation
mode.
VCCV Verification Ping - l Displays or

Mode None specifies the VCCV
verification mode.
The VCCV
verification is used
for PW connectivity
check.
l If the VCCV-ping
function is required,
do not set VCCV
Verification Mode
of PWs to None.

Max. Concatenated 1 to 31 - l Displays or

Cell Count specifies the
maximum number
of concatenated
cells.
l If the value 1 is
assumed, only one
ATM cell is
encapsulated in one
from 2 to 31 is
assumed, a
maximum of 2 to 31
ATM cells are
encapsulated into
one packet.
Packet Loading 100 to 50000 - l Displays or

Time (us) specifies the packet
loading time. Once
the packet loading
time expires, the
packet is sent out
even if the
concatenated cells
are less than the
maximum.
l If Max.
Concatenated Cell
Count assumes the
value 1, this
parameter is
ineffective. That is,
the packet will be
sent out once the cell
is loaded.
Parameters for CoS Mapping



CoS Mapping - - Specifies the policy for

mapping different ATM
service levels to CoS
priorities. By setting this
parameter, different
quality measures are
provided for different
ATM services.

NOTE

created.

working PW.

protection PW.

mode.

the PW protection
group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.

PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
switching.


original working PW
after the fault is
rectified.
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.

protection group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.

protection group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no


group.

group.



A.9.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM services.
Navigation Path
2. Click New.

Service ID 1 to 4294967295 - Specifies the service ID.
Service Name - - Specifies the service

name.

Service Type UNIs-NNI UNIs-NNI l Specifies the type of

UNI-UNI the ATM service.
l UNIs-NNI: This value
applies to ATM PWE3
services. The attributes
in Connection, PW,
and CoS Mapping
need to be configured.
l UNI-UNI: This value
applies to common
ATM services. Only
the attributes in
Connection need to be
configured.
Connection Type PVC PVC Specifies the connection

PVP type of the ATM service.
Transparent For common ATM
services (UNI-UNI):
l PVP: Only the VPIs of
the source and sink are
exchanged.
l PVC: The VPIs and
VCIs of the source and
sink are exchanged.
For ATM PWE3 services
(UNIs-NNI):
l PVP: This value
applies to the N-to-1/1-
to-1 VPC
encapsulation mode.
l PVC: This value
applies to the N-to-1/1-
to-1 VCC
encapsulation mode.
For transparently
transmitted ATM
services, set Connection
Type to Transparent.

Protection Type No Protection No Protection l Specifies the

PW APS protection mode of the
PW. This parameter is
Slave Protection Pair available only when
Service Type is UNIs-
NNI.
according to the
network plan.
Connection Parameters
Connection Name - - Specifies the name of the

ATM connection.
Source Board - - Specifies the source board

of the ATM service.
Source Port - - Specifies the source port

of the ATM service.
Source VPI(eg.35,36-39) UNI: 0 to 255 - Specifies the VPI of the

NNI: 0 to 4095 source port of the ATM
service.
Source VCI(eg.35,36-39) 32 to 65535 - Specifies the VCI of the

service.
PW ID 1 to 4294967295 - Specifies the ID of the PW

Sink Board - - Specifies the sink board of

the ATM service.
Sink Port - - Specifies the sink board of

the ATM service.
NOTE
This parameter does not
need to be set if Service
Type is UNIs-NNI. This
parameter needs to be set if
Service Type is UNI-UNI
and the value must be
different from that of the
source board.
Sink VPI(eg.35,36-39) UNI: 0 to 255 - Specifies the VPI of the

NNI: 0 to 4095 sink port of the ATM
service.

Sink VCI(eg.35,36-39) 32 to 65535 - Specifies the VCI of the

service.
Uplink Policy - - Specifies the QoS policy

of the uplink ATM
connection.
Down link Policy - - Specifies the QoS policy

of the downlink ATM
connection.
Parameters of PWs
NOTE
If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS, all the parameters of working and protection PWs
need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW as an example.

Working Status - - Displays the working

status of the PW.
NOTE
This parameter is available
only after the PW
parameters are configured.
Enable Status - - Displays the enabling

status of the PW.
NOTE
This parameter is available
only after the PW
parameters are configured.
PW Signaling Type Static Static Labels for static PWs need

to be manually assigned.

PW Type The ATM connection type The ATM connection type l Specifies the type of
is PVC: is PVC: the PW.
l ATM n-to-one VCC ATM n-to-one VCC cell l In the case of ATM
cell transport transport 1_to_1 encapsulation,
l ATM one-to-one VCC The ATM connection type one PW carries one
Cell Mode is PVP: VPC or VCC.
The ATM connection type ATM n-to-one VPC cell l In the case of ATM
is PVP: transport n_to_1 encapsulation,
one PW carries one or
l ATM n-to-one VPC more VPCs or VCCs.
cell transport
l ATM one-to-one VPC
Cell Mode
PW Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Displays the direction of

the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type MPLS MPLS Displays the

packets on the PW.
PW Ingress Label / 16 to 1048575 - Specifies the PW Ingress

Source Port label.
PW Egress Label / Sink 16 to 1048575 - Specifies the PW Egress

Port label.
Tunnel Selection Mode Manually Manually Displays the method to

select tunnels.


PW will fail.


QoS Parameters


bandwidth limit is
enabled.
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs, or the
bandwidth of one or
more ATM PWE3
services, in an MPLS
tunnel. (One ATM
PWE3 service
corresponds to one
PW.)
l An ATM PWE3
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.

CIR (Kbit/s) - - Specifies the committed

the PW.
CBS (kbyte) - - Specifies the excess burst

size of the PW.
PIR (kbit/s) - - Specifies the peak

the PW.
PBS (kbyte) - - Specifies the maximum

excess burst size of the
PW.


Parameters of Advanced Attributes

Control Word Must Use Must Use l Specifies whether to

No Use use the control word.
In the MPLS packet
switching network, the
transmit packet
information.
l Set Control Word to
Must Use if PW
Type is ATM 1:1.
Control Channel Type CW CW l Specifies the mode of

None PW connectivity
check.
Alert Label
l The value None
indicates that the
control word is not
PW connectivity check
is not supported.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
l The value Alert
Label indicates VCCV
packets in Alert
Label encapsulation
mode.

used for PW
connectivity check.
this parameter to
None.

Max. Concatenated Cell 1 to 31 10 l Specifies the

Count maximum number of
concatenated cells.
l If the value 1 is
assumed, only one
ATM cell is
encapsulated in one
from 2 to 31 is
assumed, a maximum
of 2 to 31 ATM cells
are encapsulated into
one packet.
Packet Loading Time 100 to 50000 1000 l Specifies the packet

(us) loading time. Once the
packet loading time
expires, the packet is
sent out even if the
concatenated cells are
less than the
maximum.
l If Max. Concatenated
Cell Count assumes
the value 1, this
parameter is
ineffective. That is, the
packet will be sent out
once the cell is loaded.

NOTE
PW APS.

type.

group ID.


protection group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.

mode.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
mode.

working PW.

protection PW.

PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports dual-ended
switching.

are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.


group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
recommended.

group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
recommended.

mode of the PW APS
protection group.
OAM Parameters
NOTE


status of PW OAM.

l Manual: The
connectivity check
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value Auto-
Sensing is
recommended.


fixed interval.
the user.
this parameter
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
PWs.

configurable when
50 Detection Packet
100 Type is FFD and
value of 1000 when
500
Detection Packet
Type is CV.
3.3 for PW APS.

received.

received.


NOTE

mode.

the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.

protection pair.

protection pair.
Parameters for CoS Mapping


that carries service.
CoS Mapping - - Specifies the policy for

mapping different ATM
service levels to CoS
priorities. By setting this
parameter, different
quality measures are
provided for different
ATM services.
A.9.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End

Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to segment end attributes of ATM OAM.

Navigation Path
OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Segment End Attributes tab.

Source - - Displays the source node

of the ATM/IMA service.
Sink - - Displays the sink node of

the ATM/IMA service.

Connection Direction Source - Displays the direction of

Sink the ATM connection.
l Source: indicates the
forward direction.
– For common ATM
services (UNI-
UNI), Source
indicates the
direction from the
source end to the
sink end of the
ATM connection.
– For ATM PWE3
services (UNI-
NNI), Source
indicates the
direction from the
UNI port side to the
MPLS interface
side.
l Sink: indicates the
backward direction.
– For common ATM
services (UNI-
UNI), Sink
indicates the
direction from the
sink end to the
source end of the
ATM connection.
– For ATM PWE3
services (UNI-
NNI), Sink
indicates the
direction from the
MPLS interface
side to the UNI port
side.

Segment and End Non segment and Non segment and Specifies the segment and
Attribute Endpoint Endpoint end attributes of the source
Segment point and sink of the ATM
connection.
Endpoint
l Non segment and
Segment and Endpoint endpoint: intermediate
point, which refers to
the OAM node
between two segment
points or two end
points. Therefore,
intermediate points
can be further
classified into
intermediate points
between segment
points, and
intermediate points
between end points.
– Upon detecting a
fault, an
intermediate point
reports the
corresponding
alarms and inserts
segment AIS cells
and end AIS cells to
the downstream.
Afterwards, the
intermediate point
periodically sends
these cells.
– An intermediate
point does not catch
any AIS/RDI cells.
l Segment point: an end
point of a segment.
One ATM link consists
of multiple segments.
fault, a segment
point reports the
corresponding
alarms and inserts
end AIS cells to the
downstream.
Afterwards, the
segment point

periodically sends
these cells.
– A segment point
catches segment
AIS/RDI cells
only.
l End point: an end point
of an ATM link. It is
usually an edge point
on the ATM network.
fault, an end point
reports the
corresponding
alarms but does not
insert any AIS
cells.
– An end point
catches end AIS/
RDI cells only.
l Segment and endpoint:
a segment-end point,
or an edge point of a
segment and an end.
fault, a segment-
end point reports
the corresponding
alarms but does not
insert any AIS
cells.
– A segment-end
point catches the
AIS/RDI cells of a
segment and an
end.
A.9.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the CC activation status of ATM OAM.
Navigation Path
2. Click the CC Activation Status tab.




Connection Direction Source - Specifies the connection

Sink direction.
forward direction.
– For common ATM
services (UNI-
UNI), Source
indicates the
direction from the
source end to the
sink end of the
ATM connection.
– For ATM PWE3
services (UNI-
NNI), Source
indicates the
direction from the
MPLS interface
side.
backward direction.
– For common ATM
services (UNI-
UNI), Sink
indicates the
direction from the
sink end to the
source end of the
ATM connection.
– For ATM PWE3
services (UNI-
NNI), Sink
indicates the
direction from the
MPLS interface
side.

Segment and End - - Specifies the segment and

Attribute end attributes of nodes.
l Segment point: an end
point of a segment.
One ATM link consists
of multiple segments.
Segment CC cells are
terminated at segment
points.
l End point: an end point
of an ATM link. It is
usually an edge point
on an ATM network.
End-to-end CC cells
are terminated at end
points.

CC Activate Flag Deactivate - l Specifies the CC

Source activate activation flag.
Sink activate l Deactivate: This node
does not transmit or
Source + sink activate receive CC cells.
l Source activate: This
point transmits but
does not receive CC
cells.
l Sink activate: This
point receives but does
not transmit CC cells.
If this point does not
receive any service
cells or CC cells within
a time interval of 3.5
(±0.5) seconds, it will
report the LOC alarm
and transmit AIS cells
in the forward
direction.
l Source + sink activate:
This node transmits
and receives CC cells.
If this point does not
receive any service
cells or CC cells within
a time interval of 3.5
(±0.5) seconds, it will
report the LOC alarm
and transmit AIS cells
in the forward
direction.
l Once the node receives
any CC cells or service
cells, the LOC alarm
will be cleared.
A.9.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback

Status
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the remote end loopback status of ATM
OAM.

Navigation Path
2. Click the Remote Loopback Test tab.




Connection Direction Source - Displays the direction of

Sink the ATM connection.
forward direction.
– For common ATM
services (UNI-
UNI), Source
indicates the
direction from the
source end to the
sink end of the
ATM connection.
– For ATM PWE3
services (UNI-
NNI), Source
indicates the
direction from the
MPLS interface
side.
backward direction.
– For common ATM
services (UNI-
UNI), Sink
indicates the
direction from the
sink end to the
source end of the
ATM connection.
– For ATM PWE3
services (UNI-
NNI), Sink
indicates the
direction from the
MPLS interface
side.

Segment and End - - Specifies the segment and

Attribute end attribute.
l Segment LB cells are
looped back only at a
Segment point,
Segment and
Endpoint, or Non
segment and
Endpoint.
l End-to-end LB cells
are looped back only at
an Endpoint or
Segment and
Endpoint.
Loopback Point NE - - l Specifies the NE

where the loopback
point is located.
l Before an end-to-end
LB test, you need to set
end points in the test
domain. After the test,
remove the end points.
l Before a segment-to-
segment LB test, you
need to set segment
points in the test
domain. After the test,
remove the segment
points.
Test Result - - Displays whether the

loopback command is
successfully issued.
A.9.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID

This topic describes the parameters that are related to LLID configuration.
Navigation Path
2. Click the LLID tab.


Country Code - 00 00 Displays or specifies the

(Hexadecimal Code) country code of the ATM
service. The value is 2
bytes in length.
Network Code - 00 01 Displays or specifies the

(Hexadecimal Code) network code of the ATM
service. The value is 2
bytes in length.
NE Code (Hexadecimal - 00 30 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 l Displays or specifies

Code) 00 00 the NE code of the
ATM service. The
value is 11 bytes in
length.
l The default NE code
can be used if it is
unique on the network.
l NE code and NE ID are
associated. Therefore,
each NE on the
network has a unique
NE code.
A.10 Clock Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.
A.10.1 Physical Clock Parameters

This topic describes physical clock parameters.
A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority.
2. Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.

Parameters
Clock Source - - l External clock source

1 indicates the external
clock source at the
CLK/TOD1 port on
the CSHN board in
physical slot 15.
External clock source
2 indicates the external
clock source at the
CLK/TOD1 port on
the CSHN board in
physical slot 20.
l The internal clock
source is always at the
lowest priority and
indicates that the NE
works in the free-run
mode.
l The clock sources and
the corresponding
clock source priority
levels are determined
according to the clock
synchronization
schemes.
External Clock Source 2 Mbit/s 2Mbit/s l This parameter

Mode 2 MHz indicates the type of
the external clock
source signal.
according to the
external clock signal.
In normal cases, the
external clock signal is
a 2 Mbit/s signal.

Synchronous Status Byte SA4 to SA8 SA4 l This parameter is valid

only when External
Clock Source Mode is
set to 2Mbit/s.
l This parameter
indicates which bit of
the TS0 in odd frames
of the external clock
signal is used to
transmit the SSM.
to be set only when the
SSM or extended SSM
is enabled. In normal
cases, the external
clock sources use the
SA4 to transmit the
SSM.
Clock Source Priority - - Displays the priority

Sequence (Highest: 1) sequence of clock sources.
clock source priority.
A.10.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the
External Clock Port
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table for the phase-locked loop
(PLL) clock source of the external clock port.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration >
Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Priority for PLL Clock Sources of 1st External Output tab.

Parameters for configuring the priority table for the PLL clock source of the external
clock port
Clock Source - Internal Clock Source l When the PLL clock

source of the external
clock port extracts the
system clock (namely,
the local clock of the
NE), Clock Source
Internal Clock
Source. In this case,
no manual
configuration is
required.
l When the PLL clock
source of the external
clock port needs to
extract the clock from
an SDH line board,
clock from a radio link,
clock from a PDH
tributary board, or
synchronous Ethernet
clock, set Clock
Source to the
corresponding clock
source according to the
network planning
information.
Current Status - - Displays the valid status

of clock sources.

Lock Status - - l The PLL clock source

of the external clock
port extracts only an
unlocked clock source.
l If a clock source is in
locked state, the PLL
clock source of the
external clock port
does not extract the
clock source until the
clock source is
changed from the
locked state to the
unlocked state.
l The internal clock
source should not be in
locked state.
Clock Source Priority - - Displays the priority level

(Highest: 1) of a clock source. 1 is the
highest priority.
A.10.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet

This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.
Navigation Path
Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration.
2. Click the Clock Subnet tab.
Parameters for Setting a Clock Subnet

Affiliated Subnet - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.

Protection Status Start Extended SSM Stop SSM Protocol l The SSM protocol is a
Protocol scheme used for
Start Standard SSM synchronous
Protocol management on an
SDH network and
Stop SSM Protocol indicates that the SSM
is passed by the lower
four bits of the S1 byte
and can be exchanged
between the nodes.
The SSM protocol
ensures that the
equipment
automatically selects
the clock source of the
highest quality and
highest priority, thus
preventing mutual
clock tracing.
l After the standard
SSM protocol is
started, the NE first
performs the
on the clock source
quality level
information provided
by the S1 byte. If the
quality level of the
clock source is the
same, the NE then
performs the
priority table. That is,
the NE selects an
unlocked clock source
that is of the highest
quality and highest
priority from all the
current available clock
sources as the clock
source to be
synchronized and
traced by the local
station.
l If the SSM protocol is
stopped, it indicates

that the S1 byte is not

used. The NE selects
and switches a clock
source only according
to the sequence
specified in the
priority table. The
clock source of the
highest priority is used
as the clock source to
be traced.
l After the SSM
protocol is stopped,
each NE performs the
on the clock according
to the preset priority
table of the clock
source only when the
clock source of a
higher priority is lost.
Clock Source - - This parameter indicates

the clock source that is
configured for an NE. In
Clock Source Priority,
you can set whether to add
or delete a clock source.

Clock Source ID (None) (None) l This parameter is valid

1 to 15 only when the
extended SSM
protocol is started.
l Clock source IDs are
allocated for the
following clock
sources only:
– External clock
source
– Internal clock
source of the node
that accesses the
external clock
sources
– Internal clock
source of the joint
node of a ring and a
chain or the joint
node of two rings
– Line clock source
that enters the ring
when the intra-ring
line clock source is
configured at the
joint node of a ring
and a chain or the
joint node of two
rings
A.10.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality

This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Received Quality tab.

Parameters for Clock Source Quality


the name of the
configured clock source.
In Clock Source
Priority, you can set
whether to add or delete a
clock source.
Configured Quality Unknown Automatic Extraction This parameter specifies

Synchronization Quality the quality level that is
G.811 Clock Signal configured for the clock
source. This function is
G.812 Transit Clock required only in a special
Signal scenario or in a test.
G.812 Local Clock Signal Generally, this parameter
G.813 SDH Equipment need not be set.
Timing Source (SETS)
Signal
Do Not Use For
Synchronization
Automatic Extraction
Received Quality - - This parameter indicates

the clock source quality
signal received by the NE.
The NE extracts the clock
source quality signal from
the S1 byte of each clock
source.
Parameters for Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level


the name of the NE.

Quality Level 0 Do Not Use For Do Not Use For This parameter specifies
Synchronization Synchronization the clock quality whose
G.811 Reference Clock level is manually set to
zero.
Between G.811 Reference
Clock and G.812 Transit l Do Not Use For
Clock Synchronization: the
notification
G.812 Transit Clock information in the
Between G.812 Transit reverse direction of the
Clock and G.812 Local selected
Clock synchronization clock
G.812 Local Clock source to avoid direct
mutual locking of
Between G.812 Local
adjacent NEs.
Clock and synchronous
equipment timing source l G.811 Reference
(SETS) Clock: the clock signal
specified in ITU-T G.
SETS Clock
811.
Between synchronous
l Between G.811
equipment timing source
Reference Clock and
(SETS) and quality
G.812 Transit Clock:
unavailable
lower than the quality
level of the clock
signal specified in
ITU-T G.811 but
higher than the quality
level of the transit
exchange clock signal
812.
l G.812 Transit Clock:
the transit exchange
clock signal specified
in ITU-T G.812.
l Between G.812
Transit Clock and G.
812 Local Clock:
level of the transit
exchange clock signal
812 but higher than the
quality level of the
local exchange clock
signal specified in
ITU-T G.812.
l G.812 Local Clock:
the local exchange


in ITU-T G.812.
l Between G.812 Local
Clock and
synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS): lower
than the quality level
of the local exchange
in ITU-T G.812 but
level of the clock
signal of the SETS.
l SETS Clock: the clock
signal of the SETS.
l Between synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS) and
quality unavailable:
level of the clock
signal of the SETS but
level unavailable in the
synchronous timing
source.
A.10.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control

This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.
Navigation Path
2. Click the SSM Output tab.

Parameters
Line Port - - l This parameter

indicates the name of
the line clock port.
l Line Port: indicates
the SSM quality
information output
port of the current
available line clock
source and the external
clock source. This
output port can
transmit the quality
information of the
clock source by
outputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.
Output S1 Byte Info Enabled Enabled l Output S1 Byte Info

Disabled is valid only when the
SSM protocol or the
extended SSM
l Output S1 Byte Info
indicates whether the
SSM is output at the
line port.
l When the line port is
connected to an NE in
the same clock subnet,
set Output S1 Byte
Info to Enabled.
Otherwise, set this
parameter to
Disabled.
A.10.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Clock ID Output tab.

Parameters
Line Port - - l This parameter

indicates the name of
the line clock port.
l Line Port: indicates
the SSM quality
information output
port of the current
available line clock
source and the external
clock source. This
output port can
transmit the quality
information of the
clock source by
outputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.
Output Clock ID Enabled Enabled l Output Clock ID is

Disabled valid only when the
extended SSM
l Output Clock ID
indicates whether the
clock source ID is
output at the line port.
l If the line ports are
connected to the NEs
in the same clock
subnet and if the
extended SSM
protocol is started on
the opposite NE,
Output Clock ID is
set to Enabled.
Otherwise, this
parameter is set to
Disabled.
A.10.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration

Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.

Navigation Path
Clock Source Switching.
2. Click the Clock Source Reversion tab.
Parameters

the name of the NE.
Higher Priority Clock Auto-Revertive Auto-Revertive l When the quality of a

Source Reversion Non-Revertive higher-priority clock
source degrades, the
NE automatically
switches the clock
source to a lower-
priority clock source.
If this parameter is set
to Auto-Revertive,
the NE automatically
switches the clock
source to the higher-
priority clock source
when this higher-
priority clock source
restores. If this
parameter is set to
Non-Revertive, the
NE does not
automatically switch
the clock source to the
higher-priority clock
source when this
higher-priority clock
source restores.
l Correct setting of
Clock Source
Switching Condition
ensures the reliability
of the clock source
switching. To improve
the clock quality,
select Auto-
Revertive. Otherwise,
to prevent jitter of the
clock, generally, it is
Non-Revertive.

Clock Source WTR 0 to 12 5 l This parameter

Time(min.) specifies the duration
from the time when the
clock source
restoration is detected
to the time when the
clock source switching
is triggered. This
parameter is used to
avoid frequent
switching of the clock
source due to
instability of the clock
source state within a
short time.
only when Higher
Priority Clock
Source Reversion is
set to Auto-
Revertive.
A.10.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching status of a clock source.
Navigation Path
Physical Clock > Clock Source Switching.
2. Click the Clock Source Switching tab.
Parameters

the name of the clock
source.
Current Status Valid - This parameter indicates

Invalid whether the clock source
is valid.

Lock Status Lock - l This parameter

Unlock specifies the locking
status of the clock
source in the priority
table.
l Lock: A clock source
in the priority table is
in the locked state. The
clock source in the
locked state cannot be
switched.
l Unlock: A clock
source in the priority
table is in the unlocked
state. The clock source
in the unlocked state
can be switched.
Switching Source - - This parameter indicates

the clock source to be
traced by the NE after the
switching.
Switching Status Normal - This parameter indicates

Manual Switching the switching status of the
current clock source.
Forced Switching
A.10.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching

Conditions
This section describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of clock sources.
Navigation Path
Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Clock Source Switching Conditions tab.
Parameters
NE Name - - Displays the name of the

NE.
Clock Source - - Displays the clock source.

AIS Alarm Yes No l The default value is

No recommended.
set to Yes, it indicates
that clock source
switching occurs if the
clock source reports
the AIS alarm.
set to No, it indicates
that no clock source
the AIS alarm.
B1 BER Threshold- - - The parameter is invalid.

Crossing
RLOS,RLOF and OOF/ Yes Yes This parameter indicates

RLOC Alarms that clock switching
occurs when the clock
source reports the RLOS,
RLOF, OOF, or LOC
alarm.
CV Threshold-Crossing - - The parameter is invalid.
CV Threshold - - The parameter is invalid.
B2-EXC Alarm Yes No l The default value is

No recommended.
set to Yes, it indicates
that clock source
the B2-EXC alarm.
set to No, it indicates
that no clock source
the B2-EXC alarm.
A.10.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External

Clock Source
This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock
source.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock.
Parameters
2M Phase-Locked External Clock Source 1 - This parameter indicates

Source Number External Clock Source 2 the number of the external
clock source output of the
NE.
External Clock Output 2Mbit/s 2Mbit/s l This parameter

Mode 2MHz specifies the mode of
the output clock.
to be set according to
the requirements of the
interconnected
equipment. Generally,
the output external
clock signal is a 2
Mbit/s signal.
External Clock Output SA4 to SA8 ALL l This parameter is valid

Timeslot ALL only when External
Clock Output Mode
is set to 2Mbit/s.
l This parameter
indicates which bit of
the TS0 in odd frames
of the output clock
signal is used to
transmit the SSM.
to ALL, it indicates
that all the bits of the
TS0 are used to
transmit the SSM.
you use the default
value.

External Source Output Threshold Disabled Threshold Disabled l This parameter

Threshold Not Inferior to G.813 specifies the lowest
SETS Signal quality of the output
clock. If the clock
Not Inferior to G.812 quality is lower than
Local Signal the value of this
Not Inferior to G.812 parameter, it indicates
Transit Clock Signal that the external clock
Not Inferior to G.811 source does not output
Clock Signal any clock signal.
to Threshold
Disabled, it indicates
that the external clock
source always outputs
the clock signal.
you use the default
value.
2M Phase-Locked No Failure Condition No Failure Condition l This parameter

Source Failure AIS specifies the failure
Condition condition of the 2
LOF Mbit/s phase-locked
AIS OR LOF clock source.
you use the default
value.
2M Phase-Locked Shut Down Output Shut Down Output l This parameter is valid
Source Failure Action 2M Output S1 Byte only when 2M Phase-
Unavailable Locked Source
Failure Condition is
Send AIS not set to No Failure
Condition.
l This parameter
specifies the operation
of the 2 Mbit/s phase-
locked loop (PLL)
when the 2 Mbit/s
phase-locked clock
source meets the
failure conditions.
you use the default
value.

A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Synchronization Status.
Parameters

the name of the NE.
NE Clock Mode - - This parameter indicates

the working mode of the
NE clock.
S1 Byte Synchronization - - This parameter indicates

Quality Info the synchronization
quality information of the
S1 byte.
S1 Byte Clock - - This parameter indicates

Synchronous Source the clock synchronization
source of the S1 byte.
Synchronous Source - - This parameter indicates

the synchronization
source.

Data Output Method in Normal Data Output Normal Data Output l When all the reference
Holdover Mode Keep the Latest Data timing signals are lost,
the slave clock
changes to the
holdover mode. At this
time, the slave clock
works based on the
latest frequency
information stored
before the reference
timing signals are lost.
Then, the frequency of
the oscillator drifts
slowly to ensure that
the offset between the
frequency of the slave
clock and the reference
frequency is very
small. As a result, the
impact caused by the
drift is limited within
the specified
requirement.
l Normal Data Output:
The slave clock works
based on the latest
frequency information
stored before the
reference timing
signals are lost, and the
holdover duration
depends on the size of
the phase-locked clock
register on the
equipment. The
holdover duration can
be up to 24 hours.
l Keep the Latest Data:
The slave clock works
in holdover mode all
the time based on the
latest frequency
information stored
before the reference
timing signals are lost.
A.10.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters

This topic describes CES ACR clock parameters.

A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source

This topic describes parameters that are related to the ACR clock source.
Navigation Path
Clock > ACR Clock from the Function Tree.

ACR Clock Source - - Identifies the ACR clock

domain.
CES Service - - This parameter displays or

specifies the CES service
that the master ACR clock
source uses.
Track Mode - - This parameter displays

the trace mode of an ACR
clock source.
Lock Status - - This parameter displays

whether an ACR clock
source is locked.
Current CES Service - - This parameter displays

the CES service from
which the current ACR
clock source is obtained.
A.10.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain

This topic describes parameters that are related to clock domains.
Navigation Path
Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree.

Clock Domain - - Displays the clock

domain.

Clock Domain Board - - Displays the board where

the clock domain is
located.
Clock Port - - Displays the Smart E1

ports that are bound to a
clock domain.
A.10.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation

This topic describes the parameters for creating a clock domain.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.

Clock Domain System Clock Domain System Clock Domain Specifies the clock
CES ACR1 Clock domain to be bound.
Domain
CES ACR2 Clock
Domain
CES ACR3 Clock
Domain
CES ACR4 Clock
Domain
Clock Domain Board - - Displays the board where

the clock domain is
located.
Board - - Specifies the board where

the Smart E1 port is
located.
Available Port - - Displays the Smart E1

ports that are not bound to
a clock domain.
Selected Port - - Displays the Smart E1

ports that are bound to a
clock domain.

A.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports

This topic describes parameters that are used for configuring an external time port as an RS-485
monitoring port.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Auxiliary

Port - - Displays the port that

functions as the auxiliary
port.
Interface Mode 1st external clock 1st external clock Specifies the working
2nd external clock mode of the auxiliary port.
1st external time l For an external time
input/output port, set
2nd external time Interface Mode to 1st
Orderwire external time or 2nd
S1/F1 external time.
Commissioning serial port
A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General

This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2. Click the General tab.

Parameters
Call Waiting Time 1 to 9 9 l This parameter indicates the waiting

(s) time after the local station dials the
number. If the calling station does not
receive the response message from the
called station within the call waiting
time, it automatically removes the
communication connection.
l If less than 30 nodes exist in the
orderwire subnet, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to five seconds. If
more than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire
subnet, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to nine seconds.
l The call waiting time should be set to the
same for all the NEs.
Dialling Mode Pulse Dual-Tone This parameter indicates the dialling mode
Dual-Tone Frequency of the orderwire phone.
Frequency
Conference Call - 888 l This parameter indicates the telephone

number of the network-wide orderwire
conference call.
l When an OptiX RTN 980 dials the
telephone number 888, the orderwire
phones of all the NEs on the orderwire
subnet ring. When an OptiX RTN 980
receives the call, the orderwire phones
on the other NEs do not ring. In this case,
the orderwire point-to-multipoint group
call changes to a point-to-point call
between two NEs.
l The telephone number of the orderwire
conference call should be the same for
all the nodes on the same subnet.
l The telephone number of the orderwire
conference call must have the same
length as the telephone number of the
orderwire phone (phone 1) at the local
site.

Phone 1 100 to 99999999 101 l This parameter specifies the orderwire

phone number of the local station. An
addressing call refers to a point-to-point
call.
l The length of the orderwire phone
number of each NE should be the same.
It is recommended that you set the phone
number to a three-digit number.
l The orderwire phone number of each NE
should be unique. It is recommended that
the phone numbers are allocated from
101 for the NEs in a sequential order
according to the NE IDs.
l The orderwire phone number cannot be
set to the group call number 888 and
cannot start with 888.
Available - - This parameter indicates the available port

Orderwire Port for the orderwire phone.
Selected - - This parameter indicates the selected port

Orderwire Port for the orderwire phone.
A.11.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced

This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Advanced tab.
Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones

Orderwire E1 E1 l This parameter specifies the overhead

Occupied Bytes E2 byte that is used to transmit the orderwire
signals.
l Regardless the parameter value, the
radio link always uses a customized
overhead byte to transmit the orderwire
signals. Hence, this parameter should be
set according to the occupied SDH
overhead bytes in the ordinary SDH.

A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port

This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.
Navigation Path
2. Click the F1 Data Port tab.
Parameters
Available Data - - l This parameter indicates the available F1

Path data channel.
l Two data channels should be selected for
the configuration.
Number - - This parameter indicates the number of the

F1 data port.
Data Channel 1 - - l If an SDH optical or electrical line port

is selected, this parameter corresponds to
Data Channel 2 the F1 byte in the SDH frame at the line
port.
l If an IF port is selected, this parameter
corresponds to the customized F1 byte in
the microwave frame at the IF port.
l If F1 is selected, this parameter
corresponds to the F1/S1 interface on the
AUX board. The F1/S1 interface
complies with ITU-T G.703 and
operates at the rate of 64 kbit/s.
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port

This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.

Parameters for Broadcast Data Ports

Overhead Byte SERIAL1 to SERIAL1 l In the case of an SDH optical/electrical

SERIAL4 line, the preset overhead byte is used to
transmit the asynchronous data services.
l In the case of a radio link, a customized
serial overhead byte in the microwave
frame is used to transmit the
asynchronous data services.
Broadcast Data - No Data l When this parameter is set to the

Source SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the
corresponding AUX board is used.
l When this parameter is set to the SDH
optical/electrical line port, the value of
Overhead Byte of this port is used.
l When this parameter is set to the IF port,
the customized Serial byte in the
microwave frame of this port is used.
Available - - This parameter indicates the available

Broadcast Data broadcast data sink.
Sink
Selected Broadcast - - l When this parameter is set to the

Data Sink SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the
corresponding AUX board is used.
l When this parameter is set to the SDH
optical/electrical line port, the value of
Overhead Byte of this port is used.
l When this parameter is set to the IF port,
the customized Serial byte in the
microwave frame of this port is used.
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface

This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.
Navigation Path
Select the AUX board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function
Tree.

Parameters for the General Attributes

Operation Object - - This parameter indicates the operation

object.
Relay Control Auto Control Auto Control l Auto Control: If an alarm is reported, the
Mode Manual Control alarming relay is started up
automatically. Otherwise, the alarming
relay is shut down.
l Manual Control: Relay Status in Major
Alarm(K0) and Relay Status in
Critical Alarm(K1) need to be set.
Relay Status in Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status
Major Alarm(K0) Enabled of the relay is set manually for major
alarms.
l Enable: The relay is set to the "ON"
status for major alarms.
l Disabled: The relay is set to the "OFF"
status for major alarms.
l This parameter is valid only when Relay
Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.
Relay Status in Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status
Critical Alarm(K1) Enabled of the relay is set manually for critical
alarms.
l Enable: The relay is set to the enabled
status for critical alarms.
l Disabled: The relay is set to the disabled
status for critical alarms.
l This parameter is valid only when Relay
Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.
Parameters for the Input Relay


object.
Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

name of the channel.
Using Status Unused Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarm
Used interface of the input relay is used.

Alarm Mode Relay Turns Off/ Relay Turns Off/ l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns
High Level High Level Off/High Level, an alarm is generated
Relay Turns On/ when the relay is turned off.
Low Level l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns
On/Low Level, an alarm is generated
when the relay is turned on.
l This parameter is valid only when Using
Status is set to Used.
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Critical Alarm This parameter specifies the severity of the
Major Alarm alarm that is generated at the input relay.
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
Parameters for the Output Relay


object.
Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

name of the output channel.
Use or Not Unused Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarm
Used interface of the output relay is used.
Parameters for the Temperature Attributes


object.
Monitor Status - - This parameter indicates whether the

temperature attribute is monitored.
Temperature - - This parameter indicates the upper

Upper Threshold temperature threshold of the board. When
(DEG.C) the actual temperature is higher than the
preset value, an alarm is generated.
Temperature - - This parameter indicates the lower

Lower Threshold temperature threshold of the board. When
(DEG.C) the actual temperature is lower than the
preset value, an alarm is generated.

Parameters for the Alarm Relay

Alarm Severity Critical Alarm - This parameter indicates the severity of the
Major Alarm alarm.
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
Alarm Output CSK-1 CSK-1 This parameter specifies the channel of the
Channel CSK-2 output alarm relay.
CSK-3
CSK-4

IDU Hardware Description B Board Loopback Types
B Board Loopback Types
Different service interface boards support different loopback types.
Table B-1 Loopback types that service interface boards support

Board Loopback Type Remarks
SL1D/SL1DA/SL4D l Inloops at optical ports The SL4D board described in

l Outloops at optical ports this section refers to the logical
SL4D board to which the
l Inloops on VC-4 paths physical CSHN board is mapped.
l Outloops on VC-4 paths
SP3S/SP3D/ML1/MD1 l Inloops at E1 tributary -

ports
l Outloops at E1 tributary
ports
EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/ l Inloops at the MAC layer of The EG2D is the logical Ethernet
EM6FA Ethernet ports board to which the physical
EG2D l Inloops at the PHY layer of CSHN board is mapped.
Ethernet ports
EFP8 l Inloops at the PHY layer of -

Ethernet ports excluding
ports 9 and 10 (bridging
ports)
l Inloops at the MAC layer of
port 10 (bridging port)

IDU Hardware Description B Board Loopback Types
Board Loopback Type Remarks
EMS6 l Inloops at the PHY layer of -

ports 7 and 8 (bridging
ports)
port 8 (bridging port)
IF1 l Inloops at IF ports -

l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite
ports
IFU2/IFX2 l Inloops and outloops at IF -

ports
l Inloops and outloops at
multiplexing ports
IF_ETH ports
ISU2/ISX2 l Inloops and outloops at IF -

ports
l Inloops and outloops at
multiplexing ports

IDU Hardware Description C Indicators of Boards
C Indicators of Boards
Indicators of Boards
Table C-1 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN


board.
PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board
of the board.
of the board.
On (green) l When the board is being powered on

or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at The BOOTROM self-check fails during

board.


board.
The logic file or upper layer software is
board.
SYNC On (green) The clock is working properly.
On (red) The clock source is lost or a clock

switchover occurs.

system.

system.
ACT On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the board

In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off In a 1+1 protected system, the board

In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical port on the line is

Off The first optical port on the line is free of

R_LOS alarms.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical port on the line is

Off The second optical port on the line is free

of R_LOS alarms.

working properly.

interrupted.

the GE1 port.


at the GE1 port.

working properly.

interrupted.

the GE2 port.

at the GE2 port.
CRIT On (red) A critical alarm occurs on the NE.
MAJ On (orange) A major alarm occurs on the NE.
MIN On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs on the NE.
Table C-2 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1


properly.

l There is no power



properly.


l There is no power

alarms.

300 ms intervals

reporting defects.

of defects.

active one.
the board has been
activated.

standby one.
Table C-3 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2



services.

services.

ODU On (green) The ODU is working properly.
On (red) l The ODU is reporting critical or major

alarms.
l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) The antennas are not aligned.

and off at 300 ms
intervals
RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Off The remote equipment is free of defects.
ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system, the board

l In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected system, the board

l In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.
Table C-4 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2


properly.

l There is no power




properly.

l There is no power

alarms.

300 ms intervals

reporting defects.

of defects.

active one.
the board has been
activated.

standby one.
Table C-5 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2


normal.

disabled.

properly.


l There is no power



properly.

l There is no power

alarms.

300 ms intervals

reporting defects.

of defects.

active one.
the board has been
activated.

standby one.

Table C-6 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2


normal.

disabled.

properly.

l There is no power



properly.

l There is no power

alarms.

300 ms intervals

reporting defects.

of defects.


active one.
the board has been
activated.

standby one.
Table C-7 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F



system.
board.
the board.

being initialized.


board.
board.


data.



data.

NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
Table C-8 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6TA/EM6FA


system.

board.
the board.

being initialized.

upper layer software fails during the power-
on or resetting process of the board.
The logic file or upper layer software is lost
during the running process of the board.


data.



data.

NOTE
a: The L/A1 and L/A2 indicators are available only on the EM6FA and indicate the states of the

Table C-9 Status explanation for indicators on the EMS6


board.
the board.
On (green) l The upper layer software is being

initialized during the power-on or
resetting process of the board.
l The software is running properly during
the running process of the board.

board.
board.
SRV On (green) The system is working normally.

system.



data.

transmitting data.


data.

transmitting data.
Table C-10 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8


board.
the board.

being initialized.


board.
board.

system.
Table C-11 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D/SL1DA


properly.

l There is no power



configured.
LOS1 On (red) The first port of the SL1D/

SL1DA is reporting the
R_LOS alarm.

Off The first port of the SL1D/

SL1DA is free of R_LOS
alarms.
LOS2 On (red) The second port of the

SL1D/SL1DA is reporting
the R_LOS alarm.
Off The second port of the

SL1D/SL1DA is free of
R_LOS alarms.
Table C-12 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D


properly.

l There is no power



configured.
Table C-13 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1


properly.


l There is no power



configured.
Table C-14 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX

board.

system.

system.
Table C-15 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU
PWR On (green) The power supply is normal.
Off There is no power supply.
ALM On (orange) The board is in the initialization state.
On (red) An alarm is reported on the PIU.

Off No alarm occurs.
Table C-16 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN

FAN On (green) The fan is working properly.
On (red) The fan is faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

IDU Hardware Description D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
D Weight and Power Consumption of Each

Board
Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
Table D-1 Weight and power consumption of each board

Board Weight (kg) Power Consumption (W)
CSHN 1.60 kg < 36.6 W
IF1 0.72 kg < 12.0 W
IFU2 0.79 kg < 23.0 W
IFX2 0.80 kg < 33.0 W
ISU2 0.60 kg < 22.0 W
ISX2 0.60 kg < 23.0 W
EM6T 0.37 kg < 10.4 W
EM6TA 0.40 kg < 16.2 W
EM6F 0.40 kg < 11.3 W
EM6FA 0.40 kg < 15.4 W
EMS6 0.50 kg < 16.5 W
EFP8 0.60 kg < 13.5 W
SL1D 0.30 kg < 3.4 W
SL1DA 0.30 kg < 3.3 W
ML1 0.45 kg < 7.0 W
MD1 0.50 kg < 12.2 W

IDU Hardware Description D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
Board Weight (kg) Power Consumption (W)
SP3S 0.50 kg(VER.B) < 5.7 W(VER.B)

0.40 kg(VER.C) < 4.8 W(VER.C)
SP3D 0.64 kg(VER.B) < 9.6 W(VER.B)

0.54 kg(VER.C) < 8.3 W(VER.C)
AUX 0.27 kg < 1.3 W
PIU 1.00 kg < 25.0 W
FAN 1.70 kg < 15.9 W (room temperature)

< 103.5 W (high temperature)
Empty chassis 7.10 kg -

(with only the
backplane)

IDU Hardware Description E Glossary
E Glossary
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.
E.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers.
E.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
E.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
E.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
E.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
E.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.

E.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers.
1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)
E.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
ABR See available bit rate

ACAP See adjacent channel alternate polarization
access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access
to a resource.
ACL See access control list
adaptive modulation A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation scheme according to
the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a high-
efficiency modulation scheme to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum
utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts
the low-efficiency modulation scheme to improve the anti-interference capability of the
link that carries high-priority services.
ADC See analog to digital converter
add/drop multiplexer Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals
contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/
or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.
Address Resolution Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to
Protocol MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through
ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host
converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.
The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment
through its IP address.
adjacent channel A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal
alternate polarization polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
ADM See add/drop multiplexer
administrative unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order
VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the multiplex section frame start.
AF See assured forwarding
aggregation A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete or
conceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.

AIS See alarm indication signal

alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the Network
Management System (NMS). Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the
details of the alarm.
alarm cascading The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.
Alarm Filtering An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based on
the filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarm
information. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed or
stored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure
has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the
networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function
module of a specific board.
AM See adaptive modulation
analog to digital An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The
converter reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
APS See automatic protection switching
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol
assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.
For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that
exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the
traffic instead of discarding the packets.
Asynchronous A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells.
Transfer Mode A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in
the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.
Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.
ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATM PVC ATM permanent virtual circuit
ATPC See automatic transmit power control
attenuator A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to
ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.
AU See administrative unit
automatic protection Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch
switching to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
automatic transmit A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected
power control at the receiver
available bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible
forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time
quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.

B
backward defect When detecting a defect, the sink node of an LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI)
indication to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a
network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the
transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
base station controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks
with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides
the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power
control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one
or more BTSs in an actual network.
base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of traffic
and signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radio
equipment, and the antenna.
basic input/output A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control
system programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
BDI See backward defect indication
BE See best effort
BER See bit error rate
best effort A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the
network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time
it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss
ratio, and high reliability.
binding strap The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent
polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).
BIOS See basic input/output system
BIP See bit interleaved parity
bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding
bit in the received digital signal.
bit error rate Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the
communications quality of a network.
bit interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the
transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the
first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the
covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of
all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting
the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the
signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within
the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes
the BIP-X.
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit

bridge protocol data The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that
unit uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on
ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was
intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is
determined by the broadcast address.
BSC See base station controller
BTS See base transceiver station
buffer A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in inter-networking to
compensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of data
can be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices. In a
program, buffers are created to hold some amount of data from each of the files that will
be read or written. In a streaming media application, the program uses buffers to store
an advance supply of audio or video data to compensate for momentary delays.
C
cable tie The tape used to bind the cables.
cable tray N/A
cable trough N/A
CAR See committed access rate
CBR See constant bit rate
CBS See committed burst size
CC See connectivity check
CCC See circuit cross connect
CCDP See co-channel dual polarization
CCM See continuity check message
CE See customer edge
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets
and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute
instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's
main data-transfer path, the bus.
CES See circuit emulation service
CF See compact flash
CGMP See Cisco Group Management Protocol
channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two
or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio
(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted
per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per
second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),
and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).

CIR See committed information rate

circuit cross connect An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels.
circuit emulation A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the
service transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM
cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the
interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES
technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original
sequence at the reception end.
Cisco Group N/A
Management Protocol
CIST See common and internal spanning tree
CIST root A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network.
clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a
network.
co-channel dual A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical
polarization polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice
the transmission capacity of the single polarization.
coarse wavelength A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into
division multiplexing the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM
does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in a short-distance chain network.
colored packet A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors.
committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.
CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified
into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate
can be defined.
committed burst size committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,
the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed
information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this
parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be
forwarded.
committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal
rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to
the leaky bucket.
common and internal The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logical
spanning tree continuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTP
to ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in
portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in
a standardized enclosure.
concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be
used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
connectivity check Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by
each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.

constant bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on
the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise
clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
continuity check CCM is used to detect the link status.
message
corrugated pipe Used to protect optical fibers.
CPU See central processing unit
CRC See cyclic redundancy check
cross polarization A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate
interference the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.
cancellation
customer edge A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the
Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing
cyclic redundancy A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses
check a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it
sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after
transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission
was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission
includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
data communication A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data
network Communication Function (DCF).
data communications The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
channel transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)
between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the
192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12
is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
Datagram A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram,
UDP datagram.
DC See direct current
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground)
DC-C DC-return common (with ground)
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground)
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground)
DC-return common A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
(with ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return common A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
(with ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND
on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC See data communications channel
DCN See data communication network
DDF See digital distribution frame
DDN See digital data network
DE See discard eligible
differentiated services A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series
of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of per-
hop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning
functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.
differentiated services A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to apply
code point differentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServ
policy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet and
other IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers.
DiffServ See differentiated services
digital data network A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber
channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex
technology.
digital distribution A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with
frame transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,
cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.
digital modulation A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the
carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the
information can be transmitted by the carrier.
direct current Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or
change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.
discard eligible A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports
the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic
exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the
case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node.
Distance Vector An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical
Multicast Routing dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing
Protocol datagrams with its neighbors.
DS boundary node A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a
domain that is not DS-capable.
DS domain In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group of
network nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It provides
point-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain.
DS interior node A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.
DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.
DSCP See differentiated services code point

dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves
orthogonally polarized.
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
E
E-Aggr See Ethernet aggregation
E-LAN See Ethernet LAN
E-Line See Ethernet line
E-Tree See Ethernet-tree
EBS See excess burst size
ECC See embedded control channel
EF See expedited forwarding
electromagnetic Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications
compatibility equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic
environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional
electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or
interference limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
electrostatic discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different
electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.
embedded control A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,
channel to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility
EMI See electromagnetic interference
Engineering label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
EPL See Ethernet private line
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service
equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for
the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.
ERPS See Ethernet ring protection switching
ESD See electrostatic discharge
ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or
cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision
Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/
s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.
Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision
Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/
s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.

Ethernet aggregation A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet LAN A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
virtual connection).
Ethernet line A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet private LAN An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a
service dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or
MPLS server layer networks.
Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point
connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethernet ring protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.
Ethernet virtual An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared
private LAN service bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
Ethernet virtual An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared
private line bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
Ethernet-tree An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet Virtual
Connection.
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute
European A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
excess burst size A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the
traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter
used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size
when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter
must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the
maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The
protection switching is not really performed.
expansion Connecting a storage system to more disk enclosures through connection cables,
expanding the capacity of the storage system.
expedited forwarding The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that
demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF
traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP
value of EF PHB is "101110".

E.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function
to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been
detected.
fast Ethernet Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times
faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so
on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following
three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),
100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical
fibers).
fast link pulse The link pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.
FD See frequency diversity
FDI See forward defect indication
FE See fast Ethernet
FEC See forward error correction
FFD fast failure detection
fiber patch cord A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for
connections between subracks or inside a subrack.
field programmable A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
gate array (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the
PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also
overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the
limited number of gate arrays.
FIFO See First in First out
File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers
on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an
FTP client and the other an FTP server.
First in First out A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.
Forced switch For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless
an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the
protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.
forward defect Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the
indication LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the
defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected
higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward error A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at
correction the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission are corrected at the receive end.

Forwarding plane Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and can
be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network.
FPGA See field programmable gate array
fragment Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units.
Fragmentation Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network medium
that cannot support the original size of the packet.
frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length
is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.
A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,
a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-
specified by the sending and receiving parties.
frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain
frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then
performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
FTP See File Transfer Protocol
full-duplex A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both
directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line
telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard
at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with
one lane for each direction.
G
gateway network A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and
element the NM application layer
GE See gigabit Ethernet
generic framing A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been
procedure standardized by ITU-T SG15.
generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is
to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router
to avoid packet discarding and congestion.
GFP See generic framing procedure
gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.
It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support
coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If
Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge
(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.
In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing
the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
Global Positioning A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and
System timing services to worldwide users.
GNE See gateway network element
GPS See Global Positioning System

graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with
graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.
GTS See generic traffic shaping
GUI See graphical user interface
guide rail Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.
H
HA See high availability
half-duplex A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both
directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party
begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before
replying.
HDLC See high level data link control
hierarchical quality of A type of QoS that can control the traffic of users, and perform the scheduling according
service to the priority of user services. HQoS has a perfect traffic statistics function, and the
administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth
can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
high availability Typically, a scheme in which two modules operate in active/standby mode to achieve
high availability. When the active module fails, the standby module automatically takes
over the system functions of the active module.
high level data link The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer
control of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by
adding a trailer and a header.
High Speed Downlink A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement
Packet Access for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the
maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the
WCDMA network topology.
higher order path In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lower
order path layers.
Hold priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates
the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the
tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.
hop A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents
a small step on the route from one main computer to another.
hot standby A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and
storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When
the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in
the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire
system.
HP See higher order path
HQoS See hierarchical quality of service
HSB See hot standby
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access

HSM hitless switch mode

HTB high tributary bus
hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports
the AM function.
I
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol
IDU See indoor unit
IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force
IF See intermediate frequency
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol
IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages
and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner,
the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM
indoor unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,
multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.
Inloop A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect
unit.
Institute of Electrical A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but
and Electronics boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,
Engineers electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
signal.
Intermediate System The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generate
routes.
Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward
Intermediate System datagrams or packets through a packet-based network, a process called routing.
routing protocol
internal spanning tree A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.
International The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-
Electrotechnical governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronic standards.
Commission
International An international association that works to establish global standards for communications
Organization for and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted
Standardization ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers
connected by communications networks.

International An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications

Telecommunication technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a
Union- letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For
Telecommunication example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open
Standardization Sector system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.
Internet Control A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and
Message Protocol other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software
on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also
communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet Engineering A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.
Task Force Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with
studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet
Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups
that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher
of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.
Internet Group The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among
Management Protocol the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent
across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery
service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The
entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two
fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
Internet protocol A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications
version 6 and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed
as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address
has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet protocol A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications
version 6 and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed
as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address
has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
inverse multiplexing The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-
over ATM multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher
bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is
referred to as an IMA group.
IP See Internet Protocol
IPV6 See Internet protocol version 6
IPv6 See Internet protocol version 6
IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System routing protocol
ISO See International Organization for Standardization
IST See internal spanning tree
ITU-T See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization
Sector

J
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system
instability.
E.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
L
L2VPN See Layer 2 virtual private network
label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label
switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on
normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.
label switching router Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is
composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for
allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and
removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups
received in the label forwarding table.
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG See link aggregation group
LAN See local area network
LAN See local area network
LAPS link access protocol-SDH
Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser
light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor
laser as the light source.
layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits
and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the
second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
Layer 2 virtual private A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packet
network switched (IP/MPLS) network.
LB See loopback
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme
LCT local craft terminal
line rate The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the
maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
line rate forwarding The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
Link Aggregation A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to
Control Protocol increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE
802.3ad.

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
link capacity LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
adjustment scheme control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links
that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,
increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the
responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.
Link Protection Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is
a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection,
the link protection should be provided.
LMSP linear multiplex section protection
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being
switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been
switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to
the working channel.
LOF See Loss Of Frame
LOM loss of multiframe
loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
LOP See loss of pointer
LOS See Loss Of Signal
Loss Of Frame A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead
indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitor
the performance of the PHY layer.
loss of pointer Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the
PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of
cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.
Loss Of Signal Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received
signal.
LP lower order path
LPT link-state pass through
LSP See label switched path

LSR See label switching router
M
MA See maintenance association
MAC See media access control
MAC See media access control
MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer
main topology A interface that displays the connection relationships of NEs on the NMS (screen
display). The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-
machine interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network,
the alarms of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as
the basic network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed
here.
maintenance That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the
association connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance
Entities.
maintenance A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a Service
association end point Instance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is an
end point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate Maintenance
Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association.
maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The
devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.
maintenance point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.
management A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It
information base comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as
routers and switches) in a network.
manual switch Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists
on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch
command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.
maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
unit depending on the network—576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining the
size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted
across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one
that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks
involved.
MBS maximum burst size
MCF See message communication function
MD See maintenance domain
MDI See medium dependent interface
Mean Time Between The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
Failures of the reliability of the system.
Mean Time To Repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.

media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
medium dependent The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media
interface transmission.
MEP See maintenance association end point
MEP maintenance end point
message The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of management
communication information with their prs.
function
MIB See management information base
MIP maintenance intermediate point
mounting ear A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or
components.
MP See maintenance point
MPID maintenance point identification
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching
MPLS L2VPN The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. In
this case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of
different media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.
MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of fault
detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM and
relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CR-
LSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs.
In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum.
MPLS TE See multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering

MPLS TE tunnel In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported through
multiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a group
of LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has two
identifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquely
define the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE or
FILTER_SPEC object.
MS See multiplex section
MSP See multiplex section protection
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTBF See Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR See Mean Time To Repair
MTU See maximum transmission unit
Multicast A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast
group rather than a host.
Multiple Spanning Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an
Tree Protocol algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed
as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided
in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and
multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded
in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
multiplex section The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions.
multiplex section A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
protection including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
Multiprotocol Label A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
Switching layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of
networks, and is beneficial to routing.
multiprotocol label N/A
switching traffic
engineering
N
N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection
channel.
NE See network element
NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the
telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and
maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.

network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One
NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which
manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC
board.
Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.
System
network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can
point access OSI network services.
network to network An internal interface within a network linking two or more elements.
interface
next hop The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a network
on its journey to its final destination.
NLP normal link pulse
NMS See Network Management System
NNI See network to network interface
node A node stands for a managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame,
one node stands for one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for
one frame of the device. Therefore, a node does not always mean a device.
Node Protection A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able to
protect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the
PLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able to
protect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the
PLR.
non-gateway network A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be
element transferred by the gateway network element application layer.
non-GNE See non-gateway network element
NSAP See network service access point
NSF not stop forwarding
O
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance
ODF See optical distribution frame
ODU See outdoor unit
OM Operation and maintenance
One-to-One Backup A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protected
tunnel at a PLR.
open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's
algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A
link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers
in the area.

Open Systems A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by
Interconnection different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different
categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.
Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.
Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source
and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.
operation, A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,
administration and activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,
maintenance location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an
operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber
access network to users/subscribers.
optic fiber connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple
the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A
connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and an optical source
(or a detector).+
optical distribution A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
frame
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
OSI See Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF See open shortest path first
outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency
conversion and amplification for RF signals.
Outloop A method of looping back the input signals received at a port to an output port without
changing the structure of the signals.
Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
E.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
P
packet switched A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.
network
Packing case A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.
Path A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end
of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is
a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the
network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between
a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet
loss ratio or other aspects.
PBS See peak burst size
PCB See printed circuit board

PCI bus PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bit
for interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems.
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy
PDU See protocol data unit
PE See provider edge
peak burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst
IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This
parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not
less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
peak information rate A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed
information rate.
penultimate hop Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLS
popping enabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS tagged
packet is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to an
adjacent Label Edge Router (LER).
per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should
select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF
defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),
assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
PHB See per-hop behavior
PHP See penultimate hop popping
PIR See peak information rate
PLA physical link aggregation
plesiochronous digital A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
hierarchy rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates
data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.
polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or
rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is
perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically
polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the
plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the
tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this
electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies
power for the subracks in the cabinet.
PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol
PQ See priority queue
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence
PRC primary reference clock

printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto
a non-conductive substrate.
priority queue An abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following three
operations: (1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated
priority (2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority,
and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") (3) PeekAtNext
(optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it
protection ground A cable which connects the equipment and the protection ground bar. Usually, one half
cable of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.
Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
protocol data unit It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model.
provider edge A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, and
exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, a
PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and
the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the
sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
pseudo wire An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established
and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is
maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes
edge-to-edge of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched
Network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division
Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real
situation.
PSN See packet switched network
PTN packet transport network
PW See pseudo wire
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge
Q
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag
of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN.
The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the
carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.
QoS See quality of service
QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying
quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and
keying the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period
or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are
evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-
bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.

quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.

Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.
R
radio frequency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an
electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.
The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC
with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified
into such high-frequency current.
radio network A device in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the
controller radio resources.
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization
resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented.
Rapid Spanning Tree An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
Protocol convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
RDI See remote defect indication
received signal level The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
Received Signal The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the
Strength Indicator receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD
within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna
Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received
power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open).
RED See random early detection
Reed-Solomon-Code A forward error correction code located before interleaving that enables correction of
errors induced by burst noise. Widely used error correction scheme to fight transmission
errors at the receiver site.
REI See remote error indication
remote defect A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal
indication detects specific defects in the incoming signal.
remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There are
two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream
LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is
sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte.
Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the
operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of
the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources
such as InterNIC.

Resource Reservation The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is
Protocol used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport
layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control
protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
reverse pressure A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit end
transmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end
to slow down the transmission rate.
RF See radio frequency
RFC See Request For Comments
RIP See Routing Information Protocol
RMON remote network monitoring
RMON remote network monitoring
RNC See radio network controller
Root alarm An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level
alarms always accompany a root alarm.
route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/
IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
route table A mapping table that stores the relationship between the original address, destination
address, short message (SM) protocol type and account. The SMSC delivers an SM to
the designated account according to the information set in the route table.
Routing Information A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route
Protocol based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector
protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is
known to waste bandwidth.
routing table A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers
regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the
destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in
hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination.
Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.
RSL See received signal level
RSSI See Received Signal Strength Indicator
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol
RTN radio transmission node
S
SD See space diversity
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy
SEMF See synchronous equipment management function

service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the
forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization
(source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA
may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement
as a whole or partially.
Service Level A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between service
Agreement * provider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information about
measuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operating
and support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider and
customer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved the
documented target measure.
SES See severely errored second
Setup Priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates
the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the
resources required by other backup tunnels.
severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio ≥ X 10-3 or at least one defect. Time
interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio
greater than 1 X 10 -3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction).
SF See signal fail
SFP See small form-factor pluggable
side trough The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the
cabinet.
signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber
signal cable.
signal fail A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal to noise ratio The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a
given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and
is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).
Simple Network A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
Management Protocol the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
simplex Designating or pertaining to a method of operation in which information can be
transmitted in either direction, but not simultaneously, between two points.
SLA See service level agreement
SLA* See Service Level Agreement *
Slicing To divide data into the information units proper for transmission.
small form-factor A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
pluggable
SNC See subnetwork connection

SNCP See subnetwork connection protection

SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR See signal to noise ratio
space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance
to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two
signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant
network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune
a loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message
static virtual circuit Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPN
information by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.
Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be
transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to
active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices
to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.
STM See Synchronous Transport Module
STM-1 See synchronous transport mode-1
STM-N See synchronous transport module of order N
STP See Spanning Tree Protocol
sub-network Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of
network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or
correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock
subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a
sub-network is used to contain the equipment located in adjacent regions and closely
related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a topological
view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network planning can
better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space can be saved,
on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on the equipment
under their management.
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,
server or router and is matched with the IP address.
subnetwork connection A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the
association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork.
subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection
protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance
falls below a required level.
SVC See static virtual circuit
switch To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. This
behavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.

Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock
information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their
clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the
synchronization information to downstream nodes.
synchronous digital A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the
hierarchy transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed
counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitable
for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses
synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
synchronous The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into
equipment object-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.
management function
synchronous transport Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s.
mode-1
Synchronous An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the
Transport Module SDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields
organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitably
conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized
to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher
capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities
for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.
synchronous transport A STM-N is the information structure used to support section layer connections in SDH.
module of order N See ITU-T Recommendation G. 707 for STM modules of order 1, 4, 16 and 64.
tail drop A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length,
packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such as
TCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced,
thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets are
dropped from the input end (tail) of the queue.
Tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when
the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide
synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
TCI tag control information
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol
TDM See time division multiplexing
TE See traffic engineering
TEDB See traffic engineering database
Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,
maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks
and services.

TIM trace identifier mismatch

time division A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
multiplexing (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3, ...), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time
slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted
over one channel.
time to live A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.
The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the
network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,
and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.
TMN See Telecommunication Management Network
ToS priority A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.
TPS See tributary protection switch
traffic engineering A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load
of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management
parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the
utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by
unbalanced loads.
traffic engineering TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to know
database the features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which uses
the link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS contain
some TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reserved
bandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are rather
important. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area and
generates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLS
TE network.
Traffic shaping It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee
the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic
in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer
devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.
Transmission Control The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
Protocol be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
tributary protection Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to
switch protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.
trTCM See two rate three color marker
TTL See time to live
TU tributary unit
Tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.
In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel
ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel
is an MPLS tunnel.

two rate three color The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak
marker Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated
burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the
PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or
doesn't exceed the CIR.
E.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
U
U-VLAN A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN.
Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN.
UAS unavailable second
UBR See unspecified bit rate
UDP See User Datagram Protocol
underfloor cabling The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.
UNI See user network interface
unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.
unspecified bit rate No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is ideal
for the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded,
and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender.
upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network
Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored
at the NMS side.
User Datagram A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
Protocol datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP
to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable
connectionless packet delivery service. Therefore, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,
delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,
the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is
received.
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
example, ATM switches).
V
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface
variable bit rate One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
VBR See variable bit rate
VC See virtual container

VCC See virtual channel connection

VCG See virtual concatenation group
VCI See virtual channel identifier
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board
virtual channel The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A
connection logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection.
virtual channel A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to
identifier identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on
its way to its destination.
virtual concatenation A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same
group virtual concatenation link
virtual container The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists
of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block
frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 μs.
virtual local area A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical
network network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated
with switched Ethernet.
virtual path identifier The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which
virtual path the cell belongs.
virtual private LAN A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS
service enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the
MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via
connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.
virtual route forward VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actual
routing device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs,
performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances on
the device.
virtual user-network A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
interface classification and traffic control in HQoS.
VLAN See virtual local area network
voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice
information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form
in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the
public switched telephone network (PSTN).
VoIP See voice over IP
VPI See virtual path identifier
VPLS See virtual private LAN service
VPN See virtual private network
VRF See virtual route forward

W
wait to restore The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
WAN See wide area network
Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE
management layer of the transport network
weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This
scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority
queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP
detection synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority
packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.
weighted round Robin N/A
WFQ See weighted fair queuing
wide area network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are
physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a
province, a state or even a country.
winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
WRED See weighted random early detection
WRR See weighted round Robin
WTR See wait to restore
X
XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation


RTN 980 IDU Hardware Description - (V100R003C03 - 01) PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

RTN 980 IDU Hardware Description - (V100R003C03 - 01) PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System

IDU Hardware Description

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 980 V100R003C03

iManager U2000 V100R006C00

l Network planning engineer

l Basics of digital microwave communication

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a

Provides additional information to emphasize

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

3.5.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................59

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

3.10.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................138

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

A.1.3.5 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_RADIUS Server.............................................296

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

A.5.5 IF Board Parameters.............................................................................................................................386

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT................................................519

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii

A.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters.............................................................619

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels.......675

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv

A.10.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters.........834

B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................853

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

About This Chapter

1.1 Network Application

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

1.1 Network Application

OptiX RTN 900 Product Family

OptiX RTN 980

Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2

Raido trassmission network Regional

Packet Network FE/GE

合格证/ QUALIFICATION CARD Qualification card Indicates that the